Home

ANSYS ICEM CFD/AI*Environment 10.0 User Manual

1. pe 2 6 25FullTetraenclosmq the GEOMEUY estia aui te Him pl Gum v tu A E RIP 2 7 2 6 Full Tetra enclosing the geometry In wire frame 2 8 2 7 Cross section of the Tetra to show how Tetra are fit in around geometry 2 9 2 8 Mesh after it captures surfaces and separation of useful volume 2 10 2 9 Fia Meshiberore han ets De DUE Rente Du etn 2 11 Final Meshiartersmootbllo sies ts x Ea ue oues 2 12 2 11 NopsManifold ivo ton Eat Cu m Evo DUE neh ONU aioe kon Fed vias ubt 2 16 212 Quality FIISEOGgFaETI 2 16 3 1 Initial block block with O Grid O Grid with include 3 5 ONC UVE RENE m D 6 1 6 2 Force Distrib tionyas per the FEAJCODCODELS ceres e Dur ee dives EUER dS 6 2 6 3 Quadratic Element Nodes DOSITION ii v e ree Ere dot 6 3 o4 Losd Distnib tion as per the FEA CODCSDLS e 6 4 onm OU Biz MR
2. ii i e Select Repair Geometry gt Stitch Match Edges ad Select the two concentric curves and press the middle mouse button or Apply Note that the edges of the second curve will be moved to match the edges of the first selected curve See Figure 3 412 Tutorial Manual Advanced Meshing Tutorials Figure 3 412 Circular portion after repair The large hole at the end of the pipe will be fixed on the mesh level to follow d Assigning Mesh Sizes Select Mesh gt Set Global Mesh Size 28 gt General Parameters 2 This will open up window as shown in Figure 3 413 Tutorial Manual Advanced Meshing Tutorials Figure 3 413 m Global Mesh Size Li Global Mesh Sizes window Global Mesh Parameters Global Element Scale Factor Scale Factor Display Global Element Seed Size Max element Display Natural Size iw Enabled Size 0 1 Display Mum of Elements in gap 1 Hefinement 1 Ignore all Thickness Triangle tolerance 0 001 Iw LInitlezs tri tolerance Apply Dismiss Set Scale factor to 0 2 Global Element Seed Size Max element to 2 All surfaces and curves will take on the Global Element Seed Size Max element of 2 x 0 2 scale factor 0 4 Tutorial Manual Figure 3 414 Tetra sizes on surfaces Advanced Meshing Tutorials Zoom in to the stick out square portion as
3. 7 1 7 9 BOSUPrOCGSS RESUS 7 1 010 DI 7 1 vi ANSYS ICEM CFD Al Environment 10 0 User Manual SAS IP Inc ANSYS ICEM CFD Al Environment 10 0 User Manual List of Figures LN Gor TRO TNT 1 2 1 2 MS before abe 1 3 UA Aner Remove HOGS usc aiat dori atu i vcre E 1 3 To GEOME ERY WIEIA a CAD ese vases TE 1 4 1 5 Result with Close Gap gt Fills 1 4 IZxRes lt ith Close Gap TEE eoi cis uiid enel e D tob 1 5 L8 Res ltwithi lose Gap BEN s dose cot 1 5 1 9 Geometry withimismatched CAGES ERN IRR SERERE SEDAN INDE 1 6 1 10 Geometry alter Match CAGES sucre et D DA NE HV 1 7 2 1 Curves and Points representing the sharp edges and 2 3 22 Mesh with Gurves anad 6 E 2 4 2 3 Mesh without curves dnd ed 2 4 2A G80metry InpuE to
4. Maura iq a IMS 3 8 3 141 Generaung a Replay tabe se ou Rte rv RR S TURIN EHE 3 8 ANSYS ICEM CFD Al Environment 10 0 User Manual SAS IP Inc ANSYS ICEM CFD Al Environment 10 0 User Manual 3 14 2 Advantage ofthe Replay FUNCHON iscutetstasve uten px a TA toes Ue tienes 3 8 lt lt 3 8 3 15 1 Applying the Periodic lt 96 9 3 9 3 16 Mesi Qualis daa Miss tma Mut Pme a MM MR MCI a UN PN NU NAE 3 9 3 16 1 Determining the Location 5 2 000 00 3 9 3 2 lt taa 3 9 ste qas etn dM O 3 9 NR EUM 3 9 8 A iut ccm vc eve M Ee 3 9 eon ditior tt 4 1 4 1 Create Material Property 020 2 0 00 4 1 2 2 Save Maternal to nasty cris E PUN S QU 4 1 A PII 4 1
5. M 6 5 ANSYS ICEM CFD Al Environment 10 0 User Manual SAS IP Inc vii viii Chapter 1 CAD Repair Before generating the Shell Tetra mesh the user should confirm that the geometry is free of any flaws that would inhibit optimal mesh creation If the user wishes to save the changes in the native CAD files the following checks should be performed in a direct CAD interface To create a mesh Tetra requires that the model contains a closed volume If there are any holes gaps or missing surfaces in the geometry that are larger than the local tetras Tetra will be unable to find a closed volume Thus if the user notices any holes in the model prior to mesh generation he or she should fix the surface data to eliminate these holes The Build Topology operation will find holes and gaps in the geometry It should give yellow curves where there are large in relation to a user specified tolerance gaps or missing surfaces During the Tetra process any leakage path indicating a hole or gap in the model will be indicated to the user The problem can be corrected on a mesh level or the geometry in that vicinity can be repaired and the meshing process repeated For further information on the process of interactively closing holes see the section Tetra Tetra Generation Steps Useful Region of Mesh For more useful information on CAD Repair topics please go to http www berkeley ansys com
6. Eo 3 2 3 6 Unstructured and Multi block Structured 3 3 2 Unstructured Mesh OUEDUL esce donde dete pae cavolo uade dios 3 3 3 6 2 Multi Block Structured Mesh Output ccccccsccsecseccscceecenceseceecenceseceecesceeeeeceseeeeceuceeeeeees 3 3 27 BIOCKING Strategy 3 3 eT NES 3 4 MTG Ca closes ty Gott tetas the os ac nete Mei aen dut a aded 3 4 3 6 USING the Autommsuc Hut PNE dat inne ep 3 4 3 9 Most Important Features Of 3 6 3 10 Automatic O gfid generationis ato ture on e aget bea ueber o VERDE 3 6 3 10 1 Important Features of an 3 7 2211 Edge Meshing Parameter S a a veo ok Pte E eons RO Eee ERN Gr tea 3 7 SIZ SMON Eu va SUA Da 3 7 2435 5 3 8 RENNENE A e 3 8 SM he Be os Ez MIRI NT renee eee 3 8 3 14 Replay FUNCIONAN
7. LU T TT 5 4 A PSI ES h al a L MI E AU 3E SN MM in RA MERE se e T 1 PR eee i 54 ru E EET E nad mE m E DII m m LE EG ERES IL IE LE dc ae pg A ee ee ee LL ern ey 9 Try tt Subset2 In Display Tree click right mouse button on Subset under Mesh and select Create option As shown in the Create Subset window in Figure 4 251 to select the elements on Piston end for this Subset Ensure that all the geometry entities are turned Off from Display Model Tree Enter Subset as Subset2 and click on amp Create Subset by Selection icon in Create subset window Toggle Off Points Nodes Line 2D amp Volumes 3Delements To select the elements on Piston end for this subset click on Select Element s button and press p from keyboard ensure that the mouse cursor is in display window which allows selecting the Shell elements by drawing a polygon explain as selection 4 4 1 and press Apply Tutorial Manual Nastran Tutorials SIE Ci 4 LATE D E c gt 2 d E
8. Tutorial Manual Tetra Meshing Appendix volume and the same nodes The error that indicates a major problem in the connectivity in the model need to be fixed manually Usually this can be done by clearing a subset and adding specific elements to it in the location where the orientation problem was found The orientation errors will be displayed in the messages window with the location The user can then select View gt Add marker and enter in the coordinates reported in the message window This will place a marker with the name assigned by the user at the assigned location Then select Modify from the subset menu Proceed to select Add gt Specific from the Modify subset window and then enter the coordinates in the box and select near position The user then has to fix the orientation errors by editing the volume elements so that the criss crossing of elements is eliminated This is typically done by merging nodes and or splitting edges Note that Diagnostics gt which elements doesn t pertain to this check Possible problems gt Multiple edges This check will find elements with an edge that shares more than two elements Legitimate multiple edges would be found at a T shaped junction where more than two geometric surfaces meet Possible problems gt Triangle boxes This check locates groups of four triangles that form a tetrahedron with no actual volume element inside This undesirable cha
9. In this geometry the points curves and surfaces have already been placed into separate part names Thus the user can go directly to the blocking process d Blocking Select File gt Replay Scripts gt Replay Control to start recording all the commands executed while blocking 1 Na M Press Blocking gt Create Block gt Initialize Block to will open the Create Block window as shown in Figure Tutorial Manual Hexa Meshing 3 198 The default Type is 3D Bounding Box Verify that this 15 shown by the Type Enter the Part name as LIVE and press Apply without selecting anything This will create the initial block around everything Figure 3 198 Create Block Create blocks window Fart LIWE Create Block Initialize Blocks Type 3D Bounding Bos Entities Praject vertices with geometry 2D Blocking Apply ok Dismiss From the Display Tree make sure that Curves are turned ON and curve names are turned OFF Right click on Geometry gt Curves gt Show Curve Names to turn off the curve names Also make sure that Surfaces are turned OFF as well Turn ON the Blocking gt Vertices and right mouse click on Vertices gt Numbers to display the vertex numbers The initialized blocking is shown in Figure 3 199 Tutorial Manual Figure 3 199 The Initialized blocking with vertices Hexa Meshing Switch ON
10. talerance 0 01 Curves CURVES 10 CURVES Dismiss Create Point Segmentation of Curves at existing points Geometry gt Create Modify Curve gt Segment curve Select the Segment Curve option P In the dropdown Segment by Point should be selected Select the curve selection icon amp and select CURVES 10 with the left mouse button Now select the point selection icon and select POINTS 1 with the left mouse button and then press the middle mouse button to accept the point Select the Part CURVES and enter the name as Tutorial Manual Geometry Creation CURVES 10 so that the next curves will start with CURVES 11 After pressing Apply the CURVES 10 segments into two curves CURVES 10 and CURVES 11 similarly segment CURVES 9 at POINTS 3 to get CURVES 9 and CURVES 12 Segment CURVES 7 at POINTS 14 to get CURVES 7 and CURVES 13 Segment CURVES 8 at POINTS 15 to get CURVES 8 and CURVES 14 The geometry after segmenting the curve 1s shown in Figure 3 8 Note After segmenting two Curves at a particular Point the Curves name may be different but user can refer to the Figure 3 8 and select the Curves to be deleted Figure 3 8 Geometry after curve segmentations Geometry Creation HE 4 URVES 3 TURVES OINIS 11 LOINIS I1U FPOINIS 4 POINTS 6 12 z Deletion of unused entities Geometry gt Delete Curves Select Delete C
11. Number of Cut Planes in dir 23 4 Number of Cut Planes in i dir 3 Number of Cut Planes in dir 3 Mesh Internal Region Press Apply The Cart3D Mesh window appears which asks us about loading the cart3D Full Mesh Press Yes Note The final mesh generated can be examined through Mesh gt Cut Plane as in the case of the previous Tutorials Tutorial Manual Cart3D d Setup Flow Cart Parameters In the Cart3D Menu select Solver and Define solver params if the panel doesn t open automatically A Solver parameters window appears as shown in Figure 3 569 Figure Solver parameters _ 3 569 File Information le Inform atl on Case Information Solver Contrals Mesh File BER_c3d mesh mg pee Mesh Info File BER_c3d mesh Info ter Covergence History Windo Partition Information Accept Cancel Choose File Information gt Mesh File as BOMBER c3d mesh mg this should be default 3 Click on Case Information and enter the following parameters as shown in Figure 3 570 Tutorial Manual Cart3D Mach number 0 65 Angle of Attack 5 0 side Slip angle 0 0 Free Stream Density 1 0 Free Stream Sound Speed 1 0 Figure Solver parameters 3 570 File Information Case Information Case Case Information ns Solver Controls eee n Informat Boundary Conditions d attac ion Covergence History Side slip angle o o Window Partiti
12. 2 Tutorial Manual Advanced Meshing Tutorials Select Blocking from the Display Tree widget gt Init Output blocks This will initialize the output topology for Multiblock mesh Toggle on Pre mesh gt Output blocks in the Display Tree widget Select Blocking gt Edit Block gt Merge blocks gt In the Join Block Toggle on Automatic This will merge the unnecessary blocks as shown in Figure 3 348 Figure 3 348 Blocking after Auto merge CX e F5 FA e NL ql 2 E Pi us m D G M M Tutorial Manual Advanced Meshing Tutorials q Saving the files save the blocking using File gt Blocking gt Save blocking save the Multiblock mesh with File gt Blocking gt Write Multiblock domains and select Volume when asked to select the type of domain Finally File gt Exit to quit ANSYS ICEMCFD Advanced Meshing Tutorials 3 6 2 Hybrid tube Overview In this tutorial the user will generate a hybrid mesh for the Hybrid Tube geometry shown in Figure 3 349 The tube is comprised of three regions CYLI CYL2 and CYL3 separated by the two interfaces INTERFACEI and INTERFACE2 The user will first generate 2 separate tetra domains in CYL1 and CYL2 and hexa domain in CYL3 The three domains will be made conformal at the two interfaces
13. Apply doe Dismiss Tutorial Manual Nastran Tutorials Figure 4 204 Curve S for Seam weld Select the Target part name as PART 1004 For Connector Connector Part Name comes by default as WELDO and enters Max Projection as 5 0 Leave Element Splitting as Re mesh area Tri Quad and then press Apply Switch Off Connectors from the Model Tree Switch the Parts in the Model Tree Note Only directives will be saved at this stage Actual Seam Weld or any other connector will appear only when surfaces are meshed Spot Welds PART 1001 and PART 1004 Points representing the Spots should be created on the Geometry before defining spot weld Now turn ON points from Display Tree Also from Parts turn OFF all parts including Connectors except PART 1001 Tutorial Manual Nastran Tutorials From the Geometry Tab Menu bar select Create Point icon Select Part as PART 1001 and leave the Name Blank as shown in Figure 4 205 Select Parameter along a Curve icon select N Point Method enters N point as Figure 4 205 Create Point Window Create Point Fart 1001 MH ame XYZ Points method M paint M points 3 Curve part 1001 37163 i Apply ox Dismiss Select the Curves as shown in Figure 4 206 one by one and Press Apply Thus Three Points are created Make sure the Part Name is same for all the Points
14. 159072 Vector Variable Current Translation mag i5s Apply L ancel Note Results shown here are obtained by MSC Nastran run Results may differ with those of AI Nastran run depending on the version Tutorial Manual Nastran Tutorials Figure 4 276 Animation Setup and Controller window b B b 44 0 000 with Steps Cycles ho o e Speed ms ho Animate dynamic surfaces Animation Controller al Animate views Rotate about line Angle degree 360 Anis 0 01 Center 0 Animate deformation Undeformed shape Smoothly back cycle Amplifier Animate modal Undeformed shape Steps per cycle 20 Amplifier 3 0505 udi T Tutorial Manual Nastran Tutorials Select e Control All Animation option from Post processing tab menu bar which will open Animation Controller window as shown in Figure 4 276 Set the values as shown in Figure 4 276 and press Animate to view the mode shape as shown in Figure 4 277 Finally select Exit to quit the post processor Figure 4 277 Anima ted model Tranzlation Total al 18 556 Hz 18 556 15 91 Hz 14 85 13 79 12 73 11 67 60 544 484 423 363 302 242 181 i21 D e M amp Ooo 1 co n similarly for the frequency 104 023 HZ also the result can be animated as shown in Figure 4 278 Tutorial Manual
15. 1456 x31 1061 09456 08105 06754 05403 04052 IRE 0000 iE pp psp A A Finally select File Results Close Result to quit the post processor 4 1 4 PCB Thermal Analysis Overview In this tutorial it is shown that how easy to create a mesh in the PCB model and then do thermal analysis in Ansys using AI Environment ENS i o DS a Summary of steps Starting the project O O ANSYS ICEMCFD 10 0 893 Tutorial Manual ANSYS Tutorials Repairing the geometry Assigning the mesh sizes Generating the tetrahedral mesh smoothing and checking the mesh Defining the material properties setting the solver parameters Writing the input file solution and results saving the project b Starting the project Launch the AI Environment from UNIX or DOS window Then File gt Change working directory ICEM CAN docu FEAHelp AI Tutorial Files gt PCB Thermal analysis project Load its tetin file geometry tin c Repairing the geometry For repairing geometry select Geometry gt Repair geometry ND gt Build topology Run the build topology with the default parameters d Assigning the mesh sizes Creating bodies Before defining the mesh sizes we have to define the material point For defining the material point select Geometry gt Create body E rhis will bring a create body nil window In create body window Assign part
16. this will open the Modify panel as shown in Figure 3 117 Select edge s and select one of the radial edges as in Figure 3 118 Enter the Offset as 0 5 toggle off Absolute distance default and Apply The radial edge will be shrunk in half reducing the size of the radial blocks and increasing the size of the central block Tutorial Manual Hexa Meshing Figure 3 117 Edit Block ay Modify OGrid Edit Block panel Modify Ond Method Rescale Hescale Block Select All Visible Selected Black ENS Edge 0 20140 AS Absolute distance Offset 0 9 Apply ia Dismiss Tutorial Manual Hexa Meshing Figur 3 118 Modif Ogrid edge Update surface mesh sizes on the blocking Select Pre mesh Params 5 gt Update Size 5 Turn on Pre Mesh recompute Further refinement with Edge Parameters Again turn off Pre Mesh Select Select Pre Mesh Params ap gt Edge Params gt Select edge s and again select one of the radial edges Increase the number of Nodes to 7 Change Spacing 1 end near the wall to 0 2 Turn on Copy Parameters and select Tutorial Manual Hexa Meshing Copy gt Method gt To Parallel Edges default Turn on Copy Absolute Apply This will carry a 0 2 near wall spacing throughout all of the cylinder surfaces Make any other node distribution changes you see fit Turn on Pre
17. 47 mil keps Energy Equations Riequired C Yes Mo Scaling Yes No Tutorial Manual Output to Solvers Select Done to close the Star CD window and the ICEM CFD messages window will indicate when the translation process is complete When the translation process is complete the STAR CD files will have been written to the 3DPipeJunct directory The STAR CD solver is now prepared to run with that file set Select File gt Quit to close the ANSYS ICEMCFD window The remainder of this section deals with writing output files for structured mesh Output to Solvers 3 8 3 Structured Mesh Start ANSYS ICEMCTD and press File gt Open gt Project and from the File selection window choose 3DpipeJunct Press Accept Load the Tetin file geometry tin and the Multiblock structured Hexa mesh a Wiriting Output to a Solver The user can write output to CFX TASCflow with the Multiblock version of the mesh Press Output gt Select solver Tutorial Manual Output to Solvers Figure 3 629 Select your second solver CFX Select a solver TASCflow CFX TASCflow d CFDRC DTF CM amp STARS COBALT Okay Cancel From the Selection window select CFX TASCflow refer to Figure 3 629 Press Okay b Solver Specific Boundary Conditions With the solver set to CFX TASCflow the user can define regions that CFX TASCflow will recognize Press Output gt Boundary conds
18. Tutorial Manual ANSYS Tutorials Figure 4 13 Mode shape at 194 975 Hz Translation_Total 194 975 Hz 26 94 23d 23 43 21 5 19 16 16 40 14 55 lcu 11 14 d 303 7 620 eae 4 117 2 51 0 6059 Similarly to view another mode shape select the next frequency 552 589 Hz from the Select AnsysVariables window and animate the mode shape as shown in the Figure 4 14 Tutorial Manual ANSYS Tutorials Figure 4 14 Mode shape at 552 589 E Hz Translation Total 552 989 32 08 29 94 27 80 25 67 23 53 21 38 18 26 15 12 14 99 12 85 10 71 8 577 5 441 4 305 2 169 5 0 03253 1 Finally select File gt Results gt Close Result to quit the post processor Tutorial Manual 4 1 2 Connecting Rod Thermal Boundary Condition Al Environment can be used to see the thermal effects too Some examples of this category of problems include heat distribution in any automobile component and temperature distribution due to temperature difference A simple connecting rod structure 15 used to demonstrate the process here In the example the crankshaft end big end is made fixed while a high temperature load 15 applied at the piston end small end The geometry is shown in Figure 4 15 Figure 4 15 Connecti ng Rod Model a Summary of Steps Geometry Editing Launch AI Environment and load geometry file Extracting Curves and Points Mesh parameters and Meshing Mesh Sizing
19. Tutorial Manual Nastran Tutorials After all the points are created the geometry should look as shown in Figure 4 207 Figure 4 206 Curves Dark on which parametric points to be created Figure 4 207 The Dark Point indicate sthe newly Point created Tutorial Manual Nastran Tutorials Select Y Define Connectors icon from Mesh Tab Menu bar Now click on Tid Spot Weld icon from Define Connectors window as shown in Figure 4 208 Spot Weld Name SPOT POINTSO It will appear by default Source Points Select the 12 points created as shown in Figure 4 207 Target Parts Select the parts PART 1001 and PART 1004 Connector Part Name SPOT WELDO It will appear by default Max Projection 5 Weld Type Point to Point It will appear by default Element Splitting Remesh area Tri Quad It will appear by default and Press Apply Switch Connectors in the Display Tree All the values are shown in Figure 4 208 Nastran Tutorials Figure 4 208 SSS D CAECUS Define Define Connectors a Connectors window Connector Type Spot Weld name SPOT _PUINTSO Spot Weld Source points 1 001 03 PART 4 b reu Target parts PART 1000 PART 10 2 Connector Part name SPOT_WELDO projection Weld options Weld type Paint to point Element splitting Remesh area Tri uad Active Apply ok Dismiss Turn OFF all Parts
20. hd Cum DEFAULT Change the part name to DEFAULT Click on Select entities and select the two cylindrical surfaces as shown in Figure 5 74 After selecting the surfaces click the middle mouse button to complete the selection Tutorial Manual ANSYS ICEMCFD CFX Tutorials Figure 5 74 Surface for DEFAULT Delete all the curves and then run Build Topology to create the curves and points in their respective parts Thus go to the Geometry tab menubar and select Delete Curve Click on Select curves amp and press the hotkey a from the keyboard to select all the curves in the model Now click on Apply to delete all the curves The original parts PART 1 through PART 5 are empty of useful geometry To delete empty Parts Right click on Parts and select Delete Empty Parts to delete the empty and un necessary parts Some of these parts still have geometry in the dormant state and are not considered empty To delete these parts right click on the part name and select Delete and the Delete from the pop up Do this for PART 1 through PART 5 The Display Tree before and after deleting and renaming parts is shown in Figure 5 75 Tutorial Manual ANSYS ICEMCFD CFX Tutorials Figure 5 75 ET boda Eh Model Display Tree before bya Geometry yi Geomewy and after Deleting E Subsets wf Subsets and renaming Parts Points af Paint Dues Curves w Suifa
21. Ansys File Tpipe Ansys in Attnbute File Tpipe_Ansys ansys Parameter File Tpipe Ansys ansys par Edit Options Basic C Advanced Volume Elements Defined Shell Elements Defined Thickness Distribution Distributed Bar Elements Defined Create Attribute amp Parameter Files Apply Tutorial Manual ANSYS Tutorials The Ansys input data file displays in the default text editor This file can be directly edited and saved if desired Since there is no need to edit this example just close the editor This file will be saved to the project directory as Tpipe Ansys in Solution and Results A modal analysis will be performed in Ansys on this model and the results will be visualized within ICEMCFD Solving the problem Click on the Submit Solver Run icon Q from the Solve Options Tab Menu bar to open the window shown in Figure 4 9 Select Batch under Ansys Run Mode Next to Input File the name of the previously written input file should appear Tpipe_Ansys in The Output File name can be anything you wish as this is the Ansys messages file that will be written Verify the Working Directory is correct A dot means to use the current working directory Also verify that the Select Ansys Products field is correct The ANSYS EXEC PATH environment variable may have to be set to the full path to the Ansys executable for ICEMCFD to be able to run Ansys Press Apply to
22. Assigning Shell Thickness For analysis purpose it 1s better to assign the thickness to the shell Select gi Assign Mesh Thickness icon from Edit Mesh Tab Menubar which pops up Adjust Mesh Thickness window shown in Figure 4 157 From Method select Calculate and press the Apply It will automatically calculate the original thickness of the geometry and assigns it to the mesh Tutorial Manual Nastran Tutorials Figure 4 157 Adjust Mesh Thickness Adjust Mesh 5 Window Thickness T Thickness Method Calculate Apply Dismiss Note If the usres wants to see the assigned mesh thickness Click the right mouse button on Mesh gt Shell and select Shell Thickness The Mesh will appear as seen in Figure 4 158 Tutorial Manual Nastran Tutorials Figure 4 158 Geometry Showing Mesh Thickness Now to turn off Mesh gt Shell gt Shell Thickness from Model Tree e Material and Element Properties Material for this model is STEEL So the properties like Young s modulus Poisson s ratio and Density should be defined Since the original geometry had a thickness while we have resolved only the mid surface the shell thickness also needs to be defined Selection of Material Select 28 Create Material Property icon from Properties Tab Menubar Define the Material Name as STEEL and supply the required parameters for it in the Define Material Property window as shown in Figure 4 159 Material ID
23. Mesh type Al Tri Edges uns 0 Surface projection Single loop amp complete edges Interpolation surface Keep volume consistent Apply ok Dismiss You will be immediately prompted to select edges no need to select from the Repair Mesh panel Leave everything in the panel as default and drag a selection box keeping the left mouse key depressed around the displayed edges Selection will be verified by display of nodes and black edges Press the middle mouse button or Apply The Tutorial Manual Advanced Meshing Tutorials yellow edges will eventually disappear indicating the closing of the hole was successful Note Notice that Keep volume consistent is selected This will restructure the tetras so that they match up with the newly created surface mesh This 15 recommended only if there 15 one hole as in this case If more than one hole Keep volume consistent should be turned off Mesh from Edges should be done iae manually one hole at a time then select Flood Fill Make Consistent also from the Repair Mesh panel Flood fill is also part of the Make consistent process After the tetras are fixed Flood Fill is automatically run to determine which elements to retain those inside the closed volume and which to throw away Scroll up in the Message Window and note the number of elements assigned to LIVE and those put into OREN default dead zone Turn off Mesh gt S
24. c3d mesh FlowiCart par PITOT c3d mesh Info Forces dat PITOT c3d mesh mg history dat PITOT c3d mesh R medleg tmp run cubes med uris run Flow art med PITOT c3d clic cntl Ej slicePlanes dom FITOT_c3d cntl E PITOT_c3d dom c3d Fam PITOT c3d qui PITOT c3d i dat Documents er Computer om LE Network File name slicePlanes dom Files af type Jal Files 4 L ancel 2 From the Post processing tab select Variables and Select Variables T Bm n the Scalar Variable panel select Pressure and set Min 0 6 as shown in Figure 3 597 Tutorial Manual Figure 3 597 Result Variable Window Cart3D Hesult Variables Global Variables z uw wee Scalar Variable Current Pressure i Min 06E Max 153682 Vector Variable Curent From oiin ts Mas mag Apply o Cancel Press Apply in the Result Variables window to get the image shown in Figure 3 598 Tutorial Manual Cart3D Figure 3 598 Post Proces S Result Case2Sub Critical Close the Post Processing session by File gt Results gt Close Result and confirm to close by pressing Yes Change the working directory via File gt Change Working Dir and set the location to the folder Sub Critical into which the original files were copied From the Cart3D menu select Solver gt Define solver param
25. ANSYS Tutorials Mesh sizing Select the Mesh Set Global Mesh Size gt General Parameters to button In the Global Mesh Size window enter a Scale Factor of 1 0 and Max Element of 1 0 Under Natural Size toggle ON Enabled Next to Enabled enter a Size of 0 125 Enabling Natural size turns on an algorithm that automatically refines the mesh size where there is small curvature and small gaps in order to accurately resolve the geometry Leave all other fields as default in the Global Mesh Size window as shown in Figure 4 48 and press Apply ANSYS Tutorials Figure 4 48 xm m Global Mesh Size window Global Mesh Size Global Mesh Parameters Dz Y m Global Element Scale Factor Scale factor Iv Display Global Element Seed Size element Display Natural Size Enabled Size 0125 Display Num of Elements 1 gap 2 Refinement 10 Ignore Wall Thickness Triangle tolerance 0 001 Unitless tritalerance Apply OK Dismiss Tutorial Manual ANSYS Tutorials Select the Mesh gt Set Surface Mesh Size button which brings up the Surface Mesh Size window as shown in Figure 4 49 Click on the surface selection button Choose an item and select all the surfaces by 5 2922 pressing ensure that the mouse cursor is in display window Enter a Maximum size of 0 5 as shown in Figure 4 49 and pre
26. BIST p suena 0 04 U5 06 OF US 094 1 Then in the Pre Mesh Quality window at the upper left select Angle from the Criterion pull down Enter the values as shown in Figure 3 164 and press Apply A new histogram will appear for the internal angles of elements as shown in Figure 3 165 Tutorial Manual Hexa Meshing Figure 3 164 Pre mesh quality Pre Mesh Quality Window while selecting Angle Criterion Angle Histogram Options Min value 0 Mars value 80 Mastr height 12 zl Hum of bars 20 Apply Cancel An angle greater than 18 degrees is acceptable for most commercial solvers Figure 3 165 Histogram showing Angle Note As taught in the 3DPipeJunct example to display cells of a particular determinant or angle value select a histogram bar and then select Show Cells within that range will be highlighted The user should then inspect the elements and decide on a solution In most cases block vertices can be moved or edge parameters can be changed to improve the area Tutorial Manual Hexa Meshing Running Pre mesh smoother Before converting the Pre mesh to an unstructured or structured mesh the user may choose first to smooth the mesh Select Blocking gt Pre mesh Smooth The Pre mesh smooth window will then appear Select the Method as Quality Select the Criterion as Angle and enter Smoothing iterations 3 and Up to quality 0 5 as shown in Figu
27. Tutorial Manual Cart3D only one component present At the end it displays the Finest Cell Dimensions as shown in Figure 3 493 Figure 3 493 Lart3D Mesher Cart3D Mesher window files prefix wiNG2 Single Component Fix Normals Nominal Mesh Radius Body 0n y Lenght x 120 Starting Mesh Divisions 3 33 Mas Mum of Cell Refinements 1 2 E Compute Parameters Finest Cell Dimensions 0 00737 0 0073 D 00737 Hesh Creation Preview Mesh Only Create and Save Full Mesh Humber of Multi grid levels 5 Outer Bounding Box Minimum Diagonal Point 23 4641 05 30 17 T hd aximum Diagonal Point 30 882856 30 173 Define Surface Family Refinement Define All Surface Refinement Mumber of Buffer Layers 4 Angle Threshold For 20 Refinement Area Weight Normals Beirates enin ota k Number of Cut Planes ine dir 3 4 Humber of Cut Planes in dir 3 a Number of Cut Planes in dir 3 Mesh Internal Region Apply Dismiss Tutorial Manual Cart3D 5 This will create 2 density polygons for mesh density control that can be seen by activating Geometries gt Densities in the Display Tree widget 6 This also computes the Finest Cell Dimensions 0 00737 x 0 00737 x 0 00737 Varying the Starting Mesh Divisions and or Max Num of Cell Refinements can vary these values 7 The diagonal points displayed under the Outer
28. 1 Click on Cart 3D from the main menu Select the Volume Mesher icon We get the cart 3D Mesher window as shown in Figure 3 492 Figure AOL 5 g Edt View ino Setting Windows Help 5 3 492 d CERCA Comey Blocking Edt Meth Properties Corban Loads Sove Oupa Pod procening gt i 4 3D 22 0190 Boras Mesher Lant3D Messer m Cat fies fw ING a window Seal pce Fix Namas Nomina Mesh Radus Bod a Longi x Seating Mech Deauons 555 of Cell 11 asete Finest 10 000 Mash Cination Preview Mesh Ony Create and Save Ful Meth Number of Multi grid levels Owes Dowding Doa Mirum Diagonal Port 3 Ne zi Meh Sub Se v oo _ omoa emoORONST ne em 0 60489036 0 2 u t 4109720 0 s 3 fies Pirfo it i f tog Save 2 Leave Fix Normals enabled This will fix orientation of the triangles such that their normals are pointing outward 3 Choose Nominal Mesh Radius Body Length X 20 Starting Mesh Divisions 3 3 3 and Max number of Cell Refinements 12 4 Click Compute Parameters This saves the mesh in the local directory converts in into Cart3D format and finds the intersections if any This is required to convert the triangulation to Cart3D tri format even if there is
29. Create volume cells Apply ck Cancel Click on the part selection Ks button A window with the current parts in the model will appear Select the part PIN as shown in Figure 4 52 and press Accept to close the Select parts window ANSYS Tutorials Figure 4 52 Internal Wall Parts Selection window Select parts Accept Cancel Screen O Al None ven Now Click Apply to split the internal wall A new part will appear in the Model Tree called PIN BACK Turn OFF all the parts except for PIN BACK to see these new surface elements Make sure to turn all parts back on This will disconnect the mesh of the BLOCK and the PIN at the internal wall In most cases this will be the result when geometries are meshed separately and the meshes loaded together but here it is easy to just split the internal wall A contact is then defined where the meshes meet To see the mesh in Solid amp Wire press the Solid Simple Display from the main menu Make sure Surfaces are off in the Model Tree so you are not looking at surfaces on top of mesh Now the mesh should look as shown in Figure 4 53 ANSYS Tutorials Figure 4 53 Mesh in Solid amp Wire mode d Material and Element Properties Definition of the Material Select Properties Create Material Property Bed Define the Material Name as MATI The Material ID can be left as 1 Select the material Type as Isotropic which is the default Define Young
30. Dismiss From the Properties tab select Define 2D Element Properties 6 to open the Define Shell Element window as shown in Figure 4 127 For the Part COVER MAT2 material has to be used For that do the following steps e Select Part as COVER e Set PID to 12 Tutorial Manual LS Dyna Tutorials Set Type to Shell e Select material as 2 e Supply thickness as 0 75 Select MAT2 for the Transversal Shear Material Coupling Membrane Bending Material and Bending Material option e Press Apply to complete the operation Figure 4 127 Define Shell Define Shell Element element window COVER is 2 Pip 12 Properties Type Shell Maternal 2 w Thickness 0 75 Transversal Shear Material Coupling Membrane MATZ Bending Maternal MATZ Bending Moment of Inertia ERES 1 000000 Bending Material 2 Tranzverse Shear Thickness Patin 0 823330 Nonstructural Mass Unit ib 0 000000 lj Apply ck Dismiss Tutorial Manual LS Dyna Tutorials Expand Material Properties in the Display Tree widget Right click on MAT2 and select Modify to open the Define Material Property window shown in Figure Change the LS Dyna Material Type to Type24 MAT PIECEWISE LINEAR PLASTICITY Input Yield Stress as 210 0 and Failure Strain as 0 3 Press Apply Figure 4 128 Define Material Property Matenal Name 4 Delne Maternal
31. Dismiss Now select Blocking gt Pre mesh params 9 gt Update Sizes it will open window as shown Figure Select Update All and press Apply Tutorial Manual Advanced Meshing Tutorials Figure 3 451 Pre Mesh Params i Recalculate sizes window E Meshing Parameters 949 99 ee Sizes Method Update All C Keep Distributions C Keep Counts CC d Apply ok Cancel Now turn ON Blocking gt Pre mesh from Display Tree widget it will ask for Recompute Select Yes to recompute Turn the display of Pre mesh to Solid from Display Tree widget Pre mesh gt Solid After turning it to solid blocking will look like as shown in Figure 3 452 Blocking after completing meshing Tutorial Manual Advanced Meshing Tutorials n Checking Quality and running Pre mesh smoother Now user will check the quality of mesh which will be created from blocking and run Pre mesh smoother to improve its quality Choose Blocking gt Pre mesh quality and criteria as Determinant 3 3 3 and enter the parameters as shown in Figure 3 453 It will show the quality of mesh in histogram similar to quality shown in Figure 3 453 a Pre Mesh quality window Pre Mesh Quality Criterion Determinant Ja3 3 Histogram Options Minis value lo Mayes value heigt 12 3 Mum of bars Apply ox Cancel Figure 3 454 Determinant 3 3 3 Histogram showing Min 0 63 De
32. Property Window Material ID E lsotropic zi pU Material ype y zl Select Type 24 PIECEWISE LINEAR PLASTICITY Yield stess 2100 Failure strain 0 3 E From the Properties tab select Define 3D Element Properties to open the Define Volume Element window shown in Figure 4 129 As BAT part is made of Solid elements 3D elements property has to be assigned for that MAT3 material has to be used for this part e Select Part as BAT e Select material as MATS e Set PID to 20 Tutorial Manual LS Dyna Tutorials e Press Apply to complete the operation Figure 4 129 Define Volume Define Solid Element z Element EX window BAT e Maternal 3 D FID 20 LES Global Apply cock Dismiss d Contact e From the Constraints tab click on Define Single Surface Contact e to open the Define Single Surface Contact window shown in Figure 4 130 Figure 4 130 Define 5ingle Define Single Surface Contact Surface Contact Mame ALL window Contact Surfaces unz sel 2 Static Coefficient of Frictian 0 3 Dynamic Coefficient of ae 21 Friction L5 Dyna Single Contact Option SINGLE SURFACE Apply ck Dismiss Tutorial Manual LS Dyna Tutorial
33. i C A VET iy A X VEH Ay YN X T wm S T v j 5 Jj b T 4 m n Generating the Mesh Before generating the mesh the user needs to set the meshing parameters Define multigrid for this mesh The multigrid mesh 15 required for quite a few solvers and needs to have certain restrictions on the number of nodes that can be defined on an edge For example multigrid level 2 would require 5 9 13 17 and similar numbers of nodes on an edge Hexa allows only these numbers of nodes to be defined on an edge To activate select Setting gt Meshing gt Hexa Mixed Enter 2 for Multigrid level in the Meshing options window as shown in Figure 3 342 and press Apply Tutorial Manual Advanced Meshing Tutorials Figure 3 342 Hexa Mixed Meshing Meshing option window Options z level 2 Projection limit 55 D efault meshing law Biieometic gt Default bunching ratio ln Floating arid Project Check Fix Inverted Blacks Transfinite degree Linea C Quadratic Reference topology Unstruct face type Quad Dominant Show 4 3 style Edge meshing params Press Mesh gt Set Surface Mesh siz to open the Mesh parameters window Figure 3 343 Select all the Surface Parts and then set the Max Element size to 0 4 Height to 0
34. 1E 1 1E 2 teration Done Print Set range Full range log v f log Symbols Lines Yard Tutorial Manual Cart3D f Computing Force and Moments 1 In the Cart3D main menu select Integrate Cp The Post Process solution window appears as shown in Figure 3 507 Figure 3 507 Post Process Gil Post Process Solution 3 Solution window Cart3D Result wING2 c3d itriq Che Output Directory Profiles a Heference parameters Family Params All Params Model 2 Model axis Model axis Cp Distribution Apply vo Cancel 2 Click All Params in the Post Process Solution window 3 In the Reference All Params window specify Reference Area as 1 1589 Reference Length as 1 4 Enable Compute Force and Compute Moment 5 Set Moment about Point 0 5 00 Pointi 5 0 0 and Point2 1 125 0 1 6 Click Apply in the Reference All Params window and then Dismiss to close as shown in Figure 3 508 Cart3D Figure 3 508 x Reference All IE amm Params window Reference Area 1 1523 Reference Length 1 Compute Force Compute Moment Moment about Point 05 Moment about Line Point 05 Paint 1 1 zh 1 Apply Dismiss 7 Press Apply in the Post Process Solution window The results appear in the GUI messages area g Visualizing the results 1 Flow charts write
35. Center of 3 Points You should see the window shown in Figure 4 28 ANSYS Tutorials Figure 4 28 Create Point v Center point re Part POINTS POINTS 00 E Ae Center of 3 Points 41434427884 2 Apply Dismiss Select 3 points on the nodes at one side of the large hole as shown in Figure 4 29 Then press Apply to create the center point Do this for the other side of the hole as well so that there are two center points ANSYS Tutorials Figure 4 29 Three points Press the Local Coordinate Systems button i from the main menu You should see the window shown in Figure 4 30 Tutorial Manual ANSYS Tutorials Figure 4 30 Define Local Define Local Caordinate 9 Coordinate System System Window DN Name Lcs1 Number Reference Global m Type Cylindrical 0 00 Detined hy Defined y Defined by 3 Poims rl Foints j 3 Points 0 000853 0 0024 V Apply Dismiss The Name should read LCS1 Select Cylindrical from the pull down next to Type When selecting the three points the first point is the origin The second point defines the direction for the z axis which is the cylindrical axis And the third point defines the starting point of the angle theta Select the three points in the order shown in Figure 4 31 Press the middle mouse button to accept and then Apply Tutorial Manual
36. Check point file gue Save Cut planes result See _ 2 Slices Runuser command Command 55 Apply Cancel Note Post processing is explained in previous tutorials Follow the same procedure to view the results Tutorial Manual Cart3D Mach number results in slicePlanes dom for the Sub Sonic Flow case are shown in Figure 3 614 Figure Mach E p 4 0 8221 u 0 7827 0 7432 Sonic de Result Dion Mach 0 5460 Numbe Meus 0 4276 r 0 3882 0 3488 0 3093 0 2639 0 2304 Pressure results in surface results dom for the Sub Sonic Flow case are shown in Figure 3 615 Figure 3 615 Sub Pressure esult 0 7134 for 0 6974 0 6815 Press 0 6656 ure 0 6497 0 6337 0 6178 0 6019 0 5860 0 5700 0 55 0 5382 0 5223 0 5063 0 4304 0 4745 Tutorial Manual Cart3D Select File gt Results gt Close Result to end the post processing session Case Transonic flow Only the INLET and EXIT boundary conditions need to be changed surface BC Name INLET surface family INLET Density 1 0 X Velocity 0 23954 for choked flow Pressure 1 y 1 1 4 714285714 Theory In this case a normal shock will occur downstream of the throat So isentropic relations are not valid and 1 D normal shock relations must be used to find exit conditions tiota 1 y 1 M 2 y 1 0 743390 Dexit Ptotal 0 75 Dexit 55754252 From 1
37. Contr Other controls Ma Limiter Boundary Conditions ol Covergence History MINMOD wind Partition Information OW Flux functian wan Leer Colella 1998 Cut Cell BCtype Agglomerated Normals SubCell Resolution Number of Multi Grid levels 3 cycletype C M cucle W cucle Number of pre smoothing passes 1 Number of post smoothing passes 1 Accept Cancel 6 Keep defaults for Boundary Conditions Convergence History and Partition Information and press Accept e Running the FlowCart Solver 1 Select Solver panel refer to Figure 3 505 2 Specify Max Number of Cycle 150 3 Turn on Save Full Hexa Result Tutorial Manual Cart3D 4 Turn on Save Cut planes result and specify Z Slices as 0 001 0 297 0 653 0 965 1 187 1 3336 and 1 410 5 Click Apply and run the solver Figure 3 505 a Run Solver Hun Solver if window cart3D solver Number of Cycles y y axis spanwise Save Full Hex Result Grid Sequencing Level 1 Restart computation Check point file pe Save Cut planes result A Slices Y Slices Z Slices 0 001 0 297 0 653 0 965 1 187 1 3361 410 Run user command Command Apply ox Cancel 6 The user can view the convergence via the Convergence Monitor icon as shown in Figure 3 506 The monitor may open automatically Tutorial Manual Cart3D 1E2 1E1 1 0
38. Deleting unused entities Geometry Delete Surface Select Delete Surface icon Delete the surfaces shown in Figure 3 34 Repeat this for the other side of the tube Figure 3 34 Surfaces to delete Tutorial Manual Geometry Creation Delete these surfaces Build topology Geometry Repair Geometry B Build Diagnostic Topology Select Build Diagnostic Topology from the geometry tab Build topology once more but this time turn ON Filter points and Filter curves Use a tolerance of 0 002 c Creating the material point Geometry gt Create Body gt Material Point gt Centroid of 2 points Eon Select 2 Create Body to open the window Enter a new Part name of FLUID and select one location on the blade and one location on the INLET or OUTLET so that the midpoint will be inside the tube but outside the blade Press the middle mouse button to complete the selection process Press Apply to create the material point The final geometry is as shown in Figure 3 35 Figure 3 35 Final Geometry Tutorial Manual Geometry Creation d Saving geometry File gt Geometry gt Save Geometry As Enter the file name as Geo PipeBlade tin and press Save to save the geometry file Tutorial Manual Hexa Meshing Tutorial Manual Hexa Meshing 3 2 Hexa Meshing ANSYS ICEMCED is 3 object based semi automatic multi block structured and unstructured surface and volume mesher Figure 3
39. F o piir RA ES I SS Ewa 00 im T m ee Fe iaa COE Foo r E Eo ook E ha A a x a D ee ees eee m ee 2 0 r ee ee ome seme ee SO m mom E EE Ea 5E r aar Sab a x eee a 7 7 i oe Boe ee m os 7 F g n 8m ol Ee Fo 08 Chi Fall 8 x 8 x r K B a o ER qno reu aat m eee EE eee eee Oe o a TL ee N m m H mH M T h 77 S Leos Sr Foe orat sira F ee Tea Fee SS Eo 4 i x WI i ar ab iora u J aiir This will shift geometry to the ICEMCFD CFX environment for geometry clean up Because of difficulties maintaining a common standard for graphical entities across all CAD systems imported parasolid wm mm eee eee Tutorial Manual ANSYS ICEMCFD CFX Tutorials models usually require some cleanup before they can be used to create a continuous enclosed region for CFD analysis INFLOW Right click on Parts in the Display tree and select Create Part Give the Part name as INFLOW as shown in Figure 5 70 and click on Create Part by Selection its Toggle off Curves in the Display Tr
40. HMode Load 5ide Hz Load H Category Displacement Scalar Current Translation Total 7 0 95387 Vector Variable Current Translation mag TE Apply ck Cancel Tutorial Manual Figure 4 237 Animation Setup and Controller window Nastran Tutorials Animation Controller 8 gt B bk 44 0 000 with Steps o 7 Cycles Roo M Speed ris o Animate dynamic surfaces Animate views Rotate about line Angle degree 360 Anis 0 01 Center 0 Animate deformation Undeformed shape Smoothly back cycle Amplifier 15 108 Animate modal Undeformed shape Steps per cycle 20 Amplifier IN Tutorial Manual Nastran Tutorials Select Control All Animation option from Post processing tab menu bar which will open Animation Controller window as shown in Figure 4 237 Set the values as shown in Figure 4 237 and press Animate to view the mode shape as shown in Figure 4 238 Finally select Exit to quit the post processor Figure 4 238 Anima ted model Tranzlation Total Load 1 0 9184 0 9572 0 7960 0 7549 0 6735 0 6123 0 5511 0 4999 0 4286 0 0 0 0 0 0 364 3061 22449 1837 1225 1243 0000 Tutorial Manual Nastran Tutorials 4 3 4 Connecting Rod This exercise explains Hexahedral
41. In the Part Menu under the Display Tree widget perform the operation Parts gt Hide AII and the turn on only the Part CUT PLANE Y1 as shown in Figure 3 585 Tutorial Manual Cart3D Figure 3 585 F Display Tree widget v Made BU Ww SH LR CUTCELL CUTPLANE 21 CUTPLANE 2 LUTPLANE TI CUTPLANE 21 LUTPLANE Z3 INLET LIP SHULR The mesh projected onto is shown in Figure 3 586 Note The mesh in Figure 3 586 can be view by View gt Top EY Tutorial Manual Cart3D Perform the operation Parts gt Show All after viewing the mesh Full Mesh Now 1n the Cart3D Mesher window enable Create and Save Full Mesh as shown in Figure 3 587 c Mesh Generation Tutorial Manual Cart3D Figure 3 507 Mesher Create and Save Ful 5 55 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 gt Mesh art3D files prefix Single Component Fis Normals Nominal Mesh Radius Body SS Length x ET Starting Mesh Divisions 10 214 Num of Cell Refinements 7 zi Compute Parameters Finest Cell Dimensions 0 104 x 0 104 x 0 104 Hesh Creation 7 Preview Mesh Only Create and Save Full Mesh Number of Multi grid levels 3 Outer Bounding Box Minimum Diagonal Point 0 402 0 251 0 401 haximum Diagonal Point
42. Interface Friclion Data TypeCoulomb Value 0 3 Critical Normal Velocity Far weld 10 0 Apply ok Dismiss Enter name as RIGID WALL For Points click on Select node s 4 elements using hotkey and select all the nodes 0d Enter 100000 0 for the Z component of Head Coordinates and 10 0 as the Z component of the Tail coordinates LS Dyna Tutorials Supply 0 3 as the Type Coulomb Coeff Value under Interface Friction Data e Press Apply to define the Planar Rigid Wall e Turn OFF Rigid Wall display from Display Tree widget g Gravity Loading e From the Loads tab click Set Gravity i to open the Gravity window as presented in Figure 4 133 Figure 4 133 ca Gravity window Load Set BODY _LOAD LCS Global Scale E V alue A 00 00 3810 0 Apply ox Dismiss Enter Load Set as BODY LOAD Supply the Value of 9810 0 as the Z component for the Gravity e Press Apply to define gravity h Save Project e From the main menu select File gt Save Project As create a new directory PDA as said in earlier tutorials LS Dyna Tutorials e Enter PDA Dyna as project name and press Save to save the files in this directory as shown in Figure 4 134 Along with the PDA Dvyna prj file it will also store three other files Mesh file Attribute file and Parameter files as PDA Dyna uns PDA Dyna foc and PDA Dyna par respectively Figur Gav
43. Multiple projection options for initial or final mesh computation Quality checks for determinant internal angle and volume of the meshes Domain renumbering of the block topology e Output block definition to reduce the number of multi block structured output mesh files Block orientation and origin modification options 3 10 Automatic O grid generation Generating O grids is a very powerful and quick technique used to achieve a quality mesh This process would not have been possible without the presence of O grids The O grid technique is utilized to model geometry when the user desires a circular or O type mesh either around a localized geometric feature or globally around an object 3 6 ANSYS CFD Al Environment 10 0 User Manual SAS IP Inc Section 3 12 Smoothing Techniques 3 10 1 Important Features of an O grid Generation of Orthogonal Mesh Lines at an Object Boundary The generation of the O grid is fully automatic and the user simply selects the blocks needed for O grid generation The O grid is then generated either inside or outside the selected blocks The O grid may be fully contained within its selected region or it may pass through any of the selected block faces Rescaling an O grid After Generation When the O grid is generated the size of the O grid is scaled based upon the Factor in the Blocking O grid parameter window The user may modify the length of the O grid using the Blocking Re sca
44. Split at interior curves oin edge curves Delete unattached curves and points Apply OK Duigmigs Nastran Tutorials d Connectors Since this is a surface meshing model mesh parameters should be defined on curves Furthermore since the geometry 15 made of several separte parts it is desireable to have individual mesh parts connected Connectors are premesh definitions by which individual surfaces mesh parts are welded together Seam Weld To create Seam weld between PART 1003 and PART 1004 select T Define Connectors icon from Mesh Tab Menu bar Click on Seam Weld icon from Define Connectors window as shown in Figure 4 203 Turn the Surface display from Display Model Tree by clicking on Geometry gt Surfaces and also turn Off Points from Model Tree Turn Off Curves gt Show Wide and Color by Count and in Parts turn only PART 1003 Click on Select Curve s amp button and then select the curves as shown in Figure 4 204 as Source Curves and notice that the New Part Name for Curves comes default as SEAM CURVESO Nastran Tutorials Figure 4 203 Define 2 Connectors onnectors window for Seam Weld Connector Type A MD Seam connector name SEAM CURVESL ceam Weld Weld Options Weld type Point to point SOUrCe CUES _10 5 Target part IPART_ is 1 Max projection hb Far name ISEAM WELDO gt Element splitting Remesh area T
45. The curve extraction procedure is based on the Angle If the Angle between parts of the surface is greater than a threshold angle a curve segment will be created along the common edge The extraction of curves can be based on the boundary the interior or both Only interior Where only curves on the interior are extracted provided the feature angles between the triangles are greater than the threshold value Only boundary Where all curves are extracted from the boundary of the surface family Both Both interior and exterior regions are extracted Tutorial Manual Tetra Meshing Appendix d Segmenting the Curves The curve extracted so far includes several closed loop curves in distinct regions of the model but 1s still considered one curve Now user needs to segment this curve into unique entities To do so the user is asked to see the curve names by right clicking on Curves gt Show Curve Names in the Display Tree widget Notice that the curve is named CURVES 0 0 is the first curve in CURVES Select Geometry gt Create Modify Y gt Segment C uM Tetra Meshing Appendix Figure 3 277 Create Modify Curve Segmenting curves Part CURVES Mame CLIRVES UD nda Segment Curve Segment by angle Curve cul 5 maces Angle 20 Minimum number of segments 1 Keep original zl Apply ox Dismiss Select the CURVE 0 1 curve and complete the selec
46. Transversal Shear Material IsotropicMat Coupling Membrane lotropicMat Bending Material lid Bending Moment of Inertia 1 000000 Ratio C Bending Material IsctropicMat Transverse Shear Thickness 833233 Ratio Honstructural Mass Unit Length El Apply Dismiss Also review the line properties for ET1D5 bars representing the bolt holes and RBE2 gt ETIDI6 rigid bodies connecting the main shell parts Turn on Line Properties within these parts and note the icons representing the different line element types Review the Load Expand Loads gt Set 52 gt 8 in the Model tree Right mouse select FR8 and Modify Review the panel as shown in Figure 4 96 LS Dyna Tutorials Figure 4 96 Modify Force rip Page P panel Name FRS Load Set 52 LES Global Scale 500000 Force t Uniform Tatal Apply Dismiss Turn on Mesh gt Lines Also turn on the Load in the Model tree and view as in Figure 4 97 Note the downward force applied to the center of the bars representing the bolt across the flange ET2D2 LS Dyna Tutorials M ee d iE M rac E T E RE 1 d i eU il rr C m ow Cua i a M FE 7 CSS 2 View the shell thickness Turn off Lines Loads and leave on Shells Right mouse select Mesh gt Shells and select S
47. Turn on Curves in the Display tree so that the geometry of the pipe 15 visible Initialize the 2D blocking Select Blocking gt Create CLA Block gt Initialize Blocks KY J and change the type to 2D Planar as shown in Figure 3 39 Enter LIVE in the Part field and Apply Hexa Meshing Figure 3 39 The Create Block Menu Create Block e Part LIVE Create Block EN 1 exa 2 60 ef AP Initialize Blocks Type 20 Flanar Apply ck Cancel Note the white block that encloses the geometry as shown in Figure 3 40 This is the initial block that will be used to create the topology of the model Also note that the curves are now colored separately instead of by Part This is so that the individual curve entities can be distinguished from each other which is necessary for some of the blocking operations This color coding can be turned on off by right mouse selected Curves in the model tree and toggling Show Composite Tutorial Manual Hexa Meshing Figure 3 40 Initial LIVE block Turn on Vertices in the model tree Then right mouse select Vertices gt Numbers The following operations will refer to these numbers d Block Splitting First two vertical splits and then one horizontal split will be made Tutorial Manual Hexa Meshing Select Blocking gt Split Block d Split Block D Note the Split Method is set to Screen Select by default as in Figure
48. on the keyboard to select the points e Creating Bodies The Body of the model will be assigned to the part LIVE This will be the region that lies within the cylinders select Geometry gt Create Body gt Material Point 2 Enter LIVE as the Part Use the Centroid of 2 points option Click on Select locations to choose 2 screen locations in the geometry between which the material point will be created LIVE should then appear inside the model Dynamically rotate the model to ensure that LIVE 15 located within the interior of the volume and not outside To delete empty parts the user can right click on Parts gt Delete Empty Parts from the Display Tree widget The list should then modify itself so that empty parts are no longer included and the messages area states that GEOM has been deleted f Reassigning Mesh Parameters The user will now specify the mesh size on the entire model with Mesh Set Global Mesh Size I General Parameters 42 Figure 3 238 Change the Scale factor to Tetra Meshing 5 and Max element to 64 Click Apply The scale factor is a multiplier for all size specifications applied to parts or individual curves and surfaces The local element size will be equivalent to the local size applied to that entity multiplied by the Scale factor Tetra Meshing Figure 3 238 Assigning Global mesh Global Mesh Size sizes to the entire model Global Hesh Parameters G
49. static Coefficient of 2 Friction LS Dyna Contact Options AUTOMATIC A utorri alc antec GENERAL i B J Lynamic _OBMOent of 3 Frictio 0 1 Apply Dismiss Select the surface mesh selection icon e for Contact surfaces and then select the part 2 selection icon amp from the popup menu Select the part PIN BACK from the list of parts Then select the surface mesh selection icon e for Target surfaces and select the part selection icon from the popup menu Select the part PIN from the list of parts Enter a value of 0 2 for the Static Coefficient of Friction and press Apply Tutorial Manual ANSYS Tutorials f Solver Setup On this model analysis 1s to be performed in Ansys so parameters and variables should be defined accordingly This can be done as follows Setup Ansys Run First the user should select the appropriate solver before proceeding further Select Settings Solver from the main menu and select Ansys from the dropdown arrow Press Apply Selecting the solver is shown in Figure 4 62 Figure 4 62 Solver Setup Solver selection E 2 olver ss Apply Cancel Click on the Solve Options gt Setup Analysis type A 1 button This will bring up the Setup Analysis Type window as shown Figure 4 63 The solver should read as ANSYS Select the Analysis Type as Static Keep all other options as defau
50. 823 Tutorial Manual ANSYS Tutorials Meshing Extrusion of the surface mesh Materials and Element Properties selection of Material Element Properties Subsets Subset Subset2 Constraints and Loads Constraints Loads Solver setup Setup Ansys Run Setting Solver Parameter Save Project Write Ansys Input File Solution and Results Solving the Problem Post processing of results in Visual3p b Geometry Editing Launch AI Environment Select the Open Geometry icon from the main menu and select the file Conrod tin from the AI Tutorial Files working directory Extracting Curves and Points ANSYS Tutorials Click on Geometry Repair Geometry The window shown in Figure 4 16 will appear The Build Diagnostic Topology option is selected by default The default Tolerance of 0 04 will work fine here Make sure that Inherited is toggled ON for New Part Name and press Apply ANSYS Tutorials Figure 4 16 Repair Geometry Repair Geometry e ue V ss window Repair Surface Build Topology Tolerance n 04 Filter by angle Feature angle B Filter points Filter curves New Part Name i nherted Create new Part for new curves Patio nsw points Build Ports Selection Method All parts Pertby part F Single curve Single Edge Tolerance 118 Split surface at e T connactions Splitatinteriar curv
51. Boundary Conditions Edit Parameters Write Input 2 3 6 The Post Processing menu The Post Processing menu controls the viewing of solution results A results file from various CFD and structural formats must first be loaded to make this menu active The functions included in the post processing menu are set Transient Time Variables Define Cut Plane Define Iso Surface Point Probe on Surface Import External Surface Streams Control All Animations Annotation XY or polar 2 4 The Display Control Tree The Display Control Tree also referred to as the Display tree along the lower left side of the screen allows control of the display by part geometric entity element type and user defined subsets The tree 1s organized by categories Each category can be turned on or off by selecting the check box If the check mark is faded some of the sub categories are turned on and some off Each category can be expanded by selecting the symbol to reveal the sub categories Select to collapse the tree Since some functions are performed only on the entities shown the model tree is a very important feature to use when isolating the particular entities to be modified Right mouse selecting a particular category or type will reveal several display and modification options ANSYS ICEMCFD GUI 2 4 1 Geometry Controls display of points curves surfaces and bodies material volumes Subsets can also be created
52. C fs 2 N l o DE D SS SS ix ec inis E p 5 Oo Advanced Meshing Tutorials 24 Determinant 3x3x3 18 Min 0 183 12 b 0 0 01 02 03 OF 05 06 OF 0J 1 As is shown there are many bad determinants in first bar from 0 0 05 This happens because inverted blocks were created while creating the block Select Blocking gt Block Check Select the method Fix inverted Block gt Apply That will change the direction of inverted blocks Again select Blocking gt Pre mesh Quality gt Determinant 2x2x2 stencils In the Mesh window select Yes to recompute the mesh Now the histogram appears as shown in Figure3 346 without bad determinants Figure3 346 Determinants histogram after inverting bad blocks 40 Determinant 3x3x3 aU 20 10 0 Tutorial Manual Advanced Meshing Tutorials p Multiblock mesh For blocking a complicated geometry the user will end up with many splits thereby producing many unnecessary blocks To write a Multiblock mesh output for some solvers it 1s better to have as least amount of blocks possible You can reduce the number of blocks as explained below Figure3 347 Blocking before reduction of number of blocks eS 4 SCHEMAS P lt gt SU m i m Xe cm MN a mcm Ld B 1 wa te
53. CFD Al Environment 10 0 User Manual SAS IP Inc 6 7 6 8 Chapter 7 Solver Options This Menu includes tabs for specifying the Solver Specify the analysis Solution and Post processing Fore more useful information about Solver Options please go to http www berkeley ansys com faq faq_top ic 7 html 7 1 Setup Solver Parameters You can select from the following solvers ANSYS Nastran ABAQUS and LSDyna 7 2 Setup Analysis Type Depending on the selected solver different options are available For the ANSYS solver you can select either Structural or Thermal If Nastran solver is selected then you have the choice of more Analysis types 7 3 Setup Sub Case To apply the load in different steps subcases can be created 7 4 Write View Input file To create and view the input file generated for the solver 7 5 Submit Solver Run Using this option you can solve the input file generated for a particular solver 7 6 Post Process Results Allows you to plot the results 7 7 FEA Solver Support For more useful information on FEA Solvers Support please go to http www berkeley ansys com faq faq_top ic 7 html ANSYS ICEM CFD Al Environment 10 0 User Manual SAS IP Inc ANSYS ICEMCFD 10 0 Tutorial Manual August 2005 Table of Contents 1 95 Introduction to ANSYS ICEMCFD 1 1 The Unified Geometry Concept 1 2 The ANSYS ICEMCFD Geometry Interface 1 3 Meshing Modules 1 4 Mesh Vis
54. Dismiss Press the curve selection icon amp and select the curves CURVES 0 and CURVES 1 with the left mouse button Press the middle mouse button to complete the selection The distance between these two curves that the Tutorial Manual Geometry Creation surface must cross 1s 150 so enter a Tolerance bigger that than such as 200 Enter the Part name CYLI and Name CYLI1 1 Press Apply to create the surface Note Pressing the right mouse button while in selection mode will cancel each previous selection Switch ON the surfaces from the left side Display Tree window To see the names of the surfaces using the right mouse button select Surface gt Show Surface names in the Display Tree window Use the right mouse button to zoom out if needed The newly created surface name would display as CYL1 1 Similarly create the other surfaces as follows entering the part names and names each time CURVES CURVES 4 CURVES 3 CURVES 10 SM CURVES 7 CURVES 7 Press Dismiss to close the window The Geometry after surface creation 1s shown in Figure 3 14 Switch OFF the Curves from the Display Tree window to avoid clutter on the screen Figure 3 14 Geometry after Surface creation Geometry Creation eo NL i cyLi i j QUE Surface Surface Intersection Geometry gt Create Modify Curves gt Surface Surface Intersection Select Surface Surface Intersection Press the surface selec
55. Draw plane normal Draw plane border EM Create mesh subset Apply apply d os Cancel 5 The mesh cut plane using the above parameters is shown in Figure 3 500 Tutorial Manual LLL p te te qo ryt di Vil i AU Cart3D At TURA Eur rp i UE LEM Lr Ti ILLE L1 5 3 500 Cut k Figur Plan d Setup Flow Cart Parameters lt Click on Define Solver params I icon if the panel doesn t open automatically A Solver parameters window appears as shown in Figure 3 501 1 In the Cart3D Menu select Solver Tutorial Manual Figure 3 501 Solver paramete rs window Cart3D Solver parameters File Information Case Information Solver Controls Boundary Conditions Covergence History Partition Information File Information Mesh File ING2 c3d mesh mg Mesh Info File NG2_c3d mesh Info mesh Info Accept Cancel 2 Set File Information Mesh File as WING2 c3d mesh mg should be default 3 Click on Case Information window and enter the following parameters Mach Number 0 84 Angle of Attack 3 06 Side Slip angle 0 0 Free Stream Density 1 0 Free Stream Sound Speed 1 0 The values are shown in Figure 3 502 Tutorial Manual Cart3D Figure Solver parameters 3 502 File Information L ase Information Case Case Information Kach number
56. Finest Cell Dimensions 00 3 D 00737 x 0 00737 Mesh Creation Preview Mesh Only Create and Save Full Mesh Humber of Multi arid levels 3 Juter Bounding Box Minimum Diagonal Point 29 4641 05 30 173471 0 0000 hi aximum Diagonal Point 30 882856 30 1 73490 30 8278 Define Surface Family Refinement Define All Surface Refinement Humber of Buffer Layers 4 Angle Threshold for Refinement Area weight Normals CETE of Cut Planes in 25 dir 3 F Number of Cut Planes in T dir 3 F Mumber of Cut Planes m dir 3 la Mesh Internal Region Apply Dismiss 2 Set the Number of Multi grid levels to 3 This will create 3 levels of coarsened mesh which can be read by the solver Tutorial Manual Cart3D 3 Press Apply The Cart3D Mesh window appears which asks about loading the cart3D Full Mesh as shown in Figure 3 498 Press Yes Figure 3 498 Cart3D Mesh window Do vau want ta load the catal Full Mesh 4 The final mesh generated can be examined through Mesh gt Cutplane The Define Cut Planes window appears as shown Accept the default settings as shown in Figure 3 499 Tutorial Manual Cart3D Define Cut Planes a Define Cut es Active Planes Window Method by Coefficients 0 By 0 Bz D 15 45331331 541504 Fraction Value a Display back plane with hollow
57. Mass Multiplier V TMASS 1 000000 Rotation Stiffness Adjustment nonno KEROT 0 000000 Max ratio 0 Coupled Mass 55 Constrain Singularities AL TUSPCE Grid Weights GRDPNT Loads and Constraints Sets Single Point Constraints SPC Load Set LOAD Temperature Set TEMP Output Requests Displacement DISP Stress STRESS v Strain STRAIN Element Strain Energy ESE Nastran Tutorials Save Project Select Save Project icon from Main Tab Menubar It will save four files Geometry file Mesh file Attribute file and Parameter files as Bar tin Bar uns Bar fbc and Bar par respectively Write Nastran Input File Click on x Write View Input File icon from the Solve Options Tab Menubar Enter the Nastran file name as Bar dat and switch ON View Nastran file option in Write View Input File window as shown in Figure 4 193 and press Apply Figure 4 193 Write View Input al Write View File n Input File EE window Solver NASTRAN Nastran File Bar dat Volume Elements Defined Shell Elements Defined 034 Bar Elements Defined amp Thickness Distribution BCDefined Large Field Format Use Continuation Card View Nastran File Apply ok Dismiss Tutorial Manual Nastran Tutorials User will see that the Nastran input data file comes up in the default text edi
58. Minirmum Diagonal Point 4 999985 d Maximum Diagonal Pomt 115 000015 10 01 SS Define Surface Family Refinement Define All Surface Refinement Number af Buffer Layers 4 Angle Threshold for 20 Refinement Area Weight Normals Number af Cut Planes in dir 3 Humber of Cut Planes in 7 dir 3 Number af Cut Planes in Z dir 3 z Mesh Internal Region Apply Dismiss Tutorial Manual Cart3D This will create 4 density polygons by default for mesh density control These be viewed by enabling Geometry gt Densities in the Display Tree widget This also computes the finest cell size 0 132 x 0 132 x 0 132 Varying the starting Mesh Divisions and or Max Num of Cell Refinements can vary this Right click on Densities and select Delete Density in the Display Tree widget as shown in Figure 3 603 Figure 3 603 Display Tree widget Delete Create Density Modify Density Delete Density Wide Density Lines Density Tetra Sizes Density Color Show Density Hames Show Density Info Blank Densities Rename Density The Delete Density panel opens as shown in Figure 3 604 When in selection mode select all the densities with the hotkey a on the keyboard and press Apply Figure 3 604 Delete Density Window Delete Density Density 55 TM Apply ox Dismiss Tutorial Manual Cart3D l EET From the Cart3D menu select Volume Mesher 9722 In the Cart3D
59. Nastran Tutorials Finally select Exit to quit the post processor Figur e 4 278 Mode shap Tranzlation Total e at 104 023 Hz 104 0 19 67 23 Hz 18 36 17 05 Dou 14 42 13 11 11 80 10 49 3 178 OB 556 245 834 ali 0 0000 7 5 3 2 1 Z Tutorial Manual Nastran Tutorials Tutorial Manual ANSYS ICEMCFD CFX Tutorials 5 ANSYS ICEMCED CFX Tutorials 5 1 Static Mixer 5 1 1 Overview This tutorial covers geometry creation and meshing for a simple static mixer using ANSYS Workbench DesignModeler and Advance meshing CFX It is intended to be compatible with CFX 5 Tutorial 1 Flow in a Static Mixer This tutorial would effectively replace the section entitled Creating the Model in CFX Build After completing this tutorial the user could complete the remaining as sections of the CFX 5 Static Mixer tutorial picking up with Defining the Simulation in CFX Pre Figure 5 1 Static Mixer Geometry Tutorial Manual ANSYS ICEMCFD CFX Tutorials a Steps Involved in this Example e Creating Geometry in DesignModeler e Automatically generating a tetrahedral mesh in Advance meshing e Writing input mesh file for CFX 5 b Starting a New Project Launch the ANSYS Workbench ANSYS Workbench window will appear then select Geometry tab Figure 5 2 Selection window Start m Mew Geometry Simulation Advanced Meshing Finite Element Madel
60. Nastran Tutorials ud Repair Geometry Tiree lj Build Topology Tolerance 0 04 Filter by angle Feature angle 30 Filter points Filter curves Hew Part Name nherited C Create new Part far new Part Far new points Build Topo Parts Selection Method l parts Part by part Single curve cleanup Single Edge Tolerance 0 08 Split surface at M cannectians Split at interior curves Join edge curves Delete unattached curves and points Sool Dismjzs Nastran Tutorials Now the geometry appears as shown in Figure 4 241 Figure 4 241 Geomet ry after Build Topolo gy d Mesh Parameters and Meshing Even though this will be a 3D model right now it is only 2D geometry so mesh size should be given on curves Once the surface mesh is ready then it should be extruded to get the volume mesh This can be done as follows Mesh Sizing t Select Set Curve Mesh Size icon from Mesh Tab Menubar which pops up Curve Mesh Size window as shown in Figure 4 242 Click on amp Selecr Curve s button and select all the curves by pressing a ensure that the mouse cursor is in display window and enter Maximum element Size of 1 for this case and press Apply Nastran Tutorials Figure 4 242 2 Curve Mesh Size i MeshSize window Curve Mesh Parameters Method General Select Cu
61. Now select the Split method as Screen select Press the edge selection icon and select any of the horizontal edges to Tutorial Manual Hexa Meshing create a vertical split If Settings gt Selection gt Auto pick mode is OFF press Apply and it will ask for a location on the screen to split through Select on a curve or edge on any location that is vertically in line with the right side of the blade If Auto pick mode is ON you should left mouse click on the edge and hold the button while dragging the split to where you want it Press the middle mouse button to complete the split operation Then use the same method to create another vertical split on the left side of the blade These two splits should show as in Figure 3 146 Hexa Meshing Figure 3 146 Horizontal splits on blade sides Tutorial Manual Hexa Meshing Note Every time a block Split is performed the Index control is updated After the splits are complete the new range of the K index will be from 0 6 Collapsing Blocks to Display the Blade In this section the Collapse feature is introduced to create degenerate blocks for the blade For clarity in these operations right mouse click in the Display tree on Blocking gt Index Control Change the Index control for the I dimension so that the Min is 2 and the Max is 3 Turn OFF the Points from the Display window The restricted topology consists of four blocks where the two center b
62. Total Force is applied on the curve as shown in Figure 6 1 Elements on Curve Where L1 is the length of Element 1 0 and 1 are the node number connecting Element 1 Figure 6 1 Elements on Curve L1 L2 L3 L4 Then the force distribution on Linear elements as per the FEA concept is shown in Figure 6 2 Force Distribution as per the FEA concepts ANSYS ICEM CFD Al Environment 10 0 User Manual SAS IP Inc Chapter 6 Loads Figure 6 2 Force Distribution as per the FEA concepts 0 5 FI Ll LT O0 SFI LlLT L1 0 1 O FT L2ILT 0 5 FT L2ILT oe e 1 L 2 0 5 FT L3ILT O 5 FT L3ILT o L3 9 3 O S FI LAILT OSY FT L4 LT 9 L4 The formulation for Linear Element is as follow Points 0 FO 0 5 FT L1 LT Points 1 F1 0 5 FT L1 LT 0 5 FT L2 LT Points 2 F2 0 5 FT L2 LT 0 5 FT L3 LT Points 3 F3 0 5 FT L3 LT 0 5 FT L4 LT Points 4 F4 0 5 FT L4 LT The general formula is as follow Fi Sum FT L attached element LT 1 number of nodes per element 6 2 ANSYS ICEM CFD Al Environment 10 0 User Manual SAS IP Inc If we sum up FO F1 F2 F3 F4 then the resultant comes to be FT It also satisfies the FEA concepts Now if we want to apply the same force on the Quadratic Element as shown in Figure 6 3 Quadratic Element Nodes position Figure 6 3 Quadratic Element Nodes position mi 1 m2 m3
63. Tutorial Manual Figure 3 327 Advanced Meshing Tutorials similarly select any of the remaining Z direction edge and split this edge by Prescribed point POINTS 8 Then switch off Points to view the blocking shown in Figure 3 327 Blocking after splitting ZL 7 a 1 2 Ny C 757 run E gt 7 ON ETIN l eee gt lt Bm EX aum vn a To model the region we first need to split some blocks Use the Blocking gt Index control gt Select Corner Select the vertices to restrict the display to blocks as displayed in solid in Figure 3 330 You will need to readjust the index control so that the ranges are 0 1 J 1 1 K 2 3 O3 0 0 O4 0 0 O5 0 1 O6 0 1 O7 0 1 and 8 0 1 But if there 15 a discrepancy it can also be set by checking the Figure 3 328 Edge Selected Advanced Meshing Tutorials edges using Query Edges and then readjusting the Index Control Blocking gt Split Block ti gt Split Block s V Switch on Points gt Show Point Names Select one of the circumferential edges on the right block as shown in Figure 3 328 Advanced Meshing Tutorials Select POINTS 15 as shown in Figure 3 329 Figure 3 329 POINTS 15 selected Split Block ct Block Select All Visible C Sel
64. W pdauns File name pda uns Files of type Mesh Files Cancel Go to Define Properties in Table Tutorial Manual LS Dyna Tutorials e From the Properties tab click on Create Table to open the Define Table window as presented in Figure 4 120 Figure 4 120 Define Table e Define Table window Mame TABLE ID T able Type anlinear Edi Table Apply ok Cancel e Enter the Name as TABLE and ID as 1 Both will come by default Inthe Table Type window select Nonlinear e Click on Edit Table and enter the data shown in Figure 4 121 Delete the extra rows using Delete Row s e Press Accept in the Table Editor window to close it and press Apply in the Define Table window to save the table editor information Note It will make entry of Tablel in the display tree under Tables tree User can expand Tables tree and verify it LS Dyna Tutorials Figure 4 121 Table Editor window Accept Cancel Graph Load from File Delete Strain Stress c Material and Element Properties After creating Table the material and element properties should be defined for the model The table will be used for creating Non linear properties Selection of Material From the Properties tab select Create Material Property e Define the Material Name as in the Define Material Property window shown in Figure 4 122 e Material ID can be left
65. 0 16 gt Dexit 1189424 Dinter Dexit Dexit 278127 Conservation of mass inlet Area inlet V inlet pexit ATeaexit V exit gt M exit 1 435448 A change in the EXIT boundary condition needs to be incorporated Expand Boundary Conditions gt Surface Name EXIT Surface family EXIT Density 0 278127 X Velocity 1 435448 Pressure 0 1189424 Select Accept from the Solver parameters window and run the solver as before Mach number results from sliceplanes dom for the Supersonic Flow case are shown in Figure 3 618 Figure wack 3 618 oe Superso 1 648 nic Flow 1 431 1 323 Mach 1 215 Number 123025 0 8895 0 7811 0 6727 0 5643 0 4560 0 3476 0 2392 Tutorial Manual Cart3D Pressure results in surface results dom for the Supersonic Flow case are shown in Figure 3 619 Figure 3 619 Super Sonic Flow Pressu re Pressure 7145 B 48 B349 5951 5553 6154 4756 435 3959 3560 3lB52 2763 22355 1967 1558 1170 man Tutorial Manual Output to Solvers 3 8 Output to Solvers Now that the user has generated several meshes for the 3D Pipe Junction he she can write these meshes for input to any of the supported solvers This section will provide two options for solvers one for unstructured domains STAR CD and another for structured domains CFX TASCflow Figu
66. 2 24 2 043 2 361 2 179 1 338 1 815 1 534 1 453 1 271 1 090 0 5060 0 7264 0 5446 0 3532 0 1816 0 000 Cart3D Tutorial Manual Cart3D 3 7 5 Business Jet Overview This tutorial illustrates how to generate grid in Cart3D around a business Jet with multiple components The flow problem 15 solved in flowCart and the results are examined This tutorial introduces the following operations Compute force and moment information using Clic Visualize the results a Starting the Project Load ANSYS CFD Change the working directory by File gt Change Working Dir and set the location to the folder bjet bjet uns 15 located in that folder Note It 16 preferable to create a separate folder bjet and put only bjet uns domain file in that folder before performing this tutorial Tutorial Manual Cart3D Select Open Mesh eB from the main menu and select bjet uns The model contains several components defining a business jet Press h key to fit the view in the screen if the model is not visible b Mesh Generation Preview only Click on Cart3D from the main menu Select the Volume Mesher button ii We get the Cart3D Mesher window as shown in Figure 3 547 at x Figure 3 547 Fie Ed View ierg Wieden Hai au n gt 10 ish Edi ete Praeter Corturi Loads Sae siora Pas
67. 5 2 Static Mixer 2 Refined Mesh 1163 5 2 1 Overview 1163 5 3 Blunt Body 1177 5 3 1 Overview 1177 5 4 Heating Coil 1200 5 4 1 Overview 1200 The ANSYS ICEMCFD Projects Each project represents a directory within the ACN docu CFDHelp CFD Tutorial Files directory Since some of the projects are used as examples in multiple meshing modules this directory may contain several files A particular project directory can contain one or more of the following files prj Project settings tn Tetin geometry uns Unstructured mesh domain Multiblock structured hexahedral meshes bik Block topology fbc Boundary conditions for solver output atr Attributes for solver output par Parameters for solver output rpl Replay script jrf Journal echo file These extensions are preceded typically with the project name e g projectl tin 15 the tetin geometry file associated with project Most of the tutorials will already have a tetin file called geometry tin the project has yet to be created Some of the tutorials will begin with a 314 party geometry e g geometry stl stereolithography triangulated surface data which is then saved to the tin format The Tutorial Examples It is recommended that for each chapter the tutorials be done in sequence Commands in succeeding tutorials may be referred to or explained in a previous tutorial Please read through the intro
68. 90 0000 Circlel Dl 5 XYPlane Dz BB X 8 Circlez DIStance MBOX X 5 Circlez Y x 8 Circlel X z HB X X 3 Circlel Y BB X X 3 BOX_ X 2 Extrudel FDl BB X X 3 Design Parameters Parameter Dimensian Assignments Check Close Now select Generate to make changes in the geometry The Geometry after making changes is as shown in Figure 3 458 Tutorial Manual Advanced Meshing Tutorials Figure 3 458 Geometry after modifying dimensions p Updating blocking in Advance meshing Now user will update blocking for changes made in original geometry To open modified geometry in Advance meshing select File gt Geometry gt Update Geometry gt Replace Geometry as shown in Figure It will ask for saving the changes in geometry select Yes to make changes Figure Geometry d Open Geometry 3 459 Mesh Update Geometry Replace Geometry Updating Blocking d Save Geometry Menge Geometry geometry Attributes d Save Geometry As in Advance Parameters Save Visible Geometry As Meshing Results d save Geometry As Version 4 File Close Geometry Import Geometry Import Mesh Export Geometry Export Mesh b F F F Replay Scripts Tutorial Manual Advanced Meshing Tutorials It will open the modified geometry file and merge with the original blocking file as shown in Figure 3 460 Figure 3 460 Modified geometry merged with original blocking
69. CERTI AUR a 1 1 i FREIER HI ere wa M NE ww NUES es bn ees me 1 m D J b 1 Now user will update the projection of original blocking onto modified geometry in order to capture modified changes 2 Select Blocking gt Associate qi Update Association 4 it will open the window as shown in Figure 3 461 After updating the blocking new blocking will look like as shown in Figure 3 462 Tutorial Manual Advanced Meshing Tutorials Figure 3 461 Blocking a Update association window Associations Edit Associations ow V exo Update Associations Vertices Edges Faces Update Blocking Apply ok Cancel 4 Tutorial Manual Advanced Meshing Tutorials Figure 3 462 Blocking after updating associations q Saving the Project Now user will save project Select File gt Save project as and enter name as Parametric90 Tutorial Manual Cart3D 3 7 Cart3D The main menu contains project and file related options and some settings options The main menu 15 shown in Figure 3 463 Figu Geometry Mesh Blocking Edit Mesh Properties Constraints Loads Solve Options Cart3D Output Post processing re O san 42 3 46 3 Main Men u The main menu has the following options 1 V
70. Dimensions Window Draw Modify Dimensions General Horizontal 1 vertical e Length Distance os Radius c Diameter AA Angle Semi Automatic Fat E mm Edit ove H Animate Display Constraints Settings Select general as default option Take the cursor on to the screen move on to the edge on which you want to apply the dimensions Apply the dimensions according to the figures shown Figure 5 8 Tutorial Manual ANSYS ICEMCFD CFX Tutorials Figure 5 8 General Deimesions graphics window After giving the general dimensions In the left lower corner there is a window called detailed view enter the values as given in Figure 5 9 Tutorial Manual Figure 5 9 Exact Dimensions window ANSYS ICEMCFD CFX Tutorials Details of Sketchi gt Sketch Sketch Show Constraints El Dimensions 5 Hi mm H4 mm We zl mm 40 mm Wo 10 mm Edges Line Line Line Lines Line Lines Line Linel Line Line11 Line Line iz After giving the exact dimensions Click on Revolve in the 3D features toolbar This will ask for details in the detail views window at the left bottom side of the screen Enter the details as per theFigure 5 10 Click on the Axis and select the axis as XY plane from the screen and press Apply Figure 5 10 Revolve detail window Details of Revolye Revolve Revolve Base Object Sketch Axis Selected Operat
71. Figure 4 154 Curves with Node Spacing ON Now de select Curves gt Curves Node Spacing under the the Model Tree Meshing Select the Mesh Shell Patched Based icon from Mesh Tab Menu bar By default patch based surface meshing is in Quad dominant mode Select the option From Surfaces Y N O vum WEE UR VON UR Tutorial Manual Nastran Tutorials Enable Respect Line element and press Apply with default settings as shown in Figure 4 155 Note If Surfaces are not selected then it considers all the Surfaces Tutorial Manual Nastran Tutorials Figure 4 155 Mesh Surface Mesh Surface a window ORE 969 Mesh type Quad Dominant Hesh boundaries Method Fram surfaces Surfaces v Project ta surfaces Respect line elements Remove old elements Use surface sizes Simple offset lgnare size 0 Clean level 1 4l Smooth boundaries Mapping bz 8 Adjust nodes limit deviation Try harder i ne y Apply ck Dismiss Tutorial Manual Nastran Tutorials Turn off Geometry branch in the Model Tree In the Model Tree expand the Mesh branch of the tree by clicking on the Click the right mouse button on Shells and select Solid amp Wire the mesh appears as shown in Figure 4 156 Figure 4 156 Mesh in Solid amp Wire Frame mode
72. In the Surfaces display options Continuous contour and Edge with single color will be ON by default Switch OFF the Continuous contours for the surfaces beginning with SYM OUTER OUT and ORFN From the Post processing Tab menu bar select Variables icon Select Mach number from the Scalar Variable dropped down menu of the Result Variables window Post Processing Tutorials The display would be as shown in Figure 3 664 Figure 3 664 Surfaces SYM OUTER and OUT with no solid contours number 2 4944 2 608 2 42 2 236 2 050 1 863 1 677 1 491 1 305 1 119 0 9333 0 7472 0 5612 0 3751 0 1891 0 003038 Select the Streams icon from the post processing tab menu This would bring out the Set Seeds window as shown in Figure 3 665 In the Current Selected Surfaces box the name of the currently highlighted surface in the model tree will appear Tutorial Manual Post Processing Tutorials This surface will be the source of new streamline seeds If this is not desired name click on the picker and select from the main display You can also type the name you want in the box Select OUT surface for this tutorial Figure 3 665 Streams Manager Set seeds for al streams Detne seeds ___ __ seeds E Current Selected Surfaces Selected Surfaces OUT Selected Surface s Modes 4 Centroids Exclude edge nodes Tracking Direction Both Down Number of seeds searching
73. S E Jc E a Ci Oh C C ER EIE E IAN Sa 2 e EMI Ba D E NDA m D m e c 3 2 t LLI en s To 2 5 Ham N 3 Qo e 7 er 0 N Q gt gt 500 EN Eo 0 5 O o en DLE INYO 5 090 Nastran Tutorials Click on eb Displacement on Subset icon from the Constraints Tab Menubar which pops up Create Displacement on Subset window given in Figure 4 253 In this window enter Name as CNST1 and toggle ON options UX UY and UZ of Directional Displacement Click on Select Subset button and select Subset1 for subsets as shown in Figure 4 253 and press Apply Turn Displacement display from Model Tree m ee Tutorial Manual Nastran Tutorials Figure 4 253 Create Displacement G Create on Subset a Displacement on Subset Mame ENST window SPC Set LCS Global SPC Constraint Only Subsets Subset 63 Directional Displacement v uy o uz oa Rotational Displacement ROTH 0 ROTY 0 nor Apply Dismiss Loads Tutorial Manual Nastran Tutorials Click on Pressure Subset from Loads Tab Menubar which will up Place Pressure on Subsets window
74. Save Full Result Run Grid Sequencing Level i Restart computation Save Cut planes result A Slices Y Slices og 0 0 Slices Runusercommand Command 7 Apply Cancel The user can view the convergence by clicking on the Convergence Monitor to view the plot as shown in Figure 3 594 The monitor may open automatically Tutorial Manual Cart3D Figure Solution Convergence 3 594 1 4 Solution Convergen ce Window 1E3 1E2 1E1 1 0 1 2 Iteratianz Done Print Set range Full range log flag Symbols v Lines gid Y grid f Visualization of Results Go to File gt Results gt Open Results The Select Result Format window opens as shown in Figure 3 595 Select as the Format Tutorial Manual Cart3D Figure 3 595 Select Result d Window mum DataSet Format ICEMCFD m Select Result Format File Structured Grid Unsteady Grid Transient cases only Apply ok Cancel Select the file slicePlanes dom from the Critical run as shown in Figure 3 596 and press Open Cart3D Figure File selection 3 596 Look in pitat File Selection fe Recent Documents Desktop check 00200 PITOT_c3d i tri cutPlanes dat PITOT_c3d i triq density _boxes tin PITOT c3d input art cnt
75. Select Blocking gt Associate gt Associate Vertex and you should see the window as shown in Figure 3 208 Make sure the Entity type to associate to its Point Select the vertex 129 Then select the point POINTS 19 Press Apply This will assign the association and move the vertex to the point all in the same step Tutorial Manual Hexa Meshing Figure 3 208 Blocking Associate vertex to entity Associations window Edit Associations Bee Associate Vertex gt Entity C Self Point C Curve Surface Vertex 28 POINTS 19 4 a Apply Dismiss Similarly place other vertices to the corresponding points as shown in Figure 3 209 Tutorial Manual Figure 3 209 Projectin g the vertices to points Figure 3 210 Displa y Proj Type Hexa Meshing Make sure all the Vertices the Fuselage and Wings are properly associated to a point To view this Switch off Points and Switch on Vertices Pro Type in the Display Tree Then turn ON Vertices You should see a p next to each point associated vertex as shown in Figure 3 210 y stands for a volume vertex while a c means a curve vertex and an s stands for a surface associated vertex Tutorial Manual Hexa Meshing To align the volume vertices near the wing tip select Blocking gt Move Vertex 7 gt Set Location Xf You should see the window shown in Figure 3 211
76. Since the mesh is very similar in the Z direction a 2D blocking can first be made which is easier than a 3D blocking Then the 2D blocking can be extruded into a 3D blocking a Summary of Steps The Blocking Strategy Starting the Project in ICEM CFD Generating the 2 D Blocking Y N ee ERO UN Tutorial Manual Advanced Meshing Tutorials Creating the O grid Resolving other grids Creating remaining Blocks Step involved achieving Complete Blocking Placing all nodes to one plane 3 D Blocking Resolving zero thickness walls Defining Periodicity Generating the Mesh Checking the Mesh Quality Multiblock mesh Saving the files b The Blocking Strategy Since the geometry is mostly an extruded model in the Z direction the blocking can also easily be done by extruding a 2D blocking in the Z direction to create a 3D blocking Generally the blocking process starts by capturing the outer geometry and then proceeds to capture the minor parts of geometry by means of splitting the blocks This is the top down approach But in this example the strategy is exactly the opposite of the standard strategy First the minor geometry will be captured Then Transform Copy Merge Blocks will be employed to get a wider repetitive portion and then create block will be used to capture the rest This is known as the bottom up approach c Starting the Project in ANSYS ICEMCFD Start ANSYS ICEMCFD Go to Fil
77. This will bring up a file selection window to select an existing boundary condition file We should not pick the existing file since that is for STARCD Press Cancel there This will bring up the Family boundary conditions window From the Family boundary conditions window select Surfaces gt Mixed unknown gt OUT gt Create new This will open up a window to Tutorial Manual Output to Solvers choose Figure 3 630 Double click Regions and Sub regions under Flux domains and Sub regions Figure 3 630 Creating a region on the OUT family Select a BC type Regions and Subregions Flus domains and Sub regions Additional Blacked aff Flus Elements Regions and Subregions Okay Cancel Name this region OUTLET as shown in Figure 3 631 Tutorial Manual Output to Solvers Figur Family boundary conditions 7 631 Volumes Regions and Subregions Surfaces Mame One sided 2 z OUT Delete Copy Create new Paste Flux domains and Sub Regions and Subre Two sided 7 Mixed unknown Edges Nodes Mixed unknown iii Accept Cancel The user may continue on to define other regions or flux domains of the 3D pipe Tutorial Manual Output to Solvers When the user has finished defining the desired regions press Accept from the Family boundary conditions window Select File gt Save Project Finally choose
78. Through this window browse the directories and select the pp cas file with the square button towards right side of the Cas file option similarly read pp dat as the data file for Dat file Finally press Apply from Fluent files window This will load the fluent case in the main window Post Processing Tutorials Figure 3 635 Reading Fluent Case and Data file siiis Add i i Format Fluent Cas File lisual3 Pipe_Network pp cas Dat File lisual3 Pipe_Network pp dat gt Apply Dismiss The boundary names Family names are read in by ANSYS ICEMCFD for easy post processing These names are organized in the model tree of the data set Figure 3 636 Tutorial Manual Post Processing Tutorials Figure 3 636 Model Surface Manager Dataset under Display Tree Colormap Multeviews SUMTaces Am Dyn amic Surface inlet d Visualization of Surface Grid and Solid Contours For post processing the display controls are provided for individual surfaces User can access those options from the entry to the surfaces in the Display Tree widget To access these options user has to click right hand mouse button after selecting the Surface from the tree To do changes globally user has to select Surfaces in the tree and click the right mouse button on it The different options to control the display of the result variable are shown in Figure 3
79. W Staged caefficent 0 5060 Eval Gradient 0 Stages coefficent 1 0 Eyal Gradient o Accept Cancel In Other controls specify the following values for the parameters as shown in Figure 3 485 CFL number 1 4 Limiter Type Ventat s limiter Flux function van Leer Cut Cell BCtype Agglomerated Normals Number of Multi Grid levels 3 MultiGrid cycle type W cycle Number of pre smoothing passes 1 Number of post smoothing passes 1 Tutorial Manual Cart3D Figure 3 485 File Information Other controls Case Information CFL number 1 4 Other Solver Controle N contr Hunge Kutta Scheme Limiter Type ols Other controls Limiter Boundary Conditions windo L overgence History MINMOD W Partition Infarmatian Yentat s limiter Flus Function yan Leer Colella 1998 Cut Cell Agglomerated Normals C SubCell Resolution Humber of Multi Grid levels 3 Multigrid cycletype Vecucle Weepcle Number of pre smaathing passes 1 Number of post smoothing passes Accept Cancel Keep defaults for Boundary Conditions Convergence History and Partition Information and press Accept e Running the FlowCart Solver Select Solver gt Run Solver refer to Figure 3 486 Specify Max Number of Cycles 150 Turn on Save Full Hex Result Tutorial Manual Cart3D Turn on Save Cut planes result and specify Z Slices as
80. You ll see the name Subset0 appear under Mesh gt Subsets the Model Tree Figure 4 25 Create Subset Create subset eee 2 window Subset Subset Create Subset RRA qz Create Subset by Selection Entities X Apphy Dismiss Manual Figure 4 26 Element S selection by polygon and elements selected for SubsetO ANSYS Tutorials Ha Sd c Rot VILLE 96226816520 5 e RISA EER KSA HH ae ou a 85 ap 895520025524 mr HH aan TESS 257 4 292004 Hd 2 TOOTH RRS j FT ANSYS Tutorials jn TER d E THAR t iat EE 1 l7 Fi E EIL 1 Subset1 In the Model Tree right mouse click again on Subsets Create Enter the name Subset1 this time Use polygon selection again but this time select around the small hole which 15 the Piston end as shown in Figure 4 27 Press Apply to create Subsetl Tutorial Manual ANSYS Tutorials Figure 4 27 Elements selected for Subset1 f Cylindrical Coordinate System In order to fix translations radially around the crankshaft hole we ll need to create a local cylindrical coordinate system But we ll first need to create points at the center of the large hole Y Press Geometry Create point
81. geometry based hexahedral meshes Now in the latest version of Hexa it is also possible to generate 3D surface meshes with the same speed and flexibility e CAD and projection based hexahedral mesh generation Easy manipulation of the 3D object based topology model e Modern GUI and software architecture with the latest hexahedral mesh technology Extensive solver interface library with over 100 different supported interfaces Automatic O grid generation and O grid re scaling Geometry based mesh size and boundary condition definition Mesh refinement to provide adequate mesh size in areas of high or low gradients Smoothing relaxation algorithms to quickly yield quality meshes Generation of multi block structured unstructured and super domain meshes Ability to specify periodic definitions Extensive replay functionality with no user interaction for parametric studies Extensive selection of mesh bunching laws including the ability to graphically add delete modify control points defining the graph of the mesh bunching functions Link bunching relationships between block edges to automate bunching task Topology operations such as translate rotate mirror and scaling to simplify generation of the topology model Automatic conversion of 3D volume block topology to 3D surface mesh topology e Automatic conversion of 2D block topology to 3D block topology Block face extrusion to create extended 3D block topology
82. geometry when prompted In car mod tin the trunk or deck lid has been extended rearward the rear windshield backlight angle has been changed and the windshield has been moved slightly rearward Since the replay file will act on the prescribed points which have been moved but carry the same name all of those operations performed with respect to prescribed points will be valid Display the Curves and zoom in so the box representing the wind tunnel fills the window Figure 3 91 Notice the differences in the geometry from the car base subproject Figure 3 92 Final Mesh W iW m A A k LA Hu Hexa Meshing Select File gt Replay Script gt Replay Control The Replay control window will show all the commands you previously saved in the subproject car base If a new session you would have to select Load from the Replay control window and select the saved replay file rpl In the Replay control window scroll all the way to the top and highlight line no 1 Select Do all Turn on Pre Mesh and recompute Figure 3 92 LT e EE MT FEET E I rast Lr Ed a i TRUE a e T rity CE 142411111 e mL A ES a Lr nae HE This mesh will have been generated using exactly the same parameters as the first so the
83. gt Create Block x gt 2D to 3D For the method select Translate A window will appear as shown in Figure 3 324 Enter the value 5 and press Apply Figure 3 324 Extrusion Window Create Block Fart LIVE Create Block Method Translate m Distance 0 Y Distance 0 Distance 5 Apply ck Dismiss Switch off Vertices and Points The extruded 3 D blocking is shown in Figure 3 325 Tutorial Manual Advanced Meshing Tutorials Figure 3 325 3D Blocking after Extrusion RUM Uf E V 4 TEF amas 5 um qum rum SNNT T M X B p up un NE i sl A nes TE Panra k Getting other regions Resolved Go to Blocking gt Split Block D gt Split Block WY Switch on Point gt Show Point Names Now select Prescribed point Click on Screen select and accept POINTS 16 using the left mouse button and press the middle mouse button to accept the selection as shown in Advanced Meshing Tutorials Figure 3 326 Select an edge representing the Z direction with the left mouse button and Press Apply Figure 3 326 Split block window Split Block a ff di d e Split Block Block Select Al Visible Selected Black aS Edge S Project vertices Split Method Split Method Prescribed point Point POINTS 16 At Apply ok Dismiss
84. on Point window Nastran Tutorials Create Displacement rl on Point Mame ENSTI sPESe ov LES Globa 002204 SPC Type Constraint Ony Points uns set 0 4 Directional Displacement l Us 0 I uv 0 I uz 0 Rotational Displacement lw ROTH 0 ROTY 0 ROTZ 0 Apply ck Dismiss Tutorial Manual Nastran Tutorials Figure 4 227 Constraint on Point Loads 4 Click on Force on Point icon from Loads Tab Menubar which will pop up Place Force on Point window as shown in Figure 4 228 In this window enter Name as FORCE and select the two center points of the bolt connections on PART 1003 as shown in Figure 4 229 and enter a value of 100 for FZ and press Apply Tutorial Manual Nastran Tutorials Figure 4 228 Force on Place Force on Point amp Point window Name FORCE Load Set Poirits uns sel 0 x LCS Global Scale 1 0 Force Uniform Tutorial Manual Nastran Tutorials TTA E E un E IDEM A d TOR E Aue 1 AEN AE zu ON ORNA NON ders Ait AUER SRY ioa M ar NEN n ra p Pour NI ES un Dill c T etr PETERE miu LED me VS EAT n Ns ZAMORA eee 20 RACE AR Oden ar VA aml apply FZ han
85. parameters and variables should be defined accordingly This can be done as follows Setup Nastran Run First user should select the appropriate solver before proceeding further Select Settings gt Solver from Main menu Top left and select appropriate solver and select Nastran press Apply Selecting a solver 1s shown in Figure 4 191 Tutorial Manual Nastran Tutorials Figure 4 191 Solver Setup v window 5 Solver NASTRAN Sets Default Apply o Cancel Click on Setup Analysis Type icon from Solve Options Tab Menubar to setup Nastran run which pops up Setup Analysis Type window as shown Figure 4 192 In the Setup Analysis Type window do the following Select Run Type as Linear Static Sol 101 Make sure that Constrain Singularities AUTOSPC and Grid Weights GRDPNT are turned ON For the Default Sets select Single Point Constraints SPC and Load Set LOAD as In the Output Requests toggle ON Displacement DISP Stress STRESS and Element Strain Energy ESE In the end press Apply to complete the setup Figure 4 192 Setup Analysis Type window Solver NASTRAN Nastran Tutorials Setup Analysis Type Executive amp Case Control Cards Hun Linear Static Sol 107 Executive Control Cards Hun Time TIME 99999 Output Lines 3355 Write Input Lines ECHO NONE Parameters PARAH
86. surfaces ANSYS ICEMCFD GUI 2 ANSYS ICEMCFD GUI ANSYS ICEMCFD s unified graphical user interface also known as AI Environment offers a complete environment to create and edit your computational grids The AI Environment GUI includes the following Main menu Function Tabs Utility icons Data Entry Zone Display Control Tree Graphics Window Message Window Histogram Quality Display Window Selection Toolbar Figure 2 1 The ICEM CFDMesh Editor ANSYS ICEMCFD GUI Function Taba Selection Toolbar Display Control Tree QU eek eet m Ads 2 1 Main Menu Many of the following menu items are accessible as icons in the upper left hand corner File The File menu is used to create new or open existing projects loading and saving files importing and exporting geometries and initialize scripting Edit This menu contains Undo Redo the option to open a shell window and various internal mesh geometry conversion commands View Contains various options for the standard view controls and annotations Info This menu allows the user to get various information regarding geometry mesh and individual entities Settings Tutorial Manual ANSYS ICEMCFD GUI Contains default settings for performance graphics and other settings most likely to be used more than 90 of the time by a specific user Help Contains links to reference material tutorials user s guide and
87. will open the window as shown in Figure 3 430 Turn ON the vertices number from Blocking gt Vertices gt Number from Display Tree widget SS Tutorial Manual Advanced Meshing Tutorials Figure 3 430 Split block window Split Block Block 5elect All Visible Selected ES Block d Edge Project vertices Split Method Split Method Screen select Apply ok Dismiss Select Split method as Screen select and select 26 42 and make a split at the location as shown in split it edge as shown in Figure 3 431 Tutorial Manual Advanced Meshing Tutorials Figure 3 431 Locations Paint where edge eb 4e where 26 42 is split edge to be splitted After splitting the edge geometry will look like as shown in Figure 3 432 Figure 3 432 Geometry after splitting the 26 42 edges Creation of first O grid To capturing the first hole user will create O grid and defines the corresponding block to Vorfn family Tutorial Manual Advanced Meshing Tutorials Select Blocking gt Split block open the window as shown in Figure 3 433 Figure 3 433 y O grid block window split Block Split Block grid Block Select Black s Select Face s Select Edges Select Vert s Clear Selected Around block s Offset 1 Ab
88. y axis spanwise v Save Full Hex Result Run Grid Sequencing Level n 8 Restart computation Check point ile P fad Save Cut planes result Slices 50100200300 lt Y Siees 0 Z Sices 0 E Hun user command Command Apply ck Dismiss Click Apply and run the solver The user can view the convergence by clicking on the Convergence Monitor icon and the window pops up as shown in Figure 3 542 The monitor may open automatically Tutorial Manual Cart3D Figure 3 542 E onverg x Sol utio n i Axial Force Convergenc Normal Force e Win dow Max FResidual L1 Resid al 10 20 30 Iterations Done Print Set range Full range Xlog Y log v Symbols V Lines v M Y arid p Computing Force and Moments 1 In the Cart3D main menu select Integrate Cp The Post Process solution window appears as shown in Figure 3 543 Tutorial Manual Cart3D Figure 3 943 Post Process E Post Process Solution Solution Window L art3D Result file MISSILE_c3dii triq gt Clie Output Directory Profiles E Reference parameters Family Params All Params Model Model y axis Model axis EE Cp Distribution Apply ok Cancel Click All Params icon in the Post Process Solution window In the Reference All Params window specify Reference Area 314 148 and Reference Length 350 0 Ena
89. 0 000 with Steps Cycles Poo xl Speed ms n Animate dynamic surfaces Animate views Rotate about line Angle degree 360 0 01 Center 0 Animate deformation Lindeformed shape Smooth back cycle Amplifier 0 031377 Animate modal Undeforned shape Steps per cycle 2n Amplifier Tutorial Manual ANSYS Tutorials Figure 4 87 Animated model of Total Translati Load 13 on 355 352 357 352 348 343 339 334 330 325 321 315 311 307 302 298 Mi 1 O3 Ga C 1 CO Gam s oL Finally select Exit to quit the post processor D Saving the project In the save the project with File gt Save Project and close with File gt Close Project Tutorial Manual 915 Tutorial Manual 4 2 LS Dyna Tutorial 4 2 1 Frame Quasi Static Analysis The main objective of this tutorial is to demonstrate legacy conversion from a Nastran model to an LS Dyna model It highlights the ease of use of AI Environment in translating a model from one solver to another by one simple command A Nastran linear static analysis data file 1s provided as input and converted to LS Dyna Material properties for the shell elements are converted to nonlinear by using LS Dyna material type 24 MAT PIECEWISE LINEAR PLASTICITY The stress strain curve for steel mild steel 1010 grade is used for
90. 0 001 0 297 0 653 0 965 1 187 1 3336 and 1 410 Click Apply to run the solver Figure 3 486 Bun Solver Solver E window Lart3D solver Max Number of Cycles 4 Ma ful multigrid y axis spanwise v Save Full Hex Result Grid Sequencing Level 1 Restart computation Check point file PO Eases Save Cut planes result A Slices Y Slices ERI Z Slices 0 001 0 297 0 653 0 965 1 187 1 3336 1 410 Run user command Command Em Apply ox Dismiss Tutorial Manual Cart3D The user can view the convergence by selecting the Convergence monitor icon as shown in Figure 3 487 The monitor may open automatically Figure Solution Convergenc 3 487 1E4 Solution Convergen ce Window 1E3 1E2 1E1 1 1E 1 1E 2 3 10 15 Iterationz Done Print Set range Full range Slog Iv r log Symbols Lines orid t ard Tutorial Manual Cart3D f Computing Force and Moments E In the Cart3D main menu select Integrate Cp The Post Process solution window appears as shown in Figure 3 488 Figure 3 488 Post Process Gal Post Process Solution Solution window Catb Result file WINGI c3d itria Laur Clic Output Directory Profiles gt Reference parameters Family All Params Model x axis b Model y axis zb Model axis E Cp Distribution Apply ok Dismiss Cl
91. 270 Curve Mesh Size amp Curve mesh size window Curve Mesh Parameters Method General Select Lurve s GEOH 5 80 Maximum Size EN Number of Modes Height 0 Ratio width n 4 PAinimurn size Maximum deviation Advanced Bunching Bunching law Spacing 1 Ratio Spacing z 560 Raia2 Space 50 Adjust attached curves Remesh attached surfaces Blank curves with params Apply ox Dismiss Make sure that Surfaces and Curves are visible in Display Tree widget Right click on Surfaces gt Tetra sizes and Tutorial Manual Tetra Meshing Curves gt Tetra sizes Check that all the surfaces have the Maximum element size of 16 and curves have size of 0 Choose File gt Save project to save the additions to the tetin file i Generating the Tetrahedral Mesh Click on Mesh gt Volume Meshing 9 gt From Geometry 9 Apply to create the mesh Tutorial Manual Tetra Meshing Figure 3 271 Mesh with Tetrahedral window Mesh Volume 2 Mesh type Tetra Method PRP Smooth mesh Iterations 5 i Min quality 04 Coarsen mesh Iterations 2 Worst aspect ratio 0 1 Smooth transition Factor 1 2 Options Run as batch process Only visible geometry Part by Part Load mesh after completion Apply Dismiss When the meshing process is complete the user should make sure that the el
92. 3 385 Density box in the wake of submarine Select File gt Save project to save the changes made to the model before proceeding further g Generating Tetra Mesh from partial surface mesh Tetra sizes for the parts FIN and TAIL will be taken from the existing surface mesh by default Press Mesh gt Volume Meshing gt From Geometry Surface aM to start generating the mesh In Mesh with tetrahedral window Figure 3 386 Press on Use existing mesh a new window select subpart will open Select the parts FIN and TAIL for existing surface mesh as shown in Figure 3 387 Press Apply to generate the tetrahedral mesh Tutorial Manual Advanced Meshing Tutorials Figure 3 386 3 Mesh with tetrahedral Mesh volume window Mesh type Tetra bd Method qoe Smooth mesh terationz D4 quality Coarsen mesh Iterations Worst aspect ratio 0 1 Smooth transition Factor 12 Existing Mesh Parts FIN TAIL 02 Options Run as batch process Ony visible geometry Load mesh after completion Apply Dismiss Tutorial Manual Advanced Meshing Tutorials Figure 3 387 Select subpart x Select subpart for existing surface mesh Select Parts From screen Accept Cancel When the tetra process has finished the complete tetra mesh should be visually examined as in Figure 3 388 Figure 3 388 Complete Tetra Mesh on symmet
93. 3 41 In this case the split may be done by approximation as it is only the topology of the T that is essential not the exact proportion Figure 3 41 The Split Window Split Block Split Block Block Select All Visible C Selected Block de Edge 11134 Project vertices Split Method Split Method Screen select Y Apply Dismiss Tutorial Manual Figure 3 42 First Split Edge 11 19 Hexa Meshing In the Data Entry Panel select Split Block V once again or the Select Edge icon You will be prompted to select an edge note red text at the bottom of the view screen With the left mouse key select the edge defined by vertices 11 and 19 or 13 21 as shown in Figure 3 42 Keeping the left mouse key depressed slide the new edge to the desired location and middle mouse key to perform the operation The split is shown in Figure 3 42 Note Pressing the right mouse button while in selection mode will cancel the previous selection Also note the color of the edge blue cyan designates an internal edge Hexa Meshing Repeat for edge 33 amp 19 or 34 21 The results are shown in Figure 3 43 Figure 3 43 1 Second Split Edge 33 19 Create the horizontal split this time changing Split Method to Relative as in Figure 3 44 Enter 0 5 mid point of selected edge select any one of the four vertical edges and press the middle mouse button or Apply Tutor
94. 3 m4 4 L1 L2 L3 LA m1 m2 m3 m4 are mid side nodes of Element 1 2 3 4 The Load distribution as per the FEA concept on the Quadratic elements is shown in Figure 6 4 Load Distribution as per the FEA concepts ANSYS CFD Al Environment 10 0 User Manual SAS IP Inc 6 3 Chapter 6 Loads Figure 6 4 Load Distribution as per the FEA concepts 1 69FFT LTILT 1 6 FT ETiET mi 0 L1 1 1 69 FT L2 LT B J 1 6y FT ILZ ILT 1 6 FT 3 LT c 6r FT L3 LT iod A 2 3 FT LI LT 5 7 B 2 3 FT L2 LT 1 6 FT L4LT p LAL T C 2 3 FT L3 LT D 2 3 FT L4 LT The formulation of Total Force at the side nodes is as follow Points 0 FOq 1 6 FT L1 LT Points 1 F1q 1 6 FT L1 LT 1 6 FT L2 LT Points 2 F2q 1 6 FT L2 LT 1 6 FT L3 LT Points 3 F3q 1 6 FT L3 LT 1 6 FT LA LT Points 4 F4q 1 6 FT LA LT But the formulation of mid side node is as follow Points m1 Fm1 2 3 FT L1 LT Points m2 Fm2 2 3 FT L2 LT 6 4 ANSYS ICEM CFD Al Environment 10 0 User Manual SAS IP Inc Points m3 Fm3 2 3 FT L3 LT Points m4 Fm4 2 3 FT LA LT As in the previous case of Linear Element the total Force of Quadratic element is Frotai 09 F1q F2q F4q 1 Fm2 Fm3 Fm4 Which yields Fota F T QUAD 9 Consistent Nodal Load Distributions The Nine Node two dimension Lagrange QUAD 9 Element is sho
95. 315 Tutorial Manual Advanced Meshing Tutorials Figure 3 315 E Translate Topology window Transform Blocks Select 10411 B v Translate H otate Hirror 5 cale Copy Number of copies 3 B Rotation Amis 2 Angle 90 Center of Rotation Center Point Users Paint Select 15 6666 0 6 Apply ox Dismiss Toggle and enter the value 3 Number of Copies In the angle enter the value 90 and select Rotation Tutorial Manual Advanced Meshing Tutorials Axis as 7 In the Center of Rotation Select User Point and select POINTS 17 which is the center point of the GRID Select all the Blocks and Press Apply to transform the blocking The blocking after transformation is shown in Figure 3 316 Figure 3 316 Blocking after Transformation Creating remaining Blocks Blocking gt Create Block From Vertices Faces the dimension select 2D and the Block Type select Quad as shown in Figure 3 317 Note Part Name will be LIVE by default Advanced Meshing Tutorials Figure 3 317 a Create Vertices Faces Create Block Part LIVE TY From Yertices F aces Dimension 20 m Block Type Create Block gt ggg Type Quad 4 Vertices Ta Apply ox Dismiss Select vertices 11 and 13 with the left mouse button in that order and press middle mouse button Note
96. 36 This mesh for the Mercedes SLK model courtesy of Daimler Chrysler was generated with ICEM CFD Hexa combining the exterior and cabin flow 3 2 1 Introduction ANSYS ICEMCFD Blocking represents a new approach to hexahedral mesh generation The block topology model 15 generated directly upon the underlying CAD geometry Within an easy to use interface those operations most often performed by experts are readily accessible through automated features Recognized as the fastest hexahedral mesh generation tool in the market ANSYS ICEMCFD allows users to generate high quality meshes for aerospace automotive computer and chemical industry applications in a fraction of the time required for traditional tools The user has access to two categories of entities during the mesh generation process in ANSYS ICEMCFD block topology and geometry After interactively creating a 3 D Tutorial Manual Hexa Meshing block topology model equivalent to the geometry the block topology may be further refined through the splitting of edges faces and blocks In addition there are tools for moving the block vertices individually or in groups onto associated curves or CAD surfaces The user may also associate specific block edges with important CAD curves to capture important geometric features in the mesh For symmetric models topology transformations such as translate rotate mirror and scaling are available The simplified bloc
97. 4 110 supply the following information in the Define Initial Velocity window Enter Name as VELOCITY LS Dyna Tutorials For Points click on Select node s SE and select all the nodes by clicking on the Left Mouse button and dragging the selection window as shown in Figure 4 111 Make sure that Points and Line are switched in the Display Tree widget The message area should indicate 514 nodes Figure 4 111 Selectio n of Region where to Apply Velocity Enter a value of 10000 for the Directional Y Velocity Press Apply to define Initial velocity Turn OFF Velocities display from Display Tree widget Switch On all the Parts by Parts gt Show All in the Display Tree widget Save Project Through File gt Save Project As option create new directory FrDoor as said in earlier tutorials Tutorial Manual LS Dyna Tutorials Enter FrDoor as project name and press Save to save the project in this directory as shown in Figure 4 112 Along with the FrDoor prj file it will also store three other files Mesh file Attribute file and Parameter files as FrDoor uns FrDoor fbc and FrDoor par respectively Figure 4 112 Projec t As windo W Documents eskto p Documents ir Computer a bio Network Places d Solver Setup Setup LS Dyna Run Save Project As Save Save in 00202020004 5 o E File name Sav
98. 4 and Height ratio to 1 2 Press Apply Press Dismiss to close the window Tutorial Manual Advanced Meshing Tutorials Figur PE ere Part Prism Hesa Core Size Height Height Hum Layers Mesh d 7 para m p m hb mete 5 Hh fiz hh wa ROB BOB ow rr NE mwsr r 202 Show size params using ref size Please Note that Highlighted families have at least one blank field because not all entities in that family Apply Dismiss Blocking gt Pre mesh Params 4 gt Update Size 9 toggle on Update and press Apply Figure 3 344 Mesh in geometry Tutorial Manual LAC EAM MW rm LATI iM yu zm cA Em NN IM RU SACRA mesh Quality For the Criterion select stencil to view the histogram as shown Tutorial Manual Yes when asked whether to recompute the mesh Turn on the Mesh in the Display Tree widget to see the mesh as In the Display Tree widget turn on Project faces and answer RAN Cae i NAM ANI DIU 5 NOE m SESE CEN a a 3 of AI ETE Pic cos MANT Hu At c op V e C N 7 REOR UR LOU X oO e oN ANNAN d gt e o D ANNAM AEM 5 gt 2L D L O gt
99. 5 Tetra Meshing Appendix 382 3 5 1 Mesh Editor Before Creating the Tetra Mesh 382 3 5 2 Tetra 385 3 5 3 Editing the Tetra Mesh 387 3 6 Advanced Meshing Tutorials 398 3 6 1 Hexa Mesh in a Grid Fin 399 3 6 2 Hybrid tube 451 3 6 3 Tetra mesh for Submarine 480 3 6 4 Quad Mesh on a Frame 49 3 6 5 STL Repair with Tetra meshing 508 3 6 6 Workbench Integration 526 3 7 Cart3D 557 3 7 1 Tutorial Three Plugs 558 3 7 2 Tutorial Opera M6 Wing with 0 54 M 569 3 7 3 Onera M6 Wing with 0 84 M 590 3 7 4 Supersonic Missile 611 3 7 5 Business Jet 652 3 7 6 Bomber 670 3 7 7 Advanced Pitot Intake Tutorial 693 3 7 8 Advanced Tutorial Converging Diverging Nozzle flow 715 3 8 Output to Solvers 735 3 8 2 Unstructured Mesh 737 3 8 3 Structured Mesh 747 3 9 Post Processing Tutorials 132 3 9 1 Pipe Network 152 3 9 2 Pipe Network Advanced 769 3 9 3 Space Shuttle 785 3 9 4 Space Shuttle Advanced 797 4 Tutorials 807 4 1 Ansys Tutorial 807 4 1 1 T Pipe Modal Analysis 807 4 1 2 Connecting Rod Thermal Boundary Condition 823 4 1 3 Contact Analysis 861 4 1 4 PCB Thermal Analysis 893 4 2 LS Dyna Tutorial 916 4 2 1 Frame Quasi Static Analysis 916 4 2 2 Front Door Side Impact 935 4 2 3 PDA Drop Impact 952 4 3 Nastran Tutorial 976 4 3 1 T Pipe 976 4 3 2 Bar 1013 4 3 3 Frame 1045 4 3 4 Connecting Rod 1088 4 3 5 Hood 1119 5 ANSYS ICEMCED CFX Tutorials 1136 5 1 Static Mixer 1136 5 1 1 Overview 1136
100. 8e 9 change LS Dyna Material type to Type 20 RIGID as shown in Figure 4 107 and press Apply Figure 4 107 Define Material a Modification Isotropic Mat 2 Property js Maternal Name IsotopicMate Material ID 2 Type isotropic Young s Modulus E Constan Vaning Value 1 e 8 Mass Density RHO Constant C Varying Value 7 8e 3 L5 Dyna Material type Select Type 20 MAT RIGID LS Dyna Tutorials similarly modify the properties for IsotropicMatl In the Define Material Property window under LS Dyna Material type change the type to Type 24 MAT PIECEWISE LINEAR PLASTICITY Change Density to 7 8e 9 set Yield stress to 210 0 and Failure strain to 0 3 as shown in Figure 4 108 and Press Apply Figure 4 108 fine Material Modify Isotropic Material 1 ateral Name IsatropicM at Material ID 1 TT Isotropic Mass Density RHO Constant Warning Value 9 L5 Dyna Material type Select Type Type 24 MAT PIECE WIS Yield stress 210 Failure strain 0 3 Apply ck Dismiss LS Dyna Tutorials c Contacts and Velocities To map the real crash situation the necessary contact and velocity must be applied This 1s explained in this section Contact From the Constraints tab
101. ANSYS ICEMCED CFX Tutorial Manual ANSYS ICEMCFD CFX Tutorials jp Continuing with the Static Mixer Tutorial From this point the user can continue the CFX 5 Static Mixer tutorial from the section entitled Defining the Simulation in CFX Pre The only required change to those instructions would be in the subsection entitled Importing the Mesh When importing the mesh set Mesh Format to CFD and File select the mesh file StaticMixer msh output from ANSYS ICEMCED CFX as shown in Figure 5 31 Figure 5 31 alx CFX Mesh Definition d Opti Import arco window Mesh Format ICEM CFD File BricMixer msh z Mesh Assemb Mesh Units The only other minor change to the remaining tutorial is in the section entitled Define Physics In the Define Physics panel Select Mesh should be set to staticmixer the part name assigned to the volume elements since this 1s the only volume region this name should be selected automatically Tutorial Manual ANSYS ICEMCFD CFX Tutorials 5 2 Static Mixer 2 Refined Mesh 5 2 1 Overview This tutorial covers the creation of a refined mesh for the static mixer using ANSYS ICEMCFD It is assumed that the user has already completed tutorial number 1 This tutorial 1s intended to be compatible with 5 Tutorial 2 Flow in a Static Mixer Refined Mesh This tutorial would effectively replace
102. ANSYS Tutorials Figure 4 31 Cylindrical coordinate system After creating this turn OFF Local Coord Systems gt LCS1 in the Display Tree 2 Constraints and Loads Constraints Click on the Constraints Displacement on Subset icon This will bring the Create Displacement on Subset window given in Figure 4 32 In this window enter the Name as CNSTI From the pull down arrow next to LCS select LCS1 The UX UY and UZ translations will change to UR Utheta and UZ translations Click on the subset selection button 6 and select Subset0 as shown in Figure 4 32 ANSYS Tutorials Toggle ON the option UR Leave the default of 0 for this field to fix translations in the radial direction Then press Apply Do not be concerned about the direction that the displacement arrows point They do not indicate the displacement direction They always point to the left Turn OFF Displacements from the Model Tree to simplify the display ANSYS Tutorials Figure 4 32 Create Displacement on Subset window Tutorial Manual ANSYS Tutorials Constraint of Solid Body Motion The radial constraints will constrain the model from solid body motion radially from the shaft hole but it also needs to be constrained in the Z direction and rotation around the shaft hole You should choose a node on the surface of the large hole preferably on the symmetry plane of the model since we know that will not rotate around the sh
103. As two more position needs to be selected it comes in geometry selection mode Proceed to select other two places 0 and 1 by screen select with the left mouse button as shown in Figure 3 318 Press middle mouse button to accept the selection and press Apply Figure 3 318 Tutorial Manual Advanced Meshing Tutorials Vertex location for block and Material Selection Window i P i i asi N ES i pe h d 1 j I k j I LA ro i i i I Fi i i i w 1 ul 1 4 T 3 4 i y TT 5 d i v pao 4 1 i a bei 403 8 i 1 E i Ji a A3 A i ara m am ii 5E 51 4 i eo E Note The User should select the vertices points in an order that should be in Z shape First all the existing vertices should be selected and once they are done then middle mouse button should be pressed to proceed to select the screen locations The blocking after this operation should like as shown in Figure 3 319 Figure 3 319 Blocking after creation of block Tutorial Manual Advanced Meshing Tutorials similarly create the Block by selecting the vertices 13 21 and 74 in that order and press middle mouse button Screen select for vertex 0 as shown in Figure 3 320 Figure 3 320 Selecting vertices for another block creation Tutorial Manual Advanced Mes
104. Attribute amp Parameter Files La La La Ley 4 Edit Parameters Edit Attributes View LS Dyna File Apply Dismiss i Change Thickness Distribution to BCDefined Turn on Edit Options gt Advanced and select Create Attribute amp Parameter files Parameters LS Dyna Tutorials global settings and Attributes local part settings can be edited within this panel to modify various properties element type and constraint and load definitions For this tutorial however all of these have been set either in the original Nastran deck or as a result of all of the above modifications Note Two sets of Attributes fbc and Parameters par files are usually created One set project name fbc par is for general internal settings and the other project name lsdyna fbc par is for solver specific settings Turn on View LS Dyna File and Apply The LS Dyna deck Frame Dyna k can be edited in the text editor 1f necessary not for this tutorial Solving the problem select Solve Options gt Submit Solver Run gt to start LS Dyna as in Figure 4 101 Make sure the LS Dyna Input File is selected as Frame Dyna k Check and verify the location of the LS Dyna executable If using LS Dyna within Ansys turn on Specify Ansys Product and select the appropriate product description from the pull down list Press Apply LS Dyna will generate the binary result file d3plot in the project directory Frame LSDyna Fo
105. Bonding Box are the maximum and minimum points of the bounding box of the Mesh region They can be changed if desired 8 Set the Angle Threshold for Refinement to 5 Note In this case we wish to run the case with symmetry in the Z direction Specify bounding box minimum Z coordinate as 0 00001 slightly inside the model Refer to Figure 3 494 If the model itself 1s symmetric turn on Half Body Mesh Symmetric in Z 9 Click Apply after specifying minimum Z coordinates as 0 00001 as shown in Figure 3 494 to run the mesher This will create a domain file with 3 Cut Planes Quad Elements in each coordinate direction and Cut Cell Hex Elements The PreView mesh will be loaded automatically SS A Tutorial Manual Cart3D Figure 3 494 Cat3D Mesher amp Change Angle of B A Refinement Cart3D files prefix wING2 Single Component Fix Normals Nominal Mesh Radius Body n l enghr sj 140 Starting Mesh Divisions 3 33 Max Num of Cell Refinements 1 2 E Compute Parameters Finest Cell Dimensions 0 00737 x 000737 0 00737 Mesh Creation f Preview Mesh Only C Create and Save Full Mesh Humber of Multi grid levels 5 Duter Bounding Box Minimum Diagonal Point 23 4641 05 30 173471 0 00001 Maximum Diagonal Point 30 882856 30 173430 30 327827 Exi Define Su
106. COO IN CUT UB essen aE 6 6 FOCE ONO UNI CE 6 7 OA gt Evo RR toa pra annua 6 7 OD Pressure Om SUC 6 7 0 0 Pressare On 6 7 o Temperature vitet te 777 Ra E 6 7 68 lemperature ON CUVE S 6 7 6 9 Tempberstureob SUlTdeg s ue eoe eec M MEI MEM MICI M II ICM EQUES 6 7 6 10 Temperature or BOY tube tutus 6 7 Subsel aser Me Dale 6 7 SM Maid erii e ee 6 7 Solver Op ONS o occ esis EO ERE IM E CM ON De ee 7 1 ut 7 1 72 58tUpAnalysis TYD E lor od UR ud ERE 7 1 7 3 Setup SUD d5O acuit eam annu ES 7 1 TA 7 1 73
107. CURVES by selecting both curves Displaying the Tutorial Manual Hexa Meshing Blocking gt Edges gt Show Association in the Display Tree should look like Figure 3 184 Figure 3 184 a The edges to Curve cL projection From the Display Tree widget turn on Surfaces i Moving the remaining vertices Notice the association arrows pointing to the outside surfaces of the elbow part in Figure 3 184 If we were to snap project vertices now these vertices would move outward to the elbow part surfaces So you must turn OFF the ELBOW part from the Display Tree so that the vertices will not go to that part ayo Go to Association a gt Snap Project Vertices R Al Visible should be toggle on by default Press Apply The Tutorial Manual Hexa Meshing model should look like Figure 3 185 Then press Reset at the lower right where the Index Control window 15 located Figure 3 185 After the projection E Use Blocking gt Move Vertex 5 Move Vertex lt to improve the placement of the vertices on the cylinder See Figure 3 186 Turn the ELBOW part back on Figure 3 186 Vertex positions after moving Tutorial Manual Hexa Meshing j Creating the Second O grid The following steps instruct on how to add the second O grid ri Choose Blocking gt Split Block lt 4 Ogrid Block Press Select ioa f and then select all the blocks by box selecting over the entire model an
108. Cart3D Three types of flow are simulated Case A Fully Subsonic 0 89 Case B Transonic Pexit Ptota 0 75 Case C Supersonic pei 0 16 Display The geometry is an axisymmetric converging diverging duct The figure above shows the general shape of the nozzle It has an area of 2 5 in at the inflow x 0 in an area of 1 0 in at the throat x 5 in and an area of 1 5 in at the exit x 10 in The nozzle Area varies using a Cosine function and has the form Cart3D If x lt 5 0 then Area 1 75 0 75 Cos 0 2 x 1 0 x If x gt 5 0 then Area 1 25 0 25 Cos 0 2 x 1 0 This nozzle comes from MS Liou s paper AIAA 87 0355 a Starting the Project Load ANSYS CFD Change the working directory by File gt Change Working Dir and set the location to the folder nozzle with nozzle uns in that folder Note It is preferable to create a separate folder nozzle and put only nozzle uns domain file in that folder before performing this tutorial Select Open Mesh 23 from the main menu and select nozzle uns b Mesh Generation Preview Only Click on Cart3D from the main menu Select Volume mesher get the Cart3D Mesher GUI as shown in Figure 3 601 Cart3D Figure Fie Edt View Info Sellings Windows Heb 3 601 gt B Geomely Mesh Blocking Edk Mesh Pioperlise Constans Loads Solve Options Cait
109. Chapter 3 Hexa value thus obtained is normalized so that O corresponds to perpendicular faces and 1 corresponds to parallel faces For surface cells the skew is obtained by first taking the ratio of the two diagonals of the face The skew is defined as one minusthe ratio ofthe shorter diagonal over the longer diagonal Thus O is perfectly rectangular and 1 represents maximum skewness 3 13 Refinement and Coarsening The refinement function which is found through Meshing Refinement can be modified to achieve either a refined or a coarsened result The refinement coarsening may be applied in all three major directions simultan eously or they may be applied in just one major direction 3 13 1 Refinement The refinement capability is used for solvers that accept non conformal node matching at the block boundaries The refinement capability is used to minimize the model size while achieving proper mesh definition in critical areas of high gradients 3 13 2 Coarsening In areas of the model where the flow characteristics are such that a coarser mesh definition is adequate coarsening of the mesh may be appropriate to contain model size 3 14 Replay Functionality Parametric changes made to model geometry are easily applied through the use of Hexa s replay functionality found in File Replay Changes in length width and height of specific geometry features are categorized as parametric changes These changes do not however aff
110. Contact window M ame CONTACT_ALL ALL Contact Surfaces 49 Static Coefficient of Friction 3 Dynamic Coefficient Fiction OE L5 Dyna Single Contact Option i AUTOMATIC SIMGLE SURFACE gt SINGLE SURFACE Apply ome Dismiss Enter CONTACT ALL for the Name ely Turn off Points and Lines under Mesh in the Model tree Turn on all Parts in the Model tree Note that Mesh gt Shells is already turned on 66 99 Select Contact Surfaces gt Select element s option and type on Et 0 the keyboard or Select all appropriate visible objects from the Select mesh elements toolbar select the AUTOMATIC SINGLE SURFACE default from the drop down menu Keep other options as default and press Apply Defining Material Property Modify material properties read in from the Nastran deck to reflect the appropriate LS Dyna material type From the Model tree expand Material Properties right mouse select IsotropicMat l and select Modify to get the menu shown in Figure 4 94 Tutorial Manual Figure 4 94 Define Material Property window LS Dyna Tutorials Tutorial Manual Define Maternal Property Maternal Name sotrapicMatl Material ID 1 Type lsatropic T oung s Modulus E Constant C Varving Value 207000 Shear Modulus G Constant Varing Value Poissons s Ratio HU f Constant 47 Varving Value
111. Curves in the Display tree to see the curves Cube Creation Geometry gt Create Modify Surface gt Standard Shapes Select 6 Standard Shapes to open the Create Std Geometry window and choose the Box about a Point icon Change the Part name to CUBE and the Name to CUBE 1 Enter the XYZ size as 10 10 5 These values will Geometry Creation be in X Y and Z directions as 10 10 and 5 respectively Type 0 0 0 for the Box Origin coordinates Press Apply to create the cube The geometry so far should look as in Figure 3 19 Figure 3 19 Geometry so far Hemisphere Creation Note Turn ON Geometry gt Curves gt Show Curve Names in the Display Tree to see which curve to select in this step Geometry gt Create Modify Surface Surface of Revolution Select e Surface of Revolution to open the window shown in Figure 3 20 Change the Part to SPHERE Name to SPHERE 1 Enter the Start angle 0 and the End angle as 180 Select Axis Points as POINTS 1 and POINTS 2 Select curves as CURVES 0 and press Apply to create the hemisphere Geometry Creation Figure 5 3 20 Create Modity Surface of surface revolution _ 6 window Part SPHERE Name SPHERE 1 2118171 Surface of Revolution start angle 0 End angle 180 Axis points POINTS 1 Curves CURVES amp eee Switch ON the Surfaces in the Display Tree window To see t
112. D normal shock relations Pexit 0 81060 Conservation of mass Pinlet Aldine m Dexit Areaexic V exit Mac 492519 Name EXIT surface family EXIT Density 0 81060 X Velocity 0 492519 Pressure 0 55754252 Run the solver using the same procedure as for the Sub Sonic case Mach number results from sliceplanes dom for the Trans Sonic Flow case are shown in Figure 3 616 Cart3D Figure 3 616 Mach Trans sonic Result Mach Numbe 1 621 1 523 1 437 1 345 1 252 1 160 1 066 0 9761 0 8840 0 7919 0 6996 0 6076 0 5155 0 4234 0 3313 0 2392 Pressure results in surface_results dom for the Trans Sonic Flow case are shown in Figure 3 617 Figure 3 61 7 Pressure Trans 0 7146 i 0 6766 Sonic 0 6479 0 6070 Result meets for 0 5353 0 49594 Pressu nee re 0 4277 0 3918 0 3559 0 3201 0 2647 0 2483 0 21235 0 1766 h Case C Supersonic Flow Note For the Supersonic Flow case the Mach number needs to be changed to Mach number 1 5 and From the Cart3D menu select Solver gt Define solver params gt Case Information and set Mach number 1 5 Tutorial Manual Cart3D Theory Since EXIT is a supersonic outlet it really doesn t matter what happens here as long as it allows a supersonic exit Since the flow is fully supersonic downstream after throat there is no shock wave present in the nozzle and isentropic relations still hold good tota p 1 y 1 2 2 Y 0 743390 Dexit Dtotal
113. Environment 10 0 User Manual SAS IP Inc Section 3 16 Mesh Quality Typically the user will model only a section of the rotating machinery as well as implement symmetry in order to minimize the model size By specifying a periodic relationship between the inflow and outflow boundaries the particular specification may be applied to the model flow characteristics entering a boundary must be identical to the flow characteristics leaving a boundary 3 15 1 Applying the Periodic Relationship The periodic relationship is applied to block faces and ensures that a node on the first boundary have two identical coordinates to the corresponding node on the second boundary The user is prompted to select corres ponding vertices on the two faces in sequence When all vertices on both flow boundaries have been selected a full periodic relationship between the boundaries has been generated 3 16 Mesh Quality The mesh quality functions are accessible through Meshing Quality check Any of the four quality check options will display a histogram plot for the user 3 16 1 Determining the Location of Cells By clicking on any of the histogram bars with the left button the user may determine where in the model these cells are located The selected histogram bars will change in color to pink After selecting the bar s the Show button is pressed to highlight the cells in this range If the Solid button is turned on the cells marked in the h
114. FLUE ALI HS V 7 69 T Select these two DADO Perren PES LA UT TR OSLO he d e a T Y e Jg CORR TOO oF 0 rr mW SE rara MR a a ACC AO AQUA NER a rl RE ATUS Y UP i ec e E LAT EE rece ADOPT PLA ioter PI EDD PL ATUS OEC Sete ee Y DLP EAS YT y o Ne 49 oo o de 55545 oA D LL CL Solver Setup i Setup Nastran Run First user should select the appropriate solver before proceeding further Select Settings gt Solver from Main menu and press Apply as shown in Figure 4 230 Tutorial Manual Nastran Tutorials Figure 4 230 Soler Sun a Solver Setup window Solver NASTRAN Set As Default Apply ok Cancel Click on 8 Setup Analysis Type icon from Solve Options Tab Menubar to setup Nastran run to do Linear Static that pops up Setup Analysis Type window as shown Figure 4 231 In the Setup Analysis Type window enter the following Select Run Type as Linear Static Sol 101 Make sure that Constrain Singularities AUTOSPC and Grid Weights GRDPNT are turned On For the Default Sets select Single Point Constraints SPC and Load Set LO
115. Figure 3 175 View gt Isometric can be used to orient the model as show on the right inFigure 3 175 Tutorial Manual Figure 3 175 Project the display ed edges Hexa Meshing A i d N t a m e 4 2 y m J Hr EN x AN PP B UMP 2U NET MF 7 Before creating the two O grids it will be necessary to move two of the vertices slightly from their present position Select Blocking gt Move Vertex Move Vertex e to open the window shown in Figure 3 176 Orient the model as shown in Figure 3 177 and move the vertices to their new position as indicated in Figure 3 178 and Figure 3 179 You ll need to left mouse click on the vertex and hold the button while you slide the vertex on the surface Tutorial Manual Hexa Meshing Figure 3 176 Movement constraints window Move Verlices 2 Move Yertices s ts SN Move Vertex Method Single Vertex gt Movement Constraints Fix v Fiz Fix direction dm Vector ok Normal ta Surf Move dependent Apply ok Dismiss Tutorial Manual Hexa Meshing Figure 3 177 Vertices to be moved Hexa Meshing Figure 3 178 Vertex positions after moving Tutorial Manual Hexa Meshing h Creating the First O grid This tutorial focuses on the flow
116. Figure 3 100 Type in LIVE for the Part name Tutorial Manual Hexa Meshing Figure 3 100 D Create Body panel Create Body Part LIVE Blea Name 3 Point Location f of 2 points t At specified point 2 screen locations E Apply Dismiss xat D Select Material Point 2 or Select location s and select two locations such that the center lies within the volume as in Figure 3 101 Tutorial Manual Figure 3 101 Selectio n of points for Material point creation Hexa Meshing Select these two Foints Press the middle mouse button or Apply Right select Parts gt Delete Empty Parts in the Display tree The empty GEOM part should be deleted If not right mouse select GEOM gt Delete Save the geometry file using File gt Geometry gt Save Geometry As or save the project f Blocking the Geometry Select Blocking gt Create Block qi gt Initialize block 4 Refer to Figure 3 102 Select the LIVE Part make sure Type gt 3D Bounding Box is selected default and Apply Tutorial Manual Hexa Meshing Figure 3 102 Create Block a Create Block Window _ 5 55 Part LIVE Create Block Initialize Blocks Type 3p Bounding Box Entities Project vertices with geometry 20 Blocking Em Apply ox Dismiss It isn t necessary to select entities for
117. Figure 3 349 Hybrid Tube with three sections CYL2 ET OO 7X M Ww y N A NN 7 AN AX AV A VLA 1 AT 1 Ax V X y n X y A A VI Y Vi t OUTLET CYL1 A Mj A V LA Vy i if V Y LA MAI bv NM LA A Y 1j VA MA UV 1 1 B LLL INTERFACE1 INTERFACE2 a Summary of Steps Starting the Project Generating the Hybrid Mesh Generating the Tetra Mesh in Middle Section Merging the Tetra Mesh between Left and Middle Section Generating the Hexa Mesh in Right Section Merging the Resultant Mesh with Hexa Mesh at Interface2 Advanced Meshing Tutorials saving the Project b Starting the Project From UNIX or DOS window start ANSYS ICEMCED File gt Change working directory ACN docu CFDHelp CFD Tutorial Files gt Hybrid tube project Choose its Tetin file geometry tin c Generating the Hybrid Mesh Generating the Tetra Mesh in Left Section Select Mesh gt Set Global Mesh Size gt General Parameters fo Enter 16 as Maximum size in the Global mesh size window as shown in Figure 3 350 Press Apply followed by Dismiss to close the window Advanced Meshing Tutorials Figure 3 350 Global Mechisice 2 Global Mesh Size wind
118. File and keep the other options as default e Press Apply Tutorial Manual LS Dyna Tutorials The LS Dyna input data file comes up in the default text editor If necessary the input file can be edited and saved through this text editor Since there is no need to do any editing for this example just close the editor jp Solution and Results Modal analysis 15 to be performed on this model and the results should be visualized in a post processor Solving the problem e From the Solve Options tab click on Submit Solver Run Q to start LS Dyna with the Run Solver window given in Figure 4 137 e Supply LS Dyna file as PDA_Dyna k and the LS Dyna executable path e User can specify ANSYS LS Dyna license product to launch LS Dyna through AI Environment e Press Apply in the Run Solver window Figure 4 137 Run Solver y Run Solver T Window olver PN ILS Dyna Select LS Dyna Executable 80 5 5 5970 1 L5 D una Input File POA_Dynak ANSYS LS Dyna Options C None amp Specify Ansys Product Select Product AN SY 5 Muliphysicsl L5 D rN Apply o Dismiss LS Dyna Tutorials Post Processing of Results From the main menu select File gt Results gt Open Results The Select Result Format window is displayed as shown in Figure 4 138 For the Format choose LS DYNA from the drop down box Select the d3plot file the LS Dyna results file from the PDA directory an
119. Geometry Mko the defaults for Tetra Meshing Note that by default there will be 5 iterations of smoothing after the tetra meshing to improve the elements of low quality Click Apply to create the tetrahedral mesh Once the mesh is created it gets loaded on the screen h Editing the Mesh Smoothing Click on Smooth Mesh Globally from the Edit Mesh tab menubar to check the quality of the mesh From the messages and the smoothing histogram it can be seen that the mesh has quality more than 0 2 Still additional smoothing can be performed 1f desired Set Criterion to Quality and set Up to Quality as 0 5 as shown in Figure 5 58 and press Apply ANSYS ICEMCFD CFX Tutorials Figure 5 58 Smooth Elements Smooth Elements Globally z Window zoa Quality Smoothing iterations 5 E Up ta quality 0 5 Criterion Quality Smooth Mesh Type Smooth Freeze Float TETRA 4 C C THI 3 C Smooth Parts Subsets Method parts Apply ck Dismiss Switch OFF all the parts in the Tree except SYMP to see the smooth mesh as shown in Figure 5 59 ANSYS ICEMCFD CFX Tutorials Figure 5 59 Mesh after Smoothing Saving the Project Save the project by clicking on Save Project from the Main Menu i Inflated Boundary Generation Prism Mesh Generation Click on Set meshing Params by Parts a from the Mesh tab menubar For the BODY part set Num Layers to 1 as we only want 1 pris
120. Global mesh size a window Global Mesh Size Global Mesh Parameters BDz Y Global Element Scale Factor Scale factor Display Global Element Seed Size Max element E Display Natural Size Enabled Size 7 Display Cells in gap oo Refinement o o E Ignore Wall Thickness Triangle tolerance 0 0001 Unitless tri tolerance bd Apply ox Dismiss Tutorial Manual Cart3D Figure 3 521 8 Global Mesh 5 Global Mesh Size Tetra pud c CRM shing parameters Global Mesh Parameters window i j 1 Fast transition Edge criterion 0 05 Define thin cuts Apply ck Dismiss From the Mesh tab select Set Surface Mesh Size Use Maximum size of 1 for the tip leading trailing surfaces and 2 for the remaining surfaces Note To display the applied mesh sizes right click on Surfaces in the Display Tree widget and select Tetra Sizes as shown in Figure 3 522 Tutorial Manual Cart3D Run the Tetra Volume Mesher and save only the Surface Triangular mesh as done previously for body uns assign the name ffin uns Remember to delete the other mesh elements and to run the mesh checks before saving the Shell element mesh Also be sure to align the element normals to point outwards Close the geometry and mesh files Repeat the same process for bfin tin and sand save the surface triangular mesh as bfi
121. H l Geometry Subsets w Surfaces Cart3D save only the visible geometry to a new tetin file using File gt Geometry gt Save Visible Geometry As A window appears as shown in Figure 3 512 Specify the file name as body tin Select Save Note Don t save it as missile tin as we will lose the rest of the geometry data Figure 3 512 Save Save in missile Only x2 missile tin Visible L5 Geo metr hy Recent Documents y oam window Documents Computer a Network File name Save as type Geometry Files Cat Similarly save the front fins and back fins under the file names ffin tin and bfin tin by displaying the and BFINI parts respectively 6 Now close the current tetin file using File gt Geometry gt Close Geometry c Generating Surface mesh on Body Load the tetin file body tin the fuselage with File gt Geometry gt Open Geometry Tutorial Manual Cart3D From the Mesh tab select Set Surface Mesh Size Click the Select surface s and click on the keyboard to select all the surfaces Specify a Maximum size of 2 as shown in Figure 3 513 Figure 3 513 Surface Window Surface Mesh Size S urface s B0070 BL Maximum size 2 Height o tst C ts Height ratio 0 Number of layers 4 Tetra size ratio 0 Minimum size 0
122. HEATER and COPPERCOIL parts as below and press Apply and Dismiss This will enable prisms off the Part Priem Hexa Core Max Size Height Height atio Mum Layers COPPERCOIL p r fo p fo p DEFAULT m m HEATER 2 HEATINGEDIL INFLOW m m pn p np fo OUTFLOW p fo p Show size params using ref size Apply Dismiss Saving the Project Save the project by clicking on Save Project E from the Main Menu This saves the geometry file as HeatingCoil tin in the HeatingCoil directory Meshing Select Volume Meshing from the Mesh tab menubar to create the tet prism mesh on this geometry Set the Mesh type to Tetra Prism Layers Click on From geometry for the Method Keep the defaults for the meshing Notice that by default there would be 5 iterations of smoothing after the tetra meshing to take care of the bad elements Click Apply to create the tet prism mesh ANSYS ICEMCFD CFX Tutorials Once the mesh is created it gets loaded on the screen The figure shows the mesh near the end of the copper coil where it passes through the outer wall with one prism layer Figure 5 81 Tetra Prism Mesh f Editing the Mesh Splitting Prisms From the Edit Mesh tab menubar select Split Mesh t then Split Prisms j Set Prism ratio to 1 3 and Number of layers to 4 as in Figure 5 82 Press Apply Tutorial Manual ANSYS ICEMCFD CFX
123. Haii ens omm 4 a wes 555 i Huy nl Cell Piebinemenis 11 Ligin Pieters Fraa edi nn Heth Creation Ce Poen beth and fave Full Mach Number Multi 5 2 Owe Bourning Bux Diagn Pert Mion liigina Por E Ta Deine 5 Chafing Al Gurtace Hauria of bee oe a zi pe Disma wl edel elemenitz 11 720 a a M DHE 1 19 e 1 97 3416 5351 Cani cet h PLUGS 633 Lag Leave Fix Normals enabled as this will fix the orientation of the triangles such that their normals point outwards Choose Nominal Mesh Radius Body Length X 20 Starting Mesh Divisions 5 5 5 and Max Num of Cell Refinements 11 Click Compute Parameters This saves the mesh in the local directory converts in into Cart3D format and determines the intersections if any This step is required even if there is only one component to convert the triangulation to Cart3D tri format At the end it displays the Finest Cell Dimension as shown in Figure 3 465 Tutorial Manual Cart3D Figure Lart3D Mesher a 3 465 gt gt Cart3D CartsD files pretis PLUGS Mesher Single Component window Fix Normals Nominal Mes
124. Hexa Meshing Figure 3 76 Display of Edge Projection jp Aligning the Vertices To obtain optimal mesh quality it is sometimes necessary to line up the block vertices Note As for Split Blocks command Align Vertices only acts upon the blocks displayed thus it is important to use the Index control to isolate those blocks First line up the vertices of the three blocks underneath the car To more quickly isolate the blocks select Blocking In the Display tree gt Index control gt Select corners and select the two diagonally opposing vertices corners as shown in Figure 3 77 Adjusting the index control using From Corners Hexa Meshing Figure 3 77 Note the change in the I J ranges within the Index control panel am d Select the two Comers Turn on Vertices gt Indices for reference Select Blocking gt Move Vertex gt Align Vertices 4 to obtain the window shown in Figure 3 78 Tutorial Manual Hexa Meshing Figure 3 78 Move Vertices Aligning Vertices panel 2 Move vertices _ Align Wertices Along edge direction Reference vertex i Mm Align Coordinate system Cartesian Hove in plane Be User Defined First select any one of the vertical J edges to define the index align direction Then select any of the top four vertices as shown in Figure 3 79 and Apply Tutorial Manual Hexa Meshin
125. ICEMCFD CFX Tutorials Figure 5 62 5 Layers after Splitting The prism layers may not have the desired first cell height Thus we would redistribute them to achieve a constant first layer thickness of 0 1 a Go to the Edit Mesh tab menubar and click on Move Nodes Click on Redistribute Prism Edge Initial Height as 0 1 as in Figure 5 63 and click on Apply ANSYS ICEMCFD CFX Tutorials Figure 5 63 Redistribute Prism MoveNodes 0 Edge window Move Nodes Initial height 21 4 Apply ox Dismiss Figure 5 64 Layers after redistribution This redistributes the prism layers such that the initial height is uniformly 0 1 as shown in Figure 5 64 However the growth ratio now varies based on the total thickness of each prism column Tutorial Manual ANSYS ICEMCFD CFX Tutorials Smoothing Click on Smooth Mesh Globally from the Edit Mesh tab menubar to check the quality of the mesh Set Criterion to Quality and Up to quality to 0 5 Set PENTA 6 to Freeze to prevent prisms from smoothing initially and Apply Now set PENTA_6 to Smooth and Up to quality to 0 2 and Apply The final smoothed mesh should look something like in Figure 5 68 Figure 5 65 Layers after redistribution Saving the Project Save the project by clicking on Save Project from Main Menu If Overwrite window occurs press Yes jp Output From the Output tab menubar click on Output to CFX Accept t
126. Isotropic Define Young s Modulus as a Constant value of 207000 Define Poisson s ratio as a Constant 0 28 Define the Mass Density as a Constant 7 8e 9 Define the Thermal Expansion Coefficient as a Constant 12 22e 6 ANSYS Tutorials Enter the Reference Temperature TREF as 298 Press Apply ANSYS Tutorials Figure 4 23 Define Material a Define Material Property Property Window STEEL x Material ID 1 Isotropic Young s Modulus E Constant Varping Value 207000 Shear Modulus G Constant Warping Value Poissons s Ratio NU Constant Warping Value 0 28 Mass Density RHO Constant Varying Value 7 8e 3 Thermal Expanzion Coefficient Constant Varying Value 1 2 gt Temperature 238 ITREFI ANSYS Apply Cancel ANSYS Tutorials Element Properties Select the Properties Define 3D Element Properties icon and the Define Volume Element window as shown in Figure 4 24 will appear Press the part selection icon 4 and select the part STEEL ELEMENTS Select the Material as STEEL which was previously defined Set the PID Property ID as 1 in the Press Apply Figure 4 24 Define Volume Define Volume Element 2 Element window Part STEEL ELEMENTS As Material STEEL FIL h LCS Global Apply Dismiss e Subse
127. It will open the Move vertex window as shown in Figure 3 443 and move the vertices from EDGES 4 EDGES6 EDGES10 EDGES12 so that after turning the display of blocks ON and turning it to SOLID blocking will look like as shown in Figure 3 444 TS ee eee Tutorial Manual Advanced Meshing Tutorials Fi gure 3 443 Move e Move vertex window Move Vertices gts SN T Hove Vertex Method Single Vertex Movement Constraints Fi X FikY Fiz Fix direction Vector 4 Normal to Surf Move dependent Apply Dismiss Figure 3 444 Blocking after moving vertices Tutorial Manual Advanced Meshing Tutorials k Adding blocks to VORFN Now user will assign unrequired blocks to VORFN family Select Parts gt VORFN gt Add to part it will open Add to part window as shown in Figure select Blocking material Add blocks to Part amp add un required blocks as shown in Figure 3 446 to VORFN Turn ON Blocking gt Blocks gt Solid so that after adding parts to geometry should look like as shown in Figure 3 446 Figure 3 445 Add to part window AddtoPat 0000 97 Blocking Material Add Blocks to Part Blocks R MN Apply Dismiss Advanced Meshing Tutorials Figure 3 446 Blocks to be selected in vorfn family Figure 3 447 Geometry after adding blocks to V
128. Location Centroid of 2 points At specified point 2 screen locations Ww Apply Dismiss Tutorial Manual ANSYS ICEMCFD CFX Tutorials f Mesh Generation Global Mesh Parameters From the Mesh tab menubar click on Set Global Mesh Size oA In General Parameters o leave Scale factor as 1 for Global Element Scale Factor Change Max element to 20 for Global Element Seed Size Enable Natural Size and set Size to 2 and Refinement to 16 as shown in Figure 5 55 Natural size is the minimum element size that will be generated using automatic refinement methods to capture curvature and proximity in the meshing process Click Apply to save these settings Figure 5 55 Global Mesh Size a Global Mesh Size window Se ICTU INN s Global Mesh Parameters TD Se Global Element Scale Factor Scale Factor 1 Display Global Element Seed Size element 20 Display Hatural Size Iw Enabled Size 2 Display Mum of Elements in gap E Refinement 1 z Ignore Vall Thickness ANSYS ICEMCFD CFX Tutorials Set Initial height to 3 5 Number of layers to 1 and Prism height limit factor to 1 as shown in Figure 5 56 This ensures that the height of a prism is not larger than its base triangle size Click Apply Figure 5 56 3 Global Prism Settings mE Global Mesh Parameters Global Prism Settings Growth law exponential Initial height 35 He
129. Manual Tetra Meshing Appendix Figure 3 288 The complete mesh As in the SphereCube example the user should go through all of the checks for Errors and Possible problems to ensure that the mesh does not contain any flaws that would cause problems for analysis m Saving the Project save the mesh by selecting File gt Save Project If a question box pops up asking whether to delete disconnected vertices respond by saying Yes Close the project by selecting File gt Close Project n Adding Prism Layers In this example adding prism layers as a seperate process will be demonstrated To make sure the prism mesh is computed with highest quality the user must check the quality of the tetra mesh for smoothness In general one of two strategies may be taken The user can grow the desired number of layers or grow a single layer and subdivide later The single layer to can be optimally divided for a desired initia height and growth ratio For this example we demonstrate the latter method Tutorial Manual Tetra Meshing Appendix select Edit Mesh gt Smooth Mesh Set Up to Quality parameter to 0 4 Press Apply After three trials the mesh quality increases to 0 37 on Global parameters gt Global Prism Parameters Set Initial height to 2 and the Number of leyers to 1 as shown in Figure 3 289 Figure 3 289 Global Mesh Size Global Prism Global Mesh Parameters ra Parameters Global Prism Settings Gr
130. Max Element Switch ON Natural size limit by providing the value of 1 as shown in Figure 3 265 Tutorial Manual Tetra Meshing Figure 3 265 Global Mesh Size Global Mesh Size 9 Window UEM EM Global Mesh Parameters Global Element Scale Factor Scale Factor 06 Display Global Element Seed Size Max element 128 Display Natural Size v Enabled Size 556 Display Cells in E Refinement 10 Ignore Wall Thickness Triangle tolerance 0 001 Unitless tri tolerance Apply o Dismiss Natural size allows ICEM CFD Tetra to determine local tetrahedral sizes based on the size of the features in the model The mesher will compare the size of the elements to the radius of curvature of the curves and Tutorial Manual Tetra Meshing surfaces and the distance between the non intersecting curves and surfaces Like other size parameters Natural size is a multiplier of the scale factor The value given by Natural size multiplied with the scale factor represents a minimum element size The Natural size gt Refinement parameter defines the number of edges along a radius of curvature Refinement parameter is used to compute the Natural size consequently the larger this parameter the smaller will be the computed the Natural size Refinement should always be a positive integer value Note For more information on Natural size see the ICEM CFD on line help The value en
131. Modulus G Constant Varying Value Poissons s Ratio NU Constan Varying Value 0 28 Mass Density RHO Constant Varying Value 7 009 Thermal Expansion Coeffici Constant Varying Value TENWEHCEMCTD sey ff oe cares TT ANSYS Tutorials d Save Project Select File Save Project As and press the new folder creation icon near the upper right Create the new directory Tpipe Ansys then enter that folder and enter Tpipe Ansys prj as the project name as shown in Figure 4 5 Press the Save button Along with the Tpipe Ansys prj file it will also store three other files the mesh file uns attribute file atr and parameter file par This also sets the working directory as the project directory Save Project 4 9 Ege Arsye Projec t As windo amp LU oa Docuinerts Mhyricampgutar deter Pac Fils nama Anse pi EA DEM Project Piles 4 Conca e Solver Setup First the user should select the appropriate solver before proceeding further Setup Ansys Run Tutorial Manual ANSYS Tutorials Select Settings gt Solver from the main menu and select Ansys from the dropdown arrow Then press Apply Selecting a solver 1s shown in Figure 4 6 Figure 4 6 Solver Set Gil Solver Setup a windo
132. Output gt CFX TASCflow input Set the parameters for input to the solver as shown in Figure 3 632 Figure 3 632 Set the translation parameters for CFX TASCflow Oats Please edit the following CFs TAS Chow options M Output type Binary Ascii Topo file E Boco file Output File 5 Scaling Yes No Done Cancel Press Done to complete the translation to CFX TASCflow database The user may now select File gt Quit to exit Tutorial Manual Post Processing Tutorials 3 9 Post Processing Tutorials 3 9 1 Pipe Network In this tutorial one will be referring to a Fluent file as an example The input files are different from solver to solver but the post processing 1s very similar Normally for post processing ICEM CFD generated grid 1s not needed In this case only Fluent s case and data files are sufficient to show the results Operations introduced by this example Starting up a new Visual3p project Visualization of Surface Grid and Solid Contours Plotting Solid Contours Displaying Surfaces with Contour lines Visualization of Surface edges and Vector plots Saving the Output a Case Description The geometry of the Fluent file used for this tutorial 1s as shown in Figure 3 633 The configuration consists of an inlet pipe which finally splits 1nto four outlet pipes of similar area and another outlet wi
133. Part for new points Split surface at T connections Inherited Split at interior curves Only active parts Part by part Delete unattached curves y and points Apply Cancel Tutorial Manual ANSYS ICEMCFD CFX Tutorials e Creating Body Select Geometry gt Create Body 0 Give STATICMIXER as the Part click on Material Point and toggle on the Centroid of 2 points option as shown in Figure 5 24 Turn off all Surfaces and Points and display only curves from the Display Tree Click on Select location s and select two opposite locations on the screen as suggested in Figure 5 25 and press the middle mouse button Press Apply Figure 5 24 Create Body Window do Part STATICMIXER Name Create Body e hM aterial Point Location Centroid of 2 points At specified point 2 screen locations TR Apply c Dismiss Tutorial Manual ANSYS ICEMCFD CFX Tutorials Figure 5 25 Two Opposite points for Material point f Mesh Generation Assigning Mesh Parameters Select Mesh gt Set Global Mesh Size re It defaults into General Parameters 08 that window change Element to 3 0 and leave the other fields as the default as shown in Figure 5 26 and press Apply The Scale Factor is used to scale the mesh size up and down by changing this number Please note that all the sizes in ANSYS ICEMCFD CFX get multiplied by the Scale Factor
134. Prism layers from the surface mesh for boundary layer calculations Hex core meshing from a tetra tetra prism or surface mesh a Input to ANSYS ICEMCED Tetra The following are possible inputs to ANSYS ICEMCFD Tetra B Spline Curves and Surfaces When the input is a set of B Spline curves and surfaces with prescribed points the mesher approximates the surface and curves with triangles and edges respectively and then projects the vertices onto the prescribed points The B Spline curves allow Tetra to follow discontinuities in surfaces If no curves are specified at a surface boundary the Tetra will mesh triangles freely over the surface edge similarly the prescribed points allow the mesher to recognize sharp corners in the prescribed curves ANSYS provides tools to extract points and curves automatically from the surface model at sharp features Triangular surface meshes as geometry definition For triangular surface representation prescribed curves and points can automatically be extracted from the geometry Though the nodes of the Tetra generated mesh will not match exactly to the nodes of the given mesh it will follow the given geometric shape This 1s especially useful when importing geometry from existing mesh databases or from systems which output stereo lithography STL data The user can combine faceted geometry input with the B Spline Input Full partial surface mesh If the surface mesh 1s available f
135. Projects Simulations ili Geometry Bluntbody 8 25 2004 4 22 22 PM Fe users Sandeep workbench bluntbody 8 25 2004 3 41 16 PM FiYusersySandeepleorkbench DA test 8 6 2004 3 22 15 PM F lTesting 5DlwEl EE Browse Tools ws Options This will open DM _ DesignModeler window Another ANSYS Workbench window will pop up for selection of desired length unit Tutorial Manual ANSYS ICEMCFD CFX Tutorials select Millimeter and press OK The DesignModeler and desired unit window 15 shown in Figure 5 3 Figure 5 3 Workbe nch window ANSYS Workbench Select desired length unit C Inch C Foot C Meter C Centimeter Millimeter Always use default OK 0 00 10 89 21 78 32 66 43 55 c Geometry Creation This software is designed to allow a maximum flexibility to the user about how and where geometry models are created This tutorial covers the creation of a model Simple Static Mixer geometry using DesignModeler the geometry creation tools contained within the ANSYS Workbench itself To create the model numerous alternatives exist Tutorial Manual ANSYS ICEMCFD CFX Tutorials The geometry for this tutorial is divided in two sub steps Revolving the profile curve about the vertical axis of the mixer will generate the main body of the mixer Then the inlet pipe will be generated The detailed description 15 as follows d Creating Main Mix
136. Results and press Apply in Run Solver window Figure 4 259 Hunts ral Run Solver window Solver NASTRAN Mastran File onrod Conrod dat Hun Time Options Post Process and View 2 Results Apply ox Cancel Post Processing of Results After completion of Nastran run the results will be automatically loaded into the post processor Visual3p Click on Variables option in Post processing Tab menu bar In Select Nastran Variables window select Category as Solid and Current Scalar Variable as VonMises Stress as shown in Figure 4 260 The VonMises Stress distribution 15 shown in Figure 4 261 Nastran Tutorials Figure 4 260 Select 3 Nastran MastranV ariables E Variables X window Mode Load Side Hz Load H Category Scalar Variable Curent v onMises Stress Min 0 7 5575 Vector Variable Current mag 1 831 Bre 15 Apply Cancel Note The results shown here are obtained by MSC Nastran Solver Tutorial Manual Nastran Tutorials Figure 4 261 VonMis es Stress VonMiseg Stress Distribu Load 1 uon 7 558 O54 550 O46 542 O38 2655 031 En O23 lt a O15 E 00 5038 791 007 Pee FF FP o c c 41 To display mode shape at Total Translational Frequency select side as Single and variable as Translational Total from the Nastran Variab
137. Speed 1 0 window Accept Cancel Expand Solver Controls gt Runge Kutta Scheme and evaluate the coefficient only at the first stage as show in Figure 3 538 Tutorial Manual Cart3D Figure EIETTTTCC 3 538 File Information Runge Kutta Scheme Case Information Number of stages Solver Controls Runge Kutta Scheme Stagel coefficent 0 0695 Kutta Other controls Eval Gradient 1 Boundary Conditions nig Schem Covergence History Stage2 0 1502 e Partition Information Eval Gradient 0 amp d Stage3 coefficent 0 2898 Windao Eval Gradient o W Stage4 coefficent 0 5060 Eval Gradient o Stageb coefficent 1 0 Eval Gradient o Accept Cancel In Other controls specify the following values for the parameters as in Figure 3 539 CFL number 1 2 Limiter Type MINMOD Flux function van Leer Cut Cell BCtype Agglomerated Normals Number of Multi Grid levels 3 Multi Grid cycle type W cycle Number of pre smoothing passes 1 Number of post smoothing passes 1 Tutorial Manual Figure 3 539 Other Control Windo Solver parameters File Information Case Information Solver Controls Runge Kutta Scheme Other controls Boundary Conditions Covergence History Partition Information Cart3D Other controls CFL number 12 Limiter C No Limiter MINMOD C Ventat s limiter Flux function yan Leer C Colella 1998 Cut Cel
138. Starting the Project From UNIX or DOS window start ANSYS ICEMCFD File P Change Working Dir SICEM ACN docu CFDHelp CFD Tutorial Files gt 3Dpip eJunct Open the tetin file geometry tin c Repairing the Geometry Select Geometry gt Repair Geometry N Build m Diagnostic Topology Repair Geometry window will open as shown in Figure 3 236 Use the default values and click Apply Tutorial Manual Tetra Meshing Figure 3 236 Repair Geometry 9 Repair Geometry Window Repair Surface ated gar Build Topology Tolerance 0 1 Filter by angle Feature angle 30 Filter points Filter curves New Part Name Inherited Create new Part for new curves Part for points Build Topo Parts Selection Method al parts Part by part Single curve cleanup Edge Tolerance 02 Split surface at T connections Split at interior curves Join edge curves Delete Unattached curves and points Apply o Dismiss Note Build Topology creates the curves and points necessary for Mesh generation Tutorial Manual Tetra Meshing d Parts Creation If the Parts are already defined please go to the section Reassigning Mesh Parameters If the Parts are not defined create new Parts and add the appropriate surfaces to the parts Initially all the geometry 15 grouped into the GEOM Referring to Fi
139. Surface Mesh Smoother The triangular surface mesh inherent in the Tetra mesh generation process can also be used independently of the volume mesh The triangular smoother marks all cells that are initially below the quality criterion and then runsthe specified number of smoothing steps on the cells Nodes are moved on the actual CAD surfaces to improve the quality of the cells 2 3 5 Triangular Surface Mesh Coarsener In the interest of minimizing grid points the coarsener reduces the number of triangles in a mesh by merging triangles This operation is based on the maximum deviation of the resultant triangle center from the surface the aspect ratio of the merged triangle and the maximum size of the merged triangle 2 3 6 Triangular Surface Editing Tools For the interactive editing of surface meshes Tetra offers a mesh editor in which nodes can be moved on the underlying CAD surfaces merged or even deleted Individual triangles of the mesh can be subdivided or tagged with different names The user can perform the quality checks as well as local smoothing Diagnostic tools for surface meshes allow the user to fill holes easily in the surface mesh Also there are tools for the detection of overlapping triangles and non manifold vertices as well as detection of single multiple edge and duplicate cells 2 3 7 Check Mesh Check the validity of the mesh using Edit Mesh Check Mesh You can opt to Create subsets for each of the problems so
140. Switch on Vertices gt Numbers and Switch on Geometry gt Points Show Point Names and turn ON Points Select POINTS 9 at the wing tip as the Ref Point Toggle ON the Modify X and for the Vertices to Set selection select the vertices 236 and 237 with the left mouse button and press the middle mouse button to accept the selection Press Apply to move the vertices which will match the X coordinate of the selected vertices to the reference vertex Tutorial Manual Hexa Meshing Figure 3 211 3 Set location window Move Vertices Move Verlices Set Location Method Set Position Rel Location POINTS 3 Set Coordinate system Cartesian X Modify 3 x 497 054 Modify Y Y 12 821 Modify 2 1364 49 M Modify Normal Mormal ta Set 237 236 Apply ck Dismiss Tutorial Manual Figure 3 212 Fuselage Wing Root and Wing Tip curve and corresponding edges Hexa Meshing similarly set the location for vertices 272 and 273 using the Reference Point as POINTS 5 Switch On Geometry gt Curves and switch OFF Geometry gt Points from the Display Tree Select Blocking gt Association gt Associate Edge to Curve Associate the edges to the curves as shown in Figure 3 212 The green colors of the edges indicate that they are associated to a curve These 8 edifes go to these 1 curves Ue L emm bem T These 4 edges
141. The topologic entities in Hexa are color coded based on their properties Colors of Edges White Edges and Vertices These edges are between two material volumes The edge and the associated vertices will be projected to the closest CAD surface between these material volumes The vertices of these edges can only move on the surfaces Blue Edges and Vertices These edges are in the volume The vertices of these edges also blue can be moved by selecting the edge just before it and can be dragged on that edge Green Edges and Vertices These edges and the associated vertices are being projected to curves The vertices can only be moved on the curves to which it is being projected Red Vertices These vertices are projected to prescribed points 3 7 1 Split The Split function which divides the selected block interactively may be applied across the entire block or to an individual face or edge of a block by using the Split face or Split edge options respectively Blocks may be isolated using the Index control 3 7 2 Merge The Merge function works similarly to split blocks one can either merge the whole block or merge only a face or an edge of the block While some models require a high degree of blocking skill to generate the block topology the block topology tools in Hexa allow the user to quickly become proficient in generating a complex block model 3 8 Using the Automatic O grid The O grid creation capability is si
142. This option allows the user to apply the constraint on Curve in directional displacement Translation can be constrained in all the three directions and similarly rotational displacement 5 3 Displacement on Area This option allows the user to apply the constraint on Area in directional displacement as well as Rotational dis placement 5 4 Displacement on Subset This option allows the user to apply the constraint on Subset in directional displacement as well as Rotational displacement 5 5 Define Contact Here there are two options are available for the user 5 5 1 Automatic Detection User has to specify Contact proximity Factor It is a range within which all the elements get selected 5 5 2 Manual Definition Here user has to manually pick the contact and target surfaces for the contact creation 5 6 Define Single Surface Contact This is mainly used for LS Dyna Solver wherein user can pick the contact surface 5 7 Define Initial velocity This allows the user to define the rigid wall by specifying the directional and rotational velocity 5 8 Define Planar Rigid wall User can define Planar Rigid Wall by Specifying the Head and Tail coordinates ANSYS ICEM CFD Al Environment 10 0 User Manual SAS IP Inc 5 2 Chapter 6 Loads In this tab there are several optional available for applying the Load Pressure temperature and gravity Theory Force Distribution follows the following formulation Curve
143. Type Ventat s limiter Flux function van Leer Cut Cell BCtype Agglomerated Normals Number of Multi Grid levels 4 MultiGrid cycletype W cycle Number of pre smoothing passes 1 Tutorial Manual Cart3D Number of post smoothing passes 1 Figur Solver parameters 0 e File Information 3 557 Case Information E Solver Controls Other Hunge Kutta Scheme Co ntr Other controls Boundary Conditions ol Covergence History Wind Partition Information OW Other controls CFL number 1 4 Limiter Type C No Limiter C MIMMDD Ventat s limiter Flux function yan Leer Colella 1998 Cut Cell Agglomerated Normals SubCell Resolution Number of Mult Grid levels Multigrid cycletype M cecle Weeyele Number of pre smoothing passes 1 Number of post smoothing passes 1 Accept Cancel Keep the defaults for Convergence History and Partition Information and press Accept e FlowCart Solver Select Solver refer to Figure 3 558 gt Run Solver to open the Run Solver panel Tutorial Manual Cart3D Figure 3 558 Run Solver window Hun Solver Lart3D solver Number of Cycles 250 No full multiarid y axis spanwise Save Full Hex Result Run Grid Sequencing Level Restart computation Check point IEEE pem Save Cut planes result X Slices Z Slice
144. Unattached Show Double and Show Multiple options for the Curves by right clicking on Curves in the Display Tree Now the circular holes in the frame can be removed Select Geometry gt Repair geometry gt Remove Holes Pick all the circular holes curves one by one and press middle mouse key Figure 3 396 Tutorial Manual Advanced Meshing Tutorials Figure 3 396 Remove holes in Repair Geometry UEM Hepair Surface e Remove Holes Curves 5 hd Apply Dismiss Tutorial Manual Advanced Meshing Tutorials Figure 3 397 Display after removing holes e Defining sizes on curves The user should now make all the curves visible by switching ON Unattached Double and Multiple options for the Curves by right clicking on curves from the model tree Options like Color by count and Show Wide could be switched OFF from the model tree by right clicking on Curves from the model tree to reduce the clutter The user must define mesh sizes before mesh generation Under Mesh gt Set Global mesh size T gt Global mesh parameters fo set Scale factor to 1and Max Element to 512 as Figure 3 398 Press Apply followed by Dismiss to close the window Tutorial Manual Advanced Meshing Tutorials Figure 3 398 i E Global mesh size 9 window Global Mesh Parameters BDT Global Element Scale Factor Scale Factor Display Global Element S
145. Varying the starting mesh division and or Max number of cell refinements can vary this The diagonal points displayed under Outer Bounding Box are the minimum and maximum points of the mesh region bounding box refer to Figure 3 533 For supersonic computations choose the downstream boundary at the end of the body This better represents the experimental setup as in most wind tunnel tests the missile will be supported at the back of the body The fuselage expands from 0 to 350 in the X direction so change the X coordinate in Maximum Diagonal Point to 349 5 Set the Angle Threshold for Refinement to 5 as shown in Figure 3 534 Cart3D Figure 3 534 Mesher a Angle of _ refinement Cart3D files prefix MISSILE changed Single Component Fix Normals Nominal Mesh Radius Body 4 Lenght x ET Starting Mesh Divisions 4 44 Hum of Cell Refinements Compute Parameters Finest Cell Dimensions 1 92 1 82 Hesh Creation Preview Mesh Only C Create and Save Full Mesh Humber of Multi grid levels Outer Bounding Minimum Diagonal Point 524 998238 B33 338884 533 338884 asimum Diagonal Paint 348 5 699 999305 699 999305 ty Define Surface Family Refinement Define All Surface Refinement Number of Buffer Layers 4 E Angle Threshold for BO Refinement Area Weight Normals Number of Cut Planes inet dir 3 EU Number of Cut Pla
146. as 1 e Select the type as Isotropic from the drop down menu e Define the Constant Young s modulus as 17200 e Define the Constant Poisson s ratio as 0 35 e Define the Constant Mass Density as 1 71 9 e Leave other fields as they are and press Apply Note Material Properties branch becomes active in the Display Tree Tutorial Manual LS Dyna Tutorials Define Material Propert Property window Material Name MATT Maternal ID 1 Type isotropic Young s Modulus E Constant L Vanang Value 17200 Poisson s Ratio NU Constan Varying EN Value 0 35 Density RHO Constant iL Value 1 71e 3 e Create another material Named as MAT2 Define Material Property window shown in Figure 4 123 e Material ID can be left as 2 e Select the type as Isotropic from the drop down menu e Define the Constant Young s modulus as 10500 Tutorial Manual LS Dyna Tutorials e Define the Constant Poisson s ratio as 0 3 e Define the Constant Mass Density as 1 71 9 e Leave other fields as they are and Press Apply Figure 4 123 Define Material 2 Define Material Property Property window Material Name MAT2 Material ID Young s Modulus E Consta C Var
147. as an example For the post processing of this CFD simulation the user will also provide ICEM CFD domain file Operations introduced by this example Creating Streamlines along Surfaces Creating Streamlines along 2D Containers Animating Streamlines Creating Movies a CaseDescription The model consists of a space shuttle with the air flowing at a relative angle of attack of 10 degrees As shown in Figure 3 662 Only half of the model is simulated because of the symmetry conditions prevailing Post Processing Tutorials Figure 3 662 Geometry Following are the boundary conditions applied OUTER Pressure far field SYM Free slip OUT Outflow 1 e gradients 0 b Loading CFD results Start Visual3 application From the Set Result Format window select the file format as CFD It will pop up the CFD file selection menu which is shown in Figure 3 663 Tutorial Manual Post Processing Tutorials Figure 3 663 file Samael selection window Add as A Format CFD solution File luttle solution bin Fam Rename family rename Map File gt E Apply Dismiss For the CFD results select the Project directory as Space Shuttle Also select solution bin and family rename as the Solution file and Family rename file respectively Press Accept after verifying all these files to start analysis of the solution file c Creating Streamlines along the Surfaces
148. as shown in Figure 3 241 Select Apply and Dismiss Tutorial Manual Tetra Meshing Figure 3 241 Adjusting the curves Mesh sizes Curve Mesh Size tel Curve Mesh Parameters Method General Select Curve s 5 hd asimum Size ERN Number of Nodes Height 0 Ratio width D 4 size asimum deviation ERN Advanced Bunching Bunching law Spacing 1 Ratio Spacing z Ratio Space Remesh attached surfaces Blank curves with params Apply c Dismiss Tutorial Manual Tetra Meshing When satisfied with the meshing parameters press File gt Save Project to save the changes made to the model before proceeding further h Generating tetrahedral Mesh Choose Mesh gt Volume Meshing gt Tetra gt From on Mesh Volume window will open as shown in Figure 3 242 Tetra Meshing Figure 3 242 Mesh with Mesh Volume tetrahedral Mesh type Tetra Method Smooth mesh Iterations 5 4 Min quality o4 7 Coarsen mesh Iterations CE Worst aspect ratio Smooth transition Factor 2 Options Run as batch process Only visible geometry Part by Part Load mesh after completion Apply ok Dismiss Enable Smooth transition and set Factor 1 2 Press Apply This will initially use the Octree tetra mesher to create the volume and surface mesh Tutori
149. be improved without allowing the prism elements to smooth as well Now set PENTA 6 to Smooth as well Set Up to quality to 0 2 as shown in Figure 3 261 to prevent dramatic warpage of the prism layers Press Apply Tutorial Manual Tetra Meshing Figure 3 261 Smooth Elements a Smooth Elements Globally Globally 0 O F Quality Smoothing iterations 5 E Up to quality 02 Criterion Quality Smooth Mesh Type Smooth Freeze Float 4 3 QUAD 4 Smooth Parts Subsets parts Apply Dismiss Select Info gt Mesh Info Scan the messages area to find the number of elements in the LIVE part the volume elements belong to this part tets prisms The information indicates there are roughly 800 000 elements in the LIVE part Save the project 7 4 8 Building the Hex Core mesh Select Mesh gt Volume Meshing gt From surface mesh Set Mesh type to Hexa Core This will replace the core volume elements with Hex elements of a size 4 0 according to the parameters set in the Mesh sizes for parts window Click Apply to start the mesher Tutorial Manual Tetra Meshing A cut plane through the mesh is shown in Figure 3 262 Figure 3 262 Cut plane showing volume mesh Select File gt Save Project As and give the project a new name This preserves the existing tet prism mesh in one project and the hex core
150. below CURVES 2 POINTS 8 POINTS 10 and POINTS 9 CURVES 3 POINTS 11 POINTS 13 and POINTS 12 Press Dismiss to close the window Line Creation Geometry gt Create Modify Curves gt From Points Select d From Points Press the location selection icon select the Points POINTS 1 and POINTS 2 with the left mouse button and press the middle mouse button to complete the selection Enter the Part name CURVES and Name CURVES 4 Press Apply to create the line similarly create six more lines using the points listed below for each curve The curve names will adjust consecutively for each Curve Geometry Creation CURVES 5 POINTS 1 and POINTS 5 CURVES 6 POINTS 2 and POINTS 6 CURVES 7 POINTS 5 and POINTS 6 CURVES 8 POINTS 8 and POINTS 11 CURVES 9 POINTS 9 and POINTS 12 CURVES 10 POINTS 11 and POINTS 12 Press Dismiss to close the window The Geometry after curve creation 15 shown in Figure 3 12 Switch OFF the Points in the Display Tree window to avoid clutter on the screen Figure 3 12 Geometry after line creation Geometry Creation Surface Creation Geometry gt Create Modify Surface gt From curves Select From Curves icon to open the window shown in Figure 3 13 Figure 3 13 Surface creation from curve Create Madify Surface NE Mame CvL1 0 aIJZee 53018081 Adee Select Curves FUN Surface from curves CUF 5 NUM Tolerance 200 Apply
151. button to select Curve for removing hole Select the outer curve as shown in Figure 4 150 and press Apply to remove the hole Tutorial Manual Nastran Tutorials Figure 4 150 Curve selection to Remove Hole Switch On Surfaces in the Model Tree Re intersection by Build Topology Now the main Surface needs to be segmented at the intersection of the two pipes Build Topology automatically does that so run Repair Geometry S gt Build Diagnostic Topology 52 with default values and press Apply Note User can notice that the yellow curve there has turned blue now since it s attached to surfaces from more than 2 sides Click on Delete Surface icon from Geometry Tab Menubar Click on Select Surface s button to select surfaces to Delete Select the surface highlighted in Figure 4 151 and press Apply This would remove the internal Tutorial Manual Nastran Tutorials piece of the Surface which is not required The user can notice the changes in Color for the Curves around this surface from blue to red after deleting it Figure 4 151 Surfac e to be Delete d Delete The Surface shown in Black Color Change the display of surfaces from solid to wire frame mode by clicking right mouse button on Geometry gt Surfaces and select Wire Frame option from the Display Tree The geometry after deleting the surface 1s shown in Figure 4 152 Tutorial Manual Nastran Tutorials Figure 4 152 Geo
152. can be left as 1 Select Type as Isotropic material Define Young s modulus as 207000 Tutorial Manual Nastran Tutorials Define Poisson s ratio as 0 28 Define Mass Density as 7 8e 9 and leave other fields as default Press Apply Tutorial Manual Nastran Tutorials Figure 4 159 Define Material 5 Define Property j Material Property Material Name STEEL window Material ID Type Isotropic Young s Modulus E Constant Varying Value 207000 Shear Modulus G f Constant C Varying Poisson s Ratio NU Constant C Waning Value 0 28 Mass Density HHO f Constant C Yaning Value 7 8 8 Thermal Expansion Coefficient A 7 Apply vo Dismiss Nastran Tutorials Element Properties Select Define 2D Element Properties icon from the Properties Tab Menu bar Select Part as T4 for applying property Set PID as 1 in the Define Shell Elements window as shown in Figure 4 160 In the Type window select Shell Thickness comes by default Select Material as STEEL Press Apply Nastran Tutorials Define Shell Cod Element window Fart T4 is 5 Properties Type Shell Maternal STEEL m Thickness 6 895001657162 Transversal Shear Material same as above Coupling Membrane Bending Material same as above Bending Moment af Inertia 1 000000 Rato Bending Material lisam
153. can be read by the solver Tutorial Manual Cart3D Press Apply The Cart3D Mesh window appears which asks us about loading the cart3D full mesh as shown in Figure 3 470 press Yes Figure 3 470 Cart3D Mesh window Do vau want ta load the catal Full Mesh Switch on Mesh gt Volumes in the Display Tree widget The final mesh generated can be examined through Mesh gt Cut plane The Define Cut Planes window appears as shown Accept the default settings as shown in Figure 3 471 Tutorial Manual Cart3D Figure 3 471 Cut Plane Display Define Cut Planes a Active Show whale elements Method by Coefficients 0 By 0 D 21 9058008422855155 Fraction Value 0 5 Display back plane with hollow Draw plane normal Draw plane border p Create mesh subset SONDA Apply o Dismiss The mesh viewed using the above parameters is shown in Figure 3 472 Tutorial Manual Cart3D es AOE AAV WARE AAA OA Av VA V Tutorial Manual Cart3D 3 7 2 Tutorial Opera M6 Wing with 0 54 M Overview This tutorial illustrates how to generate a grid in Cart3D around a Wing and how to solve the problem in flowCart Post processing the results 15 also explained Leo This tutorial introduces the fo
154. curve names better With the parameter left at 0 75 press Apply to create POINTS 6 Then change the parameter to 0 25 and press Apply again to create POINTS 7 Tutorial Manual Geometry Creation Press Dismiss to close the selection window Geometry gt Delete Curve Select X Delete Curves and toggle ON Delete permanently Select the curves CURVES 0 and CURVES 1 and press Apply Arc Creation Geometry Create Modify Curve Arc through 3 points Select Arc through 3 Points to open the Arc from 3 Points window Make sure Point Names are being displayed by right clicking in the Display Tree on Points gt Show Point Names Select the points POINTS 5 POINTS 2 and POINTS 6 Enter the Part as CURVES and the Name as CURVES 0 Press Apply to create the arc similarly create three other arcs by using the following points CURVES 1 POINTS 6 POINTS 3 and POINTS 7 CURVES 2 POINTS 7 POINTS 1 and POINTS 4 CURVES 3 POINTS 4 POINTS 0 and POINTS 5 Press Dismiss to close the window Surface Creation Geometry gt Create Modify Surface gt From curves Select From Curves to open the Select Curves window Turn OFF the Points Geometry for a better view Also turn OFF the curve names for a better view Curves gt Show Curve Names Select the two curves shown in Figure 3 23 with the left mouse button and press the middle mouse button to complete the selection Assign the Part as SYM and Name as SYM 1 Enter a to
155. deviation 0 Blank surfaces with params Apply o Dismiss Click the Select surface s icon and select the hemispherical surface at the tip see Figure 3 514 with the left mouse button Middle click to accept the selection Specify a Maximum size of 0 25 as shown in Figure 3 515 Cart3D Figure 3 514 Surface Selected Tutorial Manual Cart3D Figure 3 515 Surface Mesh Surface Mesh Size al Size window Suface s 8007 0 WA Maximum size 0 25 Height 0 7 Height 0 Number of layers H Tetra size ratio 0 size 0 deviation 0 Blank zurfaces with params Apply ck Dismiss Extract the hard curves and points on the geometry using Build Diagnostic Topology Select Geometry gt Repair Geometry The Repair Geometry window opens in the default option of Build Diagnostic Topology as shown in Figure 3 516 Use the defaults and press Apply Cart3D Figure 3 51 6 Repair Geometry Build Topology Window 9 Repair Surface D a si Build Topology Tolerance 12 Filter hy angle Feature angle 30 m Filter points Filter curves Part Inherited Create new Part for new curves Part for new points Build Topo Parts Selection Method Al partz Part by part Single curve cleanup Single Edge Tolerance 04 Split surface at T connections Split at in
156. differences in solutions may be attributed to the changes in the geometry rather than to any dissimilarity in the grids When finished looking at the results save the unstructured mesh Pre Mesh gt Convert to Unstruct Save the project and File gt Exit or continue with the next tutorial Tutorial Manual Hexa Meshing 3 2 4 3D Pipe Junction Overview In this tutorial example the user will generate a mesh for a three dimensional pipe junction After checking the quality of the first mesh the user will create O grid in the blocking to improve mesh quality a Summary of Steps The Blocking Strategy Tutorial Manual Hexa Meshing Starting the Project Creating Parts starting Blocking Blocking the Geometry Projecting the Edges to the Curves Moving the Vertices Generating the Mesh Checking the Mesh Quality Creating an O grid in the Blocking Verifying and Saving the Mesh b The Blocking Strategy The strategy for this first three dimensional example 15 fairly simple First cut twwo blocks from the initial block one each for each half cylinder forming L shaped configuration Then create an O grid to improve the mesh quality Hexa Meshing Figure 3 93 3D Pipe Geometr y c Starting the Project Start ANSYS ICEMCFD and Change working directory to ACN docu CFDHelp CFD_ Tutorial Files 3DPi peJunction Select File gt Geometry gt Open and select the tetin file ge
157. displayed and modified A given subset can contain any number of different geometry types given entity can belong to more than one subset 2 4 2 Mesh Controls display of all mesh types points node elements lines bars shells tris or quads and volumes tetras pyramids prisms hexas Subsets within this category are the same as for Geometry but contain only mesh element types 2 4 3 Parts entities geometry or mesh are associated to a given part An entity cannot belong to more than one part With this association groups of entities regardless of type can be toggled on and off Parts have a specific color to discern them from other parts Parts can be made sub categories of assemblies created by right mouse selecting on Parts Individual parts can then be dragged and dropped into the assembly Toggling the assembly on off will turn on off all the parts within the assembly as for any category sub category 2 4 4 The Message window The Message window contains all the messages that ANSYS ICEMCFD writes out to keep the user informed of internal processes The Message window displays the communicator between the GUI and the geometry and meshing functions It is important to keep an eye on the Message window because it will keep the user informed of the status of operations Any requested information such as measure distance surface area etc will be reported in the message window Also internal commands
158. exit selection mode right or middle mouse key in order to change some options The selections in this and other tutorials are based on Auto Pick Mode being turned on Please leave on for the remainder of this tutorial Hexa Meshing In the Split Block panel change Split Method to Prescribed Point as shown in Figure 3 63 Figure 3 63 Split Block 3 Split Block Window ecu 2 8 d Q e Split Block Block Select All Visible C Selected Black die Edge 11 13 1 Project vertices Split Method Split Method Prescribed point Point 5 t Apply ck Dismiss Now select either Split Block 4X or Select Edge s and select any horizontal edge top or bottom edge Then Tutorial Manual Hexa Meshing select PNTS 1 at the front of the bumper The new edge will automatically be created as in Figure 3 64 Note how the new edge intersects the point Note At any point in time while in selection mode you can toggle on dynamic mode by selecting F9 This may be necessary in order to zoom in to get a closer view of the points Toggling F9 again will return to selection mode Figur e EU uid PNT 3 64 P d First ee sense Em Split P i T572 Jl pists m PUTS 13 PNTS j 3 In the same manner make one more vertical split at the rear of the car choose prescribed point PNTS 10 and two horizontal splits at the top and bottom of the vehicle PNTS 5 and PNTS 12 as
159. factor of 2 2 6 ANSYS ICEM CFD Al Environment 10 0 User Manual SAS IP Inc Section 2 2 Tetra Generation Steps Figure 2 5 Full Tetra enclosing the geometry ANSYS ICEM CFD Al Environment 10 0 User Manual SAS IP Inc 227 Chapter 2 Tetra Figure 2 6 Full Tetra enclosing the geometry In wire frame node L at M s oe j Fa 4 F n M it 1 EE RT Ex K E des T ii n al m TM IX LE T it as s Fa Li te i 1 ra I b LI pM BF Mri uv m Au CS d P 5 gt ANSYS ICEM CFD Al Environment 10 0 User Manual SAS IP Inc 2 8 Section 2 2 Tetra Generation Steps Figure 2 7 Cross section of the Tetra to show how Tetra are fit in around geometry After this is done Tetra makes the mesh conformal that is it guarantees that each pair of adjacent cells will share an entire face The mesh does not yet match the given geometry so the mesher next rounds the nodes of the mesh to the prescribed points prescribed curves or model surfaces Tetra then cuts away all of the me
160. faq faq_top ic 8 html 1 1 How are Close Holes and Remove Holes different 1 1 1 Close Holes Use Close Holes if the hole is bounded by more than one surface For example look at Figure 1 1 below The yellow curves represent the boundary of the hole From the figure it is clear that this hole is bounded by more than one surface Figure 1 2 shows the geometry after Close Holes is completed A new surface is created to close the hole ANSYS ICEM CFD Al Environment 10 0 User Manual SAS IP Inc Chapter 1 CAD Repair Figure 1 1 Close Hole B 1 1 2 Remove Holes Use Remove Holes if the hole lies entirely within a single surface such as a trimmed surface For example look at Figure 1 3 The two yellow curve loops represent the boundaries of the holes which lie entirely in one surface Figure 1 4 shows the geometry after Remove Holes is completed for one of the holes The existing surface is modified by removing the trim definition 1 2 ANSYS ICEM CFD Al Environment 10 0 User Manual SAS IP Inc Section 1 2 How do Fill Trim and Blend work in Stitch Match Edges Figure 1 3 Before Remove Holes Figure 1 4 After Remove Holes 1 2 How do Fill Trim and Blend work in Stitch Match Edges Consider the case as shown in Figure 1 5 Geometry with a gap The following figures explain how these work ANSYS ICEM CFD Al Environment 10 0 User Manual SAS IP Inc 1 3 Chapter 1 CAD Repair Figure 1 5 Ge
161. fio ignore Wall Thickness Triangle tolerance 0 001 Unitless tri tolerance Apply ox Dismiss From the Display Tree widget right click on Surfaces gt Tetra Sizes and Curves gt Curve Tetra sizes This displays icons Tutorial Manual Tetra Meshing representing the maximum element sizes specified on the entities e Setsurface mesh size The meshing can be adjusted on the different parts of the model via Mesh Set Surface Mesh Size Make only the SYMM part visible from the Display Tree widget Select and click v on the keyboard to select the visible surfaces Set Maximum size 2 as shown in Figure 3 229 Press Apply Make only CUBE and SPHERE visible from the Display Tree widget Select e uu click v on the keyboard to select the visible surfaces Set Maximum size l Press Apply followed by Dismiss to close the window The effects of the modification of the values in the params screen can be seen on the model Make all Parts visible from the Display Tree widget Tetra Meshing Figure 3 229 Setting the mesh sizes Surface Mesh 5ize a for the selected surface parts Suface s GEOMMOGE M Maximum size 2 Height ratio 0 Number of layers fo y Tetra size ratio 0 Minimum size 0 deviation 0 Blank surfaces with params Apply Dismiss f Set Curve Mesh Size o Y similarly select Mesh gt Set Curve Mesh Size A to open
162. for noncontorming Interfaces Create in all datasets BE Tutorial Manual Post Processing Tutorials Make sure that the Nodes radio button 15 selected in order to ensure the seeds will be from node points Ensure that the Exclude edge nodes are checked to exclude edge nodes from the choice of seeds Leave 10 as the desired value for the seeds into the Number of seeds text box After feeding this information click on Apply to create the streamlines in the model Figure 3 666 Figure 3 666 Density Streams 22 based OUT e surface 1 This will update the Streams branch of the Display Tree Expand the Streams option user will find the entry of Group 1 The different options for the stream lines are available on right mouse click on this Group 1 entry of Display tree select Multiple colors to change the colors of the streams From the Group 1 options select Remove permanently option The use will be prompted to confirm about the delete Group 1 entry of Streams After pressing Confirm it will delete the streams d Creating Streamlines along 2D container Normally a user would either define the seed through a surface or within a 2D container plotted on the 3D window It s difficult to seed it through the 3D container Tutorial Manual Post Processing Tutorials Select Define Cut Plane option from the Post processing Tab menu bar In Define Dynamic Cut Plane window from Methods select Middle
163. gd levels 5 E Uula Fox Bal rarum Pore xk airum birra Pant bx Define uri sce Tardy l igfiemeni Salata Fichero Hunter of Bute Layers 5 x Ange Tieshi e Leave Fix Normals enabled This will fix the orientation of the triangles such that their normals are pointing outward Choose Nominal Mesh Radius Body Length X 20 Starting Mesh Divisions 3 3 3 and Max number of Cell Refinements 12 Click Compute Parameters This saves the mesh in the local directory converts in into Cart3D format and finds the intersections if any This is required to convert the triangulation to Cart3D tri format even if there 1s Tutorial Manual Cart3D only one component present At the end it displays the Finest Cell Dimensions as shown in Figure 3 474 Figure 3 474 L art3D Mesher em Cart3D Mesher window Cart3D files prefix WINGI Single Component Fis Normals Nominal Mesh Radius Body on a Lobos E Starting Mesh Divisions 3 23 Num af Cell Refinements 1 2 E Compute Parameters Finest Cell Dimensions 0 00737 x D 00 737 000737 Hesh Creation Preview Mesh Only Create and Save Full Mesh Number of Multi grid levels 5 Outer Bounding Box Minimum Diagonal Point 23 4641 05 30 1734 Evi Maximum Diagonal Point 30 882856 30 1 73431 Define Surface Family Hefinement Define All Surface Refinemen
164. go te these 3 curves T es aget to these 3 curves h Creating the O grid around the fuselage and wing Now we will create an O grid around the body around the volume part SOLID to refine the boundary layer around the geometry In the Index Control press Reset to display the entire blocking Tutorial Manual Figure 3 213 O grid selection Figure 3 214 Blocking after creating O grid Hexa Meshing Select Blocking gt Split Block 8 gt O grid Block Toggle ON Around Block s Press add to Select block s icon amp then press the part selection icon in the selection menu that appears to the upper right This will bring up a list of the current parts Select SOLID and press Accept This will select all the blocks in the part SOLID as shown in Figure 3 213 Then press Apply to create the O grid The O grid should appear as shown in Figure 3 214 Tutorial Manual Hexa Meshing Setting Mesh Parameters on Surfaces for an Initial Mesh Press Mesh Set Surface Mesh Size The window shown in Figure 3 215 should appear Enter surface selection and box selects all the surfaces of the model Turn Surfaces ON in the Display Tree and right click on Geometry gt Surfaces gt Hexa sizes to display the Hexa icons Set the Maximum size to 300 height to 300 and the height ratio to 1 For a Hexa mesh all 3 of these need to be filled in Press Apply and you will see the icons update
165. i Association of Edges Now user will associate edges to corresponding curves to capture the geometry LS nr ee Tutorial Manual Advanced Meshing Tutorials select Blocking gt Association 6 Associate edge to curve It will open the window as shown in Figure 3 440 Figure 3 440 Blocking A Associate edges to curve Associations window Edit Associations CEOS DROS Associate Edge gt Curve Edge s 105 850 AS LLL Curvels EDGE 12 5 ies Project vertices Project to surface intersection Project ends ta curve intersection El Apply ox Dismiss Select edges 86 94 94 114 114 90 90 82 82 112 112 86 and associate it to EDGEO as shown in Figure 3 441 Figure 3 441 Association of edges to curves Tutorial Manual Advanced Meshing Tutorials Select edges 105 85 85 93 93 107 107 89 89 81 81 105 and associate it to EDGE12 Select edges 126 130 130 138 138 134 134 126 and associate it to EDGEA similarly select edges 125 129 129 137 137 133 133 125 and associate it to EDGEIO After association of edges it will look like as shown in Figure 3 442 Association of edges to curves Tutorial Manual Advanced Meshing Tutorials j Moving vertices Now user will move the vertices to to improve the quality of blocks Select Blocking gt Move vertices Move vertex rad
166. improve the quality of hybrid mesh change the Number of smoothing iterations to 10 Assign Up to quality value to 0 4 Press Apply Figure 3 377 Quality before Smoothing Tutorial Manual 352 264 176 BU 0 Advanced Meshing Tutorials Replat Quality 4 3 version Reset 8169606 Show hax 1 Solid Subset Done 0 019 012 022 051 041 051 061 1 Tutorial Manual Advanced Meshing Tutorials Figure 3 378 Smooth Elements Smooth globally window c NN L S Quality Smoothing iterations 2 E Up to quality 0 4 Criterion Quality Smooth Mesh Type Smooth Freeze TETRA_4 T 8 3 QUAD_4 PYHA 5 Smooth Parts Subsets Method al parts Y Refresh Histogram Advanced Options Laplace smoothing Mot just worst 1X Allow node merging Allow refinement Group bad hex regions Ignore PrePoints Surface Fitting Prism W arpage Ratia 15 Violate geometry Tolerance 0 1 Relative Tolerance Apply ox Dismiss Figure 3 379 Quality after Smoothing Tutorial Manual Advanced Meshing Tutorials 352 Quality 4 3 version 264 0 255703 1 176 BU 0 0 019 012 022 051 041 051 06 03 1 The quality of the hybrid mesh after smoothing is shown in Figure 3 379 Select Done to quit the smooth histogram window h S
167. inherent in the Tetra mesh generation process can also be smoothed independently of the volume mesh The triangular smoother marks all elements that are initially below the quality criterion and then runs the Tutorial Manual Tetra Meshing specified number of smoothing steps on the elements Nodes are moved on the actual CAD surfaces to improve the aspect ratio of the elements Triangular Surface Mesh Coarsener In the interest of minimizing grid points the coarsener reduces the number of triangles in a mesh by merging triangles This operation 1s based on the maximum deviation of the resultant triangle center from the surface the aspect ratio of the merged triangle and the maximum size of the merged triangle Triangular Surface Editing Tools For the interactive editing of surface meshes ANSYS ICEMCFD Tetra offers a mesh editor in which nodes can be moved on the underlying CAD surfaces merged or even deleted Individual triangles of the mesh can be subdivided or added to different parts The user can perform the quality checks as well as local smoothing Diagnostic tools for surface meshes allow the user to fill holes easily in the surface mesh Also there are tools for the detection of overlapping triangles and non manifold vertices as well as detection of single multiple edges and duplicate elements Mesh Periodicity Periodicity definition for ANSYS ICEMCEFD Tetra meshes 15 well suited for rotating turbomachinery flow so
168. main gui and move Post processing c Displaying surface flow for the selected surface The surface flow for the surface can be calculated and displayed in the following ways d Display lines for the selected surface From the model tree select the surface FUSEL by issuing a right click on the name From the display options choose Compute Surface Flow which invokes the panel in Figure 3 678 Click in the Display Lines check box Press Apply This would render the selected surface with colored flow lines as shown in Figure 3 679 Tutorial Manual Post processing Figure 3 678 Compute Surface Flow Surface Flow Iw Display lines with color ESSEN Display LIC with Texture size 1000000 Coloring type level Enhance consrast Apply Dismiss Tutorial Manual Post processing Figure 3 679 Compute Surface Flow Display Lines Mach number 94 422 236 051 965 679 494 308 122 9363 7506 564 3791 1934 007616 e e ee pm MMMM aad a A e Line Intergral Convolution LIC of the selected surface From the Compute Surface Flow panel Figure 3 678 check the Display LIC check box Retain the default resolution available in the use texture size text box Choose with grey color to display the LIC in contrasting light and grey bands The line integral convolution will be displayed as shown in Figure 3 680 Tutor
169. oam Tutorial Manual Nastran Tutorials 4 3 Nastran Tutorial 4 3 1 T Pipe This exercise includes meshing of T Pipe geometry by simplifying the thickness using Mid Surface technique and writing the input file dat to perform Modal Analysis in NASTRAN The visualization of results in Post Processor Visual3p 1s also explained The geometry of the model is shown in Figure 4 141 Figure 4 141 T Pipe Geometry Note Before proceeding to tutorials user is advised to go through the Appendix of this tutorial manual for some important information which will help to understand tutorials better The tutorial input files to do these tutorials are available at the following location of your AI Environment installation Tutorial Manual Nastran Tutorials For windows ACN docu FEAHelp AI Tutorial Files For Unix SICEM ACN J docu FEAHelp AI Tutorial Files User can copy the directory AI Tutorial Files to their local area before starting the tutorials or he can browse to this location while doing the tutorial Also fully solved tutorials with results obtained from AI Nastran are available in Solved Tutorials directory under Tutorial Files directory a Summary of Steps Launch AI Environment and load geometry file Geometry Editing Midsurface model Delete Geometry Remove Holes Re Intersection by Build Topology Mesh Parameters and Meshing Mesh Sizing Meshing Material and Element Prope
170. of inlet and outlet surfaces 29 4 0 5 OUT240 6 oo OUTL 0 1 UE 2 OUT5 n d 7 INLET B Tutorial Manual Tetra Meshing Appendix similarly add each curve to the part of the surface they circumscribe by right clicking on Parts gt Create part gt Create Part by Selection Then click on the to select the desired option Now the toolbar selection window will pop up on the screen Toggle OFF selection for points surfaces and materials Display only curves in the Display Tree widget and select the remaining curves by drawing a box around them using the left mouse button Continue by adding them to the WALL part 2 Defining the Material Point To perform the cutter operation in the tetra mesh generation process the user needs to define material points inside and outside the volume Since user is interested flow within the model the material inside the volume will be called LIVE and the material outside the volume ORFN FG yam Select Geometry gt Create body gt Material point Figure 3 282 Creating the LIVE volume part oT 240 g OUT4A D 5 00 4 1 1 pRLIVE IHTLET U 8 Tetra Meshing Appendix Select a point on INLET and a second point diagonally opposite the first point on OUTI and Press Apply The material point LIVE will appear inside the volume as shown in Figure 3 282 Rotate the model to make sure that it s within the vol
171. of the number of blocks in the model 3 6 2 Multi Block Structured Mesh Output Used for solvers that accept multi block structured meshes the multi block structured mesh output option will produce a mesh output file for every block in the topology model For example if the block model has 55 blocks there will be 55 output files created in the output directory Additionally without merging any of the nodes at the block interfaces the Output Block option allows the user to minimize the number of output files generated with the multi block structured approach 3 7 Blocking Strategy With Hexa the basic steps necessary to generate a hexahedral model are the same regardless of model com plexity The blocking topology once initialized can then be modified by splitting and merging the blocks as well as through the use of an operation called O grid Refer to the next section While these operations are performed directly on the blocks the blocks may also go through indirect modification by altering the sub en tities of the blocks i e the vertices edges faces Upon initialization Hexa creates one block that encompasses the entire geometry The subsequent operations under the Blocking menu of developing the block model referred to as blocking the geometry may be per formed on a single block or across several blocks ANSYS CFD Al Environment 10 0 User Manual SAS IP Inc 3 3 Chapter 3 Hexa Note Note
172. on the warpage of the quad faces of the prism This 15 based on the worst angle between two triangles that make up the quad face Skew This histogram is based upon calculations of the maximum skewness of a hexahedral or quadrilateral element The skewness 15 defined differently for volume and surface elements For a volume element it is obtained by taking all pairs of adjacent faces and computing the normals The maximum value thus obtained is normalized so that 0 corresponds to perpendicular faces and 1 corresponds to parallel faces mo A Tutorial Manual Tetra Meshing Appendix Custom quality One can define one s own quality definition by going to Diagnostics gt Quality metrics Select the Diagnostic as custom quality and go for Define custom quality One can change the values there to suit his her needs Figure 24 3 299 Replat Histogra Reset m 1 Show window v Solid b Subset D Done 0 0 1 0 2 0 3 0 4 0 5 0 7 0 8 0 9 Histogram The element Quality will be displayed within this histogram where 0 represents the worst aspect ratio and 1 represents the best aspect ratio The user may modify the display of the histogram by adjusting the values of Min X value Max X Value Max Y Height andNum Bars by pressing the Replot Replot If any modifications have been made to any of the parameters within the Smooth mesh globally window or to the mo
173. open the Explicit Location window Give the Part name POINTS and the Name POINTS 0 Enter the co ordinates 5 10 0 and press Apply to create the point Switch on the Points in the Display Tree window To see the names of the points use the right mouse button to select Points Show Point names in the Display Tree window Select Fit Window ES from the main menu Use the right mouse button to zoom out if needed The newly created point name would be displayed as POINTS 0 similarly enter the coordinate as 10 5 0 and enter the name as POINTS 1 Then press Apply Then create 2 more additional points at the following locations The names will automatically adjust as shown below POINTS 10 20 5 0 POINTS 11 5 20 0 Press Dismiss to close the window The Geometry after point creation is shown in Figure 3 18 in Isometric view Figure 3 18 Points created so far Geometry Creation POINTS 3 1 POINTS 2 POINTS 0 Arc Creation Geometry gt Create Modify Curve gt Arc through 3 points Select Arc Through 3 Points to open the Arc from 3 Points window Then select POINTS 1 POINTS 0 and POINTS 2 with the left mouse button and press the middle mouse button to complete selection Enter the Part as CURVES and Name as CURVES 0 Press Apply to create the arc similarly create another arc called CURVES 1 from points POINTS 1 POINTS 3 and POINTS 2 Press Dismiss to close the window Note Turn on
174. operations Multigrid preparation running reorder and mgPrep Obtaining surface triangles from geometry data Running the solver for AOA 5 and Mach 3 Cart3D Computing force and moment information Visualizing the results in Post processing a Starting the Project Load ANSYS ICEM CFD Change the working directory by File gt Change Working Dir and set the location to the folder missile Note It is preferable to create a separate folder missile and put the missile tin geometry file in that folder before performing this tutorial b Creating Faceted Data from Geometry The model has a Fuselage Front Fins and Back Fins The fuselage can be considered as one component and each fin as one component First the surface triangulation for the fuselage will be created The tetra mesher can be run separately for each component Thus any unforeseen difficulty in creating the surface triangulation the model as a whole will be avoided The user has to create a separate tetin file for each component Note To skip the surface triangle generation process proceed the Mesh Generation Preview Only Also put the missile uns domain file into the missile directory Load the tetin file missile tin In the Display Tree switch on Surface gt Solid and Wire Under Parts in the Display Tree select Parts gt Hide and switch on the Part Body as shown in Figure 3 511 Figure 3 511 Model Display Tree widget
175. part Estrude into orphan region Extra Options Name Value Apply Dismiss Tetra Meshing p Generating the Prism Mesh Select Mesh gt Mesh Prism Save overwrite the project as prompted This opens the Mesh with Prisms window as in Figure 3 245 Figure 3 245 1 Mesh with prism window Mesh with Prisms 2 Select Parts for Prism Layer Smoothing Options Number of surface smoothing steps Triangle quality type hd Humber of volume smoothing 2 steps Mas directional smoothin i 4 First layer smoothing steps Load mesh after completion Apply ck Dismiss Click on Select Parts for Prism Layer In the Mesh sizes for parts window enable Prism for CYL1 and CYL2 Parts as shown in Figure 3 246 Click Apply and Dismiss Figure 3 246 Selecting parts for prism mesh generation Tutorial Manual Tetra Meshing Mesh sizes for parts 44444 xj Part Prism Size Height Height Ratio Num Layers Tetra Size Ratio Min Size Max Deviation Int w all Split Wall A OE go o go 0 EE O o W y E EE E Show size params using ref size Apply Dismiss In the Mesh with Prisms window see Figure 3 245 enable Load mesh after completion and select Apply to start the prism me
176. point file p Save Cut planes result Slices 05061420 Y Slices 0400 Z Slices 0 75 0 75 Run user command Command Apply o Dismiss 5 Click on Apply to start the solver and output the results files Tutorial Manual Cart3D 6 The convergence history plot window should automatically open f Visualizing the results FlowCart writes two output files 1 BOMBER c3d i triq Contains Pressure Velocity and Density extrapolated to the surface triangles This can be converted to domain file format via Edit gt Cart3D Tri file gt Domain file The resultant file will be BOMBER c3d uns slicePlanes dom cut plane results Go to File gt Results gt Open Result File A Select Result Format window pops up as shown in Figure 3 575 Select ICEMCED as the Format Cart3D Figure 3 575 2 Results Window Select Hesult Format DataSet Current Format ICEMCFD File E Structured Grid Unsteady Grid Transient cases only Apply ok Cancel Select the result file surface results dom and Apply to get the default result as shown in Figure 3 576 Tutorial Manual Cart3D Figure 3 576 Density The result Generate d 2213 169 125 8 036 8817 9g474 9031 8588 8145 7702 7259 5816 5373 5930 5487 Clic Computing Force and Moment Aerodynamics and Body forces can be calculated by using the Clic utility Se
177. right mouse button on Shells and select Solid amp Wire Now the mesh should look as shown in Figure 4 179 Figur e 4 179 Mesh in Solid amp Wire mode e Material and Element Properties After getting the mesh the material and element properties should be defined for the model as follows Selection of Material MA Select S Create Material Property icon from Properties Tab Menubar Define the Material Name as STEEL in Define Material Property window shown in Figure 4 180 Material ID can be left as 1 Select Isotropic as the type of the Material Define Young s modulus as 207000 Tutorial Manual Nastran Tutorials Define Poisson s ratio as 0 28 Define Density as 7 8e 9 Leave other fields as it 1s and Press Apply Tutorial Manual Nastran Tutorials Figure 4 180 Define Material c Define Material Property n Property R c window Material Hame STEEL Material ID Type Isotropic Young s Modulus E f Constant C Varving Value 207000 Shear Modulus G Constant Warping Poisson s Ratio NU f Donstant C Varying Value 0 29 Mass Density RHO Constant Varying Value fed Tin SENHCEM Apply Dismiss _ ki Nastran Tutorials f Element Properties 130 Select Define 3D Element Properties from the Properties Tab Menubar Set PID as 1 in the Define Volume Element window as
178. run the Ansys solver in batch mode ANSYS Tutorials Figure 4 9 Run Solver EUIS y window Solver ANSYS Ansys Hun Mode C Interactive 6 Batch 7 Input File Ansys in Output File Tpipe_Ansys cut 5 Working Directory Initial Jobname He 0 Total Workspace 2 Memory Mb Total Database Memony Mb Read start ans at x Startup select Ansys Product amp S Multiphysics Apply ox Dismiss Post Processing of Results Click on the Post Process Results icon from the Solve Options Tab Menu bar which will open the Post Process Results window given in Figure 4 10 Confirm that the Solver is set to Ansys Tutorial Manual ANSYS Tutorials The Ansys Result file should be set to file rst where is the Initial Jobname specified in the previous menu Press Apply to launch the Post processor with the Ansys result file Figure 4 10 Post Process Results 9 Post Process UMS window Solver AN 515 Resul File pipe Ansys tile rst Apply Cancel 41 Click on the variables ae icon from the Post processing tab to display the Select AnsysVariables window Select the pull down next to Mode Hz to display the modal frequencies that resulted from the Ansys solution The numbers near zero are the solutions to the homogeneous equation that result when a numerical met
179. select Smooth mesh globally icon of the Edit Mesh Tab Menu bar In the Criterian Type select Quality and press Apply Right Click Mouse button on any Quality Bar situated at Right hand corner of the GUI and select Reset by Clicking Right Mouse button the Quality histogram will appear as shown in Figure 4 220 Figure 4 220 Quality Histogram before Smoothing Tutorial Manual Min 0 183726 Nastran Tutorials There are six options when we Click the right mouse button on any Histogram Bar as shown in Figure 4 221 Figure 4 221 Replat Histogram Option iu Reset wv Show Solid Subset Done To differentiate the display of element quality click the right mouse on Mesh gt Shell icon in the Display Model Tree and select Color by Quality option Since there are some elements with quality less than 0 2 quality should be improved In the Smooth Elements window shown in Figure 4 222 enter Quality value of 0 4 target quality should always be above the required value so that smoother can select more element i e more freedom to improve quality Accept the default setting and press Apply This will start the smoother which automatically tries to improve the quality to the targeted quality of 0 4 Figure 4 222 Smooth Elements window Nastran Tutorials Smooth Elements rl Globally Quality Smoothing iterations 5 4 Up to quality 04 Criterion Quality Smooth Mesh Type Smooth Fre
180. set Mach number 1 4 Use the other defaults as shown in Figure 3 589 Cart3D Figure Solver parameters _ 3 589 File Information Case Information Case Information pies EC 4 Case Solver Controls WERE loo Informati Boundary Conditions y i attac Covergence History side slip angle 00 Partition Information Free Stream Density 10 Wi ndow Free Stream Sound Speed 10 Accept Cancel ii In Solver Controls gt Other controls set Number of Multi Grid levels 3 Use the other defaults as shown in Figure 3 590 Tutorial Manual Fig ure Solver parameters _ 3 590 File nformation Case Information Other E Solver Controls Runge Kutta Scheme Contro Other controls Boundary Conditions Cavergence History Wi ndo Partition Information Cart3D Other contrals CFL number 1 4 Limiter Type Ma Limiter MINM OD Vental s limiter Flus Fanctian van Leer Colella 1998 Cut Cell Agglomerated Normals C SubCell Resolution Number of Multi Girid levels 3 MultiGrid evcletupe V cucle Ww cucle Number of pre smoathing passes 1 Number af post smoothing passes 1 Accent Cancel Mob 111 In Boundary Conditions gt Directional BC set Y Low and Y High to SYMMETRY Leave the others as default as shown in Figure 3 591 Tutorial Manual Cart3D Fig ure Solver parameters M 3 591 File Information Direct
181. shown in Figure 3 414 Select Measure distance in the upper left hand Utility Menu and then select two locations along the lower and upper curves of the square stick out Note the prescribed elements size is too large to capture this feature Back to Mesh gt Set Global Mesh Size B gt General Parameters 1 Turn on Natural Size check Enabled and change the size to 0 1 This value is multiplied by the Scale factor whose product is the global minimum size Thus 0 1 x 0 2 0 02 is the lower limit of subdivision With Natural Size enabled the tetra mesher will automatically subdivide to smaller elements in this area Tutorial Manual Advanced Meshing Tutorials e Defining Material point Select Geometry gt Create body gt Material point 2 Ca Enter the Part name as LIVE Select 2 again or Select location s and select two locations on the geometry such that the mid point is inside the pipe Verify by turning on Geometry gt Bodies in the Display tree Rotate the model to ensure that LIVE lies inside the pipe Select File gt Save Project f Generating Tetra mesh select Mesh gt Volume Meshing 8 gt From geometry The Mesh Volume panel will appear as in Figure 3 415 Tutorial Manual Advanced Meshing Tutorials Figure 3 415 Mesh Volume g Mesh with Tetrahedral window Mesh type Method PEP Smooth mesh Iterations g quality Ca
182. shown in Figure 4 244 Figure 4 244 Mesh in Solid amp Wire mode Extrusion of Surface mesh In Display Tree make sure that under Mesh tree only Shells is ON and all others are turned OFF Click on E Extrude Mesh icon from Mesh Tab Menubar which pops up Extrude Mesh window as shown in Figure 4 246 Note Before proceeding for extrusion make sure all the line point under mesh in the tree wideget are turned Off and similarly points and lines under Geometry are Turned Off Click Select Element and in the Select Mesh Element window press Select all Surface Element select button and to select the entire Surface mesh elements as shown in Figure 4 245 Nastran Tutorials Figur e 4245 deii OM 0 KL 913 Y amp I SEE Selec t Mesh Elem ent Wind OW Enter the New volume Part Name as EXTRUDED Select the Method of extrusion as Extrude by vector Enter Vector as 0 0 1 Number of Layers as 5 Spacing as 1 and rest of the option as default Press Apply Tutorial Manual Figure 4 246 Extrude Mesh window Switch Off Shell and Geometry under the Display Tree and Switch On Volume gt Solid and Wire the mesh looks as shown in Figure 4 247 Nastran Tutorials Extrude Mesh a Elements lunsselLO New volume part name ESTRUDED v Mew side part name top part name lnheited Extrude mesh Method Extrude by vector Extrude By Vector Vect
183. shown in Figure 3 10 Figure 3 10 The 3D Pipe Junction geometry with dimensions V 7 VE pe TI Biers Vc 100 a Summary of steps Create points then curves from points Create surfaces from curves Curves from Surfaces Surface Intersection Segment surface with the intersection curve Geometry Creation Delete unused segmented surfaces Create material point b Generating the Geometry Point Creation Note Settings gt Selection gt Auto pick mode should be turned OFF for ICEM CFD to behave exactly as this tutorial describes Geometry gt Create Point Explicit Coordinates Select AFE to open the Explicit Locations window Type the Part name POINTS and the Name as POINTS 0 and enter the co ordinates 0 0 0 Press Apply to create the point Switch on the Geometry gt Points in the left side Display Tree window see the names of the points use the right mouse button and select Points Show Point names in the Display Tree window Select Fit Window from the main menu Use the right mouse button to zoom out if needed The created point name will be shown as POINTS 0 similarly enter coordinates as 0 0 50 and enter the name as POINTS 1 next to Name Press Apply Now create the rest of the points listed below by just entering the locations The names continue on from POINTS 1 so they will automatically change as shown below POINTS 2 0 0 50 POINTS 3 0 50 0 POIN
184. shown in Figure 4 181 Select Part as CREATED MATERIAL 2 Note The part CREATED MATERIAL 2 contains the volume mesh which is automatically generated during Tetra meshing The number 2 in the part name CREATED MATERIAL 2 is a random number which might vary with each run of Tetra mesher Select the appropriate part based on the present run Select material as STEEL Press Apply Figure 4 181 Define Volume Define Volume Element Element EMEN window Pat CREATED MATERIA Jay 2 Maternal STEEL vi FID LES Global s Apply ck Dismiss g Constraints and Loads To map the real system of geometric model relevant constraints and loads should be applied on model This can be done as follows Constraints Nastran Tutorials Click on a Displacement on Surface icon from the Constraints Tab Menu bar which will pop up Create Displacement on Surface window as presented in Figure 4 182 As the Constraints has to apply on the Surface switch off Shells option of Mesh menu in the Display Model Tree and Switch on Surfaces In Create Displacement on Surface window enter Name as CNSTI Toggle ON all options UX UY UZ ROTX ROTY and ROTZ and select the surfaces shown in Figure 4 183 and Figure 4 184 and press Apply From Displacement branch right mouse click and select show all This will show the constraint symbols placed on the target surfaces Figure 4 184 Figure 4 182 Create Displacement on Surface
185. tet prism mesh The mesh will be for the fluid region surrounding a general fin configuration as well as for the surface of the fin The user will define a mesh density region for mesh control around the fin Finally after meshing user will perform Laplace smoothing which generally provides more uniformly spaced mesh The Hex Core utility will then be used to obtain a bulk of hex elements in the main volume Figure 3 252 The geometry with the labeled Surfaces of the exterior domain Top The labeled BOX Surfaces of the fin Bottom INLET PRESS a Summary of steps Starting the project Repairing the Geometry Tutorial Manual Tetra Meshing Assigning Mesh sizes Generating Tetrahedral Prism mesh Diagnostics Generating Hex Core mesh Smoothing Saving the project b Starting Project From UNIX or DOS window start ANSYS ICEMCED File gt Change Working Dir to ACN docu CFDHelp CFD Tutorial Files gt FinCo nfig Open the geometry file geometry tin c Repairing the geometry Repair the geometry via Geometry gt Repair Geometry 4 gt Build 4 Diagnostic Topology Run Build Topology with the default parameters Press Apply d Parts Creation If the project only contains one part the user needs to create and assign separate parts for surfaces curves and material body The surface parts BOX INLET LEAD OUTLET PRESS SUCT SYMM TIP and TRAIL are indicated in Figure 3 252 Enabl
186. that they can be fixed later or can opt to Check fix each one of them Using subset manipulation and mesh editing techniques diagnose the problem and resolve it through merging nodes splitting edges swapping edges delete create cells etc For ease of use when working with subsets it is usually helpful to add elements to the subset in order to see what is happening around the problem elements This is done via a right click on the Subset name in the Display tree and then adding layers of elements to the subset It can also be useful to display the element nodes and or display the elements slightly smaller than actual size Both of these options can be accessed via a right click on Mesh from the Tree widget Keep in mind that after mesh editing the diagnostics should be re checked to verify that no mistakes were made There are several Errors as well as Possible problems checks The descriptions of these are as follows Duplicate elements This check locates cells that share all of their nodes with other cells ofthe same type These cells should be deleted Note Note that deletion during the automatic fix will remove one of the two duplicate elements thus eliminating this error without creating a hole in the geometry ANSYS CFD Al Environment 10 0 User Manual SAS IP Inc 2 13 Chapter 2 Tetra Uncovered faces This check will locate any face on a volume element that neither touches a surface element nor touches an othe
187. the shortest edge of the initial block The larger the factor the longer the radial edge and the smaller the central block Associate The next step 15 to associate block entities to geometric entities Most of the time this means associate edges to curves This will make sure hard features are captured Other options are to associate vertices to points to capture sharp corners and faces to surfaces if the default face projection where nodes are projected to the nearest point in the normal direction to the nearest surface fails to give proper results Move vertices Vertices are typically moved on to the geometry Computation will automatically move vertex nodes to the nearest point in the normal direction on the geometry It s always best to manually position the node on to the geometry rather than leave it up to the default projection Tutorial Manual Hexa Meshing Color Coding All vertices and edges are color coded depending on their constraint to the geometry Vertex movement depends on this constraint White Edges and Vertices These edges are either on the boundary or between two material volumes The edge and the associated vertices will be projected to the closest CAD during pre mesh computation White vertices can only be moved on active surfaces Blue Cyan Edges and Vertices Internal between blocks of the same volume Blue vertices can be moved by selecting the edge just before it and can be dragged along that edge d
188. the Display Tree widget Accept the defaults in the Define Cut Planes window as shown in Figure 3 552 Figure 3 552 Define Cut Planes a Cutplane Active Method by Coefficient 0 00020 a p izis4970537224456 Fraction Value 0 5 Display back plane with hollow Draw plane normal Draw plane border Coo E Create mesh subset Cart3D Enable Volumes from the Mesh branch in the Display Tree widget The mesh viewed using the above parameters 1s shown in Figure 3 553 E LLL UP LPS RO ROC NO LIN Ih Py CRB WE l TN RIS LL SIME pos LI ME NL DL EPIRI LS mr T LM BEN I TIN OMM Yyl n n E H HE LX ILC d RR NE NINOS REN EE MERE h LN NIA HAN Tutorial Manual Cart3D d Setup Flow Cart Parameters In the Cart3D Menu select Solver Click on Define solver params if the panel doesn t open automatically Solver parameters window appears as shown in Figure 3 554 Figure Solver parameters 0 3 554 File Information File Information Case Information Sd t Solver Controls Mesh File BJET c3d mesh mg arame E iti Sic duod Mesh Info Fil BJET_c3d mesh Inte Window Partitio
189. the Part field Click on Select entities select the surface at the min X end and middle click to accept Note that selection mode is still active Enter OUTLET the Part field Click on Select entities select the surface at the max X end and middle click to accept Enter SYMP in the Part field Click on Select entities select the max Y surface at the base of the body and middle click to accept Enter BODY the Part field Click on Select entities select the surfaces of the body either one by or with the drag box and middle click to accept and again to cancel out Right click on Parts in the Display Tree widget select Reassign Colors and Good Colors The surfaces should be grouped as in Figure 5 50 Note the three surfaces of the outer box are not displayed Click on Choose an Item and select the min X top and bottom curves shown in and press the middle mouse button ANSYS ICEMCFD CFX Tutorials Click on Apply to create the surface Figure 5 50 Surface Parts Build Diagnostic Topology Go to the Geometry tab menu bar and select Delete Curve Press hotkey on the keyboard to select and delete all the curves in model similarly select Delete Point and press the hotkey a on the keyboard to select and delete all the points Creating Curves and Points To create the necessary curves and points Click on Repair Geometry 5j from the Geometry t
190. the Solid button is turned on the elements marked in the histogram bars will be displayed with solid shading Determinant The Determinant check computes the deformation of the elements in the mesh by first calculating of the Jacobian of each hexahedron and then normalizing the determinant of the matrix A value of 1 represents a perfect hexahedral cube while a value of 0 is a totally inverted cube with a negative volume The mesh quality measured on the x axis of all elements will be in the range from 0 tol If the determinant value of an element is 0 the cube has one or more degenerated edges In general determinant values above 0 3 are acceptable for most solvers The y axis measures the number of elements that are represented in the histogram This scale ranges from 0 to a value that 1s indicated by the Height The subdivisions among the quality range are determined by the number of assigned Bars Angle The Angle option checks the maximum internal angle deviation from 90 degrees for each element Various solvers have different tolerance limits for the internal angle check If the elements are distorted and the internal angles are small the accuracy of the solution will decrease It 1s always wise to check with the solver provider to obtain limits for the internal angle threshold Volume The Volume check will compute the internal volume of the elements in the model The units of the volume will be displayed in the unit that was
191. the display control options for Dynamic Surface select 2D Vector with single color The uniform color can be set by first invoking Modify Drawing Properties on the display control properties mentioned above On the ensuing panel under Uniform Colors section choose the 2D Vector Plot color Note One can control the Vector size and Arrow size by scaling the corresponding properties to desired value with the options Vector size and Arrow Tutorial Manual Post Processing Tutorials size from the Properties tab A value of 0 4 for Vector size gives good results here Figure 3 657 Dynamic surface display with vectors of uniform color pressure l l 1 066 0 3156 0 7650 0 6143 0 4637 lacs 1 5 0 01193 0 1358 O 20494 0 4400 H 5907 0 7413 0 8919 1 043 The spherical region is zoomed and shown in the Figure 3 658 The user can use right mouse button to zoom into the region required Figure 3 658 Cut plane displaying the effects of pressure at different areas Tutorial Manual Post Processing Tutorials f Movement of Cut plane The user can do finer movements of cut plane by changing Fraction value manually From Define Dynamic Surface panel change the Fraction Value to let s say to 0 572 It s best to switch off the vectors and to switch On the cut plane from Tools to notice the cutplane movement The output is as shown in Figure 3 659 Figure 3 659 Cut Plane ata fract
192. the middle mouse button when no entities are selected or selecting Dismiss will cancel the function In a similar manner associate the following edge curve combinations to make the fit the geometry Small pipe Edge 33 42 to curve CURVES 10 33 37 to CURVES 11 37 43 to CURVES 9 Outlet top horizontal end of large pipe Edge 21 44 to curve CURVES 7 This vertical edge will eventually be moved to capture the horizontal curve Note It may help to toggle entity types off and back on to identity the right entity if they overlap other entities For example turn off Vertices and Edges to verify the curve names Turn Edges back on to proceed with the selection Sides of large pipe Edges 13 34 34 38 38 21 to curves CURVES 2 5 and 6 Select all three edges first press the Hexa Meshing middle mouse button to confirm then select the three curves and press the middle mouse button again The three curves will automatically be grouped as one logical composite entity Geometrically they are still three separate curves Edges 41 42 43 44 to curves CURVES 3 4 8 The blue cyan edges 42 43 34 42 38 43 do not have to be associated They are internal and will interpolate instead of project on to geometry when the mesh is computed The associations may be verified by selecting Edges gt Show Association in the Display tree As in Figure 3 50 the green arrows in the display point from an edge to its associated curv
193. the negative direction 6 2 Force on curve Using this option user can apply force on Curves in all the three directions as well as user can apply the moment about x y z directions There are two options available Force can be applied on curves uniformly implies the nodes attached to the curve will be applied the same force Incase of Total The force applied on the curve gets distributed on the nodes attached to the curves according to the FEA concepts 6 6 ANSYS ICEM CFD Al Environment 10 0 User Manual SAS IP Inc Section 6 12 Set Gravity 6 3 Force on Surface Using this option user can apply force on Surface in all the three directions Negative value indicates force acts away from the surface 6 4 Force on Subset Using this option user can apply Force on Subset 6 5 Pressure on surfaces The user can apply the Pressure on Surfaces 6 6 Pressure on subset The user can apply the Pressure on Subset 6 7 Temperature on Points This option allows the user to apply the Temperature on point 6 8 Temperature on curves This option allows the user to apply the Temperature on Curve 6 9 Temperature on Surface Allows user to apply Temperature on Surface 6 10 Temperature on Body Allows user to apply Temperature on Body 6 11 Temperature on Subset This option allows the user to apply the Temperature on Subset 6 12 Set Gravity This option allows the user to apply the Gravity ANSYS
194. the section entitled Modifying the Model in CFX Build After completing this tutorial the user could complete the remaining sections of the CFX 5 tutorial picking up with Defining the Simulation in CFX Pre a Steps Involved in this Example Modifying the meshing parameters Creating the refined tetra mesh Checking for quality Creating prism layers inflated from the walls b Starting a New Project Creating a New Project Launch ANSYS ICEMCFD CFX Select File New Project from the Main menu and click on c Create New Directory and enter StaticMixer2 as the Directory name and also as the File name as 1n Figure 5 32 Press Save lg d 2 1163 Tutorial Manual ANSYS ICEMCFD CFX Tutorials Figure 5 32 New Project New proj 5 ave In Shaticht mers d EX m My A ceci Documents Deskto p My Documents d hy Computer T Network File name save as Project Files prj Cancel 2 Loading a Geometry File From the Main Menu click on Open Geometry and select the geometry file StaticMixer tin created in the previous tutorial by browsing as shown in Figure 5 33 Tutorial Manual ANSYS ICEMCFD CFX Tutorials Figure 5 33 8 Loading Look in 3 StaticMiver we the Ei previous Tutorial My Recent Geomet ry Document File E Deskto p wf l My Documents a Computer Network File name StaticMixer
195. the user could complete the remaining as sections of the CFX 5 Blunt Body tutorial picking up with Defining the Simulation in CFX Pre Figure 5 44 Geometry Model a Steps Involved in this Example Importing the Geometry Geometry modification Modifying the meshing parameters Creating the refined tetra mesh Checking the mesh quality Creating inflated prism layers from the walls Writing output file to the CFX 5 ig d M m 1177 Tutorial Manual ANSYS ICEMCFD CFX Tutorials b Starting a New Project Creating a New Project Launch ANSYS ICEMCED CFX Select Empty project from the Start window and click on New geometry in left side menu This will open the Ansys Workbench interface As soon as Workbench interface open up a new window Ansys Workbench pops up to select the desired length unit Default desired length unit is millimeter User can select any type of unit and press ok For this tutorial keep default length unit 1 e millimeter and press Ok Figure 5 45 Ansys workbench desired unit ANSYS iG Ps length window Select desired length unit Meter f Inch Centimeter Foot f Millimeter Always use default Enter BluntBody as Directory name as shown in Figure 5 46 and press Save ANSYS ICEMCFD CFX Tutorials Figure 5 46 ESTEE S Hizi Save in E BluntB ody 1 window bluntbadv agdb History 6 Dezkto p Documents Computer
196. this purpose The frame is constrained at both ends and a quasi static load 1s applied to the middle bracket The Frame model used is shown in Figure 4 88 Figure 4 88 Frame model a Summary of Steps Data Editing Launch AI Environment and import an existing Nastran data file Define Contact Save Project 916 Tutorial Manual LS Dyna Tutorials Solver Setup setup LS Dyna Run Write LS Dyna Input File Solution and Results Solving the problem Visualization of Results b Data Editing Launch AI Environment Figure 4 89 Import Nastran file window Start ANSYS ICEMCFD and File gt Change Working Dir to ACN docu FEAHelp AI Tutorial Files Select File gt Import Mesh gt From Nastran browse and select the file Frame dat as shown in Figure 4 89 and Apply Import Hastran File a Nastran File Frame dat HBE3 Elements Unchanged Bar Elements Unchanged Shell Elements Unchanged Apply ck Cancel Select Settings gt Solver select LS Dyna from the pull down list and Apply at the bottom of the Solver Setup panel as in Figure 4 90 defaults and options applicable for LS Dyna will be made active LS Dyna Tutorials Figure 4 90 Set Up Solver solver Setup Solver L5 Duna Sets Default Apply ck Cancel Define Constraints First a displacement constraint will be applied to one bolt hole Another bolt hole was already defined in the origin
197. three output files 1 WING2 c3d itriq Contains Pressure Velocity and Density extrapolated to the Surface triangles This can be converted to a domain file by Edit gt Cart3D Tri File gt Domain file The default resultant domain file will be WING2 c3d uns 11 SlicePlanes dom Cut Plane results 111 results dom Full mesh result 2 Go to File gt Results gt Open Results 3 Select Format as ICEMCFD 4 Specify surface results dom as the File as shown in Figure 3 509 Cart3D Figure 3 509 Result File Format Window C elect Result Format ai Add a DataSet Current Format ICEMCFD d File ving2 suface results dom m Structured Grid E Unsteady Gnd Transient cases only Apply o 5 Select Apply from the panel to get the default result as shown in Figure 3 510 Right click on Color map from the Display Tree widget and select Modify Entries to adjust the Min and Max values for the displayed variable Tutorial Manual Cart3D Figure 3 510 Post Process ing Result Density 1 323 1 272 1 215 1 158 1 101 1 044 0 3858 0 9297 0 0726 0 8125 0 7584 0 7013 0 6442 0 5871 0 5301 0 4723 Tutorial Manual Cart3D 3 7 4 Supersonic Missile Overview This example illustrates how to generate a grid in Cart3D around a supersonic missile and to solve the problem in flowCart Post processing the results 1s also explained The tutorial introduces the following
198. to 3 This will create 3 levels of coarsened mesh which can be read by the solver Tutorial Manual Cart3D Press Apply The Cart3D Mesh window appears which asks about loading the cart3D Full Mesh as shown in Figure 3 479 Press Yes Figure 3 479 Cart3D Mesh window Do vau want ta load the catal Full Mesh The final mesh generated can be examined through Mesh gt Cutplane The Define Cut Planes window appears as shown Accept the default settings as shown in Figure 3 480 Tutorial Manual Cart3D Figure 3 480 Define Cut Planes ay Define Cut Planes Window Active Method by Coefficients 0 By 0 D 15 4538341 70013392 Fraction Value 0 5 Display back plane with hollow Draw plane normal Draw plane border Coo f Create mesh subset Apply ox Cancel The mesh cut plane using the above parameters 1s shown in Figure 3 481 sd Tutorial Manual LLL p te te qo bt p rr AL TET a LU di Vil i AU Hy Cart3D AY AL LA COEM LI F Figur 3 481 Mesh Cut c d Setup Flow Cart Parameters Click on Define Solver params icon if the panel doesn t open automatically A Solver parameters window appears as shown in Figure 3 482 In the Cart3D Menu select Solver Tutorial Manual Cart3D Figure EX 3 482 File Inform
199. to be run with Mach Number 0 65 For such subsonic flow the far field can be 15 times the body length so specify 15 for Nominal Tutorial Manual Cart3D Mesh Radius Body Length X Starting Mesh Divisions 4 4 4 and Num of Cell Refinements 12 Note Though this is a symmetric model the case will not be run with a symmetry boundary condition Click Compute Parameters This saves the mesh in the local directory converts in into Cart3D format and determines the intersections At the end it displays the Finest Cell Dimensions as shown in Figure 3 565 SS A Tutorial Manual Cart3D Figure 3 565 Cart3D Mesher Compute Parameter CartsD Files pretis BOMBER Single Component Fis Normals Maminal Mesh Radius Body 5 a Lenght Starting Mesh Divisions as Num af Cell Refinements gt 5 Compute Parameters Finest Cell Dimensions 0082 x 0 0092 x 0 008 Mesh Creation Preview Mesh Only Create and Save Full Mesh Number of Multi grid levels 5 T Outer Bounding Box Minimum Diagonal Point 43 802606 Maximum Diagonal Point 51 0051 bz Define Surface Family Refinement Define All Surface Refinement Number of Buffer Layers 4 B Angle Threshold for 20 Refinement Area Weight Normals CE Number of Cut Planes in dir 3 Number of Cut Planes in 4 dir
200. vonMises Stress Min 1 11735 28230 86 Yector Variable Current Max mag 18 7091 Apply ox Cancel Note Results shown here are obtained by MSC Nastran run Results may differ with those of AI Nastran run depending on the version Tutorial Manual Figure 4 196 VonMis es Stress distribu tion Nastran Tutorials VonMisezg Stress Load 1 6236 5020 5404 4957 i573 4159 37 742 332b 2911 2495 2079 1664 1249 832 3 416 6 0 9724 To display mode shape at Total Translation Frequency select Category as Displacement and Current Scalar Variable as Translation_Total in Select Nastran Variables window as shown in Figure 4 197 Tutorial Manual Nastran Tutorials Figure 4 197 Gelect 3 Nastran Nastran ariables Variables window Mode Load 5Side Hz Load H Category Displacement Scalar Variable Current Translation Total Mnf 18 7041 Vector Variable Current ranslation 18 7091 Apply ox Cancel Select e Control All Animation option from Post processing tab menu bar which will open Animation Controller window as shown in Figure 4 198 Tutorial Manual Nastran Tutorials Figure 4 198 Animation Controller 8 Animation Cotroller window gt B b 44 0 000 with Steps 20 Cycles 1 Speed ms 10 Animate dynamic s
201. will yield a histogram that indicates the level of cell distortion Nodes that are in plane with one another will produce a cell with small warpage Nodes that make cells twisted or distorted will increase a ANSYS CFD Al Environment 10 0 User Manual SAS IP Inc 3 9 Chapter 3 Hexa cells distortion giving a high degree of warpage The y axis is the scale for the number of cells represented in the histogram a value determined by the assigned Height The x axis which ranges from a Min of 0 to a Max of 90 is the degree of warpage that a cell experiences 3 10 ANSYS ICEM CFD Al Environment 10 0 User Manual SAS IP Inc Chapter 4 Properties Properties menu allows the user to create different materials by specifying the material type that is whether isotropic Young s Modulus Poission s ratio Once the material is created the user can apply those properties to the respected elements 4 1 Create Material Property Here the user can define a material by Specifying a name of the material define whether isotropic Young s Modulus Shear modulus Poission s ratio Mass Density Thermal expansion coefficient 4 2 Save Material This Option allows the user to save the material which is created So that user can retrieve the material when ever necessary The material file will be saved with mat extension 4 3 Open Material This option allows the user to open a material file so that the user can use the same for
202. with Tetra Sizes ON Meshing Select 9 Mesh Tet icon from Mesh Tab Menubar Before launching the options for the tetrahedral meshing it will ask to save the changes done so far to the project and invokes the Save Project As window Click on Create New folder icon and enter directory name as Bar Supply Bar as the project name and press Save Tutorial Manual Nastran Tutorials Along with the Bar prj project file it will save other files in Bar directory for geometry and boundary condition as Bar tin and Bar fbc respectively Once the project file 1s saved the options for the tetrahedral meshing can be reached through Mesh with Tetrahedra window shown in Figure 4 178 Enable Run as Batch Process and Load mesh after completion SS A Tutorial Manual Nastran Tutorials Figure 4 178 8 Mesh Vol meshwin P Tetrahedral window Mesh type Tetra Method cioe Smooth mesh Iterations 5 y Min quality Jo Coarsen mesh Iterations E Worst aspect ratio 01 Smooth transition Factor 12 Options Run as batch process visible geometry Part by Part Load mesh after completion Apply ok Dismiss Press Apply to start meshing Switch off Geometry from the Model Tree Tutorial Manual Nastran Tutorials In Display Tree click on to expand the Mesh menu Click the
203. 0 In the Display Tree widget switch Off Parts except PLATE 1 PLATE 2 SHELL and LIVE Press hotkey h select the FACES and its corresponding Part Note Make sure that Toggle between all and partial enclosure is enabled as shown in Figure 3 335 Figure Select blocks 3 335 Toggle Between All and oggle between all and partial enclosure key Partial option Use Polygon ae selection to select the Faces As shown in Figure 3 336 we can easily select the Face to be associated to PLATE 1 Now in the Surface Part window select Plate 1 Tutorial Manual Advanced Meshing Tutorials Figure 3 336 Faces selected to be Associate d to PLATE 1 similarly select the Face to be associated to PLATE2 as shown in Figure 3 337 Tutorial Manual Figure 3 337 Faces selected to be Associat ed to PLATE 2 Advanced Meshing Tutorials Note Select the following region using Box Selection Select one by one the four regions as shown in Figure 3 338 The Part must be Shell Tutorial Manual Advanced Meshing Tutorials Figure 3 338 Faces selected to be Associate d to SHELL To see the face projection toggle on the Faces gt Face Projection The Face projection is shown in Figure 3 339 Figure 3 339 Blocking with face projection on family PLATE1 SHELL and PLATE2 Tutorial Manual Advanced Meshing Tutorials Switch on all Parts and switch Off Faces in the Displa
204. 0 2 0 25 0 5 Define Surface Family Refinement ESTNETESESM Define All Surface Refinement Number of Buffer Layers 4 t Angle Threshold Far 20 Refinement Area weight Normals Number of Cut Planes inet dir 3 Number of Cut Planes in r dir 3 Humber of Cut Planes in z dir 3 Mesh Internal Region Apply o Dismiss Set the Number of Multi grid levels to 3 This will create 3 levels of coarsened mesh which can be read by the solver Press Apply The Cart3D Mesh window appears which asks us about loading the cart3D Full Mesh as shown in Figure 3 588 Press Yes Tutorial Manual Cart3D Figure 3 588 Cart 3D Mesh window Do you want ta load the Full Mesh The final mesh can be examined through Mesh gt Cutplane as discussed for the previous tutorials Note There are three cases to be performed for this tutorial so it is advisable to make three copies of the current directory and run the cases in the respective directory The three cases to be computed are i Critical ii Sub Critical iii Super Critical d Case 1 CRITICAL Change the working directory by File gt Change Working Dir and set the location to the folder Critical into which the current files were copied Go to Solver 7 gt Define solver parameters axi The parameters panel may open automatically In the Solver parameters window do the following 1 In Case information
205. 0 28 LS Dyna Tutorials Mass Density Constant Value Thermal Expansic Constant Value Reference Temperat TH Structural Elemer Constant Value Stress Limits for Tension 5T f Constant Varving Value Stress Limits for Compression SE Constant C Waning Value Stress Limits for Shear 55 f Constant Varving Value Material Coordinate System MCSID L5 Dyna Material type Select Type Type 24 MAT PIECEWISE_ Yield stress 210 Failure strain 0 2 LS Dyna Tutorials Scroll down to the bottom of this panel and change LsDyna Material type 22 Select Type to Type 24 MAT PIECEWISE LINEAR PLASTICITY Specify the Yield Stress as 210 and Failure strain as 0 2 and press Apply similarly modify the material property for IsotropicMat2 Set the Mass Density to 7 84e 06 Review properties of the different Parts Expand the Parts tree and the individual part for example part 2 and right mouse select Surface Line Properties and select Modify to reveal the Define Shell Element panel as shown in Figure 4 95 Note the Material assignment and Thickness Review all other shell parts ET2D LS Dyna Tutorials Figure 4 95 Save Project Define Shell Element a window ET201 PID 1 Properties Type Shell Material Isotropic atl Thickness 225
206. 0001963 0001601 0001639 0001476 00015314 0001152 e e ci c co Oo oOo c coc c c3 0002449 Tutorial Manual Nastran Tutorials 4 3 5 Hood This exercise explains import of existing Nastran data modifying that data and rewriting the new Nastran data It also explains solving the problem and visualization of results The imported Hood model is shown in Figure 4 266 a Summary of Steps Launch AI Environment and import an existing Nastran data file Data Editing Verification of imported data Modify some element properties save Changes of imported data Write Nastran Input File Solution and Results Solving the problem Visualization of Results b Launch AI Environment and Import Data Launch the AI Environment from UNIX or DOS window Then File gt Change working directory and set ICEM ACN docu FEAHelp AI Tutorial Files Next File gt Import Mesh gt Nastran which pops up the window shown in Figure 4 265 Select the file Hood dat leave other option as default and press Apply to import the data Figure 4 266 shows the imported data in AI Environment Nastran Tutorials Figure 4 265 Import Nastran File i Import Nastran File window Nastran File HBE3 Elements Unchanged Bar Elements Unchanged Shell Elements Unchanged Apply ok Cancel Figure 4 266 Hood model Tutorial Manual Nastran Tutorials c Data Editing Verificati
207. 1 043 f Displaying surfaces with contour lines Contour lines are helpful in identifying the regions pertaining to the same values of the variable After checking the flat shading click on the button Use smooth shading to display geometry in smooth shading Click OK to close the Selected Surfaces Properties window Tutorial Manual Post Processing Tutorials Select the option Contour line with variable colors for the Surfaces in the Display Tree widget The contour bands on the surface will look like the Figure 3 645 Figure 3 645 Surface display with Contours of pressure pressure NODE The pressure values calculated inside Fluent are normally static pressure values with respect to the atmospheric pressure Thus user would see some negative values also relative to the atmospheric pressure Low pressure regions would be clearly visible in the region where flow expands Tutorial Manual Post Processing Tutorials into the spherical region However when the spherical region contracts flow actually hits those boundaries and thus higher pressure is expected in those regions The spherical region is zoomed and shown in the Figure 3 646 The user can use right mouse button to zoom into the region required Figure 3 646 Zoomed view of spherical location Toggle OFF the Contourlines with variable colors as well as Continuous Contour option Tutorial Manual Post Processing Tutorials Visuali
208. 130 Mesh sizes for parts Part Prism Size Height Height Ratio Num Layer Mesh Size CUBE 05 0 01 12 0 for Part 80M o LIVE 0 SPHERE 1 0 02 12 0 SYM r fj Show size params using ref size Please Note that Highlighted families have at least one blank field because not all entities in that f Apply Verify the sizes by right mouse selecting Surfaces and turn on Hexa Sizes Figure 3 131 Figure 3 131 Verifyin g Hexa Sizes Tutorial Manual Figure 3 132 Mesh after Recompute Operation Hexa Meshing select Blocking gt Blocking gt Pre Mesh Params 5 gt Update Sizes G Make sure Method gt Update All is selected default and Apply In the Display tree turn on Blocking gt Pre Mesh and re compute the mesh when prompted View the mesh as shown in Figure 3 132 n Viewing with Scan Planes Viewing the volume mesh can provide another good visual diagnostic Within blocking this is done by means of a scan plane where an I J K or radial o grid index plane is scrolled through the volume Turn on Edges and Curves for reference Turn off Pre Mesh then right mouse select Pre Mesh and select Scan planes The Scan Plane Control window will appear in the lower right hand corner of the screen as shown in Figure 3 133 Tutorial Manual Figure 3 133 The Scan Plane Control window Hexa Meshing On Bl
209. 15 to be performed on this model and the results should be visualized in a post processor Nastran Tutorials Solving the problem Click on Q Submit Solver Run icon from the Solve Options Tab Menubar to start the Nastran as shown in Figure 4 166 The Nastran file will be selected by default as Tpipe dat Toggle ON Post process and View Results and press Apply in Run Solver window Figure 4 166 Run Solver Gil Run Solver window Solver NAS TRAN Nastran File TpipeT pipe dat gt Hun Time Options Post process and View Results Apply ok Cancel Note If Nastran doesn t go through Please refer the FATAL error in the file f06 and fix the issues accordingly in the dat file dat Post Processing of Results After completion of Nastran run the results will be automatically loaded into the Post Processor tab Nastran Tutorials Click on Variables option in Post processing Tab menu bar In Select Nastran Variables window select Category as Solid and Current scalar variable as Translation Total as shown in Figure 4 167 Figure 4 167 G elect a Select Nastran Nastran ariables 5 Variables ESTARIA Mode Load 5ide window Made Hz Load Category Scalar Yarable Curent Translation Total Min 0 679978 00 24818 Vector Variable Current Translation mag i88 Apply ck Cancel Note MSC Nastran run obtains Results shown here Results may
210. 2 single edges Single multiple edges Stand alone surface mesh Single edges Overlapping elements MHon maniFald vertices Unconnected vertices Tetra Meshing Use the default set of checks and press Apply to check for Errors and Possible Problems in the mesh Once the check for each possible problem is over ICEM CFD creates subsets of the bad elements and displays the number of elements for the particular problem in the messages area If there are errors reported for any unconnected vertices choose Yes to delete them Press Dismiss to close the window Refer to the Tetra Appendix for a detailed description of the various errors and possible problems i Saving the Project Save the mesh and geometry by selecting File gt Save Project Close the project by selecting File gt CloseProject SS A Tutorial Manual Tetra Meshing 3 4 3 3D Pipe Junction Overview In this tutorial example the user will generate a tetrahedral mesh for the three dimensional pipe junction geometry Prism layers will then be added The 3D Pipe geometry is shown in Figure 3 235 Figure 3 235 The 3D Pipe geometry with the labeled surfaces a Summary of Steps Starting the project Repairing the geometry Assigning mesh sizes Generating the tetrahedral mesh with Smooth Transition Tutorial Manual Tetra Meshing Diagnostics Saving the project b
211. 3 Number of Cut Planes in Z dir 3 Mesh Internal Region Apply ox Dismiss This will create 5 density polygons by default for mesh density control which can be viewed via Geometry gt Densities in the Display Tree widget Tutorial Manual Cart3D This also computes the finest cell size 0 0082 x 0 0082 x 0 0082 Varying the starting mesh division and or Max number of cell refinement can vary the finest cell size The diagonal points displayed under Outer Bounding Box are the Minimum and Maximum points of the mesh region refer to Figure 3 565 set the Angle Threshold for Refinement to 10 as shown in Figure 3 566 Cart3D Figure 3 566 L art3D Mesher Angle Threshold for Refinement Iu MM Window L art3D files prefix BOMBER Single Component Fix Normals Nominal Mesh A adius Body 4 Lenght x Starting Mesh Divisions 4 44 Mum of Cell Refinements 2 858 Compute Parameters Finest Cell Dimensions 082 x 0 0082 x O UE Hesh Creation Preview Mesh Only C Create and Save Full Mesh Number of Multi grid levels 3 zi Outer Bounding Box Minimum Diagonal Point 49 802 ty Maximum Diagonal Point 51 005 xi Define Surface Family Hefinement CE Define All Surface Refinement Number of Buffer Layers 4 E Angle Threshold Far 10 Refinement Area weight Normals Number of Cut Planes in dir 3 Humber af Cut Planes in dir 3 E Mumbe
212. 30 Postprocessing Cart3D 6 memo s G Ul Cart3D Mesher 9 windo Cart3D files pref NOOTE Snge Component W V Fix Normals Nominal Mash Radus Body 1 Lenght Stating Mech Divisione s 55 Num of Cell Refinements 1 Compute Parameters Fines Cal Dimencons 0 051 Mesh Creation Preview Mesh Only Create end Seve Ful Mash zj Apply Cancel Min D 0 991832 0 691882 10 0 891982 0 831882 Cart3D filas set to Log Save Leave the Fix Normals enabled to give the triangles outward normals Enable Single Component Enter Nominal Mesh Radius Body Length X 1 Starting Mesh Divisions 20 5 5 and Max Num of Cell Refinements 3 Leave the other values as default Click Compute Parameters This saves the mesh in the local directory and converts it into Cart3D format At the end it displays the Finest Cell Dimensions as shown in Figure 3 602 Tutorial Manual Figure Cart3D Mesh Window Cart3D 3 602 Mesher Cart3D files pretis NOZZLE Single Component Fix Normals Nominal Mesh Radius Body 4 Lenght X Starting Mesh Divisions 20 FA Num of Cell Refinements 3 ti Compute Parameters Finest Cell Dimensions 0 132 0 132 0 132 Hesh Creation Preview Mesh Only Create and Save Full Mesh Number of Multi arid levels 5 gt Outer Bounding Box
213. 3D files prefix PLUGS Refinement Single Component Fix Normals Nominal Mesh Radius Body Lenght 3 10 Starting Mesh Divisions 5 85 Num of Cell Refinements 11 Compute Parameters Finest Cell Dimensions 0 993 0 993 0 993 Hesh Creation Preview Mesh Only Create and Save Full Mesh Humber of Multi arid levels m Outer Bounding Box Minimum Diagonal Point 3924 577232 Maximum Diagonal Point 1 20 957939 tN Define Surface Family Refinement Define All Surface Refinement Humber of Buffer Layers 4 zi Angle Threshold far 5 Refinement Area weight Normals Number of Cut Planes in dir 3 Number of Cut Planes dir 3 Number of Cut Planes 2 dir 3 E Mesh Internal Region Apply o Dismiss Click Apply to run the mesher This will create a domain file with 3 Cut Planes Quad Elements in each coordinate direction and Cut Cells Hex Tutorial Manual Cart3D Elements through which the defining surface triangles pass This Preview Mesh will be loaded automatically In the Part Menu under the Display Tree widget right click on Parts and select Hide All Then turn on only the Part CUTPLANE Z2 as shown in Figure 3 467 Figure 3 467 1 Geometry Display Mesh Tree widget Subsets CUTPLANE 1 CUTPLANE x2 CUTPLANE x3 1 LLTPLANE 2 LLTPLAMNE 13 LL TPLANE 21 CUTPLANE Z2 CUT PLAN
214. 5 Height of 1 only on the wall boundaries CYL1 and CYL2 and a Height Ratio of 1 2 on those same walls Apply and Dismiss Turn on Surface gt Hexa size in the Display tree View the meshing parameters for each surface as in Figure 3 110 Note The quad perpendicular to the surface represents the Max Size the thickness represents the Height and the number is the Height Ratio Tutorial Manual Hexa Meshing Figure 3 110 Hexa Mesh sizes y Select Blocking gt Pre Mesh Params 9 Update Size make sure Method gt Update all default 15 selected and press Apply Turn on Pre Mesh and re compute Turn off the Edges Surfaces and other geometry types Turn on right mouse select Pre Mesh gt Solid amp Wire View this initial mesh as in Figure 3 111 TS P Tutorial Manual Figure 3 111 The initial Mesh Hexa Meshing j Checking the Mesh Quality Angle Determinant Warpage After generating the mesh the user should check the mesh quality For a more complete description of the Mesh quality criteria refer to Help Help Topics The main criteria affecting a hexa mesh are This checks the minimum internal angle in degrees for each element This calculates the determinant of all elements the mesh which is a volume measurement calculated from a Jacobian matrix Tutor
215. 637 Tutorial Manual Post Processing Tutorials Figure 3 637 Continuous Contour Right click options on Surfaces branch Contourline with variable colors Contourline with single color arid with variable colors arid with single color Edge with variable colors Edge with single color Vector with colors Vector with single color 20 vector with variable colors 2D vector with single color Nodes with variable colors Nodes with single color Modify Drawing Properties Calculate Integrala Compute Surface Flow Scalar Variable Vector variable Import fram Other DataSet Select the option Grid with variable color from the pop up menu list The surfaces would now be displayed with the mesh in scalar variable color as shown in Figure 3 638 The user would find the mesh in one color since the default scalar variable density NODE is not changing in this example Figure 3 638 Grid with Variable color Tutorial Manual Post Processing Tutorials density HODE 1 225 1 225 1 2425 1 2425 1 2425 1 2475 1 225 1 2185 1 2265 1 4 245 1 224 1 225 1 245 l 2425 1 225 E 1 225 To view the grid with the geometry click the right mouse button on Surfaces and choose Uniform Color option The surfaces would now be displayed with continuous contours as shown in Figure 3 639 Figure 3 639 Surface displayed with mesh and Solid color Tutorial Manual Post Processing Tutorials densi
216. 8 The Generated Tetra Mesh h Writing Output Select Output gt Output to CFX F from the main menu Enter StaticMixer msh as the File name as shown in Figure 5 29 and press Save Tutorial Manual ANSYS ICEMCFD CFX Tutorials Figure 5 29 Name for 5 file 72 e 3 xl Name for Save in O StaticMiser E23 CFX 5 file ET ER Date Modified Window Project 12KB AGDE File 21712005 12 55 Recent Projecti 10KB PRJFile 71712005 1 19 PM Documents amp Prajecti 97 TIN File 71712005 1 19 PM Project1 552 KB UNS File 21712005 1 19 PM Prajecti 2KB File 21712005 12 55 PM Desktop Projecki atr 1KB ATR File 71712005 1 19 PM Prajecti fbc 1 FBC File 21712005 1 19 PM 2 Project1 fbe_old 1EB OLDFile 21712005 1 18 PM tetra cmd 2 kB Text Document 71712005 1 16 PM Documents Computer T Network File name StaticMiser msh Save Places Save as type jal Files Cancel ii Accept ASCII as the Output type and select Done While writing the CFX file user can scale the output through Scale factor window shown in Figure 5 30 Press Done as no scaling 15 required for this tutorial Figure 5 30 Scale factor Scale Factor for Seale factor 101041 0 CFX 5 output cale factor 1 01 01 Done i Exiting ANSYS ICEMCFD CFX Select File gt Exit from the main menu to quit out of
217. AA Detinee o iebankest Bar E uius Lori Besos SU 4 1 4 5 Define eu ede des e cn 4 1 AO Define Een bons a Rea 4 1 7 ETDS SIGN BIemellt 4 1 45 Define Volumes Elemielit TOET 4 1 SEGA E 5 1 De lc Displacement on POINT dato nies Sentier dn vba Geta Bond esae tieu Cu duis 5 1 22 5 1 DS DISDIAC CINE COM Abed Emm 5 1 54 Displacement OD SUBSET 5 1 5 5 elle e cun 5 1 sow MUT DETECTION cm 5 1 5 5 2 Manga 5 1 5 5 Define Single surface CODEQCE MS 5 1 5 7 Denne Initial Velocity uvis deeds te vi Ep npe eb P Ee eda turris 5 1 58 5 1 6 1 Oy ON PON UU TN 6 6 O2 OF
218. AD as 1 In the Output Requests toggle On Displacement DISP Stress STRESS and Element Strain Energy ESE Press Apply to complete the setup Nastran Tutorials Figure 4 231 Setup Setup Analysis Type Analysis Type window Solver NASTRAN Executive amp Case Control Cards Fun Type Linear static Sol 101 Executive Control Cards Run Time TIME 99999 Output Lines MAXLINES 33332 29 Write Input Lines ECHO NONE Parameters PARAH Mass Multiplier WT MASS 1 000000 Rotation Stiffness Adjustment 755555 KEROT 0 000000 ratio 07 Coupled Mass 5 S 1 Constrain Singularities ALI THUS PE Grid Weights GADPNT Loads and Constraints Sets Single Point Constraints SPC isi Load Set Temperature Set TEMF Output Requests Displacement DISP Stress STRESS Strain STRAIN Element Strain Energy ESE e pe Nastran Tutorials Save Project Through File gt Save Project As option create new directory Frame as said in earlier tutorials Enter Frame as project name and press Save to save all these information in this directory It will save four files Geometry file Mesh file Attribute file and Parameter files as Frame uns Frame fbc and Frame par respectively along with the project file Frame prj W
219. ANSYS ICEM CFD Al Environment 10 0 User Manual ANSYS ICEM CFD Al Environment 10 0 User Manual Table of Contents ECAD Cei NE T 1 1 1 1 How are Close Holes and Remove Holes 1 1 CIOS Hole TE mm 1 1 TTD REMIOVE HOLES ati slat E NEN DU TT E 1 2 1 2 How do Fill Trim and Blend work in Stitch Match 1 3 1 3 How does Match work in Stitch Match 1 5 cR 2 1 T IU uum 2 1 2 T Tetramesmdgenerdtlobsas HD VI 2 1 2 1 2 2 Letra GENel AION SLEDS we sien EN Dove ae d cd 2 2 22 59 1 2 2 222 Geometry Details REGUE einer E E E adu 2 3 2 2 3 SIZES On SUITACES CUIV OS 2 4 2 2 4 Meshing inside small angles or in small gaps between objects 2 5 2 2 5 Desir d Mesh Ros 2 5 2 26 R N Tetra The Octr e ADDIOACD uite Lese Poo ktm re v
220. Cancel Click on Variables from the Post processing Tab menu bar To display the Total Translation Displacement select the Load as 1 and Category as Displacement in the Select AnsysVariables window as shown in Figure 4 69 This should be the default ANSYS Tutorials Figure 4 69 Ansys Variables Select 9 window Ansys Variables Mode Load Side Mode Hz Load fi Category Displacement Scalar Variable Curent Translation Total 8 80 Vector Variable Current Translation Max mag 7440 Dismiss Click e Control All Animations from the Post processing Tab menu bar The window shown in Figure 4 71 will appear Select Animate to see the deformation The deformed shape 1s shown in Figure 4 70 ANSYS Tutorials Figure 4 71 Animation Controller a Animation Setup and ee Controller window b B di 0 000 with Steps Cycles i ti rl Speed ms 555 Animate dynamic surfaces Animate views Rotate about line Angle degree 360 Axis 001 Center 0 Animate deformation Undeformed shape Smoothly back cycle Amplifier 1 4175 Animate modal Undeformed shape Steps per cycle 20 Amplifier Tutorial Manual ANSYS Tutorials Figure 4 72 Animate d model of Total Translati on Translation Total Load 1 EA LT
221. Defaults for Flotran 2 D ele Defaults for high order struct Defne surface to surface co CONTACT E ey aptians For 3 0 cont Create new Paste Tutorial Manual KOFE Mat Applicable None Close gap Auta Reduce penetration amp uta Asymmetric contact select Clase gap Reduce penetration amp uta Auto ICON T both Time incrementatian contr Initial penetration or gap Koray Stiffness update 1 E oc rs Shell thickness effect F IP 1 Behavior KOP1 Standard Accept Cancel ANSYS Tutorials Also switch ON the View Ansys file option in the Write View Input File window as shown in Figure 4 65 and press Apply The Ansys input data file will come up in the default text editor This can be edited and saved to the same file 1f desired Since there 1s no need to do any editing for this example just close the editor 2 Solution and Results Linear Static analysis is to be performed on this model and the results will be visualized ICEMCFD s post processor Solving the problem Click on the Solve Options Submit Solver Run Q button which should display the Run Solver window as shown in Figure 4 67 Leave the Ansys Run Mode set to Interactive Under Select Ansys Product select your Ansys product The ANSYS EXEC PATH environment variable may have to be set to the full path to the Ansys executable for ICEMCFD to be able to ru
222. Dismiss Note If nothing is selected in the entities window Then by default it takes all the entities To achieve the L shaped blocking topology shape for the elbow the user will make two block splits and discard a block Deleting a block without permanently checked will only move the block to VORFN Turn ON Curves from the Display Tree and select Blocking gt Split Block e gt Split Block to open the window shown Figure 3 170 The Split method should be set as Screen select by default Create splits as in Figure 3 171 by Tutorial Manual Hexa Meshing selecting any edge that you want the split to run perpendicular through Press Apply and then select a location for the split to run through and press the middle mouse button to accept Make two splits as shown in Figure 3 171 Figure 3 170 Split Block Split blocking window Split Block Split Block Block Select f All Visible C Selected Block 45 Edge 22 2b AB Project vertices Split Method Split Method Screen select Apply ia Dismiss Tutorial Manual Hexa Meshing Figure 3 171 The two Block Splits Next select Blocking gt Delete Block lt and select the block shown in Figure 3 172 Delete permanently should be turned OFF then press Apply Tutorial Manual Hexa Meshing Figure 3 172 Deleting a block Assign this block to 2 Fitting the Blocking to the G
223. E 3 PLUG 1 PLUG 2 PLUG 3 The mesh is shown in Figure 3 468 This is the projected mesh on the middle plane in the Z direction CUTPLANE Z2 Tutorial Manual Cart3D 1 BE _ ERE Right click in the Display Tree widget and select Parts gt Show AII after viewing the mesh c Mesh Generation Full Mesh Now in the Cart3D Mesher window enable Create and Save Full Mesh as shown in Figure 3 469 Tutorial Manual Cart3D Figure L art3D Mesher 2 3 469 MCN Create L art3D files prefix PLUGS Save Full Single Component Mesh Mormals Mominal Mesh Radius Body o0 4 Lenght 1 140 Starting Mesh Divisions 5 85 Num af Cell Refinements 11 Compute Parameters Finest Cell Dimensions 0 993 0 983 1 383 Mesh Creation C Preview Mesh Only Create and Save Full Mesh Number of Multi grid levels 5 Outer Bounding Box Minimum Diagonal Paint 3924 5772 asimum Diagonal Paint 41 25 9579 A Define Surface Family Refinement Define All Surface Refinement Humber of Buffer Layers 4 E Angle Threshald For 5 Refinement Area Weight Normals CEE Humber af Cut Planes in dir 3 Number of Cut Planes in Y dir 3 Number af Cut Planes in Z dir 3 E Mesh Internal Region Apply o Dismiss Leave the Number of Multi grid levels to 5 This will create 5 levels of coarsened mesh which
224. Edge E Reverse link Highlight dependent edges Highlight attached faces Apply ok Dismiss Note Make sure Copy Parameters and Method to All Edges 15 enabled Tutorial Manual Figure 3 372 Hexa Mesh in Cylinder 3 Advanced Meshing Tutorials similarly Click Select Edge Select new edge and select Edge 42 41 give Nodes as 9 Click Apply to accept the changes Repeat the procedure for Edge 37 41 give Nodes as 9 For or Edge 37 72 give Num points 4 Press Apply to accept the changes followed by Dismiss to close the window Turn on Pre mesh in the Display Tree Press Yes to recompute the mesh Turn on the Pre Mesh gt Solid The display will resemble Figure 3 372 The user might have to switch off the Vertices Edges and Curves to reduce clutter on the screen File gt Save blocking will save the Blocking File File Mesh gt Load from Blocking In the Mesh Exist window press Merge as shown Figure 3 373 Tutorial Manual Advanced Meshing Tutorials Figure 3 373 Window Asking for Mesh Exists EN x Merging New Mesh Mesh Already Exists in this File how do vau wish to proceed Merge Cancel Switch Off Blocking in the Display Tree Merging the Resultant Mesh with Hexa Mesh at Interface2 Before merging the surface mesh at the INTERFACE2 will look as shown in Figure 3 374 The user might have to switch off all the families except INTERFACE2 CYL2 and C
225. Enable Single Component 4Accept default value of Nominal Mesh Radius Body Length X 30 Starting Mesh Divisions 10 2 14 and Max Num of Cell Refinements 7 Leave the other values as default Click Compute Parameters This saves the mesh in the local directory and converts in into Cart3D format At the end it displays the Finest Cell Dimensions as shown in Figure 3 583 Figure 3 583 Cart3D Mesh window Cart3D L art 3D Mesher amp Cart3D files prefix Single Component v Fix Normals Nominal Mesh Radius Body a Length x Starting Mesh Divisions 10 214 Mum of Cell Refinements 7 i Compute Parameters Finest Cell Dimensions 0 104 x 0 104 x 0 104 Hesh Creation Preview Mesh Only C Create and Save Full Mesh Humber of Multi grid levels 5 Outer Bounding Box Minimum Diagonal Faint 53 899876 59 9959951 59 I aximum Diagonal Point 6011 00124 60 000019 0 0 ix Define Surface Family Refinement Define All Surface Hefinement Number of Buffer Layers 4 Angle Threshold for 20 Refinement Area Weight Normals C C Number of Cut Planes ine dir 3 Number of Cut Planes in dir 3 Number of Cut Planes in 2 dir 3 Mesh Internal Region Apply ok Dismiss Tutorial Manual Cart3D This will create 3 density polygons by default for mesh density control which can either be kept or deleted This also computes t
226. FACE Press Accept and then press Apply Tutorial Manual Advanced Meshing Tutorials 65 xj CURVES CYL ake LiLs IMLET INTERFACE Select parts to Merge Meshes window INTERFACE 2 LIVE LIVE OUTLET Accept Cancel Screen All Mane After merging the surface mesh at the INTERFACEI will look as shown in Figure 3 364 Figure 3 364 Tetra Mesh after Merging Tutorial Manual Advanced Meshing Tutorials Switch OFF lines and triangles elements to see just the geometry Switch on all the parts if they are turned OFF select the Orient gt Home option From Main menu select File gt Save project f Generating the Hexa Mesh in Right Section Switch Off the Mesh in The Display Tree e Select Blocking Create Block eb Initialize Block dn as shown in Figure 3 365 select all the entity and Press Apply Figure 3 365 Create Block window Tutorial Manual Advanced Meshing Tutorials Lreate Block a Part SOLID M Create Block Initialize Blocks Type 30 Bounding Entities o u Project vertices Orient with geometry 2D Blocking Apply ka Dismiss Turn on Vertices and their numbers with Vertices gt Numbers and Curves and their names with Curves gt Show Curves Names from Display Tree Select Association 8 Group Curve od Toggle on Group Curve and select the Curves corresponding to CURVES 4 and CURVES 3 as shown in
227. Figure 3 367 Select Association 8 Associate Edge to Curve Enable Project Vertices Tutorial Manual Advanced Meshing Tutorials Select CURVES 4 and corresponding Edges 37 38 38 42 42 4 and 41 37 as shown in Figure 3 367 by using the left mouse button Click the middle mouse button to accept the selection and then as shown in press Apply as shown in Figure 3 366 Figure 3 366 Blocking G Blocking Associations Association window lit Associations Edit Associations OCC KOKO a8420 41420 a7 41011 AQ Curve s CURVES 4 8 m Project vertices Project to surface intersection E Project ends to curve intersection Apply ok Dismiss Figure 3 367 Projecting the edges on curves Tutorial Manual Advanced Meshing Tutorials Note Make sure that Project Vertices 1s enabled Repeat the same procedure for CURVES 3 corresponding Edges 21 22 22 26 26 25 and 25 21 After Projecting vertices geometry will look like Figure 3 368 Figure 3 368 Blocking After projecting vertices Note User has to turn off and again turn on vertices for updating the position of the vertex numbers Tutorial Manual Advanced Meshing Tutorials Select Blocking gt Split Block gt OGrid window will appear as shown in Figure 3 369 Press 0 Add in front of Select Block and select existing block by using the left mouse button and then mi
228. Figure 3 642 Solid Contours with Pressure Variation pressure NODE 1 217 1 066 0 9756 0 7650 0 5143 0 4537 0 3111 0 1625 0 01183 4 1388 4 2834 4 44010 41 551 7 4 7413 4 89158 1 043 In order to observe the solid contours in Flat shading select Modify Drawing Properties option from Surfaces options It will open up Selected Surfaces Properties window Figure 3 643 From this window click on Use flat shading button to display the result in Figure 3 644 Tutorial Manual Post Processing Tutorials Figure 3 643 Selected Surface Properties Surfaces panel Properties Names Surfaces ah Line width Sizes etc Transparancy TT Contourline width Grid line width Edge line wicth Vector size Arrow size Vector size Modes dot size Unitorm Colors Solid display f Contourline arid plot Edge plot vector plot Vector plot Node plot YWectors uniformly spaced with Number of vectors Options set featureLines Remove teaturelines Use smooth shading Use flat shading Repair polyqon s orientation Interpalate results Translucent types Type fast E Apply ok Dismiss AN iW a Tutorial Manual Post Processing Tutorials Figure 3 644 Solid contours with Flat shading pressure NODE 1 217 1 066 0 9156 0 7650 0 6143 0 4637 0 3131 0 1625 0 01183 0 1388 0 2894 0 4400 0 5907 0 7413 0 8919
229. File name bluntbody agdb Save Network P Save as type DesignM odeler Geometry agdb Cancel E c Importing a Geometry File From the Main Menu select File Import External Geometry file Select the BluntBody x t file supplied by browsing as shown in Figure 5 47 Tutorial Manual ANSYS ICEMCFD CFX Tutorials Figure ax 5 47 Select Look in 3 parasolid parasolid an bluntbady x E File cadmeshing x t window heatinqcail x E skaticmixer x E skaticmixerz x E m File name bluntbody x_t Open My Network P Eg Files of type A Geometry Files sat CAT Part CAT Produc Cancel 2 After importing press Generate button from the top menu so that geometry can be visualized on the screen This loads the geometry file in the DesignModeler space as shown in Figure 5 48 Tutorial Manual ANSYS ICEMCFD CFX Tutorials Figure 5 48 Importe d Geometr y Now we have to proceed for geometry repairing and meshing in advance meshing To go into the Advance meshing Click on Project in the upper left corner After opening project window click on Proceed to Advance meshing This will open up the advance meshing interface The project window is shown in the Figure 5 49 ANSYS ICEMCFD CFX Tutorials Figure 5 49 yp Project x Design_Modeler_tasks_window File Tools Help oeli Aglo DesignModeler Tasks ili Open Mew simu
230. Frame dat Hun Time Options Post Process and View Results Apply Cancel Post Processing of Results After completion of Nastran run the results will be automatically loaded into the post processor tab Click on Variables option in Post processing Tab menu bar In Select Nastran Variables window select Category as Solid and Current Scalar Variable as VonMises_Stress as shown inFigure 4 234 The VonMises Stress distribution is shown in Figure 4 235 Figure 4 234 Vonmises Stress selection Note Results shown here are obtained by MSC Nastran run Results may differ Nastran Tutorials Select MastranV anables m HMode Load 5ide Hz Load H Category Top Layer Scalar Variable Current WonMises_Stress Mn 0 Max 223 13 Vector Variable Current mag 0 95387 Apply ck Cancel with those of AI Nastran run depending on the version Tutorial Manual Nastran Tutorials Figure 4 235 VonMises Stress VonMise Load 1 s Stress 223 distribut 508 6 7 icum 193 8 178 9 164 0 149 1 134 2 119 3 104 4 29 45 74 54 To display mode shape at Total Translation Frequency from the Nastran Variables window as shown in Figure 4 236 select Category as Displacement and variable as Translational Total Tutorial Manual Figure 4 236 Nastran variables window Nastran Tutorials Select al MastranV anables
231. ISSUE SA oe CV eM EE cx rc E EL VAT DA Aui ATE n i CN SEM Ec 4 t CREER un EXC ie AO ARS Displacement Now in the same window enter the Name as DISPLACEMENT Set the SPC Set to 2 Toggle OFF all Displacements and Rotations except UY Enter 0 2 for UY Select the surface selection icon e for mesh or geometry and box select all the surface elements at the top as shown in Figure 4 58 The window should now look like Figure 4 59 Press Apply Switched OFF Displacements in the Model Tree Tutorial Manual Figure 4 59 Create Displacement on Surface window Directional Displacement Rotational Displacement ANSYS Tutorials Create Displacement on 9 Surface DISPLACEMENTS SPC Set 2 LCS Global SPC Type Constraint with Enforcer Surfaces us sel 0 2 s oO 2 n Wo oO Figure 4 60 Displacement Display Contact ANSYS Tutorials rhe E i capa CEU mnm S E TASSE Click on Constraints gt Define Contact gt Manual Definition e the second one The window as presented in Figure 4 61 will display Enter the Name as CONTACT ALL Tutorial Manual ANSYS Tutorials Figure 4 61 Define Surface to Define Surface to Contact Surface Contact window Define Contact 3A Name CONTACT_ALL Contact Surfaces uns sel Target Surfaces uns sel
232. LS Dyna results file from the FrDoor directory and press Apply In the Select Transient Steps panel set Single step to step 1 0 005 and enable the Display Transient Time option Note that Run time instead of Single step will process through all the time steps updating the results display at each step LS Dyna Tutorials Figure 4 116 Select Result Format Select Hesult Format or Add as DataSet Current Formal ILS DYNA D 3Plot Frdaar d3plot Group Elements by Materials isplayed in the graphics window From the Post processing tab click on Variables The model will be and the Select LS Dyna Variables window will be displayed Set the Category to Kinematics and the Current Scalar Variable to Translation Total as shown in Figure 4 117 LS Dyna Tutorials Figure 4 1 17 Select L5 Dyna Result Variables window Variables L ategory Kinematics Scalar Variable Current Translation otal Min 0 Max 34 6206 Vector Variable Current Velocity mag 7944 7 Apply ox Dismiss The following results can be seen in the graphics window shown in Figure 4 118 Figure 4 118 Display Results in the Graphics window Tutorial Manual LS Dyna Tutorials Time TranelationTotal 1 133 1 058 823 3068 8312 6801 6045 5289 4534 Jo Fe 3023 1511 07556 0000 cQoaoaoadadoaooaoaacacocdo Tu
233. Mesh and recompute Turn off Curves Surfaces and Edges and view the final mesh as in Figure 3 119 Figure 3 119 A Solid display of the Mesh m Verifying and Saving the Mesh Select Pre mesh Quality change the Criterion to Angle and Apply Note the improved mesh quality in the histogram in the right hand window Also check Criterion gt Tutorial Manual Hexa Meshing Determinant 2 x 2 x 2 Re Apply and note the quality in the histogram Save to unstructured Right mouse select Pre Mesh and select Convert to Unstruct Mesh from the pull down Save the blocking using File gt Blocking gt Save as and or save the Project Use File gt Exit to quit or continue with the next tutorial Tutorial Manual Hexa Meshing 3 2 5 Sphere Cube Overview In this example the user will employ an O grid to fit the topology of the region between a Cube and a Sphere The O grid forms a topological bridge between the dissimilar topologies and provides excellent element quality a Summary of Steps The Blocking Strategy Starting the Project Creating Parts Starting Blocking Creating the Composite Curve Projecting the Edges to Curves Moving Vertices Creating the O grid Fitting the O grid Using Prescribed Points setting the Inner block to Generating the Mesh b The Blocking Strategy The topology for this geometry is quite simple The user will first create an O grid around the cube and the
234. Mesher window select Define Surface Family Refinement In the Cart3d Surface Refinement Params window set Min Surface Refinement for SURFS INLET and EXIT to 3 as shown in Figure 3 605 Press Apply and Dismiss Figure 3 605 xj Cart 30 Surface Refinement Params Family Min Surface Refinement Surface Refinement Window SURFS 0 Apply Dismiss Change the Number of Multi grid levels to 3 Under Outer Bounding Box set Minimum Diagonal Point 0 001 1 0 1 0 and Maximum Diagonal Point 10 001 1 0 1 0 Set Number of Buffer Layers to 15 and Angle Threshold for Refinement to 5 Enable Mesh Internal Region Make sure PreView Mesh Only is enabled as shown in Figure 3 606 Figure 3 606 Preview Mesh Parameters Cart3D Mesher a Carta files prefis NOZZLE Single Component v Fis Normals Nominal Mesh Radius Body ag Lenght xj Starting Mesh Divisions 20 S Mas Mum of Cell Refinements 45 Compute Parameters Finest Cell Dimensions 0 132 D132 0 132 Hesh Creation Preview Mesh Only Create and Save Full Mesh Humber of Multi grid levels 3 ml Outer Bounding Box Minimum Diagonal Point 0 001 1 0 1 0 WS Masinum Diagonal Point 10 001 1 01 0 NS Define Surface Family Refinement Define All Surface Refinement Humber of Buffer Layers 15 E Angle Threshold for 5 Refinement Area Weight Normals Number of Cut
235. NSYS ICEMCFD File gt Change working directory to ACN docu CFDHelp CFD Tutorial Files gt Elbow Part Use File gt Geometry gt Open geometry and choose geometry tin Note Settings gt Selection gt Auto pick mode should be turned OFF for ICEM CFD to behave exactly as this tutorial describes d Creating Parts Like the previous two tutorials the user will need to assign and create the Parts before blocking 15 to be performed Use the Part gt Create Part functions within the Display Tree to change the Part for the surfaces The following steps will lead the user through this process In the Display Tree turn ON Surfaces and right click on Parts gt Create Part Type IN next to the Part name The Create Hexa Meshing Part by selection a icon should be selected by default Select the entity selection icon and select the surface of the geometry labeled as IN in Figure 3 168 and then press the middle mouse button to accept Press Apply to create new part Refer to Figure 3 168 as a guide to assign the other surfaces to the Parts IN ELBOW CYL and OUT When all of the Surfaces have been assigned to their respective PARTS press the middle mouse button to end selection and press Dismiss to exit from the Create Part Window For this tutorial we will leave the Curves and Points assigned to the initial family GEOM e Creating the Material Points select Geometry gt Create Body gt Materia
236. Now zoom in closer to the fuselage and body Box select around these surfaces but not the outer surfaces The box select should be set to entire selection mode by default so it will only select what is completely enclosed within the box If it was left in partial mode from a previous selection press in the popup selection option window to switch to entire selection mode Set the Maximum size to 50 height to 50 and height ratio to 1 4 Press Apply Figure 3 215 curtace Mesh dj Setting mesh sizes on surfaces Size Surace s wTRAIL T Be Maximum size 2 Heian Height ratio fi Number of leyers o 8 Tetra size ratio 0 Minimum size 50 Max deviation lo Blank surfaces with params In the Display Tree turn OFF the part SOLID as only the LIVE part is required for meshing Then right click in the Display Tree on Blocking Tutorial Manual Hexa Meshing Pre mesh Project edges Turn on the Pre mesh The mesh distribution on the symmetry plane with the fuselage and wing is shown in Figure 3 2167 Note Project edges do not do any face projections Thus it is a good way to save time when first computing the mesh even in a 3D model This allows the user to detect any problematic edge projections and distributions and fix them quickly Figure 3 216 Mesh distribution obtained from setting the surface meshing parameters for all the surfaces j Setting Mesh Parameters with Linked
237. ORFN Turn OFF Blocking gt Blocks D Association of edges to curves Now user will associate edges to corresponding curves Select Blocking gt Associate 65 Associate Edges to curve will open the window as shown in Figure 3 448 Now associate edges to corresponding curves so that after Advanced Meshing Tutorials association and turning Curves OFF from Display Tree widget geometry should look like as shown in Figure 3 449 Figure 3 448 Blocking ra Associate edge to curve Associations window Edit Associations GOETO be Associate Edge gt Curve Edge s 4105850 S Cuve s EDGE 12 AR Project vertices Project to surface intersection Project ends ta curve Intersection El Apply o Dismiss Figure 3 449 Association of edges to curve Tutorial Manual Advanced Meshing Tutorials m Surface mesh size Mesh gt surface mesh size it will open surface mesh size window enter Maximum element size as 25 Height 5 and Height ratio 1 as shown in Figure 3 450 Select w all surfaces and Press Apply Advanced Meshing Tutorials Figure 3 450 surface mesh size window urface Mesh Size Sufaceis FACE25 WA Maximum size Heit h tt Height ratio Humber of layers DO Tetra size ratio 0 Minimum size 0 deviation 0 Blank surfaces with param Apply
238. Octree Approach when the mesher rounds the nodes of the mesh to match the given geometry it first tries to project them onto the nearest prescribed points and curves For the cutting step of the mesh generation Tetra requires that a material point be defined for each distinct material that is needed for analysis The mesher can create these automatically if none are defined material point might be used to define a fluid region for CFD analysis a solid region for FEA analysis or both fluid and solid regions for conjugate heat transfer analysis e Important Features in ANSYS ICEMCFD Tetra Natural Size If the maximum tetrahedral size defined on surface parts 1s larger than a geometric entity the specified part the user must employ the natural size limit The user can specify a Natural size that is proportional to the scale factor It should be assigned a value that is slightly smaller than the smallest gap in the Tutorial Manual Tetra Meshing model so that the mesher will further subdivide the tetrahedral to match this geometric feature The Natural size is the minimum size of any tetrahedral achieved via automatic subdivision for the entire model If the user defines a smaller max element size on a geometry entity Tetra does continue to subdivide until it meets the maximum size request The effect of the natural size 1s a geometry based adaptation of the mesh based on feature curvature and proximity Tetrahedral M
239. Planes in dir 3 Number of Cut Planes in Y dir 3 E Number af Cut Planes in Z dir 3 Mesh Internal Region Apply o Dismiss Tutorial Manual Cart3D Click Apply to run the mesher This will create a domain file with 3 Cut Planes Quad Elements each coordinate direction and Cut Cells Hex Elements The PreView mesh will be loaded automatically Note As in the case of previous tutorials the mesh can be viewed by switching on the Cut Plane that is to be viewed One such view of CUTPLANE Z2 is shown in Figure 3 607 Figur e 3 607 c Mesh Generation Full Mesh In the Cart3D Mesher window enable Create and Save Full Mesh as shown in Figure 3 608 and press Apply This will create 3 levels of coarsened mesh which can be read by the solver Tutorial Manual Cart3D Figure 3 608 Carn3D Mesher Create and Save Full Mesh S CartaD files prefix NOZZLE Single Component v Fix Normals Nominal Mesh Radius Body 3 Lenght x i Starting Mesh Divisions 20 8h Num of Cell Refinements Compute Parameters Finest Cell Dimensions 0 1328 0 132 0 132 Hesh Creation C Preview Mesh Only Create and Save Full Mesh Number of Multi grid levels 3 Outer Bounding Box Minimum Diagonal Point 0 001 1 0 1 0 NS Maximum Diagonal Point 10 001 1 0 1 0 NS Define Surface Family Refinement Define All Surface Refinement Humber of Buffer Layers 15 E A
240. Points gt Show Point Names in the Display Tree and turn Points ON Select Blocking gt Split Block gt Split Block A Next to Split Method select Prescribed Point from the pull down menu You ll see the window shown in Figure 3 201 Press the select Edge icon and select the edge connecting vertices 21 and 25 with the left mouse button Its end vertex numbers defines an edge You ll have to temporarily turn off the Points to see the vertex numbers Then press the select Point icon 4 and select POINTS 14 at the top of the fuselage as shown in the figure below Once POINTS 14 appears in the window press Apply to get the split through the prescribed point Tutorial Manual Hexa Meshing Figure 3 200 Split points Tutorial Manual Hexa Meshing Figure 3 201 Split Block a The Split block window Split Block Split Block Block Select f All Visible C Selected Block EX Edge 21 25 1 AS Project vertices Split Method Split Method Prescribed paint Point POINTS 14 27 0 2 54 Apply Dismiss Now select the edge defined by vertices 21 and 69 and split this edge by the Prescribed point POINTS 13 at the bottom of the fuselage as shown in Figure 3 202 Switch off Points to have a better view The blocking should now look like Figure 3 202 Tutorial Manual Figure 3 202 Splitting around the fuselage Hexa Meshing Right mouse click in the Display T
241. RA 10 as seen in the Figure 3 274 Tutorial Manual Tetra Meshing Figure 3 274 The mesh after conversion D Diagnostics As in the SphereCube example the user should go through all of the checks for Errors and Possible problems to ensure that the mesh does not contain any flaws that would cause problems for analysis m Saving the Project Save the mesh by selecting File gt Save Project Close the project by selecting File gt Close Project Tutorial Manual Tetra Meshing Appendix 3 4 6 STL Configuration Overview In this tutorial example the user will import STL data to the ANSYS ICEMCFD Mesh Editor After extracting a single curve from the model the user will segment this one curve into multiple curves to be used for segmenting the surfaces The surfaces and material points will then be defined according to parts From there the user can set meshing parameters for the model for input to Tetra Lastly the user will generate a tetrahedral mesh for the configuration a Summary of Steps Converting STL file to Geometry file Extracting the curves Segmenting the curves Segmenting the surfaces Assigning the parts Generating the tetrahedral mesh Adding prism a layer Tutorial Manual Tetra Meshing Appendix Subdividing the prism layer saving the Project b Converting the STL File to a Geometry File Start the ANSYS ICEMCFD Mesh Editor Select File gt Import Geometry gt STL to translate t
242. RF Out of element face INTERFACE Delete Copy V BCicon Scale 10 n families Accept Cancel Press Accept in Edit attributes window Now in the Write view input file window select Yes for Ignore BAR elements keep View Ansys file ON and other option as default Press Apply ANSYS Tutorials k Solution and Results Thermal analysis is to be performed on this model and the results should be visualized a post processor Solving the problem Click on Q Submit Solver Run icon from the Solve Options Tab Menubar to start the Ansys as shown in Figure 4 83 Press Apply in Run Solver window Verify Working Directory as well as Select Ansys Products field Ansys Multiphysics User can change both of these fields if he she 15 interested Press Apply to start Ansys solver in Interactive mode ANSYS Tutorials Figure 4 83 3 Run Solver window Run Solver Solver AN 55 Ansys Hun Mode C Interactive Batch Graphics Device Input File ansus in Output File ansys out Laur Working Directory Initial Jobname file Total Workspace S Total Database 256 Read start ans at Start up Yes Select Ansys Product ANSYS Multiphysics Apply ox Dismiss As it launches the Ansys Interactive window load the ansys in file in Ansys for the analysis through File gt Read Input From option User can chec
243. Select the x Delete Curve to open the Delete Curves window Check ON Delete permanently Press on the keyboard to select all curves and press Apply to delete Geometry Delete Point Select the X Delete Point to open the Delete Point window Check ON Delete permanently Press on the keyboard to select all points and press Apply to delete them Build topology Geometry gt Repair Geometry gt Build Diagnostic Topology Select ura Build Diagnostic Topology from the Geometry tab This will extract all the curves from the surfaces and the points from the curves But the new curves will only span the boundary of the new surfaces after Geometry Creation segmenting and deleting The tolerance should be 0 1 and Filter points and Filter curves should be turned off Press Apply Surface creation First make sure Curves are ON in the Display Tree Geometry gt Create Modify Surface gt From curves Select From Curves to open the Create Modify Surface window Select the curves shown in Figure 3 15 below with the left mouse button and press the middle mouse button to complete the selection Make sure the Part name is SYM and the Name is SYM 3 Press Apply to create the surface Press Dismiss to close the window Figure 3 15 Curves for surface Geometry Creation Select these curves c Creating the Material point Geometry gt Create Body gt Material Point gt Centroid of 2 po
244. Starting Mesh Divisions 444 and Num of Cell Refinements 8 Click Compute Parameters This saves the mesh converts it to Cart3D format and finds the intersections At the end it displays the Finest Cell Dimensions as shown in Figure 3 533 SS A Tutorial Manual Cart3D Figure 3 533 Cart3D Mesher d Cart3D Mesher LL a window Cart3D files prefix MISSILE Single Component Fis Normals Nominal Mesh Radius Body ze g Lenght x Starting Mesh Divizions 4 44 Mum of Cell Refinements E Compute Parameters Finest Cell Dimensions 1 62 1 52 x 1 52 Hesh Creation Preview Mesh Only Create and Save Full Mesh Humber of Multi arid levels 5 Outer Bounding Box Minimum Diagonal Point 524 992238 Vy I asimum Diagonal Point 874 999951 Define Surface Family Refinement DS BE IM Define All Surface Hefinement Number of Buffer Layers 4 Angle Threshold for 20 Refinement Area Weight Normals Number of Cut Planes ints dir 3 Number of Cut Planes in i dir 3 Number of Cut Planes in Z dir 3 Mesh Internal Region Apply Lox Dismiss This will create 10 density polygons for mesh density control which can be viewed in the Display Tree widget by activating Geometry gt Densities Tutorial Manual Cart3D This also computes the finest cell size 1 82 x 1 82 x 1 82
245. TS 4 150 0 0 POINTS 5 150 0 50 POINTS 6 150 0 50 POINTS 7 150 50 0 POINTS 8 150 0 20 POINTS 9 150 0 20 POINTS 10 130 0 0 Geometry Creation POINTS 11 150 100 20 POINTS 12 150 100 20 POINTS 13 130 100 0 Press Dismiss to close the Explicit Location window The points should appear as shown in Figure 3 11 when oriented in the Isometric view Figure 3 11 Points created FOINTS 3 OCINTS 2 POINTS 13 POINTS 12 POINTS 0 FONTS 11 FONTS 1 OINTs 7 FONTS 6 POINTS 10 POINTS 9 POINTS 4 8 POINTS 5 Arc Creation Geometry gt Create Modify Curve gt Arc through 3 points Select Arc Through 3 Points to open window then select the location selection Geometry Creation icon and select points POINTS 1 POINTS 3 and POINTS 2 with the left mouse button By default the Part name is CURVES Enter the Name as CURVES 0 Press Apply to create the arc Switch ON the Curves in the left side Display Tree window To see the names of the curves use the right mouse button and select Curves gt Show Curve names in the Display Tree window The newly created curves name will display as CURVES 0 similarly select POINTS 5 POINTS 7 and POINTS 6 and enter the name as CURVES 1 Press Apply to create the arc Now make two more arcs by just selecting the points as specified below and pressing Apply each time The curve names will be generated as shown
246. Tetra will be unable to find a closed volume Thus if the user notices any holes in the model prior to mesh generation the surface data should be fixed to eliminate these holes Mostly the holes can be found using the Geometry Repair Geoemtry Build Topology option It should give you yellow curves for the regions where there are big cracks or missing surfaces If holes are not apparent to the user but they are unsure of the model s integrity they can still run Tetra After the run Tetra automatically figures out the holes and prompts the user to close the holes interactively For further information on the process of interactively closing holes refer to the description later in this section or see the Mesh Editor on line Help Curves and points on sharp edges ANSYS Tetra requires curves at locations where the user 15 interested in capturing geometric features where two surfaces intersect Curves in Tetra indicate to the mesher that nodes of the mesh should be aligned along a feature Refer to the two examples in Figure 3 296 Tetra Meshing Appendix Figure 3 296 Example 1 illustrates flat surfaces with a fillet surface going Example 1 Example 2 between the two In Example 2 the two flat surfaces meet In Example 1 the tetra mesh will round along the filleted region The mesh does not have to conform to the edges of the surfaces In fact if the mesh did have to conform to the edges of the su
247. Thus it s important to keep a note of the Scale Factor all the time ANSYS ICEMCFD CFX Tutorials Figure 5 26 Global Mesh Size En Global Mesh Size window gt Global Mesh Parameters Global Element Scale Factor Scale Factor 1 Display Global Element Seed 5ize element 3 0 Display M Size Enabled Size 1 Display Mum of Elements in gap Refinement fio E Ignore Wall Thickness Triangle tolerance 0 001 v Unithess tri tolerance Saving the Project Select Save Project from the main menubar 2g Meshing Select Mesh gt Volume Meshing from the menubar Make sure Mesh type is set to Tetra and use From geometry as the method Leave the other fields as default as shown in Figure 5 27 and press Apply to start the tetra run The tetra mesh generated is shown in Figure 5 28 Tutorial Manual ANSYS ICEMCFD CFX Tutorials Select File gt Save Project As Specify StaticMixer as the File name and press Save Figure 5 27 Mesh Tetrahedral ESL GUAT Window Mesh type Tetra Smooth mesh Iterations 5 quality 4 Coarsen mesh Iterations ens Worst aspect ratio 77 Smooth transition Factor 12 Options Run batch process visible geometry Part by Part Load mesh after completion Apply o Dismiss Tutorial Manual ANSYS ICEMCFD CFX Tutorials Figure 5 2
248. Tutorials Figure 5 82 Tetra Prism Mesh Spit Mesh Split Prism Parts is Split Prisms Method Fisratio Fis initial heic Prism ratio 1 3 Number of layers 4 Split only specified layers Layer numbers 0 1 2 0 Apply ok Dismiss The resultant mesh will appear as in Figure 5 83 Tutorial Manual ANSYS ICEMCFD CFX Tutorials Figure 5 83 Prism Layers Redistributing Prisms If the first prism height is required to be 0 001 everywhere the created prism layers would need to be redistributed From the Edit Mesh tab menubar select Move Nodes d then Redistribute Prism Edge a Set Initial height to 0 001 Press Apply Tutorial Manual ANSYS ICEMCFD CFX Tutorials Tutorial Manual
249. Using Block Splitting at Prescribed point the user will generate a Hexahedral Mesh for both of the regions so that the topology of the solid region is a degenerate Hexahedral mesh Before the user employs the Collapse function for his her own applications confirm that the solver accepts degenerated hexas for a structured solver penta 6 elements prism for an unstructured solver Note Settings gt Selection gt Auto pick mode should be turned OFF for ANSYS ICEM CFD to behave exactly as this tutorial describes c Starting the Project From UNIX or DOS window start ANSYS ICEMCFD Go to File gt Change working directory Change the directory to ACN docu CFDHelp CFD Tutorial Files gt PipeBl ade The top ICEM Installation directory is referred to as ICEM ACN here Go to File gt Geometry gt Open geometry and choose the tetin file geometry tin d Creating Parts in the Mesh Editor Right click in the Display Tree on Parts gt Create Part to create different Parts and assign the different surface of the geometry to the appropriate part Refer to Figure 3 135 for the Surface part assignments Figure 3 135 The Pipe Blade configu ration Hexa Meshing BLADE A X Y e Surface Parts After the Pipe Blade project is open activate the Points and Surfaces from the Display Tree Switch on Points gt Show Points Names Begin the Surface part reassignment by changing the region enclose
250. X Plane and adjust the Fraction Value to 0 2 so as to obtain the cut plane shown in Figure 3 667 Figure 3 667 Cut Plane Density 3 e m J gt gt e Now this cut plane will be consider as the Dynamic Surface under the Surfaces option of Display Tree Ensure that the Dynamic Surface is selected from the Display Tree and then go to Streams option of Post processing Tab menu bar Tutorial Manual Post Processing Tutorials As shown in Figure 3 668 select the option Set seeds with 2D Annotation from Define Seeds panel for streams window Choose the radio button Line to define the type of seeds Figure 3 668 Set seeds for al Streams from streams a 2D Annotation a window Define seeds C Points Multiple lines Line Filled box C Circle Filed circle Tracking Direction Both Down Up Number of seeds 10 Searching For nonconforming interfaces Create in all datasets simultaneausly Apply ia Cancel Press Apply This would display a message on the main graphics window prompting the user to define the starting and ending points of the line Click the left mouse button and drag it to define the length of the line as shown in Figure 3 669 The horizontal line is drawn from left side beginning till the back side outlet going through shuttle Tutorial Manual Figure 3 669 Dynamic Surface with the line de
251. YL3 Figure 3 374 Hexa Mesh before Merging Tutorial Manual Advanced Meshing Tutorials 2 ARCADE Jp LAST Pee Pt ERAT EOD Lr rai 7 STE p a aN IPS beri slc CEST A PRDEL FE KA ET A e ENR FIAT pst way A INCAS Det i ct et ESTNE ML Ea MN 59 NOIL ISIE ISCISE XI POY 3 ef yer TAN ee E al Select Edit mesh gt Merge Node e gt Merge NL A selection window will appear as shown in Figure 3 363 In the Merge Surface Part Mesh select INTERFACE2 Press Accept Press Apply in the Merge Meshes window After merging the surface mesh at the INTERFACE2 will look as shown in Figure 3 375 And pyramid at INTERFACE2 will be as shown in Figure 3 376 You can see the pyramids by switching on pyramids with LIVE family switched ON Figure 3 375 Hexa Mesh after Merging Tutorial Manual Advanced Meshing Tutorials Figure 3 376 Pyramid at INTERFACE2 Tutorial Manual Advanced Meshing Tutorials Smoothing the Hybrid Mesh Select Edit mesh gt Smooth Mesh globally to start the smoother interface A Smooth elements window will appear The quality of the hybrid mesh before smoothing is shown in Figure 3 377 Modify the display of the histogram to have a Height of 20 elements Click on Replot to replot the Histogram To
252. Z2 is shown in Figure 3 477 Tutorial Manual Cart3D e _ me CUTPLA LL EEEEEEFEEHEHHHEHHETEFF FF FF FF FF T I NE Z2 Mesh FI Perform the operation Parts gt Show by a right click on Parts in the Display Tree widget after viewing the mesh c Mesh Generation Full Mesh Now 1n the Cart3D mesher window enable Create and Save Full Mesh as shown in Figure 3 478 Tutorial Manual Cart3D Figure 3 478 Mesher Create and Save Full Mesh CartsD files prefix WINGI Single Component Fis Normals Nominal Mesh Radius Body n a Lenght 12 Starting Mesh Divizions 3 33 Num of Cell Refinements 1 2 Compute Parameters Finest Cell Dimensions 0 003 0 00757 x 0 00737 Hesh Creation Preview Mesh Only Create and Save Full Mesh Number of Multi arid levels 3 Outer Bounding Box Minimum Diagonal Point 29 4641 05 30 1 734 asimum Diagonal Point 30 882856 30 173431 Define Surface Family Refinement Defne All Surface Hefinement Humber of Buffer Layers 4 i Angle Threshald Far n Refinement Area Weight Normals Number of Cut Planes inet dir 3 Number of Cut Planes in dir 3 Number of Cut Planes in Z dir 3 Mesh Internal Region Apply o Dismiss Set the Number of Multi grid levels
253. a bounding box around the entire geometry The next step is to split the block into four sub blocks Begin by turning on Curves and Surfaces from the Display tree The L shaped topology is best seen in a side view Select View gt Left or select the X axis in the Triad Display ki jn the lower right hand corner to re orient the model as it appears in Figure 3 103 Tutorial Manual Hexa Meshing Figure 3 103 Geometry showing the spilt locations Ww S d Select Blocking gt Split Block gt Split Block 54 Select any horizontal edge with the left mouse button try to position the new edge near the front end of the small cylinder and press the middle mouse button to accept Next select any of the vertical edges and position the new edge near the top of the large cylinder Splits should appear as shown in Figure 3 104 Tutorial Manual W ee ee Wa S Hexa Meshing WAT LW discard the upper large block Select Delete Blocks and remove block shown in Figure 3 105 Next Figure 3 104 Block Splits Figure 3 105 Delete Block A Y A a Vana vM VAC ANA WAAAY IL aV 1 WM Tutorial Manual Hexa Meshing 2 Projecting the Edges to the Curves Turn off the Surfaces displaying Curves only Select Associate a Associate Edge to Curve 3 Select th
254. ab menubar f Make sure that by default Build Diagnostic Topology e is selected Set Tolerance to 0 1 Enable Filter points and Filter curves Set New Part Name to Create new and use others as default as shown in Figure 5 51 ANSYS ICEMCFD CFX Tutorials Figure 5 51 Repair G Build Topology diia i Repair Surface P ae Tolerance 1 1 Filter by angle Feature angle 30 v Filter points Filter curves New Part Name Inherited Create new Part for new curves CURVES Part for new points POINTS Apply ok Dismiss Click Apply Turn OFF the display of Surfaces and Points in the tree to make sure that all the curves is in red as shown in Figure 5 52 Tutorial Manual ANSYS ICEMCFD CFX Tutorials Figure 5 52 All curves in Red color Body Creation Go to the Geometry tab menubar and select Create Body Switch on Surface in the Display Tree Give the Part name as BLUNTBODY Click on Material Point and toggle on the Centroid of 2 points option as shown in Figure 5 53 Click on Select locations select two opposite corners on the screen as suggested in Figure 5 54 and middle click and again to cancel out Save the Project Figure 5 53 Create Body Window Figure 5 54 Two Oppo site points for Materi al point ANSYS ICEMCFD CFX Tutorials Create Body 4 BLUNTBODY Name m Material Point
255. ace Normals Note Now there are only triangular Surface Mesh Elements as required for Cart3D Go To File gt Mesh gt Save Mesh As Specify the name as body uns in the Save all Mesh window as shown in Figure 3 519 and press Save Note User should only use the Save Mesh As option SS A Tutorial Manual Cart3D Figure ETTEITTENEEEENEEN e Save in missile E ES All missile uns e tetra_mesh uns Mesh Recent win d OW Documents Deskto p hy Documents Computer File name Save as type Mesh Files L ancel E Select File gt Geometry gt Close Geometry and File Mesh gt Close Mesh d Generating Surface Mesh on Front and Back Fins Load the geometry file ffin tin via File gt Geometry gt Open Geometry select ffin tin Repair the Geometry Build Diagnostic Topology in the same way as for body tin Figure 3 516 Use the default values which may be different from the previous geometry To remove the possibility of elements jumping from one side of the fin to the other from the Mesh tab choose Set Global Mesh Size A and General Parameters Enter Max element as 8 see Figure 3 478 and press Apply Select Tet Meshing Parameters and set Edge criterion to 0 05 as shown in Figure 3 521 Press Apply Tutorial Manual Cart3D Figure 3 520
256. aft Press Constraints gt Displacement on Point button You should see the window shown in Figure 4 33 Enter the Name FIXED MOTION The LCS should be set as LCSI Check ON the Directional Displacement UTheta and UZ and leave the numbers at 0 For the Points select one node on the symmetry plane of the model that is on the large hole See Figure 4 34 as a reference Then press Apply Turn OFF Displacements from the Model Tree to simplify the display ANSYS Tutorials Figure 4 33 Create Displacement on Subset window Tutorial Manual ANSYS Tutorials Figure 4 34 Node to constrain solid body motion Loads Click on Loads Temperature on Subset i which will bring up the Define Temperature Boundary Condition on Subsets window shown in Figure 4 35 Enter the Name as TEMPERATURE Click on the subset selection button and select Subset1 Enter a value of 498 for the Temperature and press Apply Temperature loads display as red dots Turn OFF Temperatures from the Model Tree to simplify the display ANSYS Tutorials Figure 4 35 Define Define Temperature Temperature Boundary 9 Boundary Condition on Condition on Subset Subsets window Ko A E d TEMPERATURE Temperature Set fi Subsets Subseti amp sats Temperature 498 m h Solver Setup First the user should select the appropriate solver before proceeding furthe
257. after arc creation creation 1s shown in Figure 3 29 Figure 3 29 Geometry After Arc Creation Cylinder Creation 8 ops Geometry Create Modify Surface Standard Shapes B Cylinder Select Cylinder to open the Create Std Geometry window as shown in Figure 3 30 Enter the Part name CYL and Name CYL 1 Enter a Radius of 2 Next to the Two axis Points enter 10 0 0 0 0 20 Press Apply to create the cylinder Press Dismiss to close the window Geometry Creation Figure 3 30 Cylinder Creation Create Modify 9 Surface Fart Name Ice 53000291 aos Create Std Geometry Radius 2 Two exis Points 0020 VW si Dismiss Surface Creation Geometry gt Create Modify Surface gt From curves Select From Curves Enter the Part name as BLADE and the Name as BLADE 1 Enter the tolerance as a number larger than the distance the surface must cross Use 5 here Select CURVES 0 and CURVES 2 with the left mouse button Press the middle mouse button to complete selection and press Apply to create the surface Tutorial Manual Geometry Creation similarly create the other blade surface by selecting CURVES 1 and CURVES 3 To create the OUTLET surface enter OUTLET for the Part name and OUTLET 1 for the Name Select the two curves shown in Figure 3 31 Figure 3 31 Surface Creation Select these 2 curves Create the INLET surface on the other
258. ailable to automatically refine and coarsen the mesh both on geometry and within the volume Delauny algorithm is also included to create tetras from surface mesh that already exists and also to give a smoother transition in the volume element size Hexa This ANSYS ICEMCFD semi automated meshing module presents rapid generation of multi block structured or unstructured hexahedral volume meshes ANSYS ICEMCFD Hexa represents a new approach to grid generation where the operations most often performed by experts are automated and made available at the touch of a button Blocks can be built and interactively adjusted to the underlying CAD geometry This blocking can be used as a template for other similar geometries for full parametric capabilities Complex topologies such as internal or external O grids can be generated automatically TS ee ee ee Tutorial Manual Introduction to ANSYS ICEMCFD Prism For better modeling of near wall physics of the flow field ANSYS ICEMCTD Prism generates hybrid tetrahedral grids consisting of layers of prism elements near the boundary surfaces and tetrahedral elements in the interior Compared to pure tetrahedral grids this results in smaller analysis models better convergence of the solution and better analysis results Hybrid Meshes Hybrid meshes can be created by several means Tetra and Hexa meshes can be united merged at a common interface in which a layer of pyramids are autom
259. al Cart3D Figure 3 475 LCart3D Mesher i Change Angle of Refinement Cart3D files prefix WINGI Single Component Fis Normals Nominal Mesh Radius Body a Lengat A E Starting Mesh Divisions 3 33 Mum of Cell Refinements 1 2 E Compute Parameters Finest Cell Dimensions 0 0073 0 00737 x O 0073 Hesh Creation Preview Mesh Only C Create and Save Full Mesh Humber of Multi grid levels T Outer Bounding Box Minimum Diagonal Point 29 4641 05 30 173471 0 00001 aximum Diagonal Paint 30 882856 30 173430 30 827827 ixi Define Surface Family Refinement Define All Surface Hefinement Humber of Buffer Layers 4 i Angle Threshold for Bo Refinement Area Weight Normals Humber of Cut Planes ines dir 3 4 F k Number of Cut Planes in Y dir 3 1 Number of Cut Planes in dir 3 F Mesh Internal Region In the Parts menu under the Display Tree widget perform the operation Parts gt Hide All right click on Parts to access and then turn on only the Part CUTPLANE Z2 as shown in Figure 3 476 Tutorial Manual Cart3D Figure 3 476 EWM Model Display Tree widget HO Geometry 1 Densities CUTCELL CUT PLANE 51 CUT PLANE xz LUTPLANE 3 LUTPLAHNE 1 LUTPLA amp MHE 12 LUTPLA amp MHE 13 21 22 LUTPLA amp ME 23 WING The mesh projected onto the middle z direction plane in Part CUTPLANE
260. al Manual Tetra Meshing With Smooth transition active the volume tetra elements will be discarded The Delauney method will then be used to re fill the volume with tetra elements The mesh will appear in the display when the meshing process is finished Make sure that the Mesh type Shells in the Display Tree widget is active so that the mesh represented by its triangular surface elements should appear as in Figure 3 243 Figure 3 243 The tetrahedral mesh i Assigning Prism Parameters Select Mesh gt Set Global Mesh Size gt Prism Meshing Parameters to open the Global Prism Settings panel as show in Figure 3 244 Use the defaults to grow 3 layers with a Height ratio of 1 2 Rather than Tutorial Manual Tetra Meshing specifying an Initial height the thickness of the prism layers will be based on the size of the local surface triangle Press Apply Figure 3 244 Global mesh size window Tetra Meshing Tutorial Manual Global Mesh Size Global Mesh Parameters 050577 Global Prism Settings Growth law exponentia Initial height Height ratia Humber of layers Total height Compute params marching direction Min prism quality lon Ortho weight oso Filet ratio 010 prism angle height over base nz Prism height limit factor 57 Ratio multiplier iz Prism element part controls Mew volume part Side part Top
261. al Nastran deck Turn off all the Parts except ET2D3 Hit Fit Window ES in the Utilities panel in the upper left hand corner to make the part fill the screen Turn on ETIDS part Turn on Mesh gt Points and Lines We will define a constraint on the center point of this bolt hole definition ax Select Constraints gt Displacement on Point 7 as presented in Figure 4 91 Enter 10 for the Name Toggle on options UX UY UZ ROTX ROTY ROTZ Leave all settings and values as default LS Dyna Tutorials Figure 4 91 Create Displacement Create Displacement on Point window on Point Mame amp sPCSe 1 vl LES Global vj SPC Type Constraint with Enforced Motion Points AS Directional Displacement Ww 0 Ww OY 0 Ww Ue 0 Rotational Displacement Ww 0 Ww ROTY 0 w ROTZ 0 a Apply Dismiss LS Dyna Tutorials Click on Points gt Select node s s select the node as shown in Figure 4 92 and Apply Figure 4 92 Point selection window Turn on all Displacements in the Model tree Turn on Parts gt ET2D4 in the Model tree Note the displacement icon arrow applied to this other bolt hole center point This was read in from the original Nastran deck Defining Contact Select Constraints gt Define Single SurfaceContact m as presented in Figure 4 93 LS Dyna Tutorials Figure 4 93 Define Single Define Single O Tl Contact Surface
262. al mesh 15 created by any of the meshing modules diagnostics can be performed to determine local and overall mesh quality Automatic smoothing algorithms are in place to improve overall quality Local editing can be done using a wide range of automatic re meshing and manual mesh editing tools Output Interfaces ANSYS includes output interfaces to over 100 flow and structural solvers producing appropriately formatted files that contain complete mesh and boundary condition information Post Processing ANSYS ICEMCFD Visual3 provides easy to use powerful result visualization features for structured unstructured and hybrid grids both steady state and transient Visual3 integrates CAD Geometry computational grids and the flow solution within one environment It provides an in depth view of data with visualization tools such as cut planes stream ribbons contours vectors grids 1so surfaces offset surfaces result surfaces integration XY plots data probes function calculator solution and experimental comparison scripts annotations and animation Results can be Introduction to ANSYS ICEMCFD interpolated on imported surface meshes and written out to a different solution process e g interpolating fluid results on to a surface mesh and brought in as loads for a structural analysis A surface manager tool controls the display status for all surfaces including any dynamic surface domain surfaces and user defined
263. al volumetric nodes are interpolated Required for final output of 3D volumetric grids Hexa Meshing Scan Planes Another display option within Pre Mesh With this function the user can visualize the interior volume mesh by scanning or scrolling a logical I J K index plane through the model Note The scan plane control displays I J K index dimensions as 0 1 2 respectively O grid index dimensions begin with 3 Additional o grids will have an index of 4 5 etc Blanking This display option under the Blocking Display Tree simply blanks or turns off selected blocks to reduce screen clutter or 1f one wants to focus on a smaller set of blocks Index Control As a display option within the Blocking Display tree this turns blocks on and off by toggling up and down one or more of the I J K or radial o grid indices The index control menu will appear in the lower right hand corner of the screen in the same area where the quality histogram 15 displayed If the histogram 1s turned on it will take precedence and the index control will be displayed as a pop up menu Hexa Meshing 3 2 2 2D Pipe Junction Overview In this first tutorial example the user will generate a mesh for a two dimensional pipe junction composed of two Inlets and one Outlet After generating an initial mesh the user will check the quality of the Mesh and refine it for a Navier Stokes solution a Summary of Steps The Blocking Strategy S
264. am ER Hag window Reference Area 120 6 Reference Length hb 8 Compute Force Compute Moment Moment about Point Moment about Line Point Apply Dismiss Press Apply in the Post Process Solution window The computed force and moment coefficients will be displayed in the Messages area g Visualizing the results FlowCart writes two output files 1 BJET_c3d i triq Contains Pressure Velocity and Density extrapolated to the surface triangles This can be converted to the domain file format via Edit gt Cart3D Tri File gt Domain file The default resultant domain file will be BJET_c3d uns ii BOMBER c3d dom Full mesh result Go to File gt Results gt Open Results The Select Result Format window pops up as shown in Figure 3 562 Select ICEMCTD as the Format Cart3D Figure 3 562 2 Result File Window Select Hesult Format DataSet Current Format ICEMCFD File E Structured Grid Unsteady Grid Transient cases only Apply ok Cancel Select the result file surface results dom and press Apply to get the default result as shown in Figure 3 563 Tutorial Manual Figure 3 563 Density Post 1 236 Process 1 175 ing 1 115 Result 1 054 99249 ae ll 86711 8103 27494 5885 6276 S668 5059 4450 3842 BC A A A A A Cart3D Tutorial Manual Cart3D 3 7 6 Bomber Overview This t
265. an be adjusted by Speed parameter Figure 3 672 Bubbles on 2D Tutorial Manual Post processing 3 9 4 Space Shuttle Advanced For this tutorial the same example as in the previous tutorial 1s considered Operations introduced by this example Set options Displaying surface flow for the selected surface Movies a Loading the CFD file Start Visual3 application and read the CFD results as in the previous tutorial From View select mirrors and replicates This will bring out the Mirrors and Replicates window as shown in Figure 3 673 Tutorial Manual Post processing Figure 3 673 Mirrors and Mis iban e Replicates window Noa mirror outward mirror e E Ma Z mirror Replicate by rotating with ooo ooo n Replicate by translating Times Dismiss Select the option outward Y mirror Y from the No Y mirror pull down menu list Now the mirror image of the previous image on the Post 3D window can be seen as shown in Figure 3 674 Tutorial Manual Post processing Figure 3 674 Mirror Image b Post 2D Views First invoke Define Dynamic Cut Plane from the post processing menu From Methods select middle Y plane Set Fraction Value to 0 850 so the cut plane crosses the shuttle wing From model tree right click on Muti Views branch Figure 3 675 From the options select Post 2D from Data 0 Upon prompt drag a box on the graphics windo
266. and its associative faces edges and points are all constraints when smoothing the block topology model Once the block topology smoothing has been performed the user may smooth the mesh after specifying the proper edge bunching parameters The criteria for smoothing are Determinant these criteria attempt to improve the element s determinant by movement of nodes which are subject to geometry and association constraints Laplace The Laplace option attempts to minimize abrupt changes in the mesh lines by moving the nodes SS ee ee Tutorial Manual Hexa Meshing Appendix 280 Warp The Warp method is based upon correcting the worst angle between two elements in the mesh Quality Like the determinant criteria the Quality criteria attempts to improve the element s interior angle by repositioning the nodes which are subject to geometry and association constraints Orthogonality The Orthogonality option attempts to provide orthogonal mesh lines at all boundaries of the model Skewness The Skewness 15 defined differently for volume and surface elements For a volume element this value is obtained by taking all pairs of adjacent faces and computing the normals The maximum value thus obtained is normalized so that 0 corresponds to perpendicular faces and 1 corresponds to parallel faces For surface elements the skew is obtained by first taking the ratio of the two diagonals of the face The skew is defined a
267. and points and display only surfaces from the Display Tree Click on Select location s select two opposite corners on the screen to place the Material Point within the tube as suggested in the Figure 5 78 and press the middle mouse button Press Apply Figure 5 77 Create Body window Fart HEATINGCDIL Name yat 7 Maternal Point Create Body amp Location Centroid of 2 points specified point 2 screen locations Apply ok Dismiss Tutorial Manual ANSYS ICEMCFD CFX Tutorials Figure 5 78 Two Opposite points for Material point Give fluid Zone Part name as HEATER Click on Select location s and select two opposite corners on the screen to place the Material Point within the larger volume outside the tube as suggested in the Figure 5 79 and press the middle mouse button Press Apply Figure 5 79 Two Opposite points for Material point e Mesh Generation Global Mesh Parameters Tutorial Manual ANSYS ICEMCFD CFX Tutorials From the Mesh tab menubar click on Set Global Mesh Size 9 will default into the General Parameters to section Leave Scale Factor as 1 for Global Element Scale Factor Change Max Element to 0 1 for Global Element Seed Size set Refinement to 16 Switch on Natural Size and give Size of 0 07 as shown in Figure 5 80 Natural size is the minimum elements size that will be achieved through automatic
268. anes in 3 Mesh Internal Region Apply ox Dismiss This will create 9 density polygons by default for mesh density control which can be viewed in the Display Tree widget by Geometry Densities Tutorial Manual Cart3D This also computes the finest cell size 0 642 x 0 642 x 0 642 Varying the starting mesh division and or Max number of cell refinement can vary finest cell size The diagonal points displayed under Outer Bounding Box are the minimum and maximum points of the mesh region These points can be changed 1f desired Leave the Angle Threshold for Refinement as 20 Click Apply to run the mesher This will create a domain file with 3 Cut Planes Quad Elements each coordinate direction and Cut Cells Hex Elements The Preview mesh will be loaded automatically In Parts under the Display Tree widget turn on only CUTPLANE Y2 as shown in Figure 3 549 Note It is advisable to use Parts gt Reassign Colors gt Good Colors to see the results Figure Hi4 Model Display Tree widget Geometry CUTPLANE 1 CUTPLANE x2 CUTPLANE x3 LLUTPLANE 1 2 CUTPLANE 13 CUTPLANE 1 CUTPLANE Z2 CUT PLANE 3 ENGINE LEFT EN GINE RIGHT FUSE PYLON LEFT FYL N RIGHT TAIL HURIZ TAIL VERT WING Tutorial Manual Cart3D The mesh is shown in Figure 3 550 Go to View gt Top This 1s the projected mesh on the middle plane in the Z direction CUTPLANE Y2 AE Pr
269. anual SAS IP Inc Section 2 3 Important Features in Tetra i x Mines value OO value H0 0 Num bars 20 Accept Reset Cancel Help Histogram The tetrahedral Quality will be displayed within this histogram where 0 represents the worst aspect ratio and 1 represents the best aspect ratio The user may modify the display of the histogram by adjusting the values of Min Max Height and Bars Replot If any modification is to be done for displaying the histogram then select Replot which pops ups the Replot window shown above User can change the following parameters in this window pressing Accept will replot the histogram to the newly set values Min X Value This minimum value which is located on the left most side of the histogram s x axis represents the worst quality cells Max X Value This maximum value which is located on the right most side of the histogram s x axis represents the highest quality that cells can achieve Max Y height The user can adjust the number of cells that will be represented on the histogram s y axis Usually a value of 20 is sufficient If there are too many cells displayed it is difficult to discern the effects of smoothing Num bars This represents the number of subdivisions within the range between the Min and the Max The default Bars have widths of 0 05 Increasing the amount of displayed bars however will decrease this width Reset Sele
270. anual ANSYS Tutorials i Solution and Results A Linear Static analysis will be performed on this model and the results will be visualized within ANSYS ICEMCFD Solving the problem Click on the Solve Options Submit Solver Run Q button to display the window shown in Figure 4 40 Select the Batch option and ensure that the Input File is set to the Conrod_Ansys in file created in the above step The Output File can be any name you give it but the default will be Conrod_Ansys out Verify the Working Directory is correct A dot means to use the current working directory Also verify that the Ansys Products field is set correctly The ANSYS EXEC PATH environment variable may have to be set to the full path to the Ansys executable for ICEMCFD to be able to run Ansys Press Apply to run the Ansys solver in batch mode ANSYS Tutorials Figure 4 40 Run Solver window Run Solver Ansys Hun Mode Interactive Batch Graphics lewce Input File Conrod_Ansys in m Cutout File Conrad_Ansys out Working Directory Initial Jobname Total Workspace Bir Memory Mbi Total Database 56 0 Memor Mb Read start ans at Ves d es 3 Select Ansys Product ANSYS Multiphysics Post Processing of Results Click on the Solve Options Post Process Results button which opens the Post Process Results window given in Figure 4 41 ANSYS Tutorials Press the yellow fo
271. arsen mesh Iteratiaris CO Worst aspect ratio i Smooth transition Factor as Options Run as batch process visible geometry Part by Part Load mesh after completion Apply ox Dismiss Tutorial Manual Figure 3 416 Leakage warning window Advanced Meshing Tutorials Make sure Mesh type gt Tetra 15 set leave all other options as is and press Apply to generate the tetra mesh Due to the open end a window will warn you of leakage hole as shown in Figure 3 416 Tour geometry has a hole da vou want to repair iE select Yes to repair the mesh This will display single yellow edges forming the perimeter of the hole and their adjacent surface elements These elements are automatically put in to a subset which is turned on in the Display tree Mesh gt Subset gt Leak Location Turn off all Geometry in the Display tree and view the hole as in Figure 3 417 Tutorial Manual Figure 3 417 Leakage in display Advanced Meshing Tutorials selecting Yes to repair will also bring up the mesh repair window shown in Figure 3 418 This panel contains several tools for automatic mesh repair one being to fill or create surface mesh within a closed loop of single edges Mesh from Edges D which is used in this case Advanced Meshing Tutorials Figure 3 418 Surface mesh repair epar Mesh options window g Hesh Repair Tools ACELE Hesh from edges
272. art containing geometry This initial block 15 then modified by splitting discarding unused blocks and creating O grids Hexa Meshing Split This option 1s under Blocking gt Split Block most common way of creating blocks 15 to split existing blocks The Split function which divides the selected block interactively may propagate across all visible blocks selected blocks or selected faces An edge 15 selected and the split new edges will propagate perpendicular to the selected edge Blocks may be visually blanked unblanked by using the Index control which toggles the blocks in I J K or radial 1f o grids exist directions Any new split will create a new I J K or radial 1f splitting an o grid index O grid Creation Subdivides selected blocks into a configuration of one central block surrounded by radial blocks Accessed through Blocking gt Split Block gt O grid Block Recommended for cylindrical type geometries to avoid bad internal angles at block corners Figure 3 37 The initial block OGrid Block The initial block with an O grid The initial block with an O grid to include a face Hexa Meshing Adding faces will create an O grid that passes through the selected block faces creating a C grid configuration Figure 3 37 shows the result of adding a face on the left side of the block O grids can be scaled before or after O grid creation The scale factor Offset is the ratio of the radial edge to
273. as M_CHIP select by topology and method as Entire model Press Apply To see the bodies in the geometry on screen please make bodies visible from the model tree ANSYS Tutorials Now Move the material M CHIP at the center of the surface To move material CHIP to Material BOARD right click on Parts gt Create Part gt Create part by selection from the Display Tree widget This will bring the create part window in create part window enter part as BOARD Click on Create Part by Selection Click on select entities option in Entities to select CHIP and press Apply Please refer Figure 4 73 for details Figure 4 73 Modify BODY ANSYS Tutorials ANSYS Tutorials ANSYS Tutorials e Assigning the mesh sizes To define the surface mesh size select Mesh gt Set surface mesh size this will bring the surface mesh size window Enter the Maximum element size as 2 for the all surface parts Turn on only CHIP SURF and INTERFACE and turn off all the other parts Set surface mesh size this will bring the surface mesh size window Enter the Maximum element size of 1 and select only visible parts by using option v After assigning mesh sizes save the changes with File Save project f Generating the tetrahedral mesh To generate the tetrahedral mesh Select Mesh gt Mesh Tet gt From Geometry In Mesh with tetrahedral window press Apply with the default parameters This will ge
274. associate the vertices that are right on top of their respective points e g 5 4 Figure 2 3 74 N Associati _ ng Vertex em to Point Note The vertices will turn red indicating they are fixed to the prescribed point The blocks should now better represent the geometry of the car Figure 3 75 Figure 3 75 The Blockin g fit to the Car i Edge Curve Association Turn Points off in the Display tree Turn off the internal edges right mouse select Edges and toggle off Volume Turn off all outer edges Set Index control to I 2 6 J 2 5 Tutorial Manual Hexa Meshing a Select Blocking gt Associate a Associate Edge to Curve Select all the edges that lie on the car body either by dragging a selection box or selecting or the icon in the Select blocks toolbar for all visible Then select all curves making up the car body individually or by dragging a selection box Turn back on Edges gt Volume and Reset the Index control Temporarily turn off Curves and Points in the Display tree to confirm that all the edges around the car body are associated colored green Check to make sure the association is correct by selecting Edges gt Show Association from the Display tree and switch on Curves The projection on the front bumper will resemble Figure 3 76 SS A Tutorial Manual
275. ate clean water tight geometry Yellow Curve is shared by only one surface This indicates a gap or hole greater than the tolerance Usually has to fix Blue Curve is shared by three or more surfaces Usually indicates a t junction or a sliver surface that s thinner than the tolerance Most likely okay but in some cases may cause potential problems Green Free curves that are not logically associated to the surface Usually curves that are imported or manually created Build topology by default will remove these curves Can also be removed manually First close the hole for the little stick out portion as shown in Figure 3 409 Tutorial Manual Figur e 3 409 Squar e portio n befor e repair Advanced Meshing Tutorials Select Repair Geometry gt Close Select the curves one pair at a time and press the middle mouse button Repeat for all four pairs Triangles will be created to fill in the gaps and the curves will be automatically updated to red as seen in Figure 3 410 Tutorial Manual Advanced Meshing Tutorials Figure 3 410 Square portion after repair The user will now focus on the two concentric circles in the center Figure 3 411 Perhaps this feature 1s small enough to ignore so rather than fill in the gap we ll match or stitch the edges Tutorial Manual Advanced Meshing Tutorials Figure 3 411 Circular portion before repair
276. atically created at a common interface to make the two mesh types conformal Good for models where in one part it is desired to have a structured hexa mesh and in another more complex part it is easier to create an unstructured tetra mesh Hex core meshes can be generated where the majority of the volume 15 filled with a Cartesian array of hexahedral elements essentially replacing the tetras This 1s connected to the remainder of a prism tetra hybrid by automatic creation of pyramids Hex core allows for reduction in number of elements for quicker solver run time and better convergence Shell Meshing ANSYS ICEMCEFD provides a method for rapid generation of surface meshes quad and tri both 3D and 2D Mesh types can be all quad quad dominant or all tri Three methods are available Patch based shell meshing Uses a series of loops which are automatically defined by the boundaries of surfaces and or a series of curves Gives best quad dominant quality and capturing of surface details Tutorial Manual Introduction to ANSYS ICEMCFD Patch independent shell meshing Uses the Octree method Best and most robust on unclean geometry Mapped based shell meshing Internally uses a series of 2d blocks results in mesh better lined up with geometry curvature 1 4 Mesh Visualization and Optimization Mesh visualization tools including solid wireframe display 2D cut planes color coding and node display is provided After initi
277. ation Mesh File ING1 c3d mesh mg So Iver Solver Controls ee ING1_c3d mesh mg Boundary Conditions Mesh Info File NG1 mesh Info pa ram ete r Covergence History Partition Information s window Accept Cancel Set File Information Mesh File as WINGI c3d mesh mg should be default Click on Case Information and enter the following parameters Mach number 0 54 Angle of Attack 3 06 Side Slip angle 0 0 Free Stream Density 1 0 Free Stream Sound Speed 1 0 The values are shown in Figure 3 483 Tutorial Manual Cart3D Figure Solver parameters 3 483 File Information Information Case Case Information bless UTA REC 05 4 Solver Controls EC k Be Informat Boundary Conditions bs z d ion Covergence History side slip angle 0 0 window Partition Information Free Stream Density 1 0 Free Stream Sound Speed r a Accept Cancel Expand Solver Controls Runge Kutta Scheme in the Display Tree widget as shown in Figure 3 484 and accept the default settings Tutorial Manual Cart3D Figur Solver parameters File Information Runge Kutta Scheme 3 484 Information Number of stages 5 Solver Controls Rung Runge Kutta Scheme Stagel coefficent 0 0695 e Other controls Eval Gradient 1 Kutta ais EM Stages coefficent 0 1602 History Sche Partition Information Eval Gradient 0 stages coefficent 0 2898 windo E val Gradient 0
278. ation in this directory as shown in Figure 4 271 Along with the Hood prj file it will also store three other files Mesh file Attribute file and Parameter files as Hood uns Hood fbc and Hood par respectively Figur 4 271 Save im Cyl Hood Computer E Ac File name Hood E My M ark P save as type Project Files prj d Write Nastran Input First user should select the appropriate solver before proceeding further Select Settings gt Solver from Main menu and press Apply as shown in Figure 4 272 Tutorial Manual Nastran Tutorials Figure 4 272 ral Solver Setup Solver Setup ir window Solver NASTRAN Sets Default Apply o Cancel Click 85 Write View Input File icon from the Solve Options Tab Menubar Enter the Nastran file name as Hood mod dat and switch ON View Nastran file in Write View Input File window as shown in Figure 4 273 and press Apply Tutorial Manual Nastran Tutorials Figure 4 273 Write View Input d Write View Input File File window ID Solver NASTRAN Mastran File od mad dat Volume Elements Defined gt Shell Elements Defined Bar Elements Defined Thickness Distribution BCDefined Large Field Format View Mastran File Apply o Cancel User will see that the Nastran input data file comes up in the default text editor If the user likes to edit t
279. automatically be grouped concatenated Tutorial Manual Hexa Meshing For reference turn on Vertices gt Numbers right mouse option and Curves gt Show Curve Names in the Display tree Figure EF by 3 48 Vertex number s and Curve names URVES 6 URVES 1 URVES URVES 10 Tutorial Manual Hexa Meshing A Select Blocking gt Associate 6 gt Associate Edge to Curve as shown in Figure 3 49 Figure 3 49 Blocking Blocking Association amp ssocialions window g Edit Associations es d oW E dae s i 334201 x era Curve s EURVES 10 f E Project vertices Project ta surface intersection Project ends to curve Intersection Apply Dismiss Note Project Vertices should be disabled default First capture the inlet the leftmost end of the large pipe Select Associate Edge to Curve once again or the Tutorial Manual Hexa Meshing Select Edge icon and select Edge 13 41 with the left mouse button Press the middle mouse button to accept the selection Then select the curve CURVES 1 with the left mouse button and press the middle mouse button or select Apply to perform the association The edge will turn green when associated Note This operation runs in continuation mode which allows the user to select the next set of edges and curves without reinvoking the function Selecting
280. ave a different number of nodes across opposing edges Merge vertices Hexa Meshing Vertices can be merged to create degenerate blocks If propagate merge is turned on all vertices up and downstream of those selected will also be merged essentially removing the split Edit block Various block editing commands including merge blocks re scale o grids etc Move Vertices Besides manually moving vertices on the geometry other options allow you to align vertices and to set coordinate locations of vertices Transform Blocks Copy or move blocks either by translation rotation mirror or scale Allows the user to build blocking on one portion of the model and copy and move to capture other portions that are topologically similar Edit Edge Allows the user to shape the edges either by manually splitting the edge or linking the edge shape with that of another edge This gives the user better control of the flow of the mesh which can fix projection skewness or other quality issues Pre Mesh Smooth smoothing algorithms are available to automatically improve mesh quality before 1t is converted to either unstructured or multi block mesh Block Checks Check fix is used to try and automatically fix the database if any serious errors arise Also left handed inverted blocks can be automatically detected and fixed Visibility Controls Hexa Meshing Most of the visibility controls such as toggling objects on off an
281. aving the Project Select File gt Mesh gt Save Mesh as Input file name as merge domain uns Press Accept It may ask what to do about the disconnected vertices Say Yes Select File gt CloseProject Tutorial Manual Advanced Meshing Tutorials 3 6 3 Tetra mesh for Submarine Overview In this example the objective 15 to generate a tetra mesh for a submarine by providing partial geometry and partial surface mesh from other sources The configuration consists of half of a submarine including a SUBMARINE FIN Surface mesh and TAIL Surface mesh are all cut in half by the symmetry plane as shown in Figure 3 380 A cylindrical water channel that extends a few body lengths upstream and downstream contains the entire geometry as shown in Figure 3 381 Figure 3 380 Surface parts and surface mesh of the regions composing the submarine FIN surface mesh TAIL surface mesh N SUBMARINE Figure 3 381 Surface parts of the region surrounding the submarine Tutorial Manual Advanced Meshing Tutorials OUT a Summary of steps Starting the project Assigning the mesh sizes Create density box in the wake of submarine Generating tetrahedral mesh from partial surface mesh Diagnostics Smoothing the mesh Saving the project b Starting the Projects From UNIX or DOS window start ANSYS ICEMCFD File P Change working directory ACN docu CFDHelp CFD Tutorial Files gt submarine project Choose it
282. ays that a circumscribed circle around a surface triangle should not have any additional node in the circle Often this can be removed by doing the diagonal swapping at that location Possible problems gt Overlapping triangles It depects triangles which lie on top of each other though they may not be sharing any nodes or edges These can be taken care of by moving merging the nodes or splitting swapping the edges Possible problems gt Non manifold vertices This check will find vertices whose adjacent elements outer edges don t form a closed loop This problem usually indicates the existence of elements that jump from one surface to another forming a tent like structure as shown in Figure 3 297 m P Tutorial Manual Tetra Meshing Appendix Figure 3 297 a manifold vertex a non manifold vertex In a manifold vertex the outer edges form a outer edges do not form a closed lnnp closed Loop outer edges form a closed loop thus posing no problems to the mesh quality Left With a non manifold vertex the outer edges do form closed loop acting as barrier in the free domain Right The automatic Fix option for possible problems should only be employed if the non manifold volumetric mesh 1s within the surface mesh that 1s disconnected If there is volume mesh on both sides of either surface mesh do not use the automatic F
283. b Starting the Project From UNIX or DOS window start ANSYS ICEMCFD File 2 Change working directory ACN docu CFDHelp CFD Tutorial Files gt piston valve project Choose its Tetin file geometry tin c Repairing the geometry To repair this geometry select Geometry gt Repair geometry N gt Build Diagnostic Topology using the tolerance value of 0 3 Press Apply in this window with the default parameters d Parts Creation After running repair geometry define separate parts for surfaces CYL INLET PORT SEAT SHROUD and VALVE Likewise define parts for curves CUR and points PTS as indicated in Figure 3 264 e Defining the Material Point The material of the model will be assigned to the material point LIVE Utilize the Geometry Create B This will invoke a yrs Create body window Here press Material point 2 function to assign this material point Then press Choose an item button chooses option to select 2 Screen locations With the left mouse button select two locations on the port Press the middle mouse button and LIVE should appear in the model Dynamically rotate the model to confirm that LIVE 1s located within the geometry and not outside the geometry Tetra Meshing f Setting global mesh size Press Mesh gt Set Global Mesh Size e General parameters qa to bring up the global mesh size as seen in Figure 3 265 Enter 0 6 as the Scale factor and 128 for
284. ble Compute Force and Compute Moment Click Apply in the Reference All Params window and then Dismiss to close as shown in Figure 3 544 Cart3D Figure 3 544 Reference All Param window 314 148 Reference Length 350 0 Compute Force Compute Moment Moment about Point Moment about Line Point Apply Dismiss Press Apply in Post Process Solution window The computed force and moment coefficients will be displayed in the Messages area k Visualizing the results FlowCart writes three output files 1 MISSILE c3d i triq Contains Pressure Velocity and Density extrapolated to the surface triangles This can be converted to the domain file format via Edit gt Cart3D Tri File gt Domain file The default resultant domain file will be MISSILE c3d uns 11 SlicePlanes dom Cut Plane results 111 results dom Full mesh result Slice Plane dom Cut Plane results Go to File gt Results gt Open Results A Select Result Format window opens as shown in Figure 3 545 Select as the Format Cart3D Figure 3 545 2 Select Result Window Select Result Format DataSet Current Format ICEMCFD File E Structured Grid Unsteady Grid Transient cases only Apply ok Cancel Select the result file surface_results dom to get the default result as shown in Figure 3 546 Tutorial Manual Figure 3 546 Post Process or Display Density
285. bunching The next step 1s to better define the mesh size parameters on the individual edges of the blocking The mesh is distorted in the farfield region The Linked Bunching function will be utilized to link the mesh distribution Switch off Pre mesh in the Display Tree Select Blocking gt Pre Mesh params ap gt Edge Params The Meshing Parameters window will open as shown in Figure 3 217 Select the edge to be modified indicated in Figure 3 218 The selected edge has an arrow displayed on it which indicates side and side 2 of the edge Side 1 is the back of the arrow while side 2 1s the front on the arrow Tutorial Manual Hexa Meshing Figure 3 217 Mashing Pnrnmatars Edge meshing parameters i e du window Edge 5 303 _ 11441 55 Mestiew Specric rm Linked TIME DOES 652 Linked inni Amema Bae F Specs I Suacing Nodes Locked Parernetars docked Parsmetars Can py Edur re apy absoli bunching Link Edge 59390 A Reversa link r Highlight depender edas ezachad faces Highlgktiraster enges Reverses premimelzrs Tutorial Manual Figure 3 218 Select this edge for setting edge parameter S Hexa Meshing Click on Linke
286. cally snap all vertices on to the geometry with Select Associate 6 gt Snap Project Vertices 7 7 Toggle on Vertex Select gt Visible default and Apply Manually move the vertices Move Vertex gt Move Vertex position the vertices as in Figure 3 108 For now only move green vertices on their associated curves Primarily make the edges along the ends of the small cylinder more or less equidistant Tutorial Manual Figure 3 108 After moving the vertices to the appropria te locations on the geometry Hexa Meshing Turn off Edges gt Association in the Display tree Save the Blocking i Generating the Mesh Next specify mesh parameters this time on surfaces for a 3D model For this model we ll set the sizes on the parts rather than individual surfaces or curves Select Mesh gt Set Meshing Params by Parts to get the menu shown in Figure 3 109 Tutorial Manual Figure 3 109 Enteri ng new mesh param eters Mesh sizes for parts Hexa Meshing Part Prem Hexa Cor Size Height Height A atio Mum Layers Tetra Size fh hh 1 E Hz n TEN 2 ME MEE 112 E LIVE f fh 2 GE E Qgo 0 go Show size params using ref size Apply Dismiss Set sizes as shown Max Size of 10 on all surface parts except the small cylinder CYL2 which can be
287. can also be typed and invoked within the message window ANSYS ICEMCFD GUI The Save commands will write all Message window contents to a file This file will be written to wherever ANSYS ICEMCFD was fired The Log toggle switch allows only user specified messages to be saved to a file It is important to note that the Log file is unique from the file created with the Save button This file will be written to the starting directory and it interactively updates as more messages are recorded Once the toggle is turned OFF you can continue to add to the file by turning the toggle back ON and accepting the same file name which 1s the default It will then continue to append this file 2 5 The Histogram window The Histogram window shows a bar graph representing the mesh quality The X axis represents element quality usually normalized to between 0 and 1 and the Y axis represents the number of elements Other functions which utilize this space will become pop up menus if the quality or histogram is turned on Geometry Creation 3 CFD Tutorials 3 1 Geometry Creation 3 1 1 2D Pipe Junction Overview We are going to create geometry for a two dimensional pipe junction as shown in Figure3 1 Figure3 1 2D Pipe Junction with OUTLET Dimensions 16 a Summary of steps Geometry Menu Creating the points using Explicit Coordinates Tutorial Manual Geometry Creation Creating the points using Curve Curve Inters
288. cas Suilaces Parks Fata af COPFERCOIL C COPFERCOIL I DEFAULT t DERSULI EF IMFLOV C OUTFLOW OUTFLOW E FART 1 a FART 2 rm FART 3 a PART 4 gf PART 5 Creating Curves and Points To get only the necessary curves and points Click on Repair Geometry 4 from the Geometry tab menubar Click on Build Diagnostic Topology and the window as shown in Figure 5 76 will appear Enable Filter points and Filter curves Set New Part Name to Create new and click Apply Tutorial Manual ANSYS ICEMCFD CFX Tutorials Figure 5 76 _ a H G t Repair Geometry window Pan 18 PME lr Repair Surface P Ars Tolerance 0 002 E Filter by angle Feature angle aU Iw Filter points Filter curves Hew Part Name C Inherited Create new Fart for new curves CURVES Part for new points POINTS Apply ck Dismiss Note Build Topology will turn ON the Color by Count and Show Wide option of the Curves Display Right click on Curves in the display tree to change the display options User can turn OFF these options for the normal display of Curves Body Creation Tutorial Manual ANSYS ICEMCFD CFX Tutorials Go to the Geometry tab menubar and select Create Body Give HEATINGCOIL as the Part Name and click on Material Point a 2 and toggle on the Centroid of 2 points option as shown in Figure Sd Turn OFF all curves
289. ces Edges Faces Blocks Tutorial Manual Hexa Meshing of the block entities are defined by I J K index d Unstructured and Multi block Structured Meshes The computed mesh stored internally within Blocking 1s termed Pre Mesh Pre Mesh is then converted to either multi block or unstructured files for eventual output to the solvers Unstructured Mesh Output The unstructured mesh output option will produce a single mesh output file uns where all common nodes on the block interfaces are merged independent of the number of blocks in the model Unstructured elements are defined by node number definition Multi Block Structured Mesh Output The multi block structured mesh output option will produce a mesh output file for every block in the topology model For example if the block model has 55 blocks there will be 55 output files created in the output directory Elements are defined by I J K indices rather than node numbers The number of blocks upon output can be reduced by an automatic internal merge of blocks Output Blocks e Main Blocking Functions Here are some of the most often used functions within the Blocking menu Initialize block This is under Blocking gt Create Block First a block is defined that encompasses the entire or selected portions of the geometry This block is associated to a part SOLID is the default part name This volume part should be different than any p
290. changed Tutorial Manual Hexa Meshing Repeat to capture all eight corners Thus make the block fit the cube as shown in Figure 3 128 Use F9 repeatedly to toggle between selection mode and dynamic mode to reorient the view translate rotate zoom whenever necessary Figure 3 128 Fitting the inner block to the cube with Prescribed Points D Discarding the Inner block For this example the mesh will only be generated in the volume between the SPHERE and CUBE therefore the central block must be removed Quite often when multiple blocks are displayed it is difficult to select the icon representing the block s One option is to select the block by selecting a pair of diagonally opposing corners Select Delete Block and either select diagonal corner C vertices from the Select blocks toolbar or type Shft D Tutorial Manual Hexa Meshing on the keyboard Proceed to select two corner vertices as in Figure 3 129 Press the middle mouse button or Apply Figure 3 129 Removing the central block m Generating the Mesh In the Display tree turn off Blocking gt Edges and turn on Geometry gt Surfaces gt Wireframe Select Mesh gt Set Meshing Params by Parts Type in the values as shown in Figure 3 130 Set a Max Size of 1 for SPHERE and SYMM 0 5 for CUBE Height of 0 01 for CUBE 0 02 for SPHERE and Height Ratio of 1 2 for CUBE and SPHERE Apply Hexa Meshing Figure i 3
291. ched surfaces Blank curves with params Tutorial Manual ANSYS Tutorials Meshing Select Mesh gt Surface Meshing A based 3 Change the Mesh Type from Quad dominant to Quad Click on the surface selection icon B and select all the surfaces by pressing a ensure that the mouse cursor is in display window Then press Apply in the Mesh Surface window as shown in Figure 4 19 to begin the meshing ANSYS Tutorials Mesh Surface window Figure 4 19 Mesh Surface 9 99 Mesh type Quad Mesh boundaries Method From surfaces curaces surface 0 surfi Projectto surfaces Resped line elements Remove old elements Use surface sizes Simple offset Ignore size Cleeaevelh 8 Smooth boundaries Mapping 1200 02 Adjustnodeslimt Max deviation TN Try harder 3 Click on the Solid display icon 9 in the main menu In Model Tree make sure that Surfaces are OFF so you are not looking at surfaces and mesh in solid The mesh should appear as shown in Figure 4 20 with Curves and Points OFF also ANSYS Tutorials Figure 4 20 Mesh in Solid amp Wire mode Extrusion of surface mesh In the Model Tree expand under Mesh and make sure that Points and Lines are turned OFF and Shells are turned ON This is so we only select and extrude shell elements Click on the Mesh gt Extrude Mesh icon and select Extrude by
292. cia Cart3D mesher window meme Mesher 2 prr c amp eekee eer el Leave Fix Normals enabled to fix the orientation of the triangles such that their normals point outwards Set Nominal Mesh Radius Body length X 10 Starting Mesh Divisions 5 5 5 Max Num of Cell Refinements 9 Click Compute Parameters This saves the mesh in the local directory converts to Cart3D format and determines the intersections At the end it displays the Finest Cell Dimensions as shown in Figure 3 548 TS P Tutorial Manual Cart3D Figure 3 548 Cart3D Mesher Cart3D mesher window Cart3D files prefix BJET Single Component Fix Normals Nominal Mesh Radius Body o g Lenght x Starting Mesh Divizions 5 55 Num af Cell Refinements 85 Compute Parameters Finest Cell Dimensions 542 0 642 0 642 Hesh Creation f Preview Mesh Only Create and Save Full Mesh Number of Multi arid levels 5 E Duter Bounding Minimum Diagonal Point 653 9361 gb Masimum Diagonal Paint 660 474967 ivi Define Surface Family Refinement Define All Surface Refinement Humber of Buffer Layers 4 i Angle Threshold for 20 Refinement Area Weight Normals Number of Cut Planes dir 3 Humber of Cut Planes in t dir 3 E Number of Cut Pl
293. ciate qi Snap Project Vertices Toggle on visible as shown in Figure 3 306 Press Apply Tutorial Manual Advanced Meshing Tutorials Figure 3 306 Snap Project Blocking Vertices Window Associations Edit Associations Gees AUS og Snap Project Vertices Vertex Select All Visible C Selected W ertices E Move 0 Grid nodes Apply ia Dismiss Switch OFF Curves Press Move Vertex gt Set Location The Set Location window will appear as shown in Figure 3 307 The Reference From should be set to Vertex Toggle on Modify X Select vertex 19 for the Ref Vertex Select Vertex 13 for the Vertices to Set Press Apply The final image 15 shown in Figure 3 308 Press Associate gt Associate Vertex The Entity type should be set to Point For the Vertex select vertex 11 Turn on Points For the Point select POINTS 1 Press Apply Tutorial Manual Advanced Meshing Tutorials eae cs Associate aJ gt Associate Edge to Curve Turn OFF Points Select the edge 11 13 Turn ON Curves and select the curve CURVES 1 Press Apply Advanced Meshing Tutorials Figure 3 307 Move vertices Set Position of Vertex 13 Move Vertices Set Location Method et Position E Heference From 7 Wertes Screen Ref Location POINTS 17 N amp Set Coordinate system Cartesian x Modify Modify r Modify Modifye Normal fo
294. click on Define Single Surface Contact 2 to open the Define Single Surface Contact window as shown in Figure 4 109 Figure 4 109 Define Single a Define Single Surface Contact Surface Contact SSS window Name CONTACT_ALL Contact Surfaces uns sel 0 Static Coefficient of Friction 0 3 Dynamic Coefficient of nmn Friction L5 Dyna Single Contact Option Type JSUTOMATIC SINGLE SURFALE Apply Dismiss As shown in Figure 4 109 supply the following information for the contact Name CONTACT ALL Contact surfaces Select all elements using hotkey from the keyboard Make sure that Points and Lines are switched Off in the Mesh branch of the Display Tree widget The messages area should indicate 11081 elements Select AUTOMATIC SINGLE_SURFACE option for Automatic contact option Press Apply to generate Contact Surface LS Dyna Tutorials Turn OFF Single Surface Contacts display from Display Tree widget Velocity Met From the Constraints tab click on Define Initial Velocity to open the Define Initial Velocity window as presented in Figure 4 110 Expand Parts in Display Tree by clicking on and turn OFF all the parts except ET2D22 Figure 4 110 Denne 6 Define Initial YE 0 Velocity window lt Mame VELOCITY Points x Directional Velocity A 00 x 100000 Rotational Velocity A 00 00 Z 00 Apply ck Dismiss As shown in Figure
295. click on any of the histogram bar and press Replot to update the histogram Figure 3 391 The smooth elements histogram window 24 Quality 4 3 version 18 Min 0 201441 T Mee 0 999405 Reset b w Show 0 solid 0 039 O14 123 subset 952 O62 071 O81 0 Done When the quality of the mesh is at an acceptable level press Dismiss to close the Smooth elements histogram window j Saving the project Save the mesh by selecting File gt Save project If a question box pops up to delete disconnected vertices respond by saying Yes Then close the project by selecting File gt Close Project Advanced Meshing Tutorials 3 6 4 Quad Mesh on a Frame Overview In this example the user will generate a Quad Surface mesh on a frame The frame shown below in Figure 3 392 represents a part fabricated from a sheet metal having a thickness of about 2 5 units In order to set up this geometry for surface meshing the mid surface utility will be used to get rid of the thin parts Figure 3 392 Quad Frame a Summary of steps Starting the project Advanced Meshing Tutorials Determining the mid surface Repairing the geometry Defining sizes on curves Meshing on surface Checking the quality saving the project b Starting the Project From UNIX or DOS window start ANSYS ICEMCFD File gt Change working directory ACN docu CFDHelp CFD Tutorial Files gt Frame project Choo
296. click on two locations on the displayed geometry so that the midpoint will be located inside the volume Press the middle mouse button or Apply Right or middle mouse again or Dismiss to exit the function Note The use of a Material point is not actually required However creating one will fix the volume part name within the tetin file This will avoid any problems caused by the volume name in the block file not being recognized by the tetin geometry file in future sessions Save the geometry or the project f Starting Blocking Select Blocking gt Create Block gt Initialize Blocks 17 Change Type to 3D Bounding Box default Select Part gt LIVE select the down arrow to get a pull down list of parts and Apply Creating the Composite Curves Even though curves can be automatically grouped while associating edges to curves sometimes it beneficial to group them first One such benefit is the ability to group all curves that tangentially meet smooth transition at the ends of two adjacent curves Select Blocking gt Associate 8 Group curves gt tangential as in Figure 3 122 Apply Hexa Meshing Figure 3 122 Blocking Group Ungroup curve window Associations Edit Associations Group 7 Ungroup curves Action Group Curves C Ungroup Curves Apply ox Dismiss This feature needs geometry connectivity so it will ask to run build topolog
297. comes by default Connectors Part Name BOLT WELDO and Enter No of Quad Layers as 2 and press Apply This will create Bolt Hole connector at all the four curves Tutorial Manual Nastran Tutorials Figure 4 213 select these Four Curves for Bolt Connection S Mesh Parameters Select X Set Curve Mesh Size icon from Mesh Tab Menubar which pops up Curve Mesh Size window as shown in Figure 4 214 Click on Select Curve s button and press ensure that the mouse cursor is in display window from keyboard to select all curves and enter Maximum Size of 4 for this case and press Apply and then Dismiss Tutorial Manual Nastran Tutorials Figure 4 214 Curve Curve Mesh Size a MeshSize ee window Curve Mesh Parameters Method General Select Curvels part 1001 37160 p 5 oe Maximum Size Number of Nodes o Height lo A atio 56 width fo 3 size lo hd aximum deviation 0 Advanced Bunching Bunching law mx Spacing 1 o 1 o Spacing z NEM Ratio 2 NENNT Space o Adjust attached curves Remesh attached surfaces Blank curves with parame Apply o Dismiss Tutorial Manual Nastran Tutorials e Meshing From the Model Tree turn on display of Surfaces Select the lt gt Mesh Shell icon from Mesh Tab Menubar Select Patched Based icon and in the Surface Meshing window Change Ignore Siz
298. con On the Post processing tab menu It will bring out the Point Probe on Surfaces window as given in Figure 3 651 Tutorial Manual Post Processing Tutorials Figure 3 651 Point Probe an a Probe Window Surfaces aurface X A y Z Polygon ID Value vector vector Vector Yortices Weights Values Recording to file Apply Cancel Place the mouse pointer over any surface which is to be examined and click with the left mouse button there The coordinates of the cursor location will be displayed in the text windows displayed by the Probe tab as shown in Figure 3 652 Tutorial Manual Post Processing Tutorials Figure 3 652 Point Probe on a Probe window Surfaces displaying the coordinates Surface wall 0427186953469061 Y 0105832721542554 Z 0 01011262254971 6065 Polygon 2359 ID 25790 value 0 068674155354 Vectors 0 963410497 Vector 0 00442455581 Vector 0 005472865052 vortices 2957 2831 1527 Weights 0 33656 0 504232 0 15 Values 00309023 0 153521 Recording to tile Apply ORK cancel The parameter Value s specifically describes the value of the currently chosen scalar variable at the particular location of the surface under probe c Dynamic Cut Plane A cut plane is used to visualize results on a plane cut through the three dimensional model and the result obtained will be displayed in the Dynamic Surface window Tutoria
299. created by the O grid that are oriented radially in relation to the grid lines that run circumferentially around the tube Or you can select the same edge shown in Figure 3 159 which is the blocking Edge 196 118 Set Spacingl to 0 015 which is half the previous value Set Spacing to 0 which will allow it to go as large as possible Increase the number of nodes to 13 so the Ratiol 1 25 can be met Enable Copy Parameters and select Method to Parallel edges to duplicate these settings on parallel edges in the blocking Then press Apply SS A Tutorial Manual Hexa Meshing Figure 3 159 Porams 5 Setting edge meshing parameters Edge TEE 4 A She Length 0578033 Nodes 3s g Mash law BiGeometic Spacing 1 0 o5 0 015 Spl Linked Select Fieverse 1 125 Spacing 2 p 1 SS Sp Linked Select Reverse 25 f Spare 26895 0 0969993 Specing Relate Wodes Locked Parameters lacked I Copy Parameters Apply oc Dismiss Tutorial Manual Figure 3 160 Selection of edge for changing Parameters Hexa Meshing Note Spacingl is the first element size at vertex 118 while spacing is the first element size at vertex 196 Side 1 and Side 2 are indicated by the direction arrow that displays on the edge after it 1s selected Switc
300. ct thickness is less than 15 units hence this value is supplied Enter Tolerance of 0 4 Press Surf button e select all the Surfaces using hotkey Enable Delete unattached Curves and Point and Prefer Connected Pairs press Apply Rest of the setting 1s default as shown in Figure 4 143 Note The thickness can be measured using Measure Distance icon Nastran Tutorials Figure 4 143 Create Modify al Create Modify Surface z Surface Window Part MIC Mame 8226s 9 2008238 BAe a Midsurface Method By Surfaces hd Inherit part name Search distance 1 Tolerance 14 How Quiet Surfaces E208632E WA Keep original Delete unattached curves Mw and points Partial Similar pairs only Prefer connected pairs Apply ok Dismiss Tutorial Manual Nastran Tutorials a From the supplied Surfaces AI Environment will automatically try to find the pair of Surface within the supplied distance of 15 and will quietly create the Mid Surface without asking any questions b There are some hot keys defined for easy selection For example key selects all the entities of all parts and selects only those displayed Press from keyboard to see all the available hot keys while in selection mode c Because we have used Inherit Part name it will keep the Part name as T4 and will not change it When it asks
301. cting this option will return all of the values back to the original parameters that were present when the Smooth cells window was first invoked Show The user may press the left mouse button on any of the bars in the histogram and the color will change from green to pink Toggling ON Show will display the cells that fall within the selected range on the model in the main viewing window Solid This toggle option will display the cells as solid tetras rather than as the default grid representation The user will have to select Show as well to activate this option Subset If the user has highlighted bars from the histogram and toggled ON Show the cells displayed in white color are also placed into a Subset The visibility of this subset is controlled by Subset from the Display Tree Add select This option allows the user to add cells to an already established subset Smoothing Elements window Smoothing iterations This value is the number of times the smoothing process will be performed Models with a more complicated geometry will require a greater number of iterations to obtain the desired quality which is assigned in Up to quality Up to quality As mentioned previously the Min value represents the worst quality of cells while the Max value represents the highest quality cells Usually the Min is set at 0 0 and the Maxis set at 1 0 The Up to quality value gives the smoother a quality to aim for Ideally after smoothing the quali
302. d bunching Then next to link edge select the edge selection icon and select the first edge on the same side as side 1 of the main edge The main edge will link its node distribution to all the edges connected to this edge that spans the main edge This edge is shown in Figure 3 219 Remember that the beginning of the larger edge 15 shown by a white arrow Tutorial Manual Figure 3 219 Select the edges to link Hexa Meshing Toggle on the Copy Parameters and under the Method select To Parallel edges and press Apply to achieve results similar to those shown in Figure 3 220 the edges that are copied to have an arrow displayed on them This will fix the mesh distortion in the farfield for the TOP SIDE and GROUND You can also do this for the INLET and OUTLET Tutorial Manual Hexa Meshing Figure 3 220 Select the edges to link Figure 3 221 New mesh distribution after Linked bunching Notes on Linked Bunching Linked bunching allows the distribution of nodes on a single edge to be identical to the distribution of nodes on a series of smaller parallel edges Linking defines a permanent relationship called a link between these edges The node distribution can only be modified on the smaller edges The user will not be able to specify any node distribution on the larger edge The node distribution on the larger edge will automatically be updated to reflect the node distribution on the smaller edg
303. d by GEOM 4 GEOM 7 to the part INLET The region that is denoted by GEOM 0 GEOM 3 should be reassigned to the part OUTLET The Surface defining the Cylinder pipe will be placed in the Surface part CYL The surfaces belonging to the solid blade in the middle of the cylinder should be classified as BLADE When all of the Surface parts have been assigned INLET OUTLET CYLIN BLADE press the middle mouse button to exit from continuous mode Hexa Meshing f Curve Parts and Point Parts For this tutorial we will leave the curves and points assigned to the initial part GEOM Creating the Material Points Select Geometry gt Create Body gt Material Point Enter FLUID the Create Body window that appears The material point that will be created will help us to keep the FLUID region separate from the SOLID region but is not necessary since blocks can simply be created in the FLUID part rather than creating a material point With the left mouse button select two locations on the opposite sides of the cylinder shown in Figure 3 135 Note that the FLUID material point should not be within the BLADE If tetra meshing this location would be important With Hexa meshing it is not Press the middle mouse button to accept the selection and press Apply and the Body name FLUID should appear within the geometry midway between the selected locations Rotate the model to confirm that FLUID is in an approp
304. d clicking the middle mouse button or pressing on the keyboard Now add the faces on the inlet and outlet by pressing Select Faces and selecting all the faces on the IN and OUT as shown in Figure 3 187 There are five faces on the OUT part and one face on the IN part If you select the wrong face right mouse click to deselect the last face Press the middle mouse button after selecting the correct faces Press Apply to create the O grid which should appear as shown in Figure 3 188 Tutorial Manual Hexa Meshing Tutorial Manual c T EO eO 55 P 5 O 3 co 0 5 o 25 2 0 Figure 3 187 Figure 3 188 Hexa Meshing To resize the O grid select Blocking gt Edit gt Modify O Grid to open window shown in Figure 3 189 Choose Rescale O grid from the dropdown Rescale O grid window vts g Edit Block Modify OGrd Method RHescale D grid Hescale Block Select All Visible C Selected Block de Edge 0 31140 Absolute distance Offset 0 5 Apply vo Dismiss Select any of the small radial edges of the second O grid Figure 3 1903 shows one of these radial edges that you could select Enter an Offset value of 0 5 With Absolute distance turned OFF this value is a relative distance This means it 1s Tutorial Manual Figure 3 190 Edge to be selected for rescaling Hexa Me
305. d in the Smooth Mesh Globally window in the Up to quality option change the value to 0 4 as shown in Figure 3 404 and press Apply Keep the default setting as it 1s m S Tutorial Manual Advanced Meshing Tutorials Figure 3 404 Smooth Element Globally Window Smooth Elements Globally Quality Smoothing iterations E Up to quality 04 Criterion Quality Smooth Hesh Type Smooth Freeze 3 v UC QUAD 4 C Smooth Parts Subsets Method parks Refresh Histogram Advanced Options Laplace smoothing Not just worst 1 Allow node merging Allow refinement Group bad hex regions Ignore PrePoints Surface Fitting Prism V arpage H atia 05 Violate geometry Tolerance 01 Relative Tolerance Minimum Edge Length 5 Apply ok Dismiss Tutorial Manual Advanced Meshing Tutorials e After smoothening is performed right click in Histogram window and select Reset the final histogram 1s shown in Figure 3 405 Figure 3 405 Smoot h Mesh 29 Globall a y 0 l l 0 33 0 4 0 46 53 0 67 O s 0 87 0 93 h Saving the project For saving the project select File gt Save Project Accept the default file names when asked Tutorial Manual Advanced Meshing Tutorials 3 6 5 STL Repair with Tetra meshing Over
306. d press Apply Figure 4 138 Select Result Format Select Hesult Format Add as adds DataSet a Curent 1 Format LSDYNA ss DYHA D3Flot ial Files PDA d3plot Lez Group Elements by Materials Apply ox Dismiss As soon as Apply button is pressed Select Transient Steps window will be displayed as shown in Figure 4 139 A specific time step can be selected from the second pull down area or Run time can be selected from the first pull down area to start moving forward in time with the results display updated at each time step Select Single step and step 1 Enable Display Transient Time so the time will appear in the display window Tutorial Manual LS Dyna Tutorials Figure 4 139 Select Transient 5 Select Transient Steps window Steps m Single step 0 0049999 Display Transient Time Apply ck Dismiss From the Post processing tab click on Variables 5 ror Category select Kinematics and set the Current Scalar Variable to Accel x The following results can be seen in the graphics window shown in Figure 4 140 Figure 4 140 Results Displayed in the Graphics window Tutorial Manual LS Dyna Tutorials Time 0 004949 Accel z 224e 007 076e 007 929e 007 70le 007 6336 007 48568 4007 338e 07 190e 00 275e 005 105e 007 2536 007 400e 007 54 007 696e 00 943 00 7 991 007 Hm Lp gm oc c3 rt d d d I 1 Cn Cn
307. d right mouse clicking for display options are discussed in the Introduction The same applies for the Blocking tree and its sub categories Once a blocking is initialized or a block file is loaded File gt Blocking gt Open Blocking a new category Blocking 15 created the model tree Sub categories within blocking are Subsets Vertices Edges Faces Blocks Topology Pre Mesh Edges are turned on by default Most of the time edges are the only type that needs to be displayed in order to perform the majority of the functions A crosshairs representing the vertices block corners will also be displayed Vertices are only necessary to display when certain information 15 desired Turning on Pre Mesh will display the surface mesh The user will be asked to compute the mesh if any changes have been made since the previous calculation Projection Options One of the Pre Mesh display options is projection type No Projection Will simply interpolate all nodes without projecting to geometry Useful if a quick mesh preview is desired for example to visually check distribution patterns Project Vertices Will project vertex nodes onto geometry other nodes are interpolated Project Edges Will project all nodes along edges interior face nodes are interpolated Required for final output of 2D planar grids Project Face The default setting Projects all boundary nodes including those in the face interior Only intern
308. d to one vertex by refinement in problem regions Laplace smoothing This option will solve the Laplace equation which will generally yield a more uniformly spaced mesh Note This can sometimes lead to a lower determinant quality of the prisms Also this option works only for the triangular surface mesh Allow node merging This option will collapse and remove the worst tetra and prism elements when smoothing in order to obtain a higher quality mesh This default option is often very useful in improving the grid quality Not just worst 1 This option will smooth all of the geometry s cells to the assigned quality specified under Up to quality just focus on the worst 196 of the mesh Typically when a mesh is smoothed the smoother concentrates on improving the worst regions this option will allow the smoother to continue smoothing beyond the worst regions until the desired quality is obtained Surface fitting This option will smooth mesh keeping the nodes and the new mesh restricted along the surface of the geometry Only Hexa models will utilize this option Ignore pre points Selecting this option will allow the smoother to attempt to improve the mesh quality without being bound by the initial points of the geometry This option is similar to the Violate geometry option but works only for points located on the geometry This option is available only when the user has hexahedral cells in the model Usually the best way to
309. d triangular surface meshes ANSYS ICEMCED provides a direct link between geometry and analysis In ANSYS ICEMCED geometry can be input from just about any format whether it is from a commercial CAD design package 3 party universal database scan data or point data Beginning with a robust geometry module which supports the creation and modification of surfaces curves and points ANSYS ICEMCFD s open geometry Introduction to ANSYS ICEMCFD database offers the flexibility to combine geometric information in various formats for mesh generation The resulting structured or unstructured meshes topology inter domain connectivity and boundary conditions are then stored in a database where they can easily be translated to input files formatted for a particular solver 1 1 The Unified Geometry Concept The unified geometry input environment in ANSYS ICEMCED provides rapid geometry evaluation capability for computational mesh generation This environment can combine CAD surface geometry and triangulated surface data into a single geometry database using the geometry interfaces geometry entities including surfaces curves and points are tagged or associated to a grouping called a part With this part association the user can quickly toggle off or on all entities within the parts visualize them with a different color assign mesh sizes on all entities within the part and apply different boundary conditions by part Geometry
310. ddle mouse button to accept the block Advanced Meshing Tutorials Figure 3 369 Split Block Gil Inner O grid creation i window Split Block Block Select A A Select Face s 45 45 Select Edge s s Select Vert s Clear Selected Around block s Absolute Apply ok Dismiss Similarly select two faces by FACES as shown in Figure 3 370 press Apply and will get the O Grid shown in the right of figure Figure 3 370 and Press Apply Figure 3 370 Before creation of O grid Left amp after creation of O grid Right Tutorial Manual Advanced Meshing Tutorials Select Blocking Pre mesh Params 9 gt Edge zs A window will appear Select Edge 25 41 give Nodes as 17 Toggle ON Copy Parameters and select Parallel Edges as shown in Figure 3 371 and press Apply Figure 3 371 Edge meshing parameters window Tutorial Manual Advanced Meshing Tutorials Pre Mesh Params a Meshing Parameters 9 GN Epdon3 Ne Length ad Nodes 7 1 O O Meshlaw BiGeometic 000000004 Spacing 1 1 875 5 1 Linked Select Reverse Ratia 1 1 Spacing 2 1 875 5 2 Linked Select Reverse Ratio 2 7 1 Space 7 1 875 Spacing Relative Nodes Locked Parameters locked Copy Parameters Copy Method To All Parallel Edges Copy absolute Linked bunching ae Link
311. del selecting Replot will display an updated histogram Replot Mines value value ha Max Yheigh 1196 7 Mum bars o 0 Accept Reset Cancel Help mo ee ee ee Tutorial Manual Tetra Meshing Appendix Min X value This minimum value represents the worst quality elements on the histogram s x axis Max X value This maximum value represents the highest quality that elements can achieve Max Y Height The user can adjust the number of elements that will be represented on the histogram s y axis Usually a value of 20 is sufficient If there are too many elements displayed it is difficult to discern the effects of smoothing Num Bars This represents the number of subdivisions within the range between the Min and the Max The default Bars have widths of 0 05 Increasing the amount of displayed bars however will decrease this width Reset Selecting this option will return all of the values back to the original parameters that were present when the Smooth mesh globally window was first invoked Show The user may press the left mouse button on any of the bars in the histogram and the color will change from green to pink Selecting Show will display the elements that fall within the selected range on the model in the main viewing window Solid This toggle option will display the elements as solid tetras rather than as the default grid representation The user wi
312. differ with those of AI Nastran run depending on the version To display mode shape at Total Translation Frequency select Category as Displacement and Current Scalar Variable as Translation_Total in Select Nastran Variables window as shown in Tutorial Manual Nastran Tutorials Select Control All Animation option from Post processing tab menu bar which will open Animation Controller window as shown in Figure 4 168 Tutorial Manual Nastran Tutorials Figure 4 168 Animation Controller a Animation Setup and Controller 0000 window gt NH b 44 m with Steps 20 Cycles 1 Speed ms 10 Animate dynamic surfaces Animate views Rotate about line Angle degree 360 ARIS 0 01 Center 0 Animate deformation Lndeformed shape Smoothly back cycle Amplifier 1 Animate modal Iw Undeformed shape Steps per cycle 20 Amplifier 0 70508 Tutorial Manual Nastran Tutorials Set the values as shown in Figure 4 168 and press Animate to view the mode shape as shown in Figure 4 169 amp Figure 4 170 Figure 4 169 Anima ted model at 181 65 9 Hz Tranzlation Total 181 659 Hz Co fm e CI VD gr e 25 23 el 19 l8 16 14 12 L 435 578 822 165 408 BB17 00 24 15 73 37 22 46 35 19 Finally select Exit to quit the post processor Tutorial Manual Figure 4 170 A
313. dral Mesh Volume Gp window Mesh type Tetra Method de Smooth mesh Iterations E 4 Min quality EM Coarsen mesh Iterations Worst aspect ratio EUNDO Smooth transition Factor Options Run as batch process visible geometry Part by Part Load mesh after completion Apply ok Dismiss Press Apply to start the meshing process The mesh opens automatically once the meshing process is complete Tutorial Manual Tetra Meshing Once the meshing process is completed make triangles visible from the Display Tree widget under Mesh gt Shell so that the mesh appears as in Figure 3 233 Figure 3 233 The smoothed mesh Atri E h Diagnostics The user should check the mesh for any errors or problems that may cause problems for analysis The Check Mesh window shown in Figure 3 234 is accessible under Edit Mesh gt Check Mesh e Tutorial Manual Tetra Meshing Figure 3 234 Check mesh window Check Mesh Check Mesh Duplicate element Uncovered faces Missing internal faces Periodic problems Volume orientations Surface orientations Hanging elements Penetrating E elements Disconnected bar elements Set defaults Elements to check AJ Active Check mode Create subsets Checkfix each Apply Dismiss Possible Problems Multiple edges Triangle bases
314. duction before beginning the tutorials The input files for the tutorials can be found within the ANSYS ICEMCED installation For example Ansys_inc v100 icemcfd linux64 docu CFDHelp CFD_ Tutorial Files They can also be downloaded from http www berkeley ansys com icemcfd_ftp index html icemcfd_100 manual This download also contains these manuals in pdf format for hardcopy output Tutorial Design These tutorials provide explanation for each step in the mesh generation process The user not only learns the sequence of commands but also comes to understand the concept behind the individual commands After going through these tutorials the user will be capable of extending his or her knowledge of the functions into more complicated projects Each example will either introduce new features or use familiar features in new ways to ultimately achieve better results for specific geometries Lessons begin by outlining the functions and operations being introduced in the example New features will receive the most thorough explanations in the chapter in which they are first introduced For specific questions regarding the usage of a command refer to Help gt Help Topics Text Conventions The text conventions of this tutorial are categorized in the following manner gt indicates order of selection For example Edges gt Group curve gt screen select means to choose the screen select option of the Group curve f
315. during the check process Remaining errors can be repaired manually via Edit Mesh Repair Mesh gt Make Remove Periodic You should not get this error ideally unless you have done some editing on the mesh Volume orientations This check will find cells where the order of the nodes does not define a right handed cell The automatic Fix will re order the mis oriented cells nodes to eliminate this error Surface orientations This check will flag any location where more than one tet element share a single triangle surface element The tet elements would have 3 common nodes but the fourth node would be different These errors that indicate a major problem in the connectivity in the model need to be fixed manually This would normally involve manually deleting and creating elements Multiple Edges This check will find cells with an edge that shares more than two cells Legitimate multiple edges would be found at a T shaped junction where more than two geometrical surfaces meet Triangle boxes This check locates groups of 4 triangles that form a tetrahedron with no actual volume cell inside This un desirable characteristic is best fixed by choosing Select for this region and merging the two nodes that would collapse the unwanted triangle box Hanging elements For a volume mesh a surface or line element that does not have an attached volume element is flagged as a hanging element Penetrating elements Flags regions where two sets of ele
316. e Nodes and vertices of these edges will project on to the associated geometry Hexa Meshing Figure 3 50 Projection of edges to Curve Note If once completed the associations do not appear as in Figure 3 50 the steps of operation may be retraced with the Undo and Redo buttons Also edges can be re associated to their proper curves It is not necessary to disassociate and then re associate The re association will overwrite the previous association Turn off Edges gt Show Association after verifying Moving the Vertices Next move vertices on to the geometry Select Move Vertex Move Vertex 4 as shown in Figure 3 51 1f not already selected Hexa Meshing Note Selecting Move Vertex from the Menu tab will immediately prompt you to select from the screen It is usually not necessary to select Move Vertex from the Data Entry Panel unless another option was previously selected Figure 3 51 Move Vertex Window Tutorial Manual Hexa Meshing Move the vertices of the Inlets and Outlet ends of large pipe as shown Keeping the left mouse key depressed one can drag the vertex along the curve Figure 3 52 Associate Edges to Curve FE Note Due to the associations made between the edges and curves many of these vertices will snap to the correct position Vertices may however be moved along the curve by dragging the mouse To capture the ends of the curves drag with the left
317. e gt Change working directory and set the current working directory to ACN docu CFDHelp CFD Tutorial Files gt Gridfi n Go to File gt Geometry gt Open Geometry and open geometry tin Advanced Meshing Tutorials For this tutorial the part grouping has already been pre defined Thus the user can immediately proceed to blocking Curves should be ON in the Display Tree d Generating the 2 D Blocking Inside the mesh tab press Blocking 7 Create Block P eu Initialize Block V Enter LIVE for the Part Next to the Type choose 2D Planar from the pulldown Press Apply The 2D blocking will be created in the XY plane This is the orientation that the 2D Planar blocking 15 meant to work with If the 2D part of your geometry 15 not parallel to the XY plane it is recommended to orient the geometry in the XY plane or some blocking operations may be difficult The Initial block should look like Figure 3 302 Figure 3 302 Initial 2D Blocking Advanced Meshing Tutorials Turn on the Vertices and their numbers from the Display Tree by right mouse clicking on Blocking gt Vertices gt Numbers The vertex numbers are shown in Figure 3 302 Right click in the Display Tree to turn on Geometry gt Curves gt Show Curve Names Zoom in toward the bottom of the inner blocked shaped geometry and it should look like Figure 3 303 Advanced Meshing Tutorials It 2 0 Figure 3 303 E an Bottom
318. e Factor which is found in Set Global Mesh Size window from Mesh Tabbed menubar Note that if 0 is assigned as the Scale Factor Tetra will not run 2 2 4 Meshing inside small angles or in small gaps between objects Examine the regions between two surfaces or curves that are very close together or that meet at a small angle This would also apply if the region outside the geometry has small angles If the local tetra sizes are not small enough so that at least 1 or 2 elements would fit through the thickness the user should define Thin cuts This is in the Tet Meshing Parameters section of the Global Mesh Size window To define a thin cut the two surfaces have to be in different Parts If the surfaces meet the curve at the intersection of the surfaces will need to be in a third different Part If the tetra sizes are larger or approximately the same size as the gap between the surfaces or curves the surface mesh could have a tendency to jump the gap thus creating non manifold vertices These non manifold vertices would be created during the Tetra process Tetra automatically attempts to close all holes in a model Since the gap may be confused as a hole the user should either define a thin cut in order to establish that the gap is not a hole or make the mesh size small enough so that it won t close the gap when the Tetra process is performed A hole is usually considered a space that is greater than 2 or 3 cells in thickness 2 2 5 Desired M
319. e Project As 4 134 Cave DPA mj An ES Save Proje ct As 351 wind OW Documents Deskto p My Documents Computer Network File name PDA Places as type Project Files p i Solver Setup Setup LS Dyna Run First select the appropriate solver before proceeding further Tutorial Manual LS Dyna Tutorials e Select Settings gt Solver from the Main menu and select LS Dyna as solver and press Apply Selection of a solver is shown in Figure Figure 4 135 Solver Solver Setup selection Solver L5 Duna Sets Default Apply o Cancel From the Solve Options tab click Write View Input File 9 to open the Write View Input File window as shown in Figure 4 136 Tutorial Manual LS Dyna Tutorials Figure 4 136 wiite View Input Write View File j Input File DI window Solver LS Dyna LS Dyna File PDA_Dynak Attribute File POA_Dyna lsdyna fbc PDA D wna lsdyna par Farameter File E dit Options Basic C Advanced Volume Elements Defined Shell Elements Defined Thickness Distribution Distributed gt Bar Elements Defined Paint Elements Defined Create Attribute amp Parameter Files Edit Parameters Edit Attributes Iw View LS Dyna File Apply ck Dismiss e Enable View LS Dyna
320. e and then immediately select the edge just before it as the Target Edge s as in Figure 3 89 Press the middle mouse button to complete Figure 3 89 Display of the 100 bunching using the a 3 Edge gt Bunching Hexa Meshing Next back to Edge Params select the previous target edge and make sure Copy Parameters gt Parallel Edges 15 on and Apply Repeat for the edge behind the car using edge 37 111 as the reference Turn on Pre Mesh and recomputed Figure 3 90 Mon n Coenobio Mesh of the 555256 Lu ET baseline zn model L L n a a SS SS SSS TT n Saving your Replay File Bring the Replay control window to the foreground and select Save Accept the default filename replay file rpl and Save from the Save Script File browser Select Done to close the Replay control window Select File gt Close Project and type any suitable name Tutorial Manual Hexa Meshing o Using Replay for the Design Iteration Figure 3 91 The car model geomet ry The user is now ready to rebuild the block topology on a similar geometry or design iteration Instead of repeating the same commands manually run the Replay file To load the iteration select File gt Geometry gt Geometry choose mod tin and Replace the original
321. e as CURVES 0 Press Apply to create the line Switch ON Geometry gt Curves in the Display Tree if they are switched off To see the names of the curves use the right mouse button and select Curves gt Show Curve Names in the Display Tree Use the right mouse button to zoom out if needed The created line name would be shown as CURVES 0 Tutorial Manual Geometry Creation similarly select the following points pressing Apply each time Without changing the Name entry by default the names of each new curve would appear as shown on the left CURVES 1 from POINTS 0 and POINTS 2 CURVES 2 from POINTS 2 and POINTS 3 CURVES 3 from POINTS 4 POINTS 5 CURVES 4 from POINTS 5 and POINTS 7 CURVES 5 from POINTS 6 and POINTS 7 CURVES 6 from POINTS 8 and POINTS 9 CURVES 7 from POINTS 8 and POINTS 12 CURVES 8 from POINTS 9 and POINTS 13 Press Dismiss to close the window Arc Creation Geometry gt Create Modify Curves gt Arc Through 3 points Select the Arc Through 3 Points option open the window as seen in Figure 3 5 Geometry Creation Figure 3 5 Arc from 3 points window Create Modify Curve Part CURVES CURVES 10 gt r v Arc from 3 Points P g Apply Dismiss To select Points click on select point icon and select the points POINTS 4 POINTS 3 and POINTS 10 with the left mouse button Press the middle mouse button to accept the point C
322. e as above Tranzverse Shear Thickness 0 932330 Nonstructural Mass Unit n 000000 Length Apply ok Dismiss f Solver Setup Modal analysis is to be carried out on this model so this has to be setup for Nastran and write an input file for NASTRAN Setup Nastran Run First user should select the appropriate solver before proceeding further Nastran Tutorials Select Settings gt Solver from Top Menubar and select appropriate solver viz Nastran and press Apply as shown in Figure 4 161 A Solver Setup a Solver selection m Solver 5 Default Apply ox Cancel Setup Solver Parameters Click on Setup Solver Parameters from Solve Options Tab Menu bar that will open Setup Solver Parameters window Select Solver Parameter as Eigen Value Extraction EIGR EIGRL Select Type as EIGRL Note EIGRL is Real Eigenvalue Extraction Data Lanczos Method Set Number of Modes to 20 Min and Max could be defined to limit this however in general it is easier to let Nastran just return first 20 frequencies Leave the other parameters as Default as shown in Figure 4 162 Press Apply A default Subset by the name of EIGRL1 is created under Parameters in the Model Tree Nastran Tutorials Figure 4 162 Setup Solver ad in a arameters Parameters window Solver NASTRAN Solver Parameter Eigenvalue Extraction EIGR EIGAL hd T
323. e as type Project Files pri First user should select the appropriate solver before proceeding further Tutorial Manual LS Dyna Tutorials Select Settings gt Solver from the Main menu and select LS Dyna and press as shown in Figure 4 113 Figure 4 113 Solver Setup solver Setup Window Solver L5 Duna Sets Default Apply ck Cancel Write LS Dyna Input File From the Solve Options tab click on Write View Input File e to open the Write View Input File window as shown in Figure 4 114 LS Dyna Tutorials Figure 4 114 Input c Write View Input File File window Solver ILS Dyna LS Dyna File FrDaor k Attribute File Parameter File FiDoar Isdyna par Laur Edit Options C Basic Advanced Volume Elements Defined Shell Elements Defined gt Thickness Distribution Distributed Bar Elements Defined 8 Paint Elements Defined gt Create Attribute amp Parameter Files Edit Parameters E dit Attributes view L5 Dyna File Apply ck Dismiss Tutorial Manual LS Dyna Tutorials In Edit Options Enable Advanced and click on Create Attribute amp Parameter Files which will create the attribute and parameter files This file will be used for translating the information into the LS Dyna k file Note User can switch ON View LS Dyna File opti
324. e hole Delaunay violation This check finds cells which violate the Delaunay rule which states that a circumscribed circle around a surface triangle should not enclose any other nodes These can often be removed by swapping edges of these tri angles Overlapping elements This flags surface elements that occupy part of the same surface area but don t share the same nodes so are not duplicates Non manifold vertices This check will find vertices who adjacent cells outer edges don t form a closed loop Finding this problem usually indicates the existence of cells that jump from one surface to another forming a tent like structure as shown in the figure below ANSYS ICEM CFD Al Environment 10 0 User Manual SAS IP Inc Chapter 2 Tetra Figure 2 11 Non Manifold Vertices anon manitold vertex outer edges do not form a closed loop outer edges forma closed loop No a i T a a um t 7 F Un connected vertices This check finds vertices that are not connected to any cells These can generally be deleted Smoothing After eliminating errors possible problems from a tetra grid the user needs to smooth the grid to improve the quality Figure 2 12 Quality Histogram Replat 12 0 254564 Reset 1 Show Solid Subset 0 Done 0 OF 02 OS 04 05 OB OF Os 09 1 2 16 ANSYS ICEM CFD Al Environment 10 0 User M
325. e important geometric features in the mesh Moreover for models where the user can take advantage of symmetry conditions topology transformations such as translate rotate mirror and scaling are available The simplified block topology concept allows rapid generation and manipulation of the block structure and ultimately rapid generation of the hexahedral meshes Hexa provides a projection based mesh generation environment where by default all block faces between different materials are projected to the closest CAD surfaces Block faces within the same material may also be associated to specific CAD surfaces to allow for definition of internal walls In general there is no need to perform any individual face associations to underlying CAD geometry which further reduces the difficulty of mesh gen eration For more useful information on Hexa please go to 3 2 Features of Hexa Some of the more advanced features of Hexa include O grids For very complex geometry Hexa automatically generates body fitted internal and external O grids to parametrically fit the block topology to the geometry to ensure good quality meshes Edge Meshing Parameters Hexa s edge meshing parameters offer unlimited flexibility in applying user specified bunching requirements Time Saving Methods Hexa provides time saving surface smoothing and volume relaxation algorithms on the generated mesh Mesh Quality Checking With a set of tools for mesh quality checking cells
326. e mesh Params 3 gt Update Size gt Update and Apply Turn on Pre mesh in the Display tree and recompute Figure 3 84 What has been created so far is a body fitted blocking that is aligned with indices I and J This is known as a Cartesian or H grid type of blocking Tutorial Manual Hexa Meshing Figure Te The H CH aera RHETT PEEP L ETEUETEHHTBTRRHERHERHEHEHEHEHHERTEHEEEEHHEHHRRHEH EH EHEHERHEHREHEHEL LE Creating an O grid around the Car Next create an O grid where the mesh radially propagates from the surface of the car towards the outer domain This will result in an orthogonal mesh to better capture near wall or boundary layer flow First turn off Pre Mesh and turn on Edges Also turn on the VOREN part for we re going to select the interior blocks Select Blocking gt Split Block 7 the panel shown in Figure 3 85 to obtain Tutorial Manual Hexa Meshing Figure 3 85 Creating an O grid in the Blocking Split Block Gees Block Split Block a Select Block s Select Faces Select Edgel s e 5 Ri Select Vert s Clear Selected Around block s Oa Absolute Apply Lok Dismiss Using Select m1 select the blocks as in Figure 3 86 and press the middle mouse button to accept selection Turn off VORFN The selected blocks will disappear Figure 3 86 Select the b
327. e the display of Surfaces from the Display Tree widget To change the part names of surfaces right click on Parts gt Create Part In the Create Part window enter the appropriate Part name Choose Create part by selection toggle OFF Selection of points curves and bodies from the Select 5 geometry toolbar Click on Select entities to select the required surfaces with the left mouse button After selection Tetra Meshing is over press middle mouse button to complete the selection process Continue to create the other Parts for the surfaces Then Press Apply followed by Dismiss to close the window Leave the curves and points in the GEOM part e Defining the Material Point The material of the model will be assigned to the material point LIVE The LIVE material 1s the region that lies within the BOX surrounding the fin Select Geometry gt Create Body gt Material Point gt Enter Part as LIVE Click on Select location s to select two locations Select two locations e g one on the fin tip and one at a box corner and middle click such that the LIVE material point will appear within the volume of interest f Setting Global Mesh Size Choose Mesh Set Global Mesh Size gt General Parameters to open the Global Mesh Size window Figure 3 253 Enable Natural size Enter the value of 32 for Max element Enter a Scale factor of 1 This value is a parameter that 1s referred to by other mesh pa
328. e three edges at the top A indicated with dashed lines in Figure 3 106 Press the middle mouse button then select the three curves A making up the small semicircle Press the middle mouse button to complete the operation In continuation mode you ll be prompted to select the next set of edges curves Select the three edges B at the front of the large cylinder accept with the middle mouse button and then select the three curves making up the large semicircle B Again press the middle mouse button to complete Associate the three edges on the Y plane near the cylinder intersections C then the semicircle curve making up the intersection C Finally associate the side rear edges to the curves making up the backend of the large cylinder D gt D and E gt E as shown in Figure 3 106 Hexa Meshing Figure 3 106 Associating edges to curves Verify that the correct associations have been set right mouse select Edges gt and select Show Association in the Display tree Figure 3 107 The arrow originates from the edge center and points to the geometry entity it s associated to Note that white edges point to the nearest point normal to the nearest surface for they re not directly associated to a specific surface Tutorial Manual Figure 3 107 Display of the projections of the edges to the associated curve Hexa Meshing h Moving the Vertices You can automati
329. e to 0 6 and Clean level to 3 Now press Apply in the Mesh Surface window as shown in Figure 4 215 Note If Surface Window is left Blank it selects all the surfaces Figure 4 215 Mesh Surface window Nastran Tutorials Mesh 5urface 5urface Meshing Q9 Mesh type Quad Dominant Mesh boundaries Method Fram suraces Surfaces RNC Project to surfaces Respect line elements Remove old elements Use surface sizes Simple offset lgnore size Be 0 Clean level 4 Smooth boundaries Mapping 2 y Adjust nodes limit 4 deviation harder n Apply ox Dismiss Tutorial Manual Nastran Tutorials In Model Tree click on to expand the Mesh options Click the right mouse button on Shells and select Solid amp Wire Turn Off Surface The mesh is shown in Figure 4 216 Figure 4 216 Mesh in Solid amp Wire mode Nastran Tutorials AXE VHS 1954 54 SANI xp Tutorial Manual Seam Weld m reae DN LL Mc DA Nastran Tutorials Figure 4 219 Spot Weld LE D TI d th PC 7 f Mesh Quality It should be ensured that quality of the elements does not go below certain value before applying constraint For this case let us say a quality of 0 2 should be good enough To check the quality of the elements
330. ecified point 2 screen locations T Apply ck Dismiss Select two points as shown in Figure 3 227 and middle click LIVE should appear in the model the small cross marks the location The user might have to make Bodies visible in the Tree Dynamically rotate the model to confirm that LIVE 15 located within the region to be meshed outside the cube but inside the sphere Tutorial Manual Tetra Meshing Figure 3 227 Points to be Points to selected selected for creating material 5 point m d Set global mesh size The user must define mesh sizes before mesh generation Select Mesh gt Set Global Mesh Size 1 gt General Parameters I to obtain the Global Mesh Size window as shown inFigure 3 228 Enter 2 for Scale factor and 64 for Max element Figure 3 228 Press Apply followed by Dismiss to close the window Note To visualize the size defined in the Global Mesh Size window toggle ON Display under Scale factor and Max element These options will provide tetra icons on the display labeled as scale and max Tutorial Manual Tetra Meshing Figure 3 228 Setting the Global Global Mesh Size a mesh sizes for the model Global Hesh Parameters E Global Element Scale Factor Scale factor 2 Display Global Element Seed Size element 4 Display Natural Size Enabled Size Rt Display Mum of Elements in gap i 1 Refinement
331. ect CAD Interfaces are used all geometric parameter changes are performed in the native CAD system If any of the indirect interfaces are used however the parametric geometry changes are performed in ICEM DDN Generating a Replay File The first step generating a Replay file 15 to activate the recording of the commands needed to generate the initial block topology model As mentioned above this function can be invoked through File gt Replay of the steps in the mesh development process are recorded including blocking mesh size edge meshing boundary condition definition and final mesh generation The next step in the process 15 to make the parametric change in the geometry and then replay the recorded Replay file on the changed geometry steps in the mesh generation process are automated from this point Advantage of the Replay Function TS P Tutorial Manual Hexa Meshing Appendix 282 With the Replay option the user is capable of analyzing more geometry variations thus obtaining more information on the critical design parameters This can yield optimal design recommendations within the project time limits 3 3 8 Periodicity Periodic definition may be applied to the model in ICEM CFD Hexa The Periodic nodes function which is found under Blocking gt Periodic nodes plays a key role in properly analyzing rotating machinery applications fo
332. ect the block topology Therefore the Replay function is capable of automatically generating a topologically similar block model that can be used for the parametric changes in geometry If any of the Direct CAD Interfaces are used all geometric parameter changes are performed in the native CAD system 3 14 1 Generating a Replay File The first step in generating a Replay file is to activate the recording of the commands needed to generate the initial block topology model As mentioned above this function can be invoked through File gt Replay All of the steps in the mesh development process are recorded including blocking mesh size edge meshing boundary condition definition and final mesh generation The next step in the process is to make the parametric change in the geometry and then replay the recorded Replay file on the changed geometry All steps in the mesh generation process are automated from this point 3 14 2 Advantage of the Replay Function With the Replay option the user is capable of analyzing more geometry variations thus obtaining more inform ation on the critical design parameters This can yield optimal design recommendations within the project time limits 3 15 Periodicity Periodic definition may be applied to the model in Hexa The Periodic nodes function which is found under Blocking Periodic nodes plays a key role in properly analyzing rotating machinery applications for example 3 8 ANSYS ICEM CFD Al
333. ected Block 418 432 AB Project vertices Split Method Split Method Prescribed point Point POINTS 15 Apply o Dismiss Select the method Prescribed Point and select POINTS 15 It is common that upon split one may start seeing extra blocks edges In that case blocking should be restricted as explained in the previous step Tutorial Manual Advanced Meshing Tutorials Similarly split the other Block selecting the Circumferential edge at Prescribed point POINTS 16 The Final Block can be seen using Blocking gt Blocks gt Solid as shown in Figure 3 330 Note Don t use the Whole Block option in Blocking gt Blocks Display Tree widget Figure 3 330 Block after Split in Selection of blocks for Splitting Tutorial Manual Figure 3 331 Advanced Meshing Tutorials Switch OFF Blocking gt Blocks blocks to the VORFN part by going to Parts gt keep it in Off Mode gt Add to Part gt Blocking Material Add to Part by Selection with Blocks and selecting the Block as shown in Figure 3 331 Press the middle mouse button and then Apply Blocking with VORFN block selection POINTS 9 Tutorial Manual Advanced Meshing Tutorials Select Blocking gt Association 8 Reset Association B Enable Vertices Edges and Curves and Faces as shown in Figure 3 332 Figure 3 332 Reset Association Window Blockin
334. ection Creating the curves using From Points Creating the curves using Arc through 3 points Segmentation of curve using Segment Curve Deleting unused entities Creating Material Point using Mid Point File Menu Saving the geometry b Generating the Geometry Point Creation Note Settings gt Selection gt Auto pick mode should be turned OFF for ANSYS ICEMCED to behave exactly as this tutorial describes ab Geometry gt Create Point gt Explicit Coordinates Select the Explicit coordinate to open the Explicit Location window as shown in Figure 3 2 Tutorial Manual Geometry Creation Figure 3 2 Point creation window Create Point Fart CT NN Name POINTSO Explicit Locations Locations Create 1 point 0 1 point E vl 0 Apply ok As shown in Figure 3 2 Select Create 1 Point and assign coordinates 0 0 0 Input the Part name POINTS the Name as POINTS 0 and press Apply to create a point Switch ON the Geometry gt Points in the left side Display Tree window see the names of the points use the right mouse button and select Points gt Show Point Names in the Display Tree window Select Fit Window from the main menu Use the right mouse button to zoom out if needed The created point name would be shown as POINTS 0 similarly create the other points by entering POINTS 1 in the
335. ee by clicking on and also expand ET2D1 as shown in Figure 4 269 Right Click on ET2D1 gt Surface Properties Modify Figure 4 269 Hi4 Model Display Tree Mesh Element Properties HUO Displacements HO 2 1 CN15 1 CHIE Maternal Properties HA Farts w ETID ETIDZ ETID3 ETID4 ET2D1 1 Surface Properties M 202 Delete ET2027 ET203 204 EIU ET2DB5 ETD HHH CE E S FRR tH tH tH tH tH te 4 JI ITI mi na LJ c Parameters Subcases The window that pops up is shown in Figure 4 270 Change the value of Thickness from 0 75 to 0 8 and press Apply Similarly select ET2D2 and change the value of Thickness from 0 7 to 0 8 and press Apply Tutorial Manual Nastran Tutorials Figure 4 270 Define Shell Define Shell Element Element window Fart ET201 gx FID 1 Properties Type Shell Maternal lIsotrapicM at Thickness Transversal Shear Material Isctropic Mat Coupling Membrane Isotro Bending Material Eius selle d Bending Moment of Inertia 000000 Bending Maternal IsatropicM att Transverse Shear Thickness 0 213313 Nonstructural Mass Unit 0 000000 Length Apply ok Dismiss Save Project Through File gt Save Project As option create new directory Hood as said in earlier tutorials Nastran Tutorials Enter Hood as project name and press Save to save all these inform
336. ee widget since only surfaces need to be put into INFLOW Click on Select entities and then select the bottom min Z surface as shown in Figure 5 71 and press the middle mouse button Press Apply to move all the surfaces into the part INFLOW Figure 5 70 Create Part window Create Part Part INFLOW Create Part Create Part by Selection Entities 5 Adjust Geometry Names Apply Dismiss _ Tutorial Manual ANSYS ICEMCFD CFX Tutorials Figure 5 71 m Surface for INFLOW W E 1 n k a 5 IN NN AE m 1 i 7 d a A m the 3 OUTFLOW Change the part name to OUTFLOW Click on Select entities select the top max Z surface as shown in Figure 5 72 and click the middle mouse button Press Apply to move the surface into the part OUTFLOW Figure 5 72 Surface for OUTFLOW COPPERCOIL Tutorial Manual ANSYS ICEMCFD CFX Tutorials Change the part name to COPPERCOIL Click on Select entities then select surfaces representing the circular copper coil as shown in Figure 5 73 There are total of five surfaces including two closing surfaces on the circular cylinder After selecting the surfaces click the middle mouse button to complete the selection Press Apply to move the surface into the part COPPERCOIL Figure 5 73 Surface for COPPERCOIL GUPEEERBECOOYI Es
337. eed Size element 51 2 Display Natural Size Enabled Sie Dig8 Display Cells in gap 1 Refinement TU ignore Wall Thickness Triangle tolerance 0 0004 v Unitless tri tolerance Tutorial Manual Advanced Meshing Tutorials Select Mesh gt Set Curve mesh size a this will open a window as shown in Figure 3 399 Click on picker gt and select all the curves with the hot key a For Maximum element size enter 4 and press Apply Press Dismiss to close the window Advanced Meshing Tutorials Figure 3 399 Curve mesh size Curve Mesh Size amp window Hesh Parameters Method General Select Curvels topo surt 1828110 topo Maximum Size Number of Modes o Height lo Ratio o width 14 size 5560 Maximum deviation Advanced Bunching Bunching law Pl Spacing 1 Ratia 1 56 Spacing 2 Ratio 2 Space Adjust attached curves Remesh attached surfaces Blank curves with params Apply x Dismiss Tutorial Manual Advanced Meshing Tutorials Switch ON Quad sizes by right clicking Curves gt Curve Node Spacing from the Display tree This will display the nodes on all the curves in the model as shown in Figure 3 400 Figure 3 400 Quad sizes on the curves f Surface Meshing Mesh Shell Mesh 9 gt Patch Based 9 This would o
338. efine thin cuts between the two surfaces To define a thin cut the two surfaces have to be in different parts if the surfaces are converging the Tutorial Manual Tetra Meshing Appendix curve at the intersection of the surfaces will need to be in a third different part If the tetra sizes are larger or approximately the same size as the gap between the surfaces or curves the surface mesh could jump the gap thus creating non manifold vertices These non manifold vertices would be created during the meshing process Tetra automatically attempts to close all holes in a model Since the gap may be confused as a hole the user should either define a thin cut in order to establish that the gap is not a hole or make the mesh size small enough so that it won t close the gap when the meshing process is performed A space that is greater than 2 or 3 elements in thickness 1s usually considered as a hole Density control 3 5 2 Tetra The Three modes for Tetra are From geometry From geometry and surface mesh and From surface mesh From Geometry In this mode the user can accept the default parameters by selecting Apply from the Mesh with Tetrahedral window Additionally the user may also modify any of the parameters before selecting Apply There are some options to mesh Smooth mesh This will attempt to improve the quality of the Tetra mesh to Min quality in a particular number of iterations If you give iterations as 0 the smo
339. eg eer ba a ibas dte dupl 2 5 2 3 Itportapt Features Vu due Anto a e ea ein e o de oen cule ce 2 12 2 3 LoNat tal SIZES cascos a vate 2 12 2 3 2 Tetrahiedrat MeSDESIOOOIU TE i eos era Roco en eoa sort Reseau v Una v SURE 2 12 2 3 5 Mesh aora reb ute 2 13 2 3 4 Triangular Surface Mesh 5 2 13 2 3 5 Triangular Surface Mesh Coarsener cccseccsscccseccescceseccenceesecceeceesecseeceeceeeeceeeceeeeceenceeeeeees 2 13 2 3 5 Mangler Sumace Edino TOO 2 13 23 FMCG Em 2 13 2 23 90 QUalIb Tet PIG ssec deine stan usta 2 18 2 2 18 SM LI cm RR 3 1 ILU E 3 1 3 2 3 1 3 3 Mesh Generation with 3 2 3 4 Ihediexa Databdse cede is lcs da dU Qu ue 3 2 3 5 IntelligeritGeomeltby ID
340. elect geometry 3525 jg e X9 x S ES HOS Geometr y window In the Select geometry window press Select items in a part The Select part window appears as shown in Figure 3 526 Select and FFINI and press Accept Figure i 3 526 Select Part windo Accept All Mone Screen Cancel W In the Transformation Tools window enable Copy enter Number of copies as 3 select X for Axis Angle 90 and Center Point as Origin as shown in Figure 3 527 Then press Apply Tutorial Manual Cart3D Figure 3 527 _ Transformation Tools a Transformation Tool window Select point BFIN1 0 surface BE ae Translate Hotate Hirror 5 cale Copy Number of copies 3 E Rotation 7 Vector Angle 80 Center of Rotation Center Point Origin Apply ox Cancel The geometry of BFINI and FFINI gets rotated as shown in Figure 3 528 Tutorial Manual Cart3D Figure 3 528 After Rotati on Switch off BODY and BFINI from the Display Display Tree widget and select View gt Left from the main menu In the Display Tree right click on Parts and select Create Part Enter FFIN2 as the Part name as shown in Figure 3 530 Select Create Part by Selection and select the region as shown in Figure 3 529 Middle click to accept Tutorial Manual Figure 3 529 Region selecte d Cart3D Tutorial Manual Cart3D Figure 3 530 Create Pa
341. element size of 2 for part SUBMARINE as shown in Figure 3 383 and press Apply Figure 3 383 urface Mesh Size a Surface Mesh Parameter Sufacele s 08160 MA Maximum size 2 Heit o 8 8 8 8 8 8 Height ratio 0 Number of layers Tetra size ratio 0 Minimum size 0125 Max deviation 0 Blank surfaces with params Apply ox Dismiss aaa e Setting curve mesh size Enter Maximum element size of 0 on all the curves through e Mesh Set Curve Mesh size a Press a to select all the curves from the screen Press Dismiss to close the window f Creating Mesh density To create density select Mesh gt Create density However before using this tool we need to create another Tutorial Manual Advanced Meshing Tutorials point behind the submarine geometry Starting from the back point of the submarine on the axis of symmetry create a point 5 unit further downstream in X direction In Create Density box Figure 3 384 enter size as a scale factor multiplier ratio as 1 2 and width as 15 Choose option Points and Press to pick the two axis points mentioned above Figure 3 384 Create density box Create Density a Name density Sg Raio t2 0 Width 150 Density Location From Points Entity bounds Foints BODY 161 POINTS Ay Apply ok Dismiss Figure Figure 3 385 shows the density box after creation Advanced Meshing Tutorials Figure
342. element subdivision based on local curvature and feature proximity A size smaller than natural size can be prescribed on a surface or curve and can still be reached Click Apply to save this setting ANSYS ICEMCFD CFX Tutorials Figure 5 80 a Global Mesh Size window Global Mesh Size Global Mesh Parameters B Global Element Scale Factor Scale factor Display Global Element Seed Size Max element Display Hatural Size Enabled Display of Elements in gap E Refinement 16 E Ignore Wall Thickness Apply ox Dismiss Global Prism Parameters Now click on Prism Meshing Parameters Leave Initial height blank and set Number of layers to 1 Leave the others default as shown below and press Apply Tutorial Manual ANSYS ICEMCFD CFX Tutorials Global Mesh Size Global Mesh Parameters Global Prism Settings Growth law exponential Initial height Height ratio 2 0 Number of layers i 4 Total height Compute param Fix marching direction Min prism quality in Ortho weight nsn Filet ratio 0 10 Max prism angle i80 height over base NEN Prism height limit Factor Ratio multiplier Apply ck Dismiss Parts for Prisms From the Mesh tab menubar select Set meshing Params by Parts a Tutorial Manual ANSYS ICEMCFD CFX Tutorials Enable Prism for the
343. ement type Triangle is highlighted in the Display Tree widget Zoom in on the region between PORT and SHROUD where the thin cut was defined the mesh should resemble Figure 3 272 Tutorial Manual Tetra Meshing Figure 3 272 xi Nt The mesh in the Thin cut region E iS RO DURS ie SOI WIC dd LS p XLI DANIA 253 i SE En i EA 1 EN uL P x a 1 1 um Le oim EL jp Checking the mesh Check the mesh for different errors and possible problems with Edit Mesh gt Check Mesh k Conversion of Elements from Liner to Quadratic Choose Edit mesh gt Convert Mesh Type 4 gt Create Mid Side Node A new window will appear as seen in Figure 3 273 Switch ON Mid Face node and choose all elements to be converted to quadratic before selecting Apply Tutorial Manual Tetra Meshing Figure 3 273 Convert biesh Linear to quadratic window Type 0 0 a ur 99 Create Mid Side Nodes Mid face node Frojectto geometry Iw Calculate projection Tolerance n 01 Check max Check deviation n 1666666 Check angle Check chord Only selected elements m Tetra 10 elements Standard check Strong check Automatic refinement The TRI 3 elements get converted to TRI 6 and TETRA 4 get converted to TET
344. en the window as shown in Figure 3 225 Click on Select entities to select the desired Surfaces 1f not already in selection mode The Select geometry toolbar opens Toggle OFF points and curves selection and keep the toggle ON for surfaces selection Enter CUBE as the Part name and select the five surfaces of the cube as shown in Figure 3 225 with the left mouse button Press Apply or middle click to create the CUBE part The new part will appear in the Parts list in the Display Tree widget Similarly create the SYMM four surfaces and SPHERE one surface parts Select Dismiss when finished For this example leave the points and curves assigned to the GEOM part Tetra Meshing Figure 3 225 Create part window Create Part Part CUBE Create Part Ange Create Part by Selection Entities surface GEOM M Adjust Geometry Names Apply Dismiss c Creating Body The body of the model which will hold the tetrahedral elements will be placed into the part LIVE Select Geometry gt Create Body 3 A window will as shown in Figure 3 226 In the Create Body window use the Material Point option Enter Part as LIVE in the window and then in Location enable Centroid of 2 points with the left mouse button Tutorial Manual Tetra Meshing Figure 3 226 Creating body window Create Body a Part LIVE Name Material Point Location Centroid of 2 points At sp
345. end Iw Record after current All commands Do range Insert Delete one Delete all Delete range Henumber Always update Done Note The option of loading is not recorded in the replay script Record after current 15 turned on by default It will record all of the commands until this button is turned off or the user selects Done The Replay control window may be moved aside or minimized while recording but the window should be kept active until recording is complete S f Select Blocking gt Create Block gt Initialize Block gt 2D planar Name the Part as LIVE and press Apply Tutorial Manual Hexa Meshing Figure 3 62 The Initialized Blocks d Splitting the Blocks with Prescribed Points Make sure Curves turned on default the Display tree Edges should also be displayed default showing the initial block as in Figure 3 62 Turn on Points gt Show Point Name in the Display tree The name of the Points will appear on the screen Zoom in to the bumper select Blocking gt Split Block D gt Split Block 4 in the Data Entry Panel will be active by default Don t select at this time Note Many functions including Split Block in the Data Entry Panel will automatically prompt the user to select from the screen This mode can be turned off on by selecting Settings gt Selection gt Auto Pick Mode If turned on default it will sometimes be necessary to
346. endix Figure 3 294 Split prism window Split Mesh oy ASG Split Prism Parts LIVE Prisms Method t Fixratin Fix initial height Initial layer height 0 2 Number af layers E E Split onky specified layers Apply Dismiss Tutorial Manual Tetra Meshing Appendix Figure 3 295 A single was subdivided into 5 layers For a fixed of number of layers 5 and the total thickness the layers can be redistributed to achieve the optimum initial height Select Edit Mesh Tab gt Move Nodes gt Redistribute prism edg Set Initia height to 0 1 and press Apply The ratios will be adjusted p Saving project Save the mesh by selecting File gt Save Project Close the project by selecting File gt Close Project Tutorial Manual Tetra Meshing Appendix 3 5 Tetra Meshing Appendix 3 5 1 Mesh Editor Before Creating the Tetra Mesh Before generating the Tetra mesh the user should confirm that the model is free of any flaws that would inhibit the creation of optimal mesh If the user wishes to save the changes in the native CAD files the following checks should be performed a direct CAD interface Missing surfaces or holes To create a mesh ANSYS ICEMCFD Tetra requires that the model contains a closed volume If however there are any holes gaps or missing surfaces in the geometry that are larger than the reference tetras in that particular location
347. ength 0 time scalae mecian 9554 mu Animate dynamic surtaces Animate tranaiant Animate list of views Add current view Swing Back Rotate about line Analetdeqrea 0 0 5 Canes noo 80s Animate deformation Lindetormed shape l Smoothly back cycle Amplifier 45 723 Animate modal nl ANSYS Tutorials Figure 4 44 Animate d model of Total Translation Total Translati Load 1 5n 1702 158n8 l475 1248 1134 LT 07940 06806 Hey O45357 03403 02269 01134 0000 coco ocococoocococoscocc Finally select File Results Close Result to quit the post processor Tutorial Manual 4 1 3 Contact Analysis The main objective of this tutorial is to demonstrate the ease of use in generating a tetra mesh in AI Environment and then defining contacts After defining the contact between the pin and block contact analysis will be done in Ansys The mesh for this tutorial is shown in Figure 4 45 Figure 4 45 Pin Block Geometry a Summary of Steps Geometry Editing Launch AI Environment Repair Mesh Sizing Meshing and Internal wall Tetra Meshing Define Internal wall Tutorial Manual 861 ANSYS Tutorials Material and Element Properties selection of Material Element Properties Constraints and Displacements Constraints Displacement Contact Solver setup setup Ansys Run Sa
348. enu not the one beneath the Method field change Nodes to 9 Spacing 1 to 1 0 and Spacing 2 to 0 5 Change Parameters gt Copy gt Method back to To Parallel Edges and Apply Change the number of Nodes of edge 34 38 to 9 Toggle off on Pre mesh and recompute to view the refined mesh shown in Figure 3 59 Hexa Meshing Figure 3 59 The Final Refine d Mesh dolo es ee ee a ee ee ee ee eee ee eee eee E i SS m m aa S oam E x i Saving the Mesh and Blocking Save the mesh in unstructured format Right mouse select Pre Mesh and select Convert to Unstruct Mesh to generate the domain file Select File gt Blocking gt Save Blocking As and input a filename for the blocking after the project name This block file can be loaded in a future session File gt Blocking gt Open Blocking for additional modification or to mesh a similar geometry Tutorial Manual Hexa Meshing It is recommended to save each blocking to a separate file instead of overwriting a previous one In more complex models the user may have to back track and load a previous blocking Select File gt Save Project As and type in a project name All files tetin blocking and unstructured mesh will be saved File gt Exit or continue with the next tutorial Tutorial Manual Hexa Meshing 3 2 3 2D Car Over
349. eometry Here the user will associate blocking edges to geometry curves and move vertices onto the geometry Select Associate a gt Associate Edge to Curve and turn ON Project vertices Select the four edges surrounding the IN part as shown in Figure 3 173 and press middle mouse button to complete selection Next select the four curves shown in Figure 3 173 and press the middle mouse button to complete selection Press Apply to associate the edges to the curves Tutorial Manual Hexa Meshing Figure 3 173 Edges to selected Selection of edges and curves for association a In the same way select the surrounding four edges and curves of the OUT surface for association Note With those edges associated to the appropriate curves the other surface associated vertices can be automatically moved onto the geometry to the nearest active surface Select Blocking gt Associate gt gt Snap Project Vertices wer s to open the window shown in Figure 3 174 Visible should be toggled on by default Then Press Apply Figure 3 175 represents the completion of these operations Hexa Meshing Figure 3 174 Blocking Snap Project vertices window Associations BIO OY oS Snap Project Vertices Vertex Select All Visible C Selected ic V ertices Move O Grid nodes Apply ok Dismiss Note View gt Right can be used to orient the model as seen on the left in
350. er angle Feature angle 30 Filter points Filter curves Hew Part Name nherited C Create new Park for new curves Part for new paints Build Topo Parts Selection Method Al parts Part by part Single curve cleanup Single Edge Tolerance 06 Split surface at T connections Split at interior curves oin edge curves Delete unattached curves and points Nastran Tutorials Note Curves can be colored and displayed by connectivity Green Unattached Yellow Single Red Double Blue Multiple In the Model Tree turn off Points and Curves and click the right mouse button on Geometry gt Surfaces gt Solid to display geometry modified so far as shown in Figure 4 148 Figure 4 148 Geometr y modified so far Note There is a minor Gap between the junctions of the two pipes This can be filled up by two ways Either a Fills the gap straight away b Removes the hole in the main Surface and then do the trimming based on the second pipe Tutorial Manual Nastran Tutorials Choice b 16 selected for this Tutorial Click on ud Remove Holes icon in the Repair Geometry window as shown in Figure 4 149 Figure 4 149 B Repair Repair Geometry a Geometry Window Apply ck Dismiss This option needs curves at the boundary of a hole so turn on Curves and turn off Surface from the Model Tree Click on Select Curve s
351. er Body Creation of Profile Curves Select the XY Plane from the project tree which 15 located at the left upper side of the main window It will display the XY plane in the graphics window as shown in Figure 5 4 Figure 5 4 Workben ch graphics window Tutorial Manual ANSYS ICEMCFD CFX Tutorials Select Look at Face Plane Sketch the icon from main tool bar Select sketching from project tree it will open the draw tool bar Now select polyline from the draw tool bar as shown in Figure 5 5 Figure 9 9 P Dimensions window Line Tangent Line Line by 2 Tangents 3 Polygon T_ Rectangle c Rectangle by 3 Points a2 Oval x Circle Circle by 3 Tangents gt Arc by Tangent i Arc by 3 Points dTa Arc by Center cts Ellipse Spline Construction Point 4 Construction Point at Intersection Modify Dimensions Constraints Settings Sketching Modeling Now Draw approximate shape with the help of cursor as shown in Figure 5 6 Tutorial Manual ANSYS ICEMCFD CFX Tutorials Figure 5 6 Approximate diagram static mixture body After drawing approximate shape to revolve user has to define the exact dimension to the curves so that shape of the revolved component will match to the geometry Click on dimensions in the sketching tab One dimension window will pop up as shown in Figure 5 7 Tutorial Manual ANSYS ICEMCFD CFX Tutorials Figure 5 7
352. erence Temperature as 298 Press Apply Now we will define the 3D element properties Select Properties gt Define 3d element properties il This will bring Define volume element window Enter parameter as shown in Figure Figure 4 75 Define volume element window Define Volume T Element Part M BOARD dt Material MAT BUARD PID 10 LES Global Apply ck Dismiss ANSYS Tutorials Now after defining volume element properties for M BOARD we have to define properties to the M CHIP also So in the same window enter Part as M CHIP Material as MAT BOARD PID as 11 and with default option press Apply i Setting the solver parameters For solver settings select Settings gt Solver then solver set up window will pop up select solver as ANSYS and press Apply select Solve options gt Setup Solver Parameters uj select ANSYS as solver and press Apply Then select Solve options gt Setup Analysis Type window In Setup Analysis Type Enter parameters as shown in Figure 4 76 ANSYS Tutorials Figure 4 76 Setup Analysis Type window Setup Analysis Type P Solver ANSY S Ansys Analysis Options Analysis Category Thermal Thermal Analysis Options Analysis Type Static Solver Auto Direct ICCG Tolerance 1 06 08 Number of Substeps Large Deformation ignore Apply o Cancel After ent
353. ering the parameters press Apply j Writing the input file Now we have to write the input file for ANSYS solver Select Solve options gt D write View input file In Edit options press Advanced Now click on Create Attribute and Parameter Files ANSYS Tutorials Now click on Edit parameters which will invoke a solver parameters window Go to ANSYS Analysis options gt Thermal analysis options gt Define thermal material option select gt Define linear property gt Create new This will invoke Define linear property window In this window enter directional characteristic as Isotropic value along xx direction as 1 1 then press copy Figure 4 77 Solver parameters window for MAT CHIP Solver parameters Xl ANSYS Analysis Options Define linear property Structural analysis options Richer characte tic Emag HF analysis options Thermal analysis options None Define thermal material MAT BOARD MAT CHIP Drthotropic Define linear proper MP1 0 Create new Paste None matt Create new Property Label Thermal conductivity Paste Flotran analysis options zx Praperty T emperature data None Define global parameters Value along lt direction 1 Define real constant set Define Property T emperature Define Coupled DOFs Y Y Property Temperature data None Define Constraint Equations Defaults Far low order struct Defaults For Flotran 3 D elem Defaults for high o
354. es Turn on Blocking gt Pre Mesh in the Display tree Select Yes when prompted to recompute Switch off Edges and Vertices from the Display tree to view the mesh as in Figure 3 56 Figure 3 56 The initial ERE mesh Tu idum E i E I l rere k 1 IEEE Py er x eu e qe a LEEEEHEEEEEEHEEEEECE EAR E 5555 Li 1 kl TAS pato Refining the Mesh with Edge Meshing Tutorial Manual Figure 3 57 The bunching on the edges Hexa Meshing Now the user will employ advanced edge meshing features to re distribute grid points to resolve the salient features of the flow Turn off Pre Mesh in the Display tree and re display Curves and Edges Right mouse select Edges and select Bunching from the pull down options to see the distribution of grid points along the edges Figure 3 57 First we ll reduce the number of nodes along the length of the large pipe SSS TERRE Hexa Meshing Turn on Vertices gt Numbers right mouse in the Display tree again for reference Select Blocking gt Pre mesh Params 54 gt Edge params 1 to display the Edge meshing hn parameters window as shown in Figure 3 58 Select 1 again and select edge 13 34 when prompted the panel change the number of Nodes to 27 then Apply Hexa Meshing Figure 3 58 A Edges Parameter Pre Mesh Params i Window Mes
355. es Join edge curves Delete unattached Ld ap Curves and points Tutorial Manual ANSYS Tutorials You will now see the points and curves as shown in Figure 4 17 Figure 4 17 Geometry after Build Topology c Mesh Parameters and Meshing We will create a 3D mesh but right now the geometry 16 only 2D so we will first mesh the 2D section then extrudes it into volume mesh The patch based mesher will be used to mesh the surfaces and this mesher only uses element sizes prescribed on curves not surfaces sizes so we will next set curve parameters Mesh sizing Select Mesh gt Set Curve Mesh Size V and the window shown in Figure 4 18 will display The Method should be set to General Then select the curve selection icon amp and select all the curves by pressing a ensure that the mouse cursor is in display window Now enter a Maximum Size of 1 and press Apply You can see the node positions by right clicking in the Model Tree on Geometry gt Curves gt Curve Node Spacing ANSYS Tutorials Figure 4 18 Curve Mesh Size window Curve Mesh Size a Curve Mesh Parameters Methad General Select Curves amp M Maximum Size m T Number of Nodes Do o i Height oo Ratio w Width gt 4 Minimum size Maximum deviation no Advanced Bunching Bunchina law spacing 1 a Ratio 1 Spacing 2 Ratio 2 Max Space Adjust attached curves Hemesh atta
356. es Constraints and Loads Constraints Loads Solver setup setup Nastran Run Save Project Write Nastran Input File Solution and Results Solving the Problem Post Processing of Results b Launch AI Environment Launch the AI Environment from UNIX or DOS window Then File gt Change working directory ACN docu FEAHelp AI Tutorial Files Load the tetin file Frame tin and examine the parts Figure 4 201 SS A Tutorial Manual Nastran Tutorials Figure 4 201 Frame Geometr y c Geometry Editing Repair Click on is Repair Geometry icon from Geometry Tab Menubar which pops up Repair Geometry window by default Build Topology option 7 amp is highlighted Now make sure that Inherited is toggled on for New Part Name and the Tolerance is set to 0 3 as shown in Figure 4 202 and press Apply Tutorial Manual Nastran Tutorials Figure 4 202 Repair Geometry a Repair SS Geometry Hepair Surface window 2 Build Topology Tolerance 0 3 Filter by angle Feature angle 30 Filter points Filter curves Hew Part Name Inherited Create new Fart for new curves Part for new paints Build Topo Parts Selection Method l parks Part by Single curve cleanup Single Edge Tolerance 06 Split surface at T conmections
357. es Note that the index space of the larger Tutorial Manual Hexa Meshing edge and all the smaller edges must be identical the ends must meet and the same spit otherwise the relationship cannot be defined k Improving Mesh Quality To check the general quality of the block shapes use the Worst Blocks function Without toggling on the Blocks option right click in the Display Tree on Blocks gt Worst This will highlight the worst block and give its determinant in the message window Based on these results make any necessary adjustments to the blocking using particularly Split edge and Move Vertex The highlighted worst block will automatically change to a different block as you edit the blocks to improve them This is just a rough check for any badly distorted blocks Checking the mesh quality is far more important and checking the worst block can easily be skipped Compute the Pre mesh with Project faces turned ON from now on so that everything projects as in the final mesh Check the quality of the mesh using two metrics Determinant 2x2x2 and Angle Press Blocking gt Pre mesh Quality Histograms First check the determinant with a Min X value of 0 a max X value of 1 and a small Max Y height of 30 so you can see the smallest histogram bars Select the worst bar and right click to select Show if it is not already ON Use the Move Vertex and Edge Parameters to improve the blocking Recheck your changes with t
358. es in dir 3 Mumber of Cut Planes dir 3 Humber of Cut Planes in Z dir 3 Mesh Internal Region Apply ox Dismiss Cart3D Press Apply The Cart3D Mesh window appears which asks us to load the cart3D Full Mesh Press Yes Note The final mesh generated can be examined through Mesh gt Cut Plane as in the previous tutorials h Setup Flow Cart Parameters In the Cart3D Menu select Solver Click on Define solver params icon if the panel doesn t open automatically The Solver parameters window appears as shown in Figure 3 536 Cart3D Figure Solver parameters 3 536 is mem File Information ase Information il Solver Controls Mesh File SILE_c3d mesh ma arame iti Sn EE Mesh Info File SILE_c3d mesh Info ter Covergence History window Partition Information Accept Cancel Choose File Information Mesh File as MISSILE c3d mesh mg this should be the default Click on Case Information and enter the parameters as shown in Figure 3 537 Mach number 3 Angle of attack 5 side slip angle 0 5 Free Stream Density 1 0 Free Stream Sound Speed 1 0 Tutorial Manual Cart3D Figure 3 5 37 File Information Case Information Case Information Mach number 3 Solver Controls Case Boundary Conditions Anga attack Info rmati Covergence History Side slip angle 0 5 Partition Information Free Stream Density 1 0 amp Free Stream Sound
359. ese direction are automatically taken remember Cart3D assumes airflow in positive X direction So tail will be negative X direction always Note Reference Area and Reference Length can be specified for each component This can be specified by click on All Params under Reference parameter option in Figure 3 577 the window 15 shown in Figure 3 579 Tutorial Manual Cart3D Figure 3 579 Rees ns xj Reference Param Ares Window Reference Length Compute Force Compute Moment Moment about Point Moment about Line Point Point Apply Dismiss For this case Force and Moment are only calculated for the Bomb component Click on Family Params under Reference parameters as seen in Figure 3 577 The Clic Reference family Params window opens as shown in Figure 3 580 Figure Clic Reference family Params 3 580 Clic Family Reference Area Reference Length Moment Point Moment Line pt Moment Line Refere ins Params window nog fo75 0 400 Apply Dismiss For the BOMB component specify Reference Area 0 008 and Reference Length 0 75 The Moment Point is specified at the center of mass at 1 0 0 4 0 0 Note Use Floating points instead of integer 1 0 instead of 1 Specify Moment point as 1 0 0 4 0 0 Tutorial Manual Cart3D Enable Force and Moment for BOMB then click on Apply and Dismiss Click Apply in the Post Process Soluti
360. esh Already Exists in this File how do you wish to proceed Tutorial Manual Advanced Meshing Tutorials Figure 3 360 selectio x2 n ee window My Recent Documents Documents T m Computer amp Network Flaces File name Files of type Figure 3 361 Tetra Mesh before Merging mesh uns Eetramesh1 ums File Look in hybrid tube t c BB Mesh Files Multiblack Canc T Du CTS TEES j LN Pee ee SET M PISIS ie ee ee eee ee ete LL EDI ENS LER te Sal sd E VL ES REL Tutorial Manual Advanced Meshing Tutorials Before merging turn on CYLI CYL2 and INTERFACEI The surface mesh at the INTERFACE will look as shown in Figure 3 361 Select Edit Mesh gt Merge Node gt au A window will open as shown in Figure 3 362 select merge volume meshes and press merge surface mesh parts Figure 3 362 Merge Modes Gil Merge meshes Window E Merge Type AI Merge Meshes Method Merge valume meshes C Resolve refinements Menge surface mesh parts is PE Frozen valume mesh parts is MEER Apply ok Dismiss A selection window will appear as shown in Figure 3 363 Select INTER
361. esh Region During the process of finding the bounding surfaces to close the volume mesh the mesher will determine if there are holes in the model If there are the messages window will display a message like Material point ORFN can reach material point LIVE You will be prompted with a dialog box saying Your geometry has a hole do you want to repair it A jagged line will display the leakage path from the ORFN part to the LIVE part The cells surrounding the hole will also be displayed To repair the hole select the single edges bounding it and the mesher will loft a surface mesh to close the hole Further holes would be flagged and repaired in the same manner If there are many problem areas it may be better to repair the geometry or adjust the meshing parameters 2 2 6 Run Tetra The Octree Approach Tetra s mesh generation is based on the following spatial subdivision algorithm This algorithm ensures refinement of the mesh where necessary but maintains larger cells where possible allowing for faster computation Once the root tetrahedron which encloses the entire geometry has been initialized Tetra subdivides the root tetra hedron until all cell size requirements are met ANSYS CFD Al Environment 10 0 User Manual SAS IP Inc 2 5 Chapter 2 Tetra Figure 2 4 Geometry Input to Tetra At this point the Tetra mesher balances the mesh so that cells sharing an edge or face do not differ in size by more than a
362. esh Smoother In smoothing the mesh the tetrahedral smoother calculates individual element quality based on the selected criterion Referring then to the user specified element quality lower bound the smoother modifies all elements below this quality criterion nodes are moved and merged edges swapped and in some cases elements are deleted This operation 15 then repeated on the improved grid up to the specified number of iterations To exclude particular parts from the smoothing ICEM CFD offers the utility to smooth the mesh only on visible parts Also the user can smooth only specific element without affecting the others Tetrahedral Mesh Coarsener The mesh coarsener allows the element count to be decreased while still capturing the major features of the geometry Users can choose to freeze surface elements during the coarsening process If the mesh has multiple material domains and the user does not want to coarsen some of them he she can exclude individual material domains by specifying them in the frozen parts option If the size checks option is used during coarsening the resulting mesh does satisfy the selected mesh size criteria on all of the geometric entities Furthermore Tetra includes a complete set of projection and smoothing tools as well as tools for element creation deletion and splitting swapping and uniform enforcement of orientation Triangular Surface Mesh Smoother The triangular surface mesh
363. ethod Single m Vertex Ts Movement Constraints Fin p ses 52 v Fix direction Vechor 11 0 x Normal ta Surf Move dependent Apply ox Dismiss Select the Direction highlighted as shown in Figure 3 312 Tutorial Manual Advanced Meshing Tutorials Figure 3 312 Move Vertex Fix Directio n Option FOINTS 82 FOINTS B1 Place the vertex 34 closers to vertex 13 as shown Figure 3 313 so that all the Blocks are of Good Quality Figure 3 313 Blocking after vertices placements PINTS PO THTS 14 Tutorial Manual Advanced Meshing Tutorials f Resolving Other Grids The user will do Copy Rotate to resolve other Triangular portion of the grid However since it copies all the associations too it s better to first remove all the associations Blocking gt Association qi Disassociate from A Dissaccosiate window appears as shown in Figure 3 314 Tutorial Manual Advanced Meshing Tutorials Figure 3 314 Disassociation Window Blocking Gil Associations E dit Associations Beer AUS x o8 Vetices 11 33 19 13 34 2 Edges 4113 13411 93 1 AS Faces in 331324932 AS Keep surface mesh Surface mesh Part Closest Selected Select all the Edges Faces and Vertex and Press Apply Go To Blocking gt Transform Block e Rotate Block 9 A new window will open as shown in Figure 3
364. ew part in the model tree as shown in Figure 3 96 Figure 3 96 Part CYL1 added in display tree similarly create new parts for the smaller semi cylinder CYL2 cylinder ends INL and OUT and symmetry planes SYM as shown in Figure 3 97 When in continuation mode after pressing the middle mouse button or Apply you can simply type in a new Part name and continue to select the surface s without having to re invoke the function Tutorial Manual Hexa Meshing Figure 3 97 The 3DPipeJun ct geometry and its Surface Parts Now turn off Toggle selection of surfaces and turn on Toggle selection of curves amp in the toolbar as shown in Figure 3 98 Figure 3 98 Curve selection Select geometry Tutorial Manual Hexa Meshing Type in CURVE for the Part name and select all curves Either type for all icon in the toolbar for all visible or click and drag a box selection For and v selection options you don t need to hit the middle mouse button or Apply to complete the operation Similarly put all points in a POINT part Turn off Toggle points te Type for all or select X in the toolbar as shown in Figure 3 99 selection of curves and turn on Toggle selection of Figure 3 99 Geometry Part Point or Node Selection Select geometry oe EEE e Creating a Material point Select Geometry gt Create Body 7 from the geometry tab
365. except PART 1002 in the Model Tree Tutorial Manual Nastran Tutorials Note Make sure that Points and Curves are switched On in the Model Tree PART 1002 and PART 1004 As explained for Spot weld between PART 1001 and PART 1004 repeat all the steps for Spot weld between PART 1002 and PART 1004 While creating Points for PART 1002 please make sure that PART 1002 is selected for Part in Create Point window and the Name should start from PART 1002 0 as shown in Figure 4 209 Figure 4 209 PART 1002 Point Creation Create Point Window Part 1002 ng XYZ v m Points method M M points 3 part 1002 381643 A Apply ox Dismiss Select each of the four curves as explained for Part 1001 Tutorial Manual Nastran Tutorials The 12 Points corresponding to Part 1002 as shown in Figure 4 210 Figure 4 210 12 points created on all four curves of PART 1002 The target weld parts here would be PART 1002 and PART 1004 and the Points selected are shown in Figure 4 210 Spot Weld Name SPOT POINTS It will appear by default Source Points Select all the 12 points created as shown in Figure 4 210 Target Parts Select PART 1002 and PART 1004 Connector Part Name SPOT WELD It will appear by default Max Projection 5 Weld Type Point to Point It will appear by default Element Splitting Remesh area Tri Quad It will appear by defau
366. eze Float 3 QUAD 4 C Smooth Parts Subsets Method parts Refresh Histogram Advanced Options Laplace smoothing Not just worst 1 Allow node merging Allow refinement Group bad hex regions Ignore PrePoints Surface Fitting Prism V arpage Ratio 05 Violate geometry Tolerance 01 Relative Tolerance Minimum Edge Length Apply wk Dismiss Nastran Tutorials After it completes the smoothing it will replot the histogram again as shown in Figure 4 223 Figure 4 223 Histogram 2d After 18 TTTT Smoothing 12 Min 0 310554 b 0 18 0 26 0 34 0 43 0 51 059 0 67 0 75 0 84 0 92 1 Now 1f there is no elements below 0 2 Quality then proceed further to define Material properties otherwise again smooth for some more iteration till no element lies below 0 2 Quality Finally Right Mouse Click within Histogram window and select Done to close the Histogram window g Material and Element Properties Material for this model is STEEL So the properties like Young s modulus Poisson s ratio and Density should be defined This problem is modeled by shell elements so properties like thickness of the shell elements needs to be defined Selection of Material Select F Create Material Property icon from Properties Tab Menu bar Define the Material Name as STEEL Material ID can be left as 1 Defi
367. fined Post Processing Tutorials Density pHpBPHn e J amp amp m e Drag the line with the left The Streamlines would appear in the graphics window as shown in Figure 3 670 This will update the Streams branch of the Display Tree If desired from Group 2 in the model tree switch to various display options Tutorial Manual Post Processing Tutorials Figure 3 670 Streamlines based 2D option e Animating the Streamlines Select the Animatation Controller icon from the post processing menu This will bring out the following selection windows as shown in the figure below Figure 3 671 m Tutorial Manual Figure 3 671 All in one Animation Controller window Post Processing Tutorials Animation Controller z b 44 0 000 with Steps cles fo e speedi ms WO Auto qgenerating Images Encode MPEG file Animate all streams spray per steps 0 bubble size 1 tall length s n time scale median 85 7 Apply Dismiss Select the option Animate All Streams on the controller panel Set bubble size to 0 5 Press Apply On the top of Animation Controller click on play button Now bubbles begin moving along the streams Figure 3 672 Tutorial Manual Post Processing Tutorials The smoothness of the animation can be controlled by Steps parameter and the speed per step c
368. finin 0 gt Material Number 0 DL CYL2 TMO Delete Copy INL SSO LIVE Maternal property v Create new Paste OUT FRU SYMM_CHO SYMM_IDO Hodes Mised unknown Accept Cancel Now from the Selection window select Mixed unknown gt INL gt Create new as shown in the following Figure 3 625 Tutorial Manual Output to Solvers Figure 3 625 Defining INL family type L TL1 550 INL PH INL SSO LIVE v Create new SMM CAO IDU INL Create new Paste 5T MM 41 Accept Cancel Tutorial Manual Output to Solvers This will open up the bc selection window where select the BC type as Inlet as shown in Figure 3 626 Selection Choose Inlet as the BC type for INL Select a BC type family inlet ali Boundary condition Baffle Cyclic Inlet Outlet Pressure Symmetry Wall ICTID number ILTID Okay Cancel Press Okay to close this window Back in the Family boundary conditions window set values to the boundary condition as shown in Figure 3 627 and then press Accept Tutorial Manual Figure 3 627 Edit the boundary condition values Output to Solvers Inlet U velocity V velocity velocity KE ar Turbulence Intensity EFS or Length Temperature Delete Copy Before continuing select File gt Save Project to confir
369. fost Solver Controls mE Informat Boundary Conditions bs z d attac ion Covergence History side slip angle o o window Partition Information Free Stream Density 1 0 Free Stream Sound Speed r a Accept Cancel 4 Expand Solver Controls Runge Kutta Scheme in the Display Tree widget as shown in Figure 3 503 and accept the default settings Tutorial Manual Cart3D Figur Solver parameters File Information Runge Kutta Scheme 3 503 Case Information Number of stages 5 Solver Controls Rung Runge Kutta Scheme Stagel coefficent 0 0695 e Uther controls Eval Gradient 1 Kutta ais PEL Stages coefficent 0 1602 History Sche Partition Information Eval Gradient 0 stages coefficent 0 2898 windo E val Gradient 0 Staged caefficent 0 5060 Eval Gradient 0 Stages coefficent 1 0 Eyal Gradient o Accept Cancel 5 In Other controls specify the following values for the parameters as shown in Figure 3 504 CFL number 1 4 Limiter Ventat s Limiter Flux function van Leer Cut Cell BCtype Agglomerated Normals Number of Multi Grid levels 3 MultiGrid cycletype W cycle Number of pre smoothing passes 1 Number of post smoothing passes 1 Tutorial Manual Cart3D Figur Solver parameters e File Information Other controls 3 504 Case Information 1 4 Solver Controls eo Other Runge Kutta Scheme imiter
370. future or modify the file and save for further usage 4 4 Define Table Here user can create different tables by specifying the values for x and y and user can even visualize the graph 4 5 Define Point Element Although the user has created the mesh user has to apply the material created to the respected elements Allows user to define point element user have to specify Mass type and scalar Mass 4 6 Define Line Element This option allows the user to select a part and Specify the material which is already and property identification number cross section Area and moment of inertia 4 7 Define Shell Element This option allows the user to select a part and specify the property identification number material thickness etc 4 8 Define Volume Element This option allows the user to select a part and specify the material property identification number etc ANSYS ICEM CFD Al Environment 10 0 User Manual SAS IP Inc 4 2 Chapter 5 Constraints Here user can define the constraints on deferent entities like point curve surface subset amp other options like Contact definition Velocity and Rigid Wall 5 1 Displacement on Point This option allows the user to apply the constraint on point in directional displacement Translation can be con strained in all the three directions by clicking in the checkbox displacement values can be specified and similarly Rotational displacement 5 2 Displacement on Curve
371. g Figure 3 79 Vertices To Be Selected Edge to be Selected Edge and Reference ro Vertices Selection t Note that the bottom vertices are adjusted to line up with those at the top By selecting one of the top vertices e g 5 2 1 all 7 2 vertices will be fixed and all other visible vertices will be adjusted Also note Move in plane gt XZ is automatically toggled on By selecting a J edge the program assumes the alignment to be along Y of the active coordinate system so only the X and Z in this case Z 1s undefined coordinates will be adjusted Select Index control gt Reset to turn on all blocks In the model tree turn on Points and turn off Vertices Vertex positions can also be adjusted by setting location of coordinates In this case we ll line up one of the vertices near the front bumper Select Move Vertex gt Set location d and select a reference point PNTS 3 as shown in Figure 3 81 The coordinates will appear in the Modify fields within the Move Vertex panel Toggle on Modify Y only Towards the bottom of the panel select Vertices to Set gt Select vert s and select the vertex corresponding to 0 as shown in Figure 3 80 Then Apply Hexa Meshing Figure 3 80 A MN Using Set EM oOo n location to align Spaa Vertices p 7 ens 15 876214 oo 5 ANION D100 Tutorial Manual Hexa Meshin
372. g Figure 3 81 Hove Verlices Setting the Vertex Location Hove Verlices Set Location Method 5 et Position m Heference From C Vertex Screen Ref Location PNTS 3 Set Coordinate system Cartesian Madify gt s 1231 74 Madii Y 432 79 Modit Z 7 o Modify Normal Mormal to Set Appl wk Dismiss The vertex will line up with the other one based on the y coordinate as shown in Figure 3 82 Tutorial Manual Figure 3 82 After Performing The Set Location the Vertex will line up Hexa Meshing _ PATS 2 purty LN b Pares NTS k Meshing with Curve Parameters Currently there is one node on the end of each edge so the number of elements is equal to the number of blocks As in the previous tutorial appropriate node distributions for the edges must be made Select Mesh gt Set Curve Mesh Size set Maximum Size to 25 Select curve s amp and either type Shift P or select the x Select items Part icon from the Select geometry toolbar Figure 3 83 In the Select part window turn on CAR and Accept Tutorial Manual Hexa Meshing Figure 3 83 Select Part Car aerate From screen Accept Cancel D Back in the Curve Mesh Size panel set Maximum Size to 25 and Apply Repeat this procedure but toggle on INLET OUTLET TOP and GROUND set Maximum Size to 500 and Apply Select Blocking gt Pr
373. g Quality described in Section 2 6 Histogram Window Different criteria such as determinant angle and warpage can be checked and displayed Delete Blocks One of the main functions in the top down approach After splitting blocks some may need to be discarded by Blocking gt Delete Block By default these deleted blocks are actually moved to the VOREN part Vorfn Blocks The VOREN part is a default part that 1s automatically created when blocking is first initialized The initial block will actually consist of 27 blocks a 3x3x3 arrangement in I J K index directions Since VORFN is turned off by default only the central block will be displayed and activated within the designated part If Delete permanently within Delete Blocks is turned on selected blocks will be removed not just moved to the VORFN The VOREN blocks will then be reconfigured in a radial o grid manner instead of the initial Cartesian arrangement Other Functions Besides the main functions listed above many other tools are available for building and fine tuning the blocking topology Create blocks Besides initializing Create Block allows the user to build blocks by selecting existing vertices and or screen locations Blocks can also be built by extruding from existing block faces Besides regular hex blocks degenerate wedge blocks unstructured and swept blocks can be created Swept blocks 3D and unstructured blocks 2D will allow you to h
374. g 2 Associations E dit Associations hd Reset Associations Vertices Edges Faces Apply I ox Dismiss To resolve the HUB accurately the user needs to associate the edges lying on top of curves CURVES 31 CURVES 36 CURVES 28 and CURVES 34 using Association gt Associate Edge to Curve Tutorial Manual Advanced Meshing Tutorials Note Associate the edge to their respective Curves as mush possible Associate all the circumferential edges to their respective curves wherever the curve exists similarly associate the vertex to its nearest point whereever possible Switch Points The Blocking should look like Figure 3 333 Figure 3 333 Tutorial Manual Blocking after associations and vertices placement Advanced Meshing Tutorials D Resolving zero thickness walls Select Associate E Face to uns For Method select Part A new window will open as shown in Figure 3 334 ud Figure 3 334 Blocking Project face window Associalions Edit Associations CI du Associate Face gt Surface Method C Closest nterpalate C Shared wall Faces 6 Surface part is P It would be good to reduce the clutter of the Block display before selecting the faces Use Index Control to change to Tutorial Manual Advanced Meshing Tutorials 0 3 1 1 K 2 3 04 0 0 5 0 3 6 0 0 O7 0 1 and O8 0
375. g the Project starting Blocking Tutorial Manual Hexa Meshing Splitting the Blocking around Fuselage Splitting the Blocking around Wing Assigning the Material Fitting the blocking to the fuselage and wing Creating the O grid around the block Setting Mesh Parameters with Linked bunching Improving Mesh Quality b Geometry and Blocking Strategy For this model the user will execute blocking methods by employing functions such as Split Set location and O grid The main fuselage and wing will be modeled by simple blocks An O grid will be added around the entire body near the end in order to improve element quality and allow grid lines to be aligned normal to the surfaces in order to set a fine boundary layer distribution c Starting the Project Start ANSYS ICEMCFD Select File gt Change working directory and change the current working directory to ACN docu CFDHelp CFD Tutorial Files WingB ody Open geometry tin by selecting File gt geometry gt Open geometry Hexa Meshing Figure 3 196 The Wing Body Far field Surface parts T TA i X 777 z ud SIDE 1 T We CROUND 1 Figure 3 197 oo Curves and MU _ aR points on the ud pem D Pd fuselage and o ORES 1 POINTS 16 ma 1 5 Wing 32 20751 C i ai 5 Ns er Ami eA Nue 17 SCORERS
376. grid Block panel as in Figure 3 114 Tutorial Manual Figure 3 114 Creating an O grid Hexa Meshing Split Block ay Block ae S Select Black s a Select Edge s AS Select Face s Around block s Offset 1 Absolute Select Apply ok Dismiss First Select Block s T and either type for all visible or drag a box to select all the blocks Note for all is not available for blocking Then select faces representing all planar geometry INL SYM and OUT Select Face s and select the face icons as shown in Figure 3 115 If there 1s difficulty in seeing the face icon one can select a face or block for that matter selecting Select diagonal Tutorial Manual Figure 3 115 Selected Blocks and Faces Hexa Meshing corner vertices from the Select blocks toolbar or typing Shft D on the keyboard This will allow you to select two diagonally opposing corners that make up the face Use the default Offset and Apply An o grid structure will be created as in Figure 3 116 Note the o grid passing through the selected faces Radial blocks are only adjacent to the cylinder surfaces Hexa Meshing Figure 3 116 The blocking with O grid structure E T 1 a 1 L 2 r a EA A To re size the o grid after it s been created select Edit Block e Modify
377. gure 3 235 create and add the appropriate surfaces to the Parts INL OUT CYL2 and SYM Figure 3 237 Create Part 2 Create part window Part INL Create Part 4086 Create Part by Selection Entities E Adjust Geometry Names Apply cock Dismiss To create Parts for the surfaces right click on Parts Create Part Create Part by Selection iis The Create Part window is shown in Figure 3 237 Enter the part name INL and select the appropriate surface with the left mouse button Accept the selection with the middle mouse button Similarly create the OUT SYM 3 surfaces CYLI and CYL2 Parts Select Dismiss when finished Create a Part called CUR and all of the curves to it Tetra Meshing Note To change the part names of curves Right click on Parts gt Create part Make only Curves visible from the Display Tree widget Use Create Part by Selection and make sure Curves are selectable from the Select geometry pop up window Box select the entire model with a left click and drag rather than individually selecting the curve entities All of the points that compose the geometry will be placed in the part PTS Note To change the part names of points Right click on Parts gt Create part Make only Points visible from the Display Tree widget Use Create Part by Selection and make sure Points are selectable from the Select geometry pop up window Once in selection mode press v
378. h Badius Body o0 a Lenght x 120 Starting Mesh Divisions 5 85 Mum of Cell Refinements 11 E Compute Parameters Finest Cell Dimensions 0 983 0 953 x 0 983 Hesh Creation Preview Mesh Only 7 Create and Save Full Mesh Humber of Multi grid levels 5 Outer Bounding Box Minimum Diagonal Paint 3924 577232 Ww asximum Diagonal Paint 41 20 357338 Ww Define Surface Family Refinement Define All Surface Refinement Number of Buffer Layers 4 E Angle Threshold for 20 Refinement Area Weight Normals CE Humber af Cut Planes in X dir 3 4 Number of Cut Planes in Y dir 3 F Mumber of Cut Planes in dir 3 a Mesh Internal Region Apply Dismiss This will create 4 density polygons for mesh density control which can be viewed in the Display Tree widget by switching on the Geometry gt Densities Tutorial Manual Cart3D This also computes the finest cell size 0 983 x 0 983 x 0 983 Varying the starting mesh division and or Max number of cell refinements can vary the finest cell size The diagonal points displayed under the Outer Bounding Box are the Minimum and Maximum points of the bounding box Mesh region refer to Figure 3 465 They can be changed if desired Set the Angle Threshold for Refinement to 5 as shown in Figure 3 466 Cart3D Figure 3 466 Lart3D Mesher a Change gt Angle of Cart
379. h OFF Edges gt Bunching in the Display Tree Switch ON Blocking gt Pre Mesh in the Display Tree If you right click on Blocking gt Pre mesh you should see Project Faces checked ON by default Choose Yes when asked to recompute the mesh Switch OFF Geometry Vertices and Edges in the Display Tree Turn off the SOLID volume part name from the Display Tree and right click in the Display Tree to turn on Blocking Hexa Meshing gt Pre mesh gt Solid amp Wire if it is not already on See Figure 3 161 Figure 3 161 The final mesh displayed in Solid amp Wire s Checking mesh quality for determinants and angle To check the mesh quality select Blocking gt Pre mesh Quality Histogram Ihe window shown in the Figure 3 162 will open Select the criterion as Determinant 3x3x3 and enter the Min X value 0 Max X value 1 Max y height 12 and Num of bars 20 Press Apply The histogram shown in Figure 3 162 will display at the lower right A value of determinant greater than 0 2 is acceptable for most commercial solvers Tutorial Manual Hexa Meshing Figure 3 162 Pre Mesh Quality Pre mesh quality A A window while selecting Cntenon IDeterminant 2x2x Determinant 2x2x2 Figure 3 163 Histogram showing Determina nt 2x2x2 Histogram Options value 0 7 value height DENEN Hum at bars 5 Apply Diemiss
380. he 1 column 15 automatically turned on in the window Continue to select and toggle back and forth through the other planes as well Press Done to exit the Scan Plane functions Check Pre Mesh Quality Q and once satisfied convert to unstructured mesh Right mouse select Pre Mesh and select Convert to Unstruct Mesh Save the project within the File menu This will save the tetin unstructured mesh blocking and project settings files all beginning with the project name Exit or continue on with the next tutorial Hexa Meshing 3 2 6 Pipe Blade Overview This tutorial example uses the Collapse function to create a degenerate topology in a Conjugate Heat transfer problem around a blade located in the center of a cylindrical pipe a Summary of Steps The Blocking Strategy Starting the Project Creating Parts in the Mesh Editor starting Blocking Using Prescribed Points to Fit the Blocking Splitting the Topology Using Prescribed Points Collapsing Blocks to Represent the Blade Material Edge to Curve Association on the Blade Moving the Vertices Tutorial Manual Hexa Meshing Generating the O grid Defining Surface Parameters for the Mesh Defining Edge Parameters to Adjust the Mesh Checking mesh quality for determinants and angle saving before Quitting b The Blocking Strategy In this lesson the blade is regarded as a Solid region while the region surrounding the blade is regarded as the Fluid region
381. he Determinant check Figure 3 222 E Find the worst block and fix it first Hexa Meshing A change of bunching can be accomplished using Blocking gt Pre mesh params gt Edge params PN You can recompute the mesh by toggling the Pre mesh OFF then ON again or go straight to the determinant check and it will recognize the change and ask to recompute the mesh Try to improve the Determinant to greater than 0 3 After this try to improve the Angle to better than 18 degrees When you are satisfied with the mesh distributions and element quality save the replay file and blocking and write out the mesh Select Save from the Replay Control window then Done after you save the file save the blocking using File gt Blocking gt Save Blocking Write out the mesh by right clicking in the Display Tree on Pre mesh gt Convert to Unstruct Mesh Tutorial Manual Hexa Meshing Appendix 276 3 3 Hexa Meshing Appendix ICEM CFD Hexa has emerged as the quickest and most comprehensive software for generating large highly accurate 3D geometry based hexahedral meshes Now in the latest version of ICEM CFD it 15 also possible to generate 3D surface meshes with the same speed and flexibility 3 3 1 The Most Important Features of Blocking e CAD and projection based hexahedral mesh generation e Easy manipulation of the 3D object based topology model e Modern GUI and software architecture w
382. he STL data into a triangular surface mesh From the File selection window choose the geometry stl file and press Open When the import is complete the extracted surface will be displayed in its Simple form Figure 3 275 Detailed display of the surface In the Display Tree widget Select Surfaces gt Show Full to see the surface Reset the display to Simple before preceding to speed up the display Tutorial Manual Tetra Meshing Appendix c Extracting the Curve At this point the geometry is defined by only one surface in one part In order to proceed the user need to extract the curves from the surface and rename all of the entities Select Geometry gt Create Modify Curve X gt Extract curves from VM Click on e select surfaces option for surfaces and Select the surface with the left mouse button Complete the selection by pressing the middle mouse button Enter 45 as the Angle for Faceted surface and 1 as the Min number of segments and enter Both under Which curve segments as seen in Figure 3 276 Tetra Meshing Appendix Figure 3 276 Create Modify Curve ca Settings for extracting curve E Part LURYES m Mame CURVES D0 NEST wires Extract Curves from Surfaces Surfaces ia Angle far faceted surfaces number of segments Which curve segments Boh 7 Apply ok Dismiss Press Apply to perform the extraction
383. he applied load This can be done as follows Constraints ANSYS Tutorials Click on the Constraints gt Displacement on Surface button which opens the Create Displacement on Surface window as presented in Figure 4 56 Now use the hot key to display geometry in the front view We will fix all displacements and rotations on the bottom surface of this model Turn OFF all Geometry entities in the Model Tree This will allow you to select mesh Next to Name enter FIX Select the surface selection icon e for mesh or geometry Then make sure you are using the entire selection method by using the p hotkey or changing to c in the selection window Box select the surface elements at the bottom as shown in Figure 4 57 Toggle ON all options of X Y and Z for the Directional displacement Press Apply The constraint applied 15 shown in Figure 4 57 Switched OFF the Displacements from the Model Tree after the constraint has been applied Figure 4 56 Create Displacement on Surface window ANSYS Tutorials Create Displacement on g wy ole FIX spcset i LES Global SPC Type Constraint with Enforce gt curmaces uns sel n 43 Doe Directional Displacement u I p I m I Rotational Displacement RoTx 0 m re 0 SU 0 Tutorial Manual ANSYS Tutorials Figure 4 57 Constraint Display PN me SRG m A
384. he default File name for CFX file as shown in Figure 5 66 and press Save Select ASCII and when asked for the scaling factor use the default 1 0 1 0 1 0 to complete the translation ANSYS ICEMCFD CFX Tutorials Figure 5 66 ax Output to Gbu s efr ER CFX window z i BluntBadv Fbc E _ Recent BluntBody prj Documents E BluntBady tin BluntBady uns BluntBody uns bak Desktop prism uns E prism cmuadt lag tetra cmuad loq E tetra _cmd1 log E tetra cmdez log tetra mesh uns hy Documents Computer Network File name Blunt ody meh Save save type Files 4 L ancel Continuing with the Blunt Body Tutorial As described in Tutorial 1 the user can continue CFX 5 Flow Around a Blunt Body Tutorial from the section Defining the Simulation in CFX Pre Tutorial Manual ANSYS ICEMCFD CFX Tutorials 5 4 Heating Coil 5 4 1 Overview This tutorial covers geometry import and meshing for Heating Coil geometry using ANSYS ICEMCFD CFX It is intended to be compatible with CFX 5 Tutorial 14 Conjugate Heat Transfer in a Heating Coil This tutorial would effectively replace the section entitled Creating the Model in CFX Build After completing this tutorial the user could complete the remaining as sections of the CFX 5 Heating Coil tutorial picking up with Defi
385. he finest cell size 0 104 x 0 104 x 0 104 Varying the Starting Mesh Divisions and or Max Num of Cell Refinements can vary this The diagonal points displayed under Outer Bonding Box are the maximum and minimum points of the mesh region Leave the Angle for Threshold Refinement 20 Specify Minimum Diagonal Point as 0 402 0 251 0 401 and Maximum Diagonal Point as 0 2 0 25 0 5 as shown in Figure 3 584 Click Apply to run the mesher This will create a domain file with 6 Cut Planes Quad Elements Cart3D Figure 3 584 Lart3D Mesher E Maximum Minimum Cart3D files prefix Diagonal Point Iw Single Component w Fix Normals Nominal Mesh A adius Body n 3 E E Starting Mesh Divisions 10 214 Num of Cell Refinements 7 E Compute Parameters Finest Cell Dimensions 0 104 s 0 104 0 104 Mesh Creation f Preview Mesh Only 7 Create and Save Full Mesh Number of Multi grid levels 5 Outer Bounding Box Mininun Diagonal Paint 0 402 0 251 0 401 SE Maximum Diagonal Point 0 2 0 25 0 5 Define Surface Family Refinement Defne All Surface Refinement Number of Buffer Layers 4 Angle Threshold for Hefinement Area weight Normals DNE Humber of Cut Planes in dir 3 Number of Cut Planes in Y dir 3 d Number of Cut Planes in dir 3 Hd Mesh Internal Region Apply Dismiss
386. he names of the surfaces select Surfaces gt Show Surface Names in the Display Tree window using the right mouse button The geometry should resemble Figure 3 21 with the Points and Curves OFF Figure 3 21 Geometry after revolution Tutorial Manual Geometry Creation A SPHERE 1 i i j i LL T CUBEESA S V UI 1 86 CUBE 1 S8 gt 4 T j GUBE 1 S3 CUBE 1 s4 X Point Creation x Geometry gt Create Point gt Parameter along a Curve Select Parameter along a curve to open the window as seen in Figure 3 22 For a clearer view the user can turn OFF Surfaces in the Display Tree and make sure that Curves and Points are ON Tutorial Manual Geometry Creation Figure 3 22 Point Parameter Create Point 9 on curve window Part POINTS IFOINTS 4 Points method Pararn eters Parameter s 0 25 Curve CURvES 55 Enter the Part as POINTS And enter the Name as POINTS 4 Then select the curve CURVES 0 Enter Curve Parameter 0 25 and press Apply to create POINTS 4 Then change the parameter to 0 75 and press Apply again to create POINTS 5 Next select the curve CURVE 1 You will need to turn off the part SPHERE in the Display Tree to be able to select CURVE 1 Also turn OFF Points gt Show Point Names in the Display Tree to be able to see the
387. he smoother Tutorial Manual Tetra Meshing Figure 3 249 The Quality histogram before smoothing Min 1 75594e 005 Mas 0 997167 The improvements are noticeable in the histogram seen in Figure 3 250 There is no element below the quality of 0 2 Note that only element types set to Smooth are included in the histogram Figure 24 3 250 The 18 Min 28 42 Quality Max 0 997167 12 after smoothing 0 01 02 03 04 05 06 OF 08 09 1 Now set PENTA 6 back to Smooth to allow the prisms to adjust as well So as not to modify them drastically set Smoothing iterations to 5 and Up to quality to 0 2 as in Figure 3 251 Select Apply to do the final smoothing Tutorial Manual Tetra Meshing Figure 3 251 Smooth Elements ral Smooth elements globally Globally window Quality Smoothing iterations 5 E Up to quality 02 Criterion Quality Smooth Mesh Type Smooth Freeze Float TETRA 4 6 C 3 C QUAD_4 Smooth Parts Subsets Method All parts D Saving the project Save the mesh by selecting File gt Save Project If a question box pops up to delete disconnected vertices respond by saying Yes Close the project by selecting File gt Close Project Tutorial Manual Tetra Meshing 3 4 4 Fin Configuration Overview In this tutorial example the user will generate and smooth a combined
388. hed to improve the overall block mesh quality either in a certain region or for the entire model The block topology may be smoothed to improve the block shape prior to mesh generation This reduces the time required for development of the block topology model The geometry and its associative faces edges and points are all constraints when smoothing the block topology model Once the block topology smoothing has been performed the user may smooth the mesh after specifying the proper edge bunching parameters The criteria for smoothing are Determinant This criteria attempts to improve the cell s determinant by movement of nodes which are subject to geometry and association constraints Laplace The Laplace option attempts to minimize abrupt changes in the mesh lines by moving the nodes Warp The Warp method is based upon cor recting the worst angle between two cells the mesh Quality Like the determinant criteria the Quality criteria attempts to improve the cell s interior angle by repositioning the nodes which are subject to geometry and as sociation constraints Orthogonality The Orthogonality option attempts to provide orthogonal mesh lines at all boundaries of the model Skewness The Skewness is defined differently for volume and surface cells For a volume cell this value is obtained by taking all pairs of adjacent faces and computing the normals The maximum ANSYS CFD Al Environment 10 0 User Manual SAS IP Inc 3 7
389. hell Thickness to visualize the shell thickness as in Figure 4 98 Tutorial Manual LS Dyna Tutorials oe c Save Project Create New Folder rename it and enter a project name e g Frame Dyna and Save from the window as shown in Figure 4 99 select File gt Save Project As FRAME LSD Se ee a ana Sa e a E E Tutorial Manual LS Dyna Tutorials Along with the Frame Dyna prj project file it will also write out the Mesh file Attribute file and Parameter files Frame Dyna uns Frame Dyna fbc and Frame Dyna par respectively Figure ES 4 99 Save Project As ies Save in Frame LS5D una do tj E t As windo Documents Desktop Computer w File name Frame D vna nave Project Files d Solver Setup Write LS Dyna Input File select Solve Options gt Write View Input File 9 to get the panel shown in Figure 4 100 Tutorial Manual LS Dyna Tutorials Figure 4 100 Wirite View Input aa Write View Input File i File window Solver L5 Duna L5 Duna File Frame gt Attribute File Frame Dyna lsdyna fbc gt Parameter File Frame Dyna lsdyna par gt E dit Options Basic Advanced Volume Elements Defined 9 gt Shell Elements Defined Thickness Distribution lBCDefned Bar Elements Paint Elements Defined 8 8 gt Create
390. her name From Main menu select File gt Mesh gt Save mesh as tetra meshl uns followed by File gt Mesh gt Close Mesh d Generating the Tetra Mesh in Middle Section Select Geometry gt Transform gt Translate Geometry f Select the LIVE Body with the left mouse button Press middle mouse button to accept as shown in Figure 3 356 Figure 3 356 Live region selecte d LIVE Tutorial Manual Advanced Meshing Tutorials Enter some value in the X direction so that it is located in CYL2 and then press Apply It should be repositioned as shown in Figure 3 357 Figure 3 357 LIVE region reposition ed LIVE Go to Part gt LIVE gt Rename and Rename it as LIVEI From Main menu select File gt Save project From Main menu select Mesh Volume Meshing 9 gt From Geometry af Press Apply with the default setting the Tetra mesh will be generated in the middle region as shown in Figure 3 358 Figure 3 358 Tetra Mesh in the middle section with Solid Wire model Tutorial Manual Advanced Meshing Tutorials e Merging the Tetra Mesh between Left and Middle Section From Main menu select File gt gt Save Mesh as tetra mesh2 uns followed by File gt Mesh gt Open mesh window will appear as shown in Figure 3 359 with Merge button Press Merge A selection window will appear as shown in Figure 3 360 Figure 3 359 Mesh Exists x Window with Merge Option M
391. hing Parameters GION Edge 1334 1 Length 41 9245 Modes 27 Mesh law Bibieometric m Spacing 1 0 737033 0 797033 Spi Linked Select Reverse Rii hs 57 Spacing z 0 737033 0 797033 Sp Linked Select Reverse Rai2 5 Space 2 26663 Spacing Relative Nodes Locked Parameters locked Copy Parameters Method All Parallel Edges Copy absolute Linked bunching nel E Apply o Dismiss Similarly re select or select edge 21 38 change Nodes to 27 and Apply Tutorial Manual Hexa Meshing Toggle on Pre Mesh and recompute to view the new mesh Note This is a structured grid When the number of nodes is changed on one edge all parallel opposing edges will automatically have the same number of nodes In this case edges 41 42 and 43 44 will have the same number of nodes as 13 41 and 21 38 respectively Next we ll bias the nodes closer to the wall boundaries of the large pipe Still within the Edge Parameters menu select edge 13 41 and change the Spacing 1 and Spacing 2 to 0 5 Change Ratio and 2 to 1 2 and Apply Note Spacing 1 refers to the node spacing at the beginning of the edge and Spacing 2 refers to the spacing at the end of the edge The beginning of the edge is shown by the white arrow after the edge is selected Requested values for spacing and ratio are typed in the first col
392. hing Tutorials y The blocking after creation of second Block is shown in Figure 3 321 Figure 3 321 Blocking after creation of second block Tutorial Manual Advanced Meshing Tutorials h Step involved to achieve complete blocking Note User has to choose Blocking gt Index Control gt Reset at time to time to update the Blocking if some Blocking disappears Finally to achieve the complete 2D Blocking with the same vertex numbers as shown in Figure 3 322 the following steps need to be performed Select vertex 39 and 52 and then select two points corresponding to the position of vertex 96 and 97 as shown in Figure 3 322 Select vertex 52 51 and 97 in order and then select the point corresponding to the position of vertex 110 Select vertex 73 and 11 then select the point corresponding to the position of vertex 123 and 124 Select vertex 11 40 and 124 and then select the point corresponding to the position of vertex 139 Figure 3 322 Complete 2D Blocking Advanced Meshing Tutorials Select vertex 40 39 and 139 and then select the corresponding to the position of vertex 154 Select vertex 39 96 and 154 and then select the corresponding to the position of vertex 169 Select vertex 21 and 85 and then select the corresponding to the position of vertex 184 and 185 Select vertex 21 64 and 184 and then select the corresponding to the position of vertex 202 Select vertex 64 51 and 202 and
393. his file directly then he can do the editions and can save the edited file through this text editor Since no need to do any editing for this example just close the editor e Solution and Results Modal analysis is to be performed on this model and the results should be visualized a post processor Solving the problem Click on Q Submit Solver Run icon from the Solve Options Tab Menubar to start Nastran with Nastran Input File window given in Figure 4 274 Supply Nastran file as Hood mod dat Tutorial Manual Nastran Tutorials Toggle ON Post process and View Results and press Apply in Run Solver window Figure 4 274 Run Solver ral Run Solver window Solver NASTRAN Nastran File ood Hoad Hun Time Options Post process and View Results Apply ok Cancel Post Processing of Results After completion of Nastran run the results will be automatically loaded into the post processor Visual3p Click on Variables option in Post processing Tab menu bar In Select Nastran Variables window set Scalar Variable as Translation Total as shown in Figure 4 275 and press Apply The Translation Total distribution is shown in Figure 4 277 Nastran Tutorials Figure 4 275 Select d Select Nastran Nastran ariables Variables window oad 5ide Mode Hz 18 556 Load Category Scalar Variable Curent Translation Total 7
394. his is useful for refining the mesh in a volumetric region i Creating the density regions Select Mesh gt Create Mesh Density e A Create Density window Figure3 254 will appear Use the Points option and click on Select location s to select two points from the screen Select one point at the base of the fin centered on the leading edge and one point at the tip of the fin also centered on the leading edge See Figure 3 255 Middle click to complete the selection Set Size 0 0625 Ratio 0 and Width 4 Press Apply in the Create Density window Create a similar density at the trailing edge of the fin Tetra Meshing Figure3 254 Create density window Create Density a Size longe 00 Ratio Density Location From Points Entity bounds Points 10 0951 0 00 5 Apply cock Dismiss Figure 3 255 E x Density Creation at the Leading Edge jp Defining Parts for prisms and hexa core Select Mesh gt Set meshing Params By Parts to open the Mesh sizes for parts window Enable Prism for the LEAD PRESS SUCT TIP and Tutorial Manual Tetra Meshing TRAIL parts as in Figure 3 256 Enable Hexa Core for LIVE and set Max Size to 4 0 Select Apply and Dismiss Figure 3 256 Selecting parts for Prism and Hexa core mesh xf Part Prism Hexa Core Size Height Height Ratio Num Layers Tetra Size Ratio Min Size Deviation Int Wall Split Wal
395. hod is used so these are for solid body motion The first valid number then is 194 975 The animation done in the next step will easily show which frequencies are for solid body motion and which are for deformations Set the Scalar Variable Current to Total Translation to see the total displacements as shown in Figure 4 11 Tutorial Manual ANSYS Tutorials Figure 4 11 Gelect Select Ansys AnsysVariables Variables window Mode Load Side Mode Hz fi 94 975 Load Category Displacement Sy ee Pee p Current Translation_Total Min 0 605933 Mex 26 9377 7 Vector Variable Max 26 3377 0 Apply ok Dismiss Click on the Control all Animations icon e from the Post processing Tab menu bar Select F Animate play button Tutorial Manual ANSYS Tutorials Figure 4 12 Animation Controller 8 Animation Setup and Controller gt B b 44 0 000 with Steps a Cycles Speed ms ho Animate dynamic surfaces Animate views Rotate about line Angle dearee 350 Axis 0 1 Center 0 Animate deformation Undeformed shape Smoothly back cycle Amplifier Animate modal Undeformed shape Steps per cycle 20 Amplifier 1 9912 SS
396. ial Manual Figure 3 112 Histogram of Angle Hexa Meshing This 15 the angle between two virtual tri faces making up a quad face Reported value is the worst angle of the faces within a given element Select Blocking gt Pre mesh Quality a For the Criterion select Angle A histogram bar graph of the values will be displayed as in Figure 3 112 Select the two worst ranges bars They will be highlighted in pink Select with the right mouse button anywhere within the histogram window Make sure Show default is turned in the pull down You may wish to turn Solid off 36 fe Min 2 592 48 Max 83 1 24 0 0 g 18 27 36 45 54 63 72 H g Show Mare View the highlighted elements as in Figure 3 113 Pre Mesh should be turned off Turn on Geometry gt Curves for reference Note that most of the bad elements those with the worst angles are on the block corners This is due to the H grid nature of the mesh within a curved geometry Select Done from the pull down after right mouse selecting in the window Figure 3 113 The highlighted elements in mesh Hexa Meshing k Creating an O grid in the Blocking The best method for fixing bad angles in block corners within cylindrical geometry is to create an internal o grid which will radially propagate from a central block First turn back on Edges Surfaces and Curves 5 e gt Block 2 This will bring up O
397. ial Manual Post processing Figure 3 680 Compute Surface Flow Display LIC Mach number ND ISO NJ 007616 Tutorial Manual ANSYS Tutorials 4 FEA Tutorials 4 1 Ansys Tutorial 4 1 1 T Pipe Modal Analysis The main objective of this tutorial 1s to demonstrate legacy conversion from a Nastran model to an Ansys model It also highlights the ease of use with AI Environment in translating a model from one solver to another with little more than a flip of a switch A Nastran modal analysis data file 16 provided as input Once imported into AI Environment and the solver is changed to Ansys the shell element materials which defined for Nastran are converted to the corresponding Ansys materials The imported mesh is shown in Figure 4 1 ANSYS Tutorials Figu 4 1 Ta Pipe mod el a Summary of Steps Data Editing Launch AIl Environment and import an existing Nastran data file Verification of imported data Save project Tutorial Manual ANSYS Tutorials Solver setup setup Ansys Run setting Solver Parameters Write Ansys Input File Solution and Results solving the problem Visualization of Results b Data Editing This tutorial continues on from the Nastran Tpipe dat file created in the T Pipe Tutorial For those who have not done the Tpipe tutorial the required Nastran file Tpipe dat is provided in the AI Tutorial Files d
398. ial Manual Hexa Meshing Figure 3 44 Split Method Relative split Block e Split Block Block Select Al Visible Selected Block aS Edge 11 13 1 S Project vertices Split Method Split Method Relative Parameter fo H Apply ox Dismiss This horizontal split is shown in Figure 3 45 Tutorial Manual Figure 3 45 Display of the curves and LIVE block after making three splits Hexa Meshing e Discard Blocks The next step in this top down approach is to remove or discard the unneeded blocks Select Blocking gt Delete Blocks X Delete Block Blocks Y A Delete permanently Apply Dismiss Tutorial Manual Hexa Meshing select blocks as shown in Figure 3 46and press the middle mouse button or Apply Figure 1 3 46 Select blocks to delete 14 J Note Deleted blocks with Delete Permanent turned off default are actually put into the VORFN part a default dead zone that is usually deactivated The geometry and blocking of the model should now resemble that shown in Figure 3 47 Tutorial Manual Hexa Meshing Figure e 3 47 Final T Shape Topolo gy f Associating to Geometry The edges of the blocking will now be associated to the curves of the CAD geometry First select the edges then the curves to which you want to associate the edges If two or more curves are selected per operation those curves will
399. ick All Params in the Post Process Solution window In the Reference All Params window specify Reference Area as 1 1589 Reference Length as 1 Enable Compute Force and Compute Moment Set Moment about Point 0 5 0 0 Point1 5 0 0 and Point2 1 125 0 I Click Apply in the Reference All Params window and then Dismiss to close as shown in Figure 3 489 Cart3D Figure 3 489 Reference All Params Window 1 1583 Reference Length 1 Compute Force Compute Moment Moment about Point 05 Moment about Line Point 0 5 Point 1 1 zh 1 Apply Dismiss Press Apply in the Post Process Solution window The results appear in the GUI messages area g Visualizing the results FlowCart writes three output files 1 WINGI c3d 1 triq Contains Pressure Velocity and Density extrapolated to the Surface triangles This can be converted to a domain file by Edit gt Cart3D Tri File gt Domain file The default resultant domain file will be WINGI c3d uns SlicePlanes dom Cut Plane results 111 results dom Full mesh results Go to File gt Results gt Open Results Select Format as ICEMCFD Specify surface results dom as the File as shown in Figure 3 490 Cart3D Figure 3 490 Select Result File Window Select Result Format Add as DataSet Current Format ICEMCFD File surace results dom i Structured Grid Unsteady Gnd Transient cases onl
400. ics user interface GUI as shown in Figure 3 424 Press ok for desired length unit window This will keep units to the default SI unit system Advanced Meshing Tutorials Figure3 42 3 New Workbenc h main window Geometry Simulation Advanced Meshing Finite Element Empty Project Model gt Open Simulations f EE Browse Tools Options Addins Figure 3 424 DesignModel er interface Cono Teoh View Help bed so Coo 9 IB sm QR a Maas zx PGenerae deke Reno horier 4 Paranete ANGYS Workbench E Tutorial Manual Advanced Meshing Tutorials c Loading Geometry in DM For loading geometry in the DM go to File Open Select the Piping agdb file from the desired location This will show geometry in the GUI as shownFigure 3 425 Figure 3 425 Loaded geometry in the workbench environment d Proceeding to the advance meshing For creating the blocking user has to go the advance meshing tab Go to the Project window select Proceed to advance meshing as shown Figure Advanced Meshing Tutorials FALELER Workbench Project OM parametric DesignModeler File Tools 5 Hl Gg Figure 3 426 Proceeding to advance meshing Designtodeler Tasks ili Open iy Open copy New simulation Proceed to Advanced Meshing Default Geometr
401. ight H atio 5 37 Parts 0 0 for I1 lo 2 2 lo 2 Pris gum m IN 0 0 0 layer OUTLET oo lo 8 8 t wind _ tuc El ne SOLID 1 1 m m n oc STATICMEIXER m oo Show size params using ref size Apply Click on Set Global Mesh Size from the Mesh tab Click on Prism Meshing Parameters Change the Height ratio to 1 3 and the Number of layers to 5 Click on Apply Figure 5 38 Global Mesh Size Mesh Prism window c EDI pu ay Growth laws Jexponential Initial height Height 1 3 of Ier 5 Total height Compute params Other parameters should be left as it is as shown in Figure 5 38 Leaving the Initial Height blank attempts to make the volume of the last prism element approximately equal to the volume of the attached tetrahedral element This ANSYS ICEMCFD CFX Tutorials is based on the size of the base triangle for each prism column so the total prism thickness will vary through the mesh Click on Mesh Prism 5 from the Mesh tab menubar to create inflated prism layers from the walls Set Number of volume smoothing steps to 5 Click Apply to begin the prism meshing process After the prism mesh generation a panel appears asking 1f the new mesh file should be loaded Click on Yes and then on Replace if prompted to replace the existing tetra mesh with this new prism mesh After prism me
402. ight ratio H2 o Number of layers Totalheight Compute param Fix marching direction Min prism quality Ortho weight os Filet ratio 0 10 prism angle height over base NEN Prism height limit Factor Ratio multiplier Apply x Dismiss ANSYS ICEMCFD CFX Tutorials Mesh Parameters by Parts Click on Set meshing Params by Parts from the Mesh tab menubar For the BODY part enable Prism Also set Max Size to 4 and Num Layers to 2 as shown in Figure 5 57 Num Layers of 2 ensures 2 layers of similar size tetrahedral elements around the BODY For the INLET OUTLET SOLID 1 1 and SYMP parts enter Max Size of 10 Click Apply and Dismiss to save this setting Figure Meshsizesforparts 5 57 Fart Prism Hesa Core Size Height Height Ratio Mum Layers Mesh areas BLUNTBODY r 4 0 0 by Parts BODY J E INLET DUTLET m m 1 np Ln POINTS LEN d sob 11 p pn hh fo f SYMP 10 0 0 0 Show size params using ref size Apply Dismiss Saving the Project Save the project by clicking on Save Project from the Main Menu This saves the geometry file as BluntBody tin in the BluntBody directory 2g Meshing Select Volume Meshing 9 from the Mesh tab menubar to create the mesh on this geometry ANSYS ICEMCFD CFX Tutorials Set Mesh type to Tetra and Method to From
403. igure 3 205 at this stage f Assigning the Material In the Index control press From corners and select the vertices 134 and 159 to restrict the display Switch off Vertices Right mouse click on Parts gt Create Part from Display Tree and it will open the window as shown in Figure 3 206 Hexa Meshing Rename the Part as SOLID Then select the last icon e Then press the Select Block button and select the four blocks for the fuselage and wing as shown in Figure 3 207 Press the middle mouse button to complete the selection and press Apply to move the blocks into the new part The edges at the interface between the new block material and the surrounding material will automatically become surface associated and the color will change to indicate that Figure 3 206 Create part window Create Part Part 50010 Create Part iie Blocking Material Create Part with Blocks Blocks 30 33 36 33 a Apply ox Dismiss Tutorial Manual Hexa Meshing Figure 3 207 Assign these blocks to SOLID Fitting the blocking to the fuselage and wing To ensure proper association of the blocking edges onto the geometry the user will project block vertices to the prescribed points first then and block edges to the curves Right click in the Display Tree to switch ON Blocking gt Vertices gt Numbers Then turn ON Blocking gt Vertices and Geometry gt Points
404. igure 4 186 Create Subset Create Subset window Subset LOAD SURFS ii Create Subset Apply ox ome Dismiss i Switch Off Geometry gt Subset in the Model Tree Tutorial Manual Nastran Tutorials Figure 4 187 Surface for subset 2 Force on subset Click on amp Force on Subset icon from Loads Tab Menubar which pops up Create Force on Subset window In this window enter Name as FORCE Enter values of FX as 0 467 FY as 0 2 and FZ as 0 862 it is shown in Figure 4 189 Press Select Subset In the Selection window select LOAD SURFS shown in Figure 4 188 press Accept in the Selection window Figure 4 188 Selection window for Selection x Subset Select subsets Accept All None Cancel Press Apply in the Create Force on Subset window Tutorial Manual Nastran Tutorials Figure 4 189 Create Force on ral Create Force Subset a on Subset window Mame FORCE Load Set Subsets LOAD_SURFS 6 LCS Global Scale 1 0 Force Type f Uniform Total Forces 0 467 Fr 02 0 852 gt 00 00 Mz 00 Apply Dismiss Note If the user wants to view the applied Force as shown in Figure 4 190 he can do so by Swiching Loads On in the Model Tree Tutorial Manual Nastran Tutorials Figure 4 190 Force applied i Solver Setup On this model linear static analysis 1s to be performed in Nastran so
405. improve the quality of grids that cannot be smoothed above a certain level is to concentrate on the surface mesh near the bad cells and edit this surface mesh to improve the quality ANSYS CFD Al Environment 10 0 User Manual SAS IP Inc 2 19 2 20 Chapter 3 Hexa Hexa is a 3 D object based semi automatic multi block structured and unstructured surface and volume mesher 3 1 Introduction Hexa represents a new approach to hexahedral mesh generation The block topology model is generated directly on the underlying CAD geometry Within an easy to use interface those operations most often performed by experts are readily accessible through automated features Recognized as the fastest hexahedral mesh generation tool in the market ICEM 4 allows users to generate high quality meshes for aerospace automotive computer and chemical industry applications in a fraction of the time required for traditional tools The user has access to two types of entities during the mesh generation process in Hexa block topology and geometry After interactively creating a 3 D block topology model equivalent to the geometry the block topology may be further refined through the splitting of edges faces and blocks In addition there are tools for moving the block vertices individually or in groups onto associated curves or CAD surfaces The user may also asso ciate specific block edges with important CAD curves to captur
406. in Figure 3 65 Figure 3 65 Additional Za Split MS puteos PUTS pNTS 8 PIRA PHTS 15 _aPNTS 11 Tutorial Manual Hexa Meshing e Overview of the Index Control By default splits only propagate through the displayed blocks Blocks can be blanked by right mouse selecting Blocking in the Display tree Index control Figure 3 66 which will appear in the lower right hand corner 2 Select comers Index 0 1 0 t E 1 4 Reset a Query Edge Done block edges and vertices are assigned an I J K value For example in Figure 3 67 the first edge perpendicular to the x axis of the global coordinate system has an index of I while the first edge perpendicular to the y axis has an index of For 2D cases such as this the K index is undefined Figure 3 67 Blocking Indices The Index control panel has two columns Min and Max left and right columns respectively The range can be changed by toggling the arrows or entering an integer value in the Tutorial Manual Hexa Meshing appropriate field Only the blocks within this range are displayed Selecting Reset will turn all of the block indices back on f Splitting the Blocks Display only the blocks containing the vehicle and those underneath the vehicle Change the Index range to I 2 3 J 1 3 Note Notice that incrementing the Index co
407. in value represents the worst quality of elements while the Max value represents the highest quality elements Usually the Min is set at 0 0 and the Max is set at 1 0 The Up to quality value gives the smoother a quality to aim for Ideally after smoothing the quality of the elements should be higher than or equal to this value If this does not happen the user should find other methods of improving the quality such as merging nodes and splitting edges For most models the elements should all have ratios of greater than 0 3 while a ratio of 0 15 for complicated models is usually sufficient Criterion User can select any criterion to display from pull down menu Smooth If the Smooth option is toggled on for a particular element type then this element will be smoothed in order to produce a higher grid quality Element types that have the Smooth option selected will have their qualities appear in the associated histogram Freeze If the Freeze option 15 selected for an element type the nodes of this element type will be fixed during the smoothing operation thus the element type will not be displayed in the histogram Float If the Float option 15 selected for an element type the nodes of the element type are capable of moving freely allowing nodes that are common with another type of element to be smoothed The nodes of this type of element however are not affected during the smoothing process and so the quality of these eleme
408. indow Keep in mind that after editing the mesh diagnostics should be re checked to verify that no mistakes were made There are several Errors as well as possible problems checks The descriptions of these are as follows Errors gt Duplicate elements This check locates elements that share all of their nodes with other elements of the same type These elements should be deleted Please note that deleting elements during the automatic fix procedure will remove one of the two duplicate elements thus eliminating this error without creating a hole in the geometry Errors gt Uncovered faces This check will locate any face on a volume element that neither touches a surface boundary nor touches another internal face This error usually Tetra Meshing Appendix indicates that there 1s a hole in the volume domain It is unlikely that this error would occur in the initial model usually it results during manual editing when the user happens to delete tetra or tri elements The automatic Fix Feature will cover these uncovered faces with triangles This may or may not be the proper solution A better method may be for the user to first Select the flawed elements and then decide if the uncovered faces are the result of missing surface mesh or the result of a hole If it is due to missing surface mesh the Fix option will eliminate the problem re run the check and select Fix If the error points out a hole in the model the user can attemp
409. ints AL xt Et select Create Body Type BODY for the new Part name Select any two locations on any surfaces curves or points so that the midpoint will be within the pipe junction Press the middle mouse button to accept then press Apply Switch ON Bodies in the Display Tree to see the material point The final geometry is shown in Figure 3 16 Figure 3 16 Tutorial Manual Geometry Creation Final Geometry M o MI ond ai 2 1 mI T T Ww a 1 lt i c d ni 4 f y d Saving Geometry File Geometry Save Geometry As Enter the file name as Geo 3DPipe tin and press Save to save the geometry Tutorial Manual Geometry Creation 3 1 3 Sphere Cube Overview We will create geometry for a sphere cube as shown in Figure 3 17 Figure 3 17 The sphere cube with dimensions a Summary of steps Create Cube by Standard Shapes Create Hemisphere Surface of Revolution Create points at Parameter along curve Create arcs to use to create the symmetry surfaces TS P Tutorial Manual Geometry Creation b Generating the Geometry Note Settings gt Selection gt Auto pick mode should be turned OFF for ICEM CFD to behave exactly as this tutorial describes Point Creation Geometry gt Create Point Explicit Coordinates Select 1 Explicit Coordinates to
410. ion Add Material Direction FD1 Angle 20 3609 4s Thins Surface Merge Topology Yes Press Generate so that it will generate the mixture body as shown in Figure 5 11 ANSYS ICEMCFD CFX Tutorials Figure 5 11 Geoemtr y after revolutio n This 1s the generated mixture body Generating the inlet pipes Now we have to generate the two inlet pipes of equal sizes and opposite in direction to each other For this we have to offset the plane and create the circles on that plane and extrude them Click on the XY plane in the project tree and then click on new plane in the 3D features toolbar This will come up with the new plane Offset this plane from original XY plane accordingly by entering the values in the details view as shown in Figure 5 12 Tutorial Manual ANSYS ICEMCFD CFX Tutorials Figure 5 12 Details of Plane4 Offsetting parameter for Plane Plane4 plane From Plane Base Plane Plane Transform 1 RMB Offset Z 30 Additional Transform Reverse Maormal zZ Axis No Flip zY Axes No Export Coordinate System Figure 5 13 Created planes Tutorial Manual ANSYS ICEMCFD CFX Tutorials After generating the offset plane go to the sketching window and select circle Create a circle of any size in the new plane as shown in figure Figur e 5 14 Creat ed C
411. ion value of 0 572 Tutorial Manual Post Processing Tutorials pressure 1 1 Ce coccocc 3156 b143 4637 1625 0 01183 s e U ex 217 066 1388 2894 4400 5907 415 0919 043 To switch the cut plane in X direction on Define Cut Plane panel from Methods menu select Middle X Plane as shown in Figure 3 660 see the relative position of this cut plane display the grid with variable color and show the back cut plane Tutorial Manual Post Processing Tutorials Figure 3 660 Cut Plane normal CODE Dynami e to X direction Active Method Coefficients by Foint and Normal by Coefficients by Comer Points by 3 Points Move or Rotate Middle Plane Middle Plane Middle 2 Plane O 000 Fractian pressure MODE pep 1 066 9156 of sill 8143 d537 nies ss 0 01153 0 1358 2894 0 4400 slay D 7413 1 043 Tutorial Manual Post Processing Tutorials On Surfaces display options toggle off Grid with variables and on Dynamic Surface display option select Vector with variable colors Figure 3 661 indicates that the vectors largely point in the X direction Figure 3 661 3D Vectors on Cut Plane Tutorial Manual Post Processing Tutorials 3 9 3 Space Shuttle In this tutorial one would be referring to a CFD result
412. ional BC Case Information A Low Directio FARFIELD nal Runge Kutta Scheme A High FAR FIELD Bounda Other controls Boundary Conditions T Low SYMMETRY Directional BC oe sige SYMMETRY Conditi Surface BC la on Covengence History 2 Low FAR FIELD 2 Wi ndow Partition Information High FARFIELD Accept Cancel iv In Surface BC select Create new and specify the following Name INLET surface family INLET Density 1 690 X Velocity 0 831784 Pressure 1 53 The others should be default as shown in Figure 3 592 Click Accept from the Solver parameters window Tutorial Manual Cart3D Figure 3 592 File Information Surface BC Case Information Mame INLET Surfac Solver Controls e Boundary Conditions el 5 amiy Bound Directional BC Density 1 690 ary surface BC MMelocity 0 831784 m IMLET nn Conditi EE M Y 0 0 Paste Velocity Covergence History Pressure Partition Informati artition Information Delete Copy Accept Cancel e Run solver to get the Run Solver window as shown in Click on Run solver Figure 3 593 Specify Max Number of Cycles as 200 Enable Save Cut planes result and specify Y Slices 0 001 as shown in Figure 3 593 and press Apply Tutorial Manual Cart3D Figure 3 593 Gil Run Solver solver Number of Cycles 200 E Y awis spanwise
413. ircle in rando m mann er Press dimensions select general and select the horizontal and vertical two dimensions Then after select the sketch and apply dimensions according to the Figure 5 16 ANSYS ICEMCFD CFX Tutorials Figure 5 15 General dimension S To circle Figure 5 16 El Details of Sketch Detail view for creating Sketch Sketch circle Show Constraints No El Dimensions 10 mm 10mm Ov El Edges 1 Full Circle Tutorial Manual ANSYS ICEMCFD CFX Tutorials Figure 5 17 Extrude details for first ui E E curves Base Object Sketch3 Operation Add Material Direction Vector None Direction Reversed Type To Faces Target Faces 1 As ThinlSurFace Merge Topology Yes After extruding the geometry will appear as shown in the figure below Tutorial Manual ANSYS ICEMCFD CFX Tutorials Figure 5 18 Geomet ry after extrusio n of the circle Now we have to create the same type of extruded pipe on the other side select the XY plane in the project tree and select new plane from the main toolbar This will give new plane on which we will create a circle Enter the details as shown in Figure 5 19 Tutorial Manual ANSYS ICEMCFD CFX Tutorials Figure 5 19 2 Details of Plane5 Create Second Offset Plane Plane5 plane Details From Plane Base Plane a Plane Transfo
414. irection Green Edges and Vertices Associated to curves The vertices can only be moved on the curves to which they have been projected Red Vertices Vertices projected to prescribed points They are fixed and cannot be moved unless projection type is changed All vertices can also be constrained by fixing x y and or 7 coordinates When thus constrained the vertex movement ignores the above color coded geometric constraints Set Pre Mesh Parameters Mesh sizes parameters can be set globally or on the surfaces curves or parts These operations constitute the first four icons in the Mesh menu These sizes then have to be applied to the blocking Pre Mesh Params gt Update Sizes Selecting Pre Mesh in the Display Tree will then prompt the user to re compute the pre mesh The user may also fine tune the node distributions within Pre Mesh Params gt Edge Params The Number of nodes initial and final node spacing expansion ratios and mathematical meshing laws can be prescribed on individual edges These distributions can be copied to opposing parallel edges down and upstream of the selected edge Pre Mesh Quality Before converting the pre mesh to unstructured or multi block the quality should be checked Blocking gt Pre Mesh Quality will create a histogram bar graph of element quality the same manner as for Edit Mesh gt TS P Tutorial Manual Hexa Meshin
415. irectory Launch AI Environment Select File Import Mesh From Nastran from the main menu which will open the Import Nastran File window shown in Figure 4 2 Figure 4 2 Import Nastran File Import Nastran File window Mastrar File HBE3 Elements Unchanged Bar Elements Unchanged Shell Elements Unchanged Apply vo Cancel ANSYS Tutorials Click on the open file L icon for the file browsing window Select the file Tpipe dat as shown in Figure 4 3 from the Tutorial Files directory Figure Choose File 4 3 Selecti Look in GAL Tutoriel Files r ds PCB Nastra 85 data I Frame dat fil History amp FrDioor dat EE Hood dat 1 em Desktop Documents Computer gc LIN Meatwork Pla File name Tpipe dat X Files of type Im astran File da nas c Verification of imported data Expand the Material Properties in the Model Tree by clicking on the To open the Define Material Property window for IsotropicMat1 as shown in Figure 4 4 double click on the material IsotropicMatl1 with the left mouse button or right click and select Modify Tutorial Manual ANSYS Tutorials Figure 4 4 Define Material a Define Material Property 5 Pr rty window F ty do Material Hame Isotropic Material ID Type Isotropic T Young s Modulus E Constant Yaning Value 207000 Shear
416. is collected into a common geometry database tetin file which can be used by any of ANSYS ICEMCFD s meshing modules Direct CAD Interfaces and Intelligent Geometry The ANSYS ICEMCFD Direct CAD Interfaces provide the bridge between parametric geometry creation tools available in CAD systems and the computational mesh generation post processing and mesh optimization tools available in ANSYS ICEMCED allowing users to operate in their native CAD systems ANSYS currently supports Direct CAD Interfaces for Catia I deas Pro E Unigraphics Solid Works m P Tutorial Manual Introduction to ANSYS ICEMCFD In an environment that has the look and feel of their native CAD system users can choose solids surfaces curves and points group these entities into parts and assign mesh sizes for mesh generation Further information on ANSYS ICEMCFD s Direct CAD Interfaces is available in the ANSYS Direct CAD Interface Tutorial Manual Since the CAD geometry is tagged with mesh parameters and boundary conditions directly in this interface the user can recalculate a mesh reflecting these changes in the geometry immediately after having saved the geometry file 3 Party Interfaces Available for STEP IGES DXF GEMS ACIS DWG Parasolid and point data Triangulated Surface Data Input Available for STL Patran Nastran Plot3d a popular Aerospace f
417. ism meshing Smoothing both prism and tetrahedral elements will improve the quality of these elements Y N Tutorial Manual Figure 5 41 Smooth Elements Window ANSYS ICEMCFD CFX Tutorials Smooth Elements Globally 2 Quality Smoothing iterations 5 zl Up to quality 0 5 Criterion Quality Smooth Mesh Type Smooth Freeze Float TETHA 4 C THI 3 CN QUAD_4 Smooth Parts Subsets uere parks Change the value of Up to Quality to 0 50 Set the Criterion to Quality First set PENTA 6 to Freeze as shown in Figure 5 41 Click on Apply to smooth the mesh Note that the histogram doesn t change much as the quality problems are likely due to the prism tetra interface Now set PENTA 6 back to Smooth Set Up to quality to 0 2 so as not to warp the prisms too much Click on Apply to smooth the mesh The low quality elements will be smoothed out as shown in the Figure 5 42 ANSYS ICEMCFD CFX Tutorials Figure 5 42 24 Histogram after Smoothing 18 Min 0 171444 1 12 b Saving the Project Save the project by clicking on Save Project E from the Main Menu e Writing Output From the Output tab menubar click on Output to CFX Accept the default name for File name as shown in Figure 5 43 and press Save Accept ASCII as the Output type and selec
418. istogram bars will be displayed with solid shading 3 16 2 Determinant The Determinant check computes the deformation of the cells in the mesh by first calculating of the Jacobian of each hexahedron and then normalizing the determinant of the matrix A value of 1 represents a perfect hexahedral cube while a value of 0 is a totally inverted cube with a negative volume The mesh quality measured on the x axis of all cells will be in the range from 0 to1 If the determinant value of a cell is 0 the cube has or more degenerated edges In general determinant values above 0 3 are acceptable for most solvers The y axis measures the number of cells that are represented in the histogram This scale ranges from Oto a value that is indicated by the Height The subdivision among the quality range is determined by the number of assigned Bars 3 16 3 Angle The Angle option checks the maximum internal angle deviation from 90 degrees for each cell Various solvers have different tolerance limits for the internal angle check If the cells are distorted and the internal angles are small the accuracy of the solution will decrease It is always wise to check with the solver provider to obtain limits for the internal angle threshold 3 16 4 Volume The Volume check will compute the internal volume of the cells in the model The units of the volume will be displayed in the unit that was used to create the model 3 16 5 Warpage The Warpage check
419. istory ow p Documents E File name Conrad Network Save as Project Files pri E Write Nastran Input File Click S Write View Input File icon from Solve Options Tab Menubar Tutorial Manual Nastran Tutorials Enter the Nastran file name as Conrod dat and switch ON View Nastran file as shown in Write View Input File window presented in Figure 4 258 and press Apply Figure 4 258 Wirte View Input d Write View File Input File a cS window Solver NASTRAN Mastran File Conrod dat Volume Elements Defined Shell Elements Defined Bar Elements Defined gt Thickness Distribution BCDefined Large Field Format Use Continuation Card View Nastran File Apply ok Dismiss User will see that the Nastran input data file comes up in the default text editor If user likes to edit this file directly then this can be done and can save the edited file through this text editor Since no need to do any editing for this example just close the editor i Solution and Results Linear Static analysis 1s to be performed on this model and the results should be visualized in a post processor Nastran Tutorials Solving the problem Click on Q Submit Solver Run icon from the Solve Options Tab Menubar to start Nastran as shown in Figure 4 259 The Nastran file will be selected by default as Conrod dat Toggle ON Post process and View
420. ith the latest hexahedral mesh technology e Extensive solver interface library with over 100 different supported interfaces e Automatic O grid generation and O grid re scaling e Geometry based mesh size and boundary condition definition e Mesh refinement to provide adequate mesh size in areas of high or low gradients e Smoothing relaxation algorithms to quickly yield quality meshes e Generation of multi block structured unstructured and super domain meshes e Ability to specify periodic definitions e Extensive replay functionality with no user interaction for parametric studies e Extensive selection of mesh bunching laws including the ability to graphically add delete modify control points defining the graph of the mesh bunching functions e Link bunching relationships between block edges to automate bunching task e Topology operations such as translate rotate mirror and scaling to simplify generation of the topology model Hexa Meshing Appendix 277 e Automatic conversion of 3D volume block topology to 3D surface mesh topology Automatic conversion of 2D block topology to 3D block topology Block face extrusion to create extended 3D block topology Multiple projection options for initial or final mesh computation Quality checks for determinant internal angle and volume of the meshes Domain renumbering of the block topology e Output block definition to reduce the number of multi block structured output mesh files e Bl
421. ition and press Apply Figure 3 284 Tetra Meshing Global Mesh Size e Parameters Window Global Mesh Parameters WOT Fast transition Edge criterion 0 2 Defne thin cuts B Apply ck Dismiss j Setting surface mesh size Next Select Mesh gt Set Surface Mesh size to set the meshing parameters on the surfaces of the model Select and Press the a keyboard key to select all surfaces Tutorial Manual Tetra Meshing Appendix Figure 3 285 Edit the surface mesh sizes Surface Mesh Size P Suface s GEOM hd aximum size 2 Height 0 Height ratio 0 Number of layers Tetra size ratio 0 Minimum size 0 deviation 0 Blank surfaces with params Apply ox Dismiss In this Surface Mesh Size window Figure 3 285 enter a Maximum element size of 2 and press Apply followed by Dismiss k Setting the curve mesh size By default for a new geometry the mesh size on all curves is zero and therefore need not be set If however the user needs to set mesh size on some or all of the curves the following procedure may be used Select Mesh Set Curve Mesh Size A to set the meshing parameters on the curves of the model Select amp and use one of the selection methods to pick some or all curves Tutorial Manual Tetra Meshing Appendix In the Curve Mesh Size window Figure 3 286 enter a value for Max Size parameters Pres
422. its will be created through the prescribed point method while the j direction splits will be made by visual judgment Press View gt Top then Fit Window Turn off Vertices at this stage Tutorial Manual Hexa Meshing Choose Blocking gt Split Block gt Split Block and it will open the window as shown in the Figure 3 144 Choose All visible and Split method as Prescribed Point Select the edge selection icon then select one of the two vertical edges Press the point selection icon then select the Prescribe point GEOM 9 and press Apply similarly make another split using the vertical edge and Prescribed Point GEOM 8 Similarly make another horizontal split through the prescribed point GEOM 12 The final result will have three horizontal splits as shown in Figure 3 145 Note Make sure that the Edge that 1s selected lies within the range of the Prescribed Point that will be selected Hexa Meshing Figure 3 144 Split Block Split block window f Split Block Block Select AlYisibe Selected Black ae Edge 41 42 1 AS Project vertices Split Method Split Method Prescribed point Point GEOM ok hi Apply ox Dismiss Tutorial Manual Hexa Meshing Figure 3 145 Make the horizontal splits in OMG the block i 18 11 These are the splits in the k direction The next set of splits will be in the 47 direction
423. ix Option Instead choose Select and split one of the normal edges Possible problems gt Un connected vertices This check finds vertices that are not connected to any elements These can generally be deleted Smoothing After eliminating errors possible problems from a tetra grid the user needs to smooth the grid to improve the quality To do this select Edit mesh Smooth mesh Globally Tutorial Manual Figure 3 298 Smooth mesh globally window Tetra Meshing Appendix Smooth Elements Globally Quality Smoothing iterations 5 a Up to quality 0 20 Criterion Quality Smooth Mesh Type Smooth Freeze Float TETRA 4 3 CC Smooth Parts Subsets Method all parks m Refresh Histogram Advanced Options Laplace smoothing just worst 1 M Allow node merging Allow refinement Group bad hex regions Ignore PrePoints Surface Fitting Prism V arpage atia 0 5 Violate geometry Tolerance 0 1 Relative Tolerance Minimum Edge Length 5 Apply o Dismiss Smoothing iterations This value is the number of times the smoothing process will be performed Displays with a more complicated geometry will require a greater number of Tutorial Manual Tetra Meshing Appendix iterations to obtain the desired quality which 15 assigned in Up to quality Up to quality As mentioned previously the M
424. k on Apply This will save the image in the directory from where user has fired the ANSYS ICEMCFD User can view the image file in any image viewer software later Tutorial Manual Post Processing Tutorials 3 9 2 Pipe Network Advanced In this tutorial we will continue with the same Fluent example as picked up in last tutorial Operations introduced by this example Point Probing Technique Dynamic Cut Plane Movement of Cut Plane Displaying Vectors in plane a Loading the Fluent file Start Visual3p application From the Set Result Format window select the file format as Fluent Load the case file pp cas and the data file pp dat b Point Probing Technique The point probe returns the point s coordinates at the cursor position the value of the active scalar and vector functions Here Point Probing Technique would be explained using the scalar variable pressure Select Variables from the Post processing Tab menu Choose the scalar variable pressure NODE from the Scalar Variable list of Result Variables window From the Surfaces options select the Continuous contour The surface display using pressure NODE variable 15 presented in Figure 3 650 Figure 3 650 Post Processing Tutorials Surface display for the variable pressure pressure NODE 1 217 1 066 0 9156 0 7650 0 6143 0 4537 0 31 31 0 1625 0 01183 0 1388 0 2894 0 4400 0 5907 0 7413 0 89159 1 043 Go to Point Probe i
425. k out the convergence graph in the Ansys window during the process After solution is done user can do post processing in Visual 3p Post Processing of Results ANSYS Tutorials Click on e Post Process Result icon from the Solve Options Tab Menubar which opens Post Process Results window given in Figure 4 84 Supply Ansys Result file file rth in this window and press Apply to launch Visual3p Post processor with Ansys result file Figure Post Process Hesults 4 84 Post Solver Process Results ANSYS ix window Result File F users icmanas The Laur Apply Cancel Select variables from Post processing tab menu bar to display the Total Translation Displacement select Load as 1 and Category as Displacement in Ansys Variables window as shown in Figure 4 85 ANSYS Tutorials Figure 4 85 Select Ti Select Ansys AnsysVariables Variables window i Mnde Load 5ide Mode Hz Load H Category Displacement Scalar Variable Current TEMP v 298 186 366 634 Vector Variable Current Hj mag 1513968 0 Apply Cancel Select Animate which pops up the Setup Animations window as shown in Figure 4 86 Now press Animate to view the deformation The deformation 1s shown in Figure 4 87 Tutorial Manual ANSYS Tutorials Figure 4 86 Animation Controller 9 Animation Setup and Controller window b B bk 44
426. k topology concept allows rapid generation and manipulation of the block structure and ultimately rapid generation of the hexahedral mesh ANSYS ICEMCFD Blocking provides a projection based mesh generation environment where by default all block faces between different materials are projected to the closest CAD surfaces Block faces within the same material may also be associated to specific CAD surfaces to allow for definition of internal walls In general there is no need to perform any individual face associations to underlying CAD geometry greatly reducing time for mesh generation a Features of ANSYS ICEMCFD Blocking O grids For complex geometry ANSYS ICEMCFD Blocking automatically generates body fitted internal and external O grids for creating good quality meshes Edge Meshing Parameters Hexa s edge meshing parameters offer unlimited flexibility applying user specified bunching requirements Mesh Quality Checking With a set of tools for mesh quality checking cells with undesirable skewness or angles may be displayed to highlight the block topology region where the individual blocks need to be adjusted Mesh Refinement Coarsening Refinement or coarsening of the mesh may be specified for any block region to allow a TS P Tutorial Manual Hexa Meshing finer or coarser mesh definition in areas of high or low gradients respectively Replay Op
427. ks pen 5 Mew simulation P Proceed to Advanced Meshing Default Geometry Options Solid bodies Surface bodies Line bodies Parameters TEF Ips Attributes P spFEA r Mamed selections mr Iris Material properties Adwanced Geometry Defaults Edit Item Els Rename gt lt Delete Headlines and Messages ANSYS Workbench Tips and Trick Contact based on Geometry In Simulation 8 1 contact regions can En using more intuitive names reflecting khe they are associated More z004 European ANSYS Conference Preparations are underway For the z200 Conferences be held this Fall Get the inFormation ANSYS Service Packs For 6 1 Mow A Customer Portal The 4815475 Customer Portal contains Pre and Important Updates registration rec Now the Graphics User Interface for Advanced Meshing opens The user has to run Build Topology to get the necessary curves and points Tutorial Manual ANSYS ICEMCFD CFX Tutorials select Geometry gt Repair Geometry B gt Build Diagnostic 2 Turn on Filter points and Filter curves Select Create new for New Part Name Press Apply ANSYS ICEMCFD CFX Tutorials Figure 5 23 MUERE Repair geometry window Repair Geometry Repair Surface PULA Hews Build Topology Tolerance 004 Filter by angle Feature angle E Filter points Filter curves Mew Part Name Create new Part for new curves
428. ks should appear as in Figure 3 71 Figure 3 71 The Block oo Indices L B g Discarding Blocks For flow analysis only the blocks outside of the car need be retained So far all of the blocks are in the LIVE volume part The blocks representing the car s interior must be reassigned into a different volume part Select Delete Blocks and select all interior blocks as shown in Figure 3 72 The blocks are 15 18 20 22 25 26 and 27 After selection press the middle mouse button or Apply These blocks will actually be put in the VORFN part since Delete Permanent is turned off default save blocking Figur e 3 72 OGri d Block Tutorial Manual Hexa Meshing h Body Fitting the Blocking To ensure proper projection of the blocking edges onto the geometry the user will project block vertices to the prescribed points and block edges to the curves Turn on Points Select Blocking gt Associate qi Associate Vertex ae as in Figure 3 73 The Entity type Point is toggled on by default Figure 3 73 Blockin Associate Vertex Panel Suns Edit Associations P Associate Vertex gt Entity Self f Point C Curve Surface Tutorial Manual Hexa Meshing v Select Associate Vertex again or the Select vert s icon and first select the vertex and then the appropriate point as shown in Figure 3 74 The vertex will immediately jump to the selected point Make sure you
429. l A O NE E ln do Bo 5 0 O NE 1 59 80 EN B o LIVE goog hb h r mess h r LEN 310 5 O O ME 2 Gg go 898 Show size params using ref size Apply Dismiss Choose File gt Save Project to save the changes in the Tetin file Accept the default project name k Generating the Tet Prism Mesh Press Mesh gt Volume Meshing B gt From NN PE Set Mesh type to Tetra Prism Layers as shown in Figure 3 257 Press Apply to generate the mesh using the default parameters Note The default prism parameters Mesh gt Set Global Mesh Size gt Prism Meshing Params indicate 3 prism layers using the local prism thickness based on the surface triangle size as no initial height is specified Tutorial Manual Tetra Meshing Figure 3 257 8 Mesh withTetrahedra MOS parameters Mesh type Tetra Method PRP Smooth mesh Iterations 5 5 quality Coarsen mesh Iterations 77 Worst aspect ratio 0 1 Smooth transition Factor 1 2 Options Run as batch process Only visible geometry Part by Part Load mesh after completion A cut plane through the complete tetra prism mesh should appear as in Figure 3 258 Tutorial Manual Tetra Meshing Figure 3 258 Tet
430. l BCtype Agglomerated Normals C SubCell Resolution Number of Multi Grid levels MultiGrid cycletype V cycle W eycle Number of pre smoothing passes 1 Number of post smoothing passes 1 E Accept Cancel Expand Boundary Conditions and choose Directional BC for the enclosing Cartesian box In this case all six faces have will have the FARFIELD boundary condition as shown in Figure 3 540 Tutorial Manual Cart3D Fi g ure Solver parameters TER 3 5 40 File Information Directional BC Case Information X Low FARFIELD Di rect i on Solver Controls Boundary Conditions A High FAR FIELD al BC Directional BC window Surface BC Y Low FARFIELD Covergence History Y Hiah E ign FARFIELD Partition Information Z Low FARFIELD Z High FARFIELD Accept Cancel Keep the defaults for Convergence History and Partition Information Click Accept to save the parameters i Running the FlowCart Solver Select Solver gt Run Solver 7 to open the FlowCart solver panel refer to Figure 3 541 Specify Max Number of Cycles 200 Enable Run Grid Sequencing and set Level 3 Enable Save Full Hex Result Turn on Save Cut planes result and specify X Slices as 50 100 200 and 300 and Y and Z Slices at 0 Tutorial Manual Cart3D Figure 3 541 Run Solver Window Run Solver i solver Number of Cycles 1 ful multigrid
431. l Manual Post Processing Tutorials From Post processing tab menu select Define Cut Plane option This will opens up Define Dynamic Cut Plane window Select the method as by Point and Normal from the dropped down list In Figure 3 653 Define Dynamice Cut Plane window is presented Post Processing Tutorials Figure 3 653 Define D m sored 9 Plane window Active Method Point and Normal Pt 0 0030059590935707092 2 622604 FEM SRL NEN 0 4 4 Fraction Value 05 l Multiple Cut Planes Copy Current Cut Plane w Display back cut plane with translucent Draw plane normal Drew plane border Color EE Apply Dismiss Tutorial Manual Post Processing Tutorials d Contours on Dynamic Surface Switch off the Continuous Contour option from the Surfaces instead turn on Continuous Contour on the display options of Dynamic Surface right click Continuous Contour for the Dynamic Surface will display the Cut Plane in the display window as shown in Figure 3 654 Figure 3 654 Cut section of the geometry pressure NODE Tutorial Manual Post Processing Tutorials Before proceeding further hide the background for the cut plane to visualize only the cut section of geometry To do this from Define Dynamic Cut Plane window check off Display Back Cut Plane In the cut plane windo
432. l Point The Centroid of 2 Points location should be selected Enter FLUID for the Part name With the left mouse button select two locations on opposite sides of the elbow so that the midpoint is inside the ELBOW and outside the CYL as shown in Figure 3 168 Press the middle mouse button to accept the selection and press Apply to create the material point The Body name FLUID should appear within the geometry Rotate the model to confirm that FLUID 1s in the appropriate location In a similar way create a material point with the Part name DEAD inside the cylinder File gt Geometry gt Save Geometry As geometry file to save the updated model before continuing on in this tutorial Tutorial Manual Figure 3 168 The geometry of the Elbow Part with the labeled Surfaces and Material f Blocking Hexa Meshing am Select Blocking gt Create Block e gt Initialize Block ep window is shown in Figure 3 169 Choose 3DBounding Box from the Type pull down if not already set Enter FLUID in the Part name and make sure Orient to geometry is OFF Press Apply to initialize the first block around everything Tutorial Manual Hexa Meshing Figure 3 169 a Initialize Block Window FLUID Lreate Block Initialize Blocks 3D Bounding Box Entities x Project vertices with geometry 20 Blocking ba Apply ox
433. lation Proceed to Advanced Meshing Default Geometry Options v Solid bodies v Surface bodies v Line bodies Parameters ps Attributes sbrEA DOM Named selections us Material properties Advanced Geometry Defaults Ld Edit Item Rename gt lt Delete Headlines and Messages ANSYS Workbench Tips and Tricks Rename Contact based on Geometry In Simulation 8 1 contact regions can be quickly renamed using more intuitive names reflecting the parks to which they are associated More 2004 European ANSYS Conferences Preparations are underway For the 2004 European ANSYS Conferences to be held this Fall Get the latest information ANSYS Service Packs for 8 1 Now Available on the Customer Portal The ANSYS Customer Portal contains Product Information and Important Updates registration required Tutorial Manual ANSYS ICEMCFD CFX Tutorials d Geometry Cleanup Because of the difficulties in maintaining a common standard for graphical entities across all CAD systems imported parasolid models usually require some cleanup before they can be used to create a continuous enclosed region for CFD analysis The imported geometry consists of a body made of surfaces surrounded by a bounding rectangular box e Parts Creation Right click on Parts from the Display Tree widget and select Create Part It defaults into Create Part by Selection Enter INLET
434. lder button next to Result file and select the file file rst This file name comes from the Initial Jobname used in the previous window Press Apply to launch the post processor with the Ansys result file Figure 4 41 Post Process Hesults ay Post Process Results window Solver AN SYS m Result File rad Ansys rst P Apply ck Cancel Click on Variables from the Post processing Tab menu bar To display the Total Translation Displacement select Load as 1 and Category as Displacement in the Select AnsysVariables window as shown in Figure 4 42 This is the default ANSYS Tutorials Figure 4 42 Celect E Ansys Variables An sysVari ables window Mode Load Side Mode Hz Load fi Category Displacement PEE e 2 Min 017195 Vector Variable Current Translation Mexmeg 0 17195 7 Apply ox Dismiss Click on e Control All Animations from the Post processing Tab menu bar The window shown in Figure 4 43 will appear Select Animate The deformation is shown in Figure 4 44 Tutorial Manual ANSYS Tutorials Figure 4 43 Animation 9 Animation Setup Controller and Controller Ms window P H bk 44 nin with Steps mo oa fio Speedims 10 Auto genaerating Images Encode MPEG file Animate all streams spray per steps 0 bubble size 0 teal l
435. le O grid option If a value that is less than 1 is assigned the resulting O grid will be smaller than the original If however a value is larger than 1 the resulting O grid will be larger 3 11 Edge Meshing Parameters The edge meshing parameter task has been greatly automated by providing the user with unlimited flexibility in specifying bunching requirements Assigning the edge meshing parameters occurs after the development of the block topology model This option is accessible by selecting Meshing Edge params The user has access to the following pre defined bunching laws or Meshing laws Default Bi Geometric Law UniformHyperbolicPoissonCurvatureGeometric 1Geometric 2Exponential 1 ponential 2Bi ExponentialLinearSpline The user may modify these existing laws by applying pre defined edge meshing functions accessible through the Meshing Edge Params Graphs option in Hexa This option yields these possible functions ConstantRampS curveParabola MiddleParabola EndsExponen tialGaussianLinearSpline Note Note By selecting the Graphs option the user may add delete modify the control points gov erning the function describing the edge parameter settings Additional tools such as Linked Bunching and the multiple Copy buttons provide the user with the ability to quickly apply the specified edge bunching parameters to the entire model 3 12 Smoothing Techniques In Hexa both the block topology and the mesh may be smoot
436. lect Cart3D gt Integrate Cp to open the Post Process Solution window as shown in Figure 3 577 Tutorial Manual Cart3D Figure 3 577 Post Process ral Post Process Solution Window S olution n L art3D Result file BOMBER c3d i tria gt Clie Output Directory Profiles zr Heference parameters Family Params All Params Model x axis Model anis zb Model axis Cp Distribution Pressure coefficients can be extracted on a cut plane for the component The results are written in the Clic Output Directory Specify the directory in which the Cp Distributions are to be stored Clic uses its own system of coordinates shown in Figure 3 578 Our model coordinate should be mapped on to Clic s coordinates In this case the Display X axis 1s Xb in Clic s coordinates Similarly Display Y axis is Yb in Clic s coordinates amp Display Z axis 1s Zb 1s Clic s coordinates Cart3D Figur 3 578 ud m Axes 2 i 4 E E f oe eh M A ai S y T rr i E e I ag A EU ET T e rs su Bou T i i s os 1 r P e 1 y m pu S P em E a A T cx eT 2 JE dd E i r Fi Aa 2 L Z D cU Note Th
437. lerance greater than the gap that the surface must jump across 10 will work fine here Press Apply to create the surface Geometry Creation Press Dismiss to close the window Figure 3 23 Curves for Surface Select these Curves similarly create the other three surfaces around the cube The result is shown in Figure 3 24 Figure 3 24 Symmetry Surfaces Tutorial Manual Geometry Creation c Deleting unused entities Geometry Delete Surface Select Delete Surface to open the Delete Surface window Select the surface shown in Figure 3 25 with the left mouse button If there is too much clutter the user can switch OFF all other Parts except CUBE Press the middle mouse button to complete the selection and press Apply to delete the surface Figure 3 25 Surface to delete Tutorial Manual Geometry Creation Delete thus surface d Creating the material point Geometry gt Create Body gt Material Point gt Centroid of 2 Point Select a Create Body and assign the name BODY to a new Part Select one of the corners of the CUBE that do not lie inside the flat plane of the SYM surfaces Select the second point on the surface of the sphere Then press Apply Switch ON Bodies in the Display Tree window to see the material point It should appear inside the hemisphere of the SPHERE surface but outside of the CUBE The final geometry is shown in Figure 3 26 Figure 3 26 Final Geometry Tut
438. les window as shown in Figure 4 262 Tutorial Manual Nastran Tutorials Figure 4 262 Select 3 Nastran Nastran ariables n Variables window Mode Load Side Hz Load H Category Displacement Scalar Yariable Current Translation Total Min ln 7 0 000245 Vector Variable Current Translation mag 0 000245 Apply o Cancel Select e Control All Animation option from Post processing tab menu bar which will open Animation Controller window as shown in Figure 4 263 Set the values as shown in Figure 4 263 and press Animate to view the mode shape as shown in Figure 4 264 Finally select Exit to quit the post processor Tutorial Manual Nastran Tutorials Tutorial Manual Figure 4 263 Animation Setup and Controller window Nastran Tutorials Animation Controller 8 gt B 44 0 000 with Steps 3 Cycles Roo M Speed ms o o Animate dynamic surfaces Animate views Rotate about line Angle dearee 360 Axis 0 1 Center 0 Animate deformation Undeformed shape Smoothly back cycle Amplifier 8025 Animate modal Undeformed shape Steps per cycle 20 Amplifier 2 0 nS Apply ck Cancel Tutorial Manual Figure 4 264 Anima ted model Nastran Tutorials Tranzlation Total Load 1 0002267 0002125
439. lick on the drop down menu next to the Part field to select an existing Part Click on CURVES to select this Part in the window Enter the Name as CURVES 9 and press Apply to create the arc similarly make another arc named CURVES 10 out of points POINTS 6 POINTS 1 and POINTS 11 Press Dismiss to close this window The geometry after creating the two arcs is shown in Figure 3 6 Figure 3 6 Geometry after arc creation Tutorial Manual Geometry Creation TE TURVES POINTS 7 CURVES 3 URVES 5 POINTS 11 OINTS 10 POINTS 4 POINTS 6 PORMES S OINETAN 13 Curve Curve Intersection Geometry gt Create Point gt Curve Curve Intersection Selecting Curve Curve opens the window as shown in Figure 3 7 Select the Part name POINTS Select CURVES 10 and CURVES 7 with the left mouse button Press the middle mouse button to accept the selection Give Gap a Tolerance of 0 01 and enter the name of the last point created Tutorial Manual Geometry Creation POINTS 13 in the Name window and press Apply This will create the intersection point called POINTS 14 Repeat the procedure for curves CURVES 10 and CURVES 8 and press Apply without changing the name in the Name window to get the intersection point POINTS 15 Press Dismiss to close the Create Point window Figure 3 7 Selection DE Fue Part POINTS Intersectio 2 LI Jh MS 1 Puree Cue
440. ll assign the material inside the cylinder to the DEAD part This will remove this region from the mesh if it is computed with the DEAD part turned off Right mouse click in the Display Tree on Blocking gt Index control You ll see a window appear at the lower right Change the Min for from 0 to 1 You can press the up arrow or type the number and press the enter key on the keyboard You should then only see the blocking shown in Figure 3 182 Right mouse click in the Display Tree on Part gt Dead gt Add to part Select the Blocking Material Add blocks to Part e button Press the Select Blocks button and then box select the entire model or press v on the keyboard Press the middle mouse button and then press Apply The selected blocks will then be assigned to the DEAD part Tutorial Manual Hexa Meshing Press Associate gt Associate Edge to Curve to open the window as shown in Figure 3 183 Make sure that Project vertices are ON Figure 3 183 Blocking Associate edge to curve window Associations g E dit Associations aioe er SUM xoW Associate Edge gt Curve Edae s 103 113 4 Curele BEOM 11 AS Project vertices Project to surface intersection E Fraject ends to curve Intersection Apply ok Dismiss Now Associate Edges 9 10 11 and 12 to CURVE D using Figure 3 182 as a guide Referring to Figure 3 182 associate Edges 13 14 15 and 16 to
441. ll have to select Show as well to activate this option Subset This will create the subset of the selected elements Selected elements will be placed a subset Done If this button is pressed then it will close the hostogram window Usually the best way to improve the quality of grids that cannot be smoothed above a certain level 1s to concentrate on the surface mesh near the bad cells and edit this surface mesh to improve the quality Tutorial Manual Advanced Meshing Tutorials 3 6 Advanced Meshing Tutorials ANSYS is tuned to help users create advance operations They include at times Complex operations of topology transformations inside HEXA Reducing the number of blocks for Multiblock mesh output Merging HEXA and TETRA meshes in all possible ways to get a conformal hybrid mesh Getting a tetra mesh out of a case where the surface mesh data 1s available additionally for some of the regions Getting Quad surface mesh on complex objects Getting rid of leakages in Tetra mesh using geometry repair tools Setting boundary conditions and writing output for solvers Figure 3 301 Hybrid Mesh The tutorials in this section are related to these advanced steps only will try to take the user to deal with real world applications Tutorial Manual Advanced Meshing Tutorials 3 6 1 Hexa Mesh in a Grid Fin Overview In this Tutorial example the user will generate a hexa mesh for a Grid Fin
442. llowing operations Use of the Cart3D mesher for mesh generation Multi grid preparation with mgPrep Running the solver for AOA 3 06 and Mach 0 54 Computing Forces and Moments using Clic Visualizing the result in Post Processing a Starting the Project Load ANSYS ICEM CFD Change the working directory using File gt Change Working Dir and set the location to the folder wing oneraM6 uns is located in that folder Tutorial Manual Cart3D Note It is preferable to create a separate folder wing1 and put the oneraM6 uns domain file in that folder before performing this tutorial Select Open Mesh from the main menu and select oneraM6 uns b Mesh Generation Preview only Click on Cart3D from the main menu Select the Volume Mesher icon We get the cart 3D Mesher window as shown in Figure 3 473 BUSES Figure Tis v um ui Winder E 3 473 gt iC Properties Load Sae Oupa Cat Pes cancaading Cart3D BOBS 4 GUI Merher E wi ndow Cam tme Conmponeni Hamna Hed Lenght 555 Hum Cal L Poramieri Finest Cell hrenin TIT Mesh Creation Hach Dele Comm Foll dts Mumba of Muli
443. lobal Element 5cale Factor Scale Factor m Display Global Element Seed Size element B4 Display Hatural Size Enabled Size Display Mum af Elements in gap Refinement oOo g lanore wall Thickness 0 001 Triangle tolerance Unitless tri tolerance gt Apply ok Dismiss The user can make the parts visible from the Display Tree widget that appears in Figure 3 239 Tutorial Manual Tetra Meshing Figure Hie Model Select parts to modify Hif Geometry Subsets Points Curves Surfaces Bodies To change the mesh size on specific surfaces select Mesh gt Set Surface Mesh Size and use Select surfaces to choose the required surfaces Click the keyboard to select all the surfaces In the Surface Mesh Size window Figure 3 240 assign Maximum element size of 2 Press Apply and Dismiss Tutorial Manual Tetra Meshing Figure 3 240 Adjusting the surface mesh face Mesh Size b sizes Associated to the E selected surfaces Surface s 10 GE bes I asimur size 2 Height 0 Height ratio 0 Number of layers 0 EET Tetra size ratio 0 Minimum size 0 deviation 0 Blank surfaces with params Setting curve mesh size Select Mesh gt Set Curve Mesh Size Select amp and click the keyboard to select all curves Set Maximum Size 0 to all the curves
444. locks belong to the blade Before collapsing the blocks change the Part family of the two center blocks to SOLID the material representing the blade Right mouse click on SOLID gt Add to part underneath Parts in the Display Tree and it will open the Add to Part window Select Blocking Material Add Blocks to Part ex and select the blocks of the blade as shown in Figure 3 147 then press the middle mouse button Press Apply to complete the operation Figure 3 147 Assignin g the blade blocks Hexa Meshing Now select Blocking Merge Vertices 4 gt Collapse Block i E Choose the edge that should be collapsed In this case it 1s the shortest edge shown in Figure 3 148 of the selected blocks Select the two blocks shown in Figure 3 148 Press Apply to Collapse the blocks Hexa Meshing Figure Select this edge Merge Vertices 4 3 148 Collapsi pac ng the A blade RAE Si Blocks Collapse Blocks Collapse edge 225102 AS E Blocks 37 34 Apply EN Dismiss After collapsing we get the model as shown in Figure 3 149 Tutorial Manual Hexa Meshing Figure 3 149 The Collapsed Blocking m Edge to Curve Association on the Blade Choose Blocking Associate e Associate Edge to Curve Associate edge to curve window will open as shown in Figure 3 150 Note Make sure Project Vertices is disabled Hexa Meshing Figure 3 150 Blocking Associa
445. locks for the O grid Tutorial Manual Figure 3 87 Your extern al O grid of the car Hexa Meshing Turn on Around Block s and Apply The blocking will appear as below in Figure 3 87 m Meshing with Edge Parameters Select Pre mesh Params 4 gt Edge params and select one of the radial edges of the O grid as in Figure 3 88 Tutorial Manual Figure 3 88 Setting the meshing paramete rs on the edge Hexa Meshing Select this Ed Increase Nodes to 7 To bunch the elements close to the car decrease Spacing 2 to 1 and change Ratio 2 to 1 5 Toggle on Copy Parameters set Method gt To Parallel Edges default and Apply This node distribution will be applied throughout the O grid Select one of the vertical edges between the car and the ground Change Nodes to 15 Spacing and 2 to 1 Ratio 1 and 2 to 1 5 and Apply Note that the ratios presented in the second column actual were not attained Increase the number of Nodes until both ratios are near 1 5 Select Edges gt Bunching in the Display tree Hexa Meshing Turn on Pre Mesh and recompute Note the large gradients in mesh size just before and behind the vehicle We will now match the node spacing of one edge to the other Turn off Pre Mesh and for reference turn on Vertices gt Numbers Select Pre Mesh Params gt Match Edges Select the radial edge on the ground plane in front 33 96 for the Reference Edg
446. lt and Press Apply Switch Connectors in the Display Tree All the values are shown in Figure 4 211 Nastran Tutorials Figure 4 211 3 Define Connector Define Connectors Window for Spot Weld Part 1002 and Connector Part1004 Spot Weald name SPOT POINTS Spot Weld Source paints PART_1 002 060 2 PART E Target parts PART_1002PART_1004 Connector Fart name SPOT_WELD1 Max projection Weld options Weld type Paint to point Element splitting Remesh area Tri uad Apply Dismiss Create Bolt Connectors Now from the Display Tree turn OFF Points and turn ON all parts The two flanges PART_1001 amp PART_1002 and the hanger PART_1003 have got Bolt Hole connections Here Bolt connections should be defined Select 29 Figure 4 212 Bolt Hole icon from Define Connectors window as shown in Tutorial Manual Nastran Tutorials Figure 4 212 ones ana Define Define Connectors i Connectors window Connector Type Bolt hole name BOLT CURVESO Bolt Hole Bolt curves pat 1 DU 37 4820 part 1E 5 AR Connector Fart name BOLT wE LOO Mum quad rings 2 E Washer Active Apply ck Dismiss Enter the following parameters in this window Click on amp button and select each of four curves as shown in Figure 4 213 and press Apply New Part Name for Curve BOLT CURVESO this
447. lt and press Apply to complete the setup Tutorial Manual ANSYS Tutorials Figure 4 63 Setup Analysis T a Setup Analysis Type cp abit dps window Solver ANS Ansys Analysis Options Analysis Category Structural Structural Analysis Options Analysis Type Static Solver Auto 7 Direct PCG Tolerance 1 0E 08 Convergence Multiplier Number of Substeps EM Large Deformation Kep ignor Apply Cancel Save Project Select File Save Project As and in the new window press the icon to create a new folder Name this folder Contact and enter into it Then enter the file name Contact as shown in Figure 4 64 Tutorial Manual ANSYS Tutorials Figure Save Project As 4 64 Save Sava in amp Contact t AS Contact prj windo Hisiory W Desktop Documants Em r Computer 8 Netwark Pla B File name L ontact pr cave Bs type ProjectFiles prj Write Ansys Input File Click on the Solve Options Write View Input File 9 button Toggle ON the Advanced option under Edit Options and click on Create Attribute amp Parameter Files Tutorial Manual ANSYS Tutorials Figure 4 65 Write View Input Ansys Input File File rn 9 window Soler ANSYS Ansys File Contactin Attribute File ftact ansysthc Parameter File ansys par Edit O
448. lutions Meshes for any rotational or translational cyclic geometry can be generated with ease Mesh Density Control The mesh Density definition for ANSYS ICEMCFD Tetra allows users to control the tetra size locally where no geometry 15 present Densities can be of different shapes point sphere line arbitrary volume Smooth Transition Smooth transition allows the user to fill the volume with the Delauney approach Tutorial Manual Tetra Meshing 3 4 2 Sphere Cube Overview After generating a tetrahedral mesh for a hemisphere containing a cube the user will check the mesh quality The geometry of the Sphere Cube is shown in the figure below Figure 3 224 PHERE The 7 of the Sphere Cube a Summary of Steps Starting the project Repairing the geometry Assigning mesh sizes Generating the tetrahedral mesh Diagnostics Tutorial Manual Tetra Meshing saving the project Assigning mesh sizes b Parts Creation All points curves and surfaces are initially assigned to one part GEOM The user needs to create and assign separate parts for surfaces curves and bodies The parts for the surfaces SPHERE CUBE and SYMM are labeled in Figure 3 224 If the parts are already defined then please go to section Reassigning Mesh sizes To change the part names of surfaces in the Display Tree widget right click on Parts gt CreatePart gt CreatePart by Selection It will op
449. m layer Apply and Dismiss Click on Mesh Prism 55 from the Mesh tab menubar to create inflated prism layers from the walls This combination of parameters attempts to make the prism layer of the same height as the attached tetrahedral elements Press Apply to generate the prism layer After the prism mesh is generated a panel appears asking if the new mesh should be loaded Click on Yes and then on Replace if prompted to replace the existing tetra mesh with this new prism mesh The mesh on SYMP and BODY would look like as shown in Figure 5 60 ANSYS ICEMCFD CFX Tutorials Figure 5 60 Prism layer on Symmetry surface Editing the Prism Mesh Now we will split this prism mesh into several pieces This is normally much faster to do rather than creating several prism layers From the Edit Mesh tab menubar click on Split Mesh Select Split Prisms a set Number of Layers as 5 and Prism Ratio as 1 3 as shown in Figure 5 61 Click on Apply to get the final mesh Tutorial Manual ANSYS ICEMCFD CFX Tutorials Figure 5 61 Split Mesh window Split Mesh 03 5 Split Prism Parts iss m Split Prisms Method Fiwratio Fix initial height Frism ratio Number af layers sg Split only specified layers Layer numbers I 1 2 0 Apply ox Dismiss Figure 5 62 shows a portion of the mesh on SYMP and BODY after splitting the prism layers Tutorial Manual ANSYS
450. m that all modifications are stored in the family boco fbc file used for output Some solvers accept input files that store information solver execution etc unrelated to ICEM CFD grid information If the user s solver is one of those for which we support output of this additional file you can set up the solver parameters in this file by selecting the params button adjacent to the Boundary conds button c Writing the Solver Input File Next choose Output gt STAR CD input to write STAR CD input files and choose the Hexa unstructured domain to write to STAR CD format It is opening the Star CD window shown in Figure 3 628 As in Figure 3 628 assign the parameters for the STAR CD input file set Make sure that the boundary condition file is selected as family boco fbc Tutorial Manual Output to Solvers Figure 3 628 Setting the STAR CD file parameters ox Please edit the following stared options pretis of output File s F users icmanas Trail star bacafile F users icmanas Trail test fbc STAR CD version 3100 3050 Starting number is Output type Formatted Unformatted White node file Yes No write element file Yes Write shells in element file Yves C No Write boundary Yes Boundaries to write Only those with a B C type All boundaries Check face orientation Yes Flow regime Laminar Turbulent Inlet
451. ment Create new co Paste Nodes 7 Mized unknown Delete Copy BCicon Scale 10 n All families Accept Cancel Click Copy Figure 4 80 Family Boundary Condition window for BOARD_SURF Tutorial Manual ANSYS Tutorials Family boundary conditions x M CHIP Boundary Conditions Element Type Create new Paste SLUHF INTERFACE V BCicon 20846 10 n Al families Accept Cancel In the same window now got to Mixed Unknown gt BOARD_SURF gt Create new and select Nodal Surface Loads type from the list ANSYS Tutorials Figure 4 81 x BC selection window for BOARD SURF Select a BC type Nodal Surface Loads n Electromagnetic material Flatran nan fuid material Material Properties Named Local Coordinate System Nodal Body Loads Nodal DOF Constraint Nodal Forces Nodal Surface Loads Structural material Thermal material Okay Cancel Figure 4 82 Bulk Temperature defining for BOARD_SURF Tutorial Manual ANSYS Tutorials Family boundary conditions d x m Volumes Nodal Surface Loads ers oF Label Surface Convection Boundary Conditions Element Type Create new Paste Nodes feta EH Mised unknown Film 0 01 Create new Bulk temperature 299 Paste ooo Boundary Conditions v Nodal Surface Loads CHIP SU
452. ments penetrate through each other Disconnected bar elements This flags line elements where one or both nodes are not connected to other elements 2 Single edges This locates surface elements with two single edges These are either corners of baffles or are triangles that are protruding from a surface like a shark s fin and are thus undesirable in the mesh These elements are a subset of the single edges check and can normally be deleted 2 14 ANSYS ICEM CFD Al Environment 10 0 User Manual SAS IP Inc Section 2 3 Important Features in Tetra Single Multiple edges This check locates elements that have both single and multiple edges Stand alone surface mesh This check locates surface elements that do not share a face with a volume element This could be an area with an extra surface element to be deleted or a missing volume element to be created Single edges This check will locate surface cells that have an edge that isn t shared with any other surface cell This would represent a hanging edge and the cell would be considered an internal baffle These may or may not be le gitimate Legitimate single edges would occur where the geometry has a zero thickness baffle with a free or hanging edge or in a 2D model at the perimeter of the domain If the single edges form a closed loop a hole in the surface mesh the user can select Fix when prompted from the appearing menu A new set of triangles will then be created to eliminate th
453. mesh Boundary nodes will project on to geometry volumes are interpolated Check mesh quality to ensure that specified mesh quality criteria are met Write Output files to the desired solvers If necessary the user may always return to previous steps to manipulate the blocking if the mesh does not meet the desired quality or if the mesh does not capture certain geometry features The blocking may be saved at any time thus allowing the user to return to previous block topologies At any point in this process the user can generate the mesh with various projection schemes such as full face projection edge projection point projection or no projection at all In the case of no projection the mesh will be generated on the faces of the block model and may be used to quickly determine if the current blocking strategy is adequate or if it must be modified Afterwards a block file can be used as a template for similar geometries such as parametric design changes Necessary alterations can either be done manually automatically update projection or running a replay script depending on the nature of the change c The Blocking Database The blocking database block file will have an extension of blk It contains all the information necessary for defining and computing the block structured mesh including block definitions part associations and mesh size parameters Block definitions include the following block topology types Verti
454. mesh in another Go through the smoothing steps again as in the base tet prism mesh Remember to Freeze the prism elements until the core has been smoothed as much as possible The final histogram should be similar to that shown in Figure 3 263 Select Info gt Mesh Info Now the information in the messages window indicates the LIVE part has roughly Tutorial Manual Figure 3 263 Final quality histogram Tetra Meshing 200 000 elements The Hex Core operation cut the mesh by roughly 759 Min 0 194698 1 12 0 01 02 O05 04 05 06 07 05 O48 1 n Saving the project save the mesh by selecting File gt Save Project If a question box pops up asking whether to delete disconnected vertices respond by saying Yes Then close the project by selecting File gt Close Project Tutorial Manual Tetra Meshing 3 4 5 Piston Valve Overview In this tutorial example the user will define a thin cut in the Geometry to mark a region where ANSYS ICEMCTD Tetra will generate a thin layer of elements The user will then generate and smooth a tetrahedral mesh for a piston valve configuration Figure 3 264 Piston valve figure with labeled surface S mE _ a Summary of Steps Starting the project Repairing the geometry Assigning the mesh sizes Generating the tetrahedral mesh Conversion from Linear to quadratic Diagnostics Saving the project Tutorial Manual Tetra Meshing
455. meshing of Connecting Rod geometry by extruding the shell elements writing the input file to solve this Linear Static problem in Nastran and Post Processing the results The geometry 15 shown in Figure 4 239 Figure 4 239 Connectin g Rod Model a Summary of Steps Launch AI Environment and load geometry file Geometry Editing Repair Mesh parameters and Meshing Mesh Sizing Meshing Extrusion of the surface mesh Materials and Element Properties Tutorial Manual Nastran Tutorials Selection of Material Element Properties Subsets Subset Subset2 Constraints and Loads Constraints Loads Solver setup Setup Nastran Run Write Nastran Input File Save Project Solution and Results Solving the Problem Post processing of results in Visual3p b Launch AI Environment Launch the AI Environment from UNIX or DOS window Then File gt Change working directory ACN docu FEAHelp AI Tutorial Files Load the tetin file Conrod tin c Geometry Editing For this tutorial user is requested to use Conrod tin file lying in the AI Tutorial Files directory as mentioned in Tpipe tutorial Repair Click on 4 Repair Geometry icon from Geometry Tab Menubar which pops up Repair Geometry window as shown Figure 4 240 By default Build Nastran Tutorials Topology option is selected Make sure that Inherited is toggled ON for New Part Name and press Apply Figure 4 240 Repair Geometry window
456. metry after deleting surface d Mesh Parameters and Meshing Since this 15 a shell model Mesh Size information needs to be assigned to the curves The mesh generated will be Quad Dominant i e The mesh generated is associated with the geometry Mesh sizing Select A Set Curve Mesh Size icon from Mesh Tab Menu bar which pops up Curve Mesh Size window shown in Figure 4 153 In the Method select General click on amp Select Curve s button to select Curves Place the mouse cursor in display window and press from keyboard to select all curves Enter Maximum Size of 4 for this case and press Apply Tutorial Manual Nastran Tutorials Figure Curve Mesh Size Curve Mesh H Size window n Curve Mesh Parameters Method General Select L urve s topo surf 366112 topo 5 aximum Size Number of Nodes Height o 0 Ratio 56 Minimum size o 7 Maximum deviation 7 Advanced Bunching Bunching law 73 Spacing 1 Ratio 1 Spacing 2 5 Ratio 2 Space Adjust attached curves Remesh attached surfaces Blank curves with params Apply ck Dismiss Tutorial Manual Nastran Tutorials Now in the Model Tree place the mouse cursor on Curves press right button and select Curve Node Spacing Also de select Color by count and Show wide which will show the Curve Node Spacing in Figure 4 154
457. mouse key depressed until the vertex can be moved no further position the cursor beyond the end of the curve will assure that the end is captured Move the remaining vertices to their appropriate positions on the geometry until the blocking resembles Figure 3 53 Try to Tutorial Manual Figure 3 53 Move the rest of the vertice S to their positio n Hexa Meshing make the blocks as orthogonal good internal angles as possible he L gt d a Li a p E F _ um 13 3 When finished complete the operation by selecting the middle mouse button or Dismiss to exit the Move Vertices window Right mouse key will undo the previous vertex movement NOT exit the function save the current work to a file by choosing File gt Blocking gt Save Blocking As Provide a filename such as so Tutorial Manual Hexa Meshing that the file may be reloaded at a later time using File gt Blocking gt Load blocking h Generating the Mesh First Mesh parameters sizes must be set on the geometry curves in this 2D case 0 Select Mesh gt Set Curve Mesh size to invoke the window seen in Figure 3 54 Keep Method as General Set Maximum Size to 1 Ignore all other parameters Select the visible Curves can select for visible or for all or selec
458. mply the modification of a single block or blocks to a 5 sub block topology as shown in Figure 3 1 Initial block block with O Grid O Grid with include a face There are several variations of the basic O grid generation technique and the O grid shown below is created entirely inside the selected block 3 4 ANSYS ICEM CFD Al Environment 10 0 User Manual SAS IP Inc Section 3 8 Using the Automatic O grid Figure 3 1 Initial block block with O Grid O Grid with include a face Using the Add face option an O grid may also be created such that the O grid passes through the selected block faces In Figure the Add Face option was used on the right most block to add the bottom face on the block prior to generating the O grid ANSYS CFD Al Environment 10 0 User Manual SAS IP Inc 3 5 Chapter 3 Hexa Another important feature of the automatic O grid is the ability to re scale the O grid after generation When the O grid is generated the size of the O grid is scaled based upon a factor in the Blocking O grid parameter window The Re scale O grid option allows the user to re scale the previously generated O grid The blocks may also be modified by moving the vertices of the blocks and by defining specific relationships between the faces edges and vertices to the geometry 3 9 Most Important Features of Hexa Hexa has emerged as the quickest and most comprehensive software for generating large highly accurate 3D
459. mport Mesh gt From Nastran from the Main menu which will open the Import Nastran File window shown in Figure 4 105 Make sure LS Dyna is selected as the solver via Settings gt Solver and hit Apply Figure 4 105 Import Hastran File Import Nastran File window ee Nastran File Files FrDiaar dat HBE3 Elements Unchanged Bar Elements Unchanged Shell Elements Unchanged Apply ox Cancel Press Apply in the Import Nastran File window LS Dyna Tutorials Change Solver to LS Dyna Verification of imported data Expand the Material Properties branch of the Display Tree by clicking on the button Double click on IsotropicMat2 or right click on it and select Modify to open the Define Material Property window as shown in Figure 4 106 LS Dyna Tutorials Figure 4 106 Define Material Define Material Property Property window Material Mame ate Material 2 sotropic Young Modulus E Constant Waning Value 200000 Shear Modulus G Constant Varing Poisson s Ratio NU Constant Yawning Value 0 28 Mass Density HHO Constant 4 Yaning Value 0 000000 T NNICEMCFD _ Dismiss Apply LS Dyna Tutorials Modifying Density and LS Dyna Material Type for Materials Change the constant value of Young s Modulus from 200000 to 1 0e 8 and the constant value of Mass Density from 0 0 to 7
460. ms using ref size Apply Dismiss On the prism form Figure 3 290 press Apply to start prism mesh computation By default the prism domain will be loaded Generally it is a good idea to check the quality of the hybrid mesh tet prism Select Smooth mesh icon on Edit Mesh to invoke the smooth mesh panel Figure 3 292 shows this panel Set Up to Quality to 0 3 and press Apply Repeat the smoothing several times until the quality approaches 0 3 Save the mesh by selecting File gt Save Project If a question box pops up asking whether to delete disconnected vertices respond by saying Yes Tutorial Manual Figure 3 292 Smooth hybrid mesh Tetra Meshing Appendix Smooth Elements Globally z Quality smoothing iterations 5 Up to quality 0 3 Criterion Quality omooth Mesh Type Smooth Freeze Float TETRA_ 4 THI 3 e CC _ re m QUAD 4 e CC Lj Smooth Parts 5Subsets Method All parts Apply Dismiss o Subdividing the prism layer On model tree gt mesh select Cut Plane and observe the single layer of prism Figure 3 293 Select Edit Mesh Tab gt Split Mesh gt Split Prism it will open a window as shown in Figure 3 294 press Apply The single prism layer breakes into 5 layers Figure 3 295 Tutorial Manual Tetra Meshing Appendix Figure 3 293 Cut plane showing a layer of prism Tutorial Manual Tetra Meshing App
461. n be consistent with and connected to the existing mesh nodes 2 2 Tetra Generation Steps The steps involved in generating a Tetra mesh are Geometry Repair Clean up Geometry details required Sizes on Surfaces Curves Meshing inside small angles or in small gaps between objects Desired Mesh Region Run Tetra The Octree Approach Check the mesh for errors Edit mesh to correct any errors Smooth the mesh to improve quality The mesh is then ready to apply loads boundary conditions etc and for writing to the desired solver 2 2 1 Repair Geometry Refer to the CAD Repair section 2 2 ANSYS ICEM CFD Al Environment 10 0 User Manual SAS IP Inc Section 2 2 Tetra Generation Steps 2 2 2 Geometry Details Required In addition to a closed set of surfaces Tetra requires curves and points where hard features hard angles corners are to be captured in the mesh The first figure below shows a set of curves and points representing hard features of the geometry where the second and third figure show the resultant mesh with and without the curves and points preserved Figure 2 shows the resultant surface mesh if the curves and points are preserved in the geometry Mesh nodes are forced to lie along the curves and points to capture the hard features of the geometry Figure 3 shows the resultant surface mesh if the curves and points are deleted from the geometry The hard features of the geometry are not preser
462. n Ansys Press Apply to start the Ansys solver in Interactive mode ANSYS Tutorials Figure 4 67 Run Sol ral Run Solver window won Solver SYS Ansys Hun Mode Interactive C Batch Input File ge DuputFie fansysout ee working Directoy Graphics Device wIN32 Initial Jobname file Total Workspace Total Database Head uc al he tart up Select Ansys ANSYS Multiphysics Produc ANSYS Multiphysics Apply Cancel After the Ansys Interactive window has come up load the input file by going to File gt Read Input From Select where file is the Initial Jobname specified in the previous window Check that the solution converges in the convergence graph This happens when the two lines cross The user can work in Ansys after this 1f desired or exit out of Ansys and Post Process the results in ICEMCFD ANSYS Tutorials Post Processing of Results Click on the Solve Options Post Process Results e button which opens the Post Process Results window given in Figure 4 68 Select the folder button to browse for the file file rst where file is the Initial Jobname specified earlier Press Apply to launch the Visual3p Post processor with the Ansys result file Figure 4 68 Post Process Results a Post Process window Solver ANSYS Result File ls PinHole file Apply ck
463. n Figure 4 175 and press Apply Tutorial Manual Figure 4 175 Global MeshSize window Nastran Tutorials Global Mesh Size Global Mesh Parameters Global Element Scale Factor Scale factor Display Global Element Seed Size Max element 64 Display Natural Size Enabled SIZE Display Cells in gap Refinement Ignore wall Thickness Triangle tolerance 0 001 Linitlezs tri tolerance Tutorial Manual Nastran Tutorials Select Set Surface Mesh Size icon from Mesh Tab Menubar which will pop Surface Mesh Size window as shown in Figure 4 176 Click on Choose an item and select all the surfaces by pressing ensure that the mouse cursor is in display window Enter Maximum Size of 2 as shown in Figure 4 176 and press Apply Figure 4 176 SIE i Surface Mesh ear EA i Size window Sufaceis 828 5 A Maximum size Height 0 Height ratio 0 Humber of layers Tetra size ratio 0 size 0 deviation 0 Blank surfaces with params Apply ck Dismiss Now in the Model Tree place the mouse cursor on Geometry gt Surfaces and press right button and select Tetra Sizes which will show tetra sizes of the surfaces as shown in Figure 4 177 and then turn off the Surface Tetra Sizes by deselecting Surface gt Tetra Sizes in Model Tree Tutorial Manual Nastran Tutorials Figure 4 177 Surfac es
464. n Information Accept Cancel Choose File Information gt Mesh File as BJET_c3d mesh mg this should be the default Cart3D Click on Case Information and enter the following parameters as shown in Figure 3 555 Mach number 0 8 Angle of attack 1 8 Side slip angle 0 0 Free Stream Density 1 0 Free Stream Sound Speed 1 0 Figure Solver parameters 3 555 File Information Case Information Case Case Information n8 E Solver Controls Informat Boundary Conditions Angle of attack 1 8 5 ion Covergence History Side slip angle 00 Window Partition Information Free Stream Density 1 0 Free Stream Sound Speed Accept Cancel Expand Solver Controls gt Runge Kutta Scheme in the Display Tree as shown in Figure 3 556 and accept the default settings Tutorial Manual Cart3D Figur Solver parameters e File Information Runge Kutta Scheme 3 556 Case Information Number of stages Solver Controls Ru ng Runge Kutta Scheme Stagel coefficent 0 0695 e Other controls Eval Gradient 1 Kutta Stagez coefficent 0 1602 Covergence History Wind Partition Information Eval Gradient 0 Stages coefficent 0 2898 Eval Gradient 0 Staged coefficent 0 5060 Eval Gradient 0 coefficent 1 0 Eval Gradient 0 OW Accept Cancel In Other controls specify the following values for the parameters as in Figure 3 557 CFL number 1 4 Limiter
465. n Tpipe directory Figure Project As 4 164 Save Save in Cx Project in a New Directory window Computer a a 7 File name Tpipe Network P Save as type Project Files pri It saves additional fours files Geometry file Mesh file Attribute file and Parameter files as Tpipe tin Tpipe uns Tpipe fbc and Tpipe par respectively along with the project file Tpipe prj Write Nastran Input File Click on Write View Input File icon from Solve Options Tab Menu bar Tutorial Manual Nastran Tutorials Feed the Nastran file name as Tpipe dat and switch View Nastran file as shown in Figure 4 165 and press Apply in Write View Input File window Figure 4 165 Wirite iew Input Write View File i Input File Ax Window Solver NASTRAN Mastran File pe TPipe dat Volume Elements Defined gt Shell Elements Defined gt Bar Elements Defined Thickness Distribution BCDefined Large Field Format Use Continuation Card View Nastran File Apply ox Dismiss User will see that the Nastran input data file comes up in the default text editor If user likes to edit this file directly then this can be done and can save the edited file through this text editor Since this example needs no editing just close the editor h Solution and Results Modal analysis
466. n fit the inside of the O grid to the cube using the prescribed points of the model which is shown in Figure 3 120 Hexa Meshing Figure 3 120 The Sphere Cube Geomet ry c Starting the Project From UNIX or DOS window start ANSYS ICEMCFD File gt Change working directory to the ACN docu CFDHelp CFD Tutorial Files Open the Sphere Cube project and load geometry tin d Creating Parts As in the 3D Pipe Junction tutorial associate the geometry into different Parts before proceeding with the blocking Tutorial Manual Figure 3 121 The Sphere cube with labeled Surfaces Hexa Meshing In the Display tree turn on Surfaces Right mouse select Parts and select Create Part Type in SYMM the Part field and select Create Part by Selection or Select entities Select the four surfaces on the bottom of the geometry as in Figure 3 121 Press the middle mouse button or Apply similarly create new parts SPHERE and CUBE referring to Figure 3 121 as a guide 771 SPHERE 1 SYHH 20 l 1 C UHE E CHEE 4 ETHH 3 For this tutorial we will leave the curves and points in the GEOM Tutorial Manual Hexa Meshing e Creating the Material Point Select Geometry gt Create Body F gt Material Point enter LIVE in the Part field select either Material Point or Select location s E and
467. n the Curve mesh params window and press Apply followed by Dismiss to close the window Select the Orient gt Home option Select Geometry gt Create Body REN Point A window will appear Select the family name as LIVE Press Accept Click on two opposite corners of CYL using the left mouse button Press the middle mouse button to complete the operation Tutorial Manual Figure 3 353 LIVE Body Created Advanced Meshing Tutorials Turn on Materials Rotate the model to ensure that LIVE lies inside the left section as shown in Figure 3 353 Select File gt Save project Enter any Name Select Mesh Volume Meshing 9 gt From Geometry Window Mesh with tetrahedral parameters will appear Figure 3 354 Press Apply to generate the tetra mesh Tutorial Manual Advanced Meshing Tutorials Figure 3 354 Mesh Wala Mesh with Tetrahedra window Mesh type Tetra Method Smooth mesh Iterations A quality o Coarsen mesh Iterations EG Worst aspect ratio Smooth transition Factor Options Run as batch process Only visible geometry Part by Part Load mesh after completion Apply oK Dismiss Tetra mesh will be generated as shown in Figure 3 355 Figure 3 355 Tetra Mesh in Left Section with Solid wire mode Tutorial Manual Advanced Meshing Tutorials Note Even though Tetra Mesh is created we again save by anot
468. n the mesh For improved cell quality Tetra incorporates a powerful smoothing algorithm as well as tools for local adaptive mesh refinement and coarsening For more useful information on Tetra please go to http www berkeley ansys com faq faq topic 2 html 2 1 1 Tetra mesh generation Suitable for complex geometries Tetra offers several advantages including Rapid model set up e Mesh is independent of underlying surface topology No surface mesh necessary Generation of mesh directly from CAD or STL surfaces Definition of cell size on CAD or STL surfaces Control over cell size inside a volume Nodes and edges of tetrahedra are matched to prescribed points and curves Natural size automatically determines tetrahedra size for individual geometry features Volume and surface mesh smoothing merging nodes and swapping edges Tetrahedral mesh be merged into another tetra hexa or hybrid mesh and then can be smoothed e Coarsening of individual material domains Enforcement of mesh periodicity both rotational and translational Surface mesh editing and diagnostic tools Local adaptive mesh refinement and coarsening Oneconsistent mesh for multiple materials Fast algorithm 1500 cells second e Automatic detection of holes and easy way to repair the mesh For more details go to Run Tetra The Octree Approach 2 1 2 Input to Tetra The following are possible inputs to Tetra Sets of B Spline cu
469. n uns Close the geometry and mesh files e Working on the entire display Load the following domain files body uns bfin uns and ffin uns Select Merge as prompted to merge all together There is only one fin at the front and one at the back We will copy and rotate these fins to get the remaining three sets Normally it is easier to do this at geometry level Select Edit gt Mesh gt Facets in the main menu The Create sharp features window appears as shown in Figure 3 523 Press No Cart3D Figure 3 523 Create Sharp Features window e do Do you want to build in sharp features Then the Merge window appears which asks us to Merge close nodes in the surfaces as shown in Figure 3 524 Press No Figure 3 524 Merge xj Merge window Merge clase nodes in the surfaces In the Display Display Tree widget switch off Mesh and switch on Surfaces gt Solid 6 Select File gt Mesh gt Close Mesh and say No in the Save Mesh window Note The main purpose of this tutorial is to create faceted surface which can be converted to mesh triangles at the end of the process It is advisable to perform the operation Parts gt Reassign Colors gt Good colors for a good view of the geometry From the Geometry tab select Transform Geometry and Rotate Geometry Tutorial Manual Cart3D In the window press Select entities A Select Geometry window pops up as shown in Figure 3 525 Figure o
470. name field and specifying the coordinates as 32 0 0 Tutorial Manual Geometry Creation Now enter the coordinates as shown below and press Apply after each one You will see the names automatically change to the ones shown below POINTS 2 0 16 0 POINTS 3 32 16 0 POINTS 4 48 32 0 POINTS 5 48 64 0 POINTS 6 64 32 0 POINTS 7 64 64 0 POINTS 8 50 5 0 POINTS 9 54 5 0 POINTS 10 16 32 0 POINTS 11 0 32 0 POINTS 12 50 16 0 POINTS 13 54 16 0 Figure 3 3 Points created thus far Geometry Creation gOINITS 5 JgqPOINTS 7 goINTS 11 gOINTS 10 POINTS 4 gOINIS 6 2 3 gORNIENTE 13 FOINTS 0 FOINTS 1 9 Press Dismiss to close the window Display window should now show the points as seen in Figure 3 3 Line Creation Geometry gt Create Modify Curve gt From Points Select the From Points option 4 to open the window as shown in Figure 3 4 Tutorial Manual Geometry Creation Figure 3 4 Create Modify 9 From points window Curve Part CURVES a Name CURVES 0 OCB Wc From Points Points AX cus Tolerance 0 001 To select Points click on select point icon and then select POINTS 0 and POINTS 1 with the left mouse button Press the middle mouse button to accept the points The point names will appear in the selection window Enter the Part as CURVES and the Nam
471. ndary condition The purpose is to study the shock behavior of a classical pitot tube intake for a variety of back pressures The Tutorial introduces the following operations 1 Running the solver for three different cases Critical Sub Critical and Super Critical Visualize the results in Post Processing a Starting the Project Load ANSYS CFD Change the working directory by File gt Change Working Dir and set the location to the folder pitot pitot uns is located in that folder Cart3D Note It is preferable to create a separate folder pitot and put pitot uns domain file and Density boxes tin geometry file in that folder before performing this tutorial select Open Mesh 23 from the main menu and select pitot uns Select Open Geometry to load Density boxes tin which contains density boxes set up for bow and lip shock resolution Turn on Geometry gt Densities the Display Tree widget to see the density regions b Mesh Generation Preview Only Click on Cart3D from the main menu Select Volume Mesher get the Cart3D Mesher window as shown in Figure 3 582 Figure 3 582 2e Omsk Edi as Leeds Faki Deters Cart 3D GUI windo Tutorial Manual Cart3D Leave Fix Normals enabled This will fix the triangle orientations such that their normals are pointing outward
472. ne Cancel Using parts in the Display Tree widget the user is able to browse the parts of the model The close up view of the PORT and SHROUD part is shown in Figure 3 268 between which the thin cut will be defined ru Figure 3 268 The PORT and SHROUD parts When finished press Done Select Apply in the Global Mesh Size window to activate the modifications Press Dismiss to Close the Global Mesh Size window Tutorial Manual Tetra Meshing Setting the surface mesh size select Mesh gt Set Surface Mesh size to set the meshing parameters on the surfaces of the model Select Press the a keyboard key to select all surfaces In the Set Surface Mesh Size window Figure 3 269 enter Maximum Element size of 16 and press Apply Figure 3 269 Surface Mesh Size a Edit the surface meshing sizes Suface s WA aximum size Height 0 Height ratio 0 Number of layers 5 Tetra size ratio 0 size 0 deviation 0 Blank surfaces with params Apply ok Dismiss h Setting curve mesh size _ Next select Mesh gt Set Curve Mesh size X to set the meshing parameters on the curves of the model Select amp Press the a keyboard key to select all curves Tetra Meshing In the Curve Mesh Size window Figure 3 270 enter all the parameters 0 Press Apply followed by Dismiss to close the window Tetra Meshing Figure 3
473. ne Young s modulus as 207000 Define Poisson s ratio as 0 28 Define Density as 7 8e 9 leave other fields as it is in Define Material Property window Press Apply Tutorial Manual Nastran Tutorials Element Properties ID element properties Ni Select Define 1D Element Properties icon from the Properties Tab Menu bar It will open Define Line Elements window as shown in Figure 4 224 select the Part as SEAM WELDO Select Type as Rigids Select rigid type as Rigid Body RBE2 Press Ok So that this window will be closed and again click Define 1D element properties Note The Material and PID turns grey scale after selecting Rigid Beam Repeat these steps to define properties for other Line elements of Spot welds and BOLT HOLES SS A Tutorial Manual Nastran Tutorials Figure 4 224 _ amp Define Line Define Line Element if Element Do eE window Part SEAM_wELDO is Material PID 0 Properties Higid Properties Rigid type Rigid Body RBE 2 Dependent DOF 123456 Apply Dismiss Shell Element Properties Select Define 2D Element Properties icon from the Properties Tab Menubar Set PID as 1001 in Define Shell Elements window Select the Part as PART 1001 to apply the property to Select Material as STEEL and leave other things are as default Enter Thickness as 2 5 Press Ap
474. near the base of the wing p 0 5 Blocking gt Split Block 9 gt Split Block 9 Select the edge connecting vertices 135 and 165 Make sure that Tutorial Manual Figure 3 204 Splitting at the wing tip Hexa Meshing the Max K the Index Control is 3 Then split this edge by the same prescribed point POINTS 18 Blocking gt Split Block gt Split Block Select the edge connecting vertices 237 and 165 and split this edge by the Prescribed point POINTS 16 which is near the trailing edge and base of the wing Switch off the Points The blocking at this stage should appear as shown in Figure 3 204 In the Index control press Select corners and select the vertices 236 and 267 to restrict the display to the one block around the wing And also switch on Points Os Blocking gt Split Block gt Split Block VY Select the edge connecting vertices 230 and 231 Then turn Points back on and split this edge by the Prescribed point POINTS 7 which is at the leading edge base of the wing Tutorial Manual Figure 3 205 Splits around the wing Hexa Meshing Blocking gt Split Block 3 gt Split Block 1 Select the edge connecting vertices 230 and 307 and split this edge by the prescribed point POINTS 8 at the leading edge base of the wing Switch off Points Then press Reset in the Index Control to display the full blocking again The blocking should look as in F
475. nerate the tetrahedral mesh on the geometry as shown in Figure 4 74 ANSYS Tutorials Figure 4 74 Completed tetra mesh Smoothing and checking the mesh To smoothen the mesh Select Edit mesh gt Smooth mesh globally will invoke a smooth mesh globally window Press Apply with the default parameters After smoothing the mesh just check the mesh for any errors and possible problems with Edit mesh gt Check mesh 8 gt essing Apply in the check mesh window will Tutorial Manual ANSYS Tutorials check for the error and possible problems in the generated mesh If there are no any errors then we can proceed for defining the material properties h Defining the material properties Now after generating the tetrahedral mesh we have to define the material properties Select Properties gt Create material property This will bring up a define material property window Enter Material name as MAT BOARD material ID as 1 Type as Isotropic Value for Young modulus E as 15000 Poisson s ratio nu 0 28 Density RHO as 1 4e 9 Thermal Expansion coefficient as 19e 6 and Ref Temperature as 298 Press Apply After defining material property for board material MAT BOARD we have to define material property for MAT CHIP Enter Material name as MAT CHIP Material ID as 1 Type as Isotropic Young modulus as 70000 Poission s ratio as 0 17 Density as 2 2e 9 Thermal Expansion Coefficient as 10e 6 and Ref
476. nes in dir 3 lr k Number of Cut Planes in z dir 3 1 Mesh Intemal Region Apply Dismiss Click Apply to run the mesher This will create a domain file with 3 Cut Planes Quad Elements in each coordinate direction and Cut Cells Hex Elements The Preview mesh will be loaded automatically Tutorial Manual Cart3D Note As in previous tutorials the mesh can be viewed by switching on the Cut Plane to be viewed 2g Mesh Generation Full Mesh Now in the Cart3D Mesher window enable Create and Save Full Mesh and change the Number of Multi grid levels to 3 as shown in Figure 3 535 This will create 3 levels of coarsened mesh which can be read by the solver Figure 3 535 Create and Save Full View Cart3D Mesher CartaD files MISSILE Single Component Fix Normals Nominal Mesh Radius Body ze 4 Lenght x aa Starting Mesh Divisions 444 7 Mum of Cell Refinements E S Compute Parameters Finest Cell Dimensions 1 52 x 1 52 x 1 82 Hesh Creation Preview Mesh Only Create and Save Full Mesh Number of Multi grid levels 3 Outer Bounding Box Minimum Diagonal Point 524 998238 B33 8388f Maximum Diagonal Point 349 5 695 999305 699 Define Surface Family Refinement Define All Surface Refinement Number of Buffer Layers 4 Angle Threshold for 5 Refinement Area Weight Normale Humber of Cut Plan
477. nger diag onal For TETRA 4 tetrahedral cells MED calculates the ratio between the radii of an inscribed sphere to a circumscribed sphere for each cell For TRI 3 triangular cells this operation is done using circles An Aspect ratio of 1 is a perfect cell and an Aspect ratio of 0 indicates that the cell has zero volume Determinant This histogram is based on the determinant of the Jacobian matrix The Jacobian value is based on the difference between the internal angles of the opposing edges within the cell Min angle The Min angle option yields a histogram based upon the minimum internal angle of the cell edges Max warp This histogram is based on the warpage of the quad faces of the prism This is based on the worst angle between two triangles that make up the quad face Skew This histogram is based upon calculations of the maximum skewness of a hexahedral or quadrilateral cell The skewness is defined differently for volume and surface cells For a volume cell itis obtained by taking all pairs of adjacent faces and computing the normals The maximum value thus obtained is normalized so that 0 corresponds to perpendicular faces and 1 corresponds to parallel faces Custom quality One can define one s own quality definition by going to Diagnostics Quality metrics Select the Diagnostic as Custom quality and go for Define custom quality One can change the values there to suit his her needs 2 3 9 Advanced options Prism warpage Ratio Pri
478. ngle Threshald Far nm Refinement Area Weight Normals Number af Cut Planes in dir 3 Humber of Cut Planes in Y dir 3 Number af Cut Planes in Z dir 3 E Mesh Internal Region Apply Dismiss Tutorial Manual Cart3D The Cart3D Mesh window appears which asking about loading the cart3D Full Mesh Press Yes Note The final mesh generated can be examined through Mesh gt Cut Plane as in the previous Tutorials d Overview of Inlet Exit Boundary Condition For all cases 1 0 Pinet 1 y with Minet taken from the exit solution Velocities are normalized by the speed of sound at the inlet Exit conditions were found by using 1 Conservation of mass 2 Isentropic Flow relation 3 I D normal shock relation All cases are done using the INLET EXIT surface Boundary condition for both inflow and outflow Since there are no cells that get the far field boundary condition Mach number Alpha and Beta are used to define the initial condition The subsonic and transonic cases use the subsonic initial condition This 1s necessary since we need the solution to choose the fully supersonic solution downstream of the nozzle throat e CaseA Fully Sub Sonic Flow Setup Flow Cart Parameters In the Cart3D Menu select Solver Click on Define solver prams The parameters window appears as shown in Figure 3 609 This window may open automatically Cart3D Figure 3 609 Solver Paramete
479. nima ted model at 670 77 9 Hz Nastran Tutorials Tranzlation Total 670 779 Hz ds B i 3 1 2b e 22 20 i 17 i5 14 12 11 50 31 33 74 16 57 99 40 oe 23 44 O58 2492 BB 302 16 Tutorial Manual Nastran Tutorials 4 3 2 Bar This exercise explains Tetrahedral meshing of bar geometry writing the input file to solve this Linear Static problem in Nastran and post processing the results the geometry 1s shown in Figure 4 171 Figure 4 171 Bar Geometr y a Summary of Steps Launch AI Environment and load geometry file Geometry Editing Repair Mesh Parameters and Meshing Mesh Sizing Meshing Material and Element Properties Selection of Material Tutorial Manual Nastran Tutorials Element Properties Constraints and Loads Constraints Loads Solver setup setup Nastran Run Write Nastran Input File Save Project Solution and Results Solving the Problem Post processing of Results b Launch AI Environment Launch the AI Environment from UNIX or DOS window Then File gt Change working directory ACN docu FEAHelp AI Tutorial Files Load the tetin file Bar tin m ee Tutorial Manual Nastran Tutorials Figure 4 172 The Bar geometry c Geometry Editing Repair Expand the Geometry branch of Model Tree and turn Surfaces on Click on Repair Geometr
480. ning the Simulation in CFX Pre In this example part of a simple heat exchanger 15 used to model the transfer of heat from a solid to a fluid The model consists of a fluid domain and a solid domain The fluid domain 15 an annular region through which water flows at a constant rate The heater 15 a solid copper coil modeled as a constant heat source The surfaces of the geometry are shown in Figure 5 67 Figure 5 67 Geometry Model 1 Ies peT JA d uiu mE lh i X TOT M Aul pu oe UR a Steps Involved in this Example Importing the geometry in Design modelar Tutorial Manual ANSYS ICEMCFD CFX Tutorials Proceeding to the Advance meshing Creating the Tetra mesh Checking for quality Creating inflated prism layers from the walls b Starting a New Project Creating a New Project Launch the Ansys Workbench and select New gt Advance Meshing Select File gt New Project from the Main menu and click 25 Create New Directory Enter HeatingCoil as the Directory name and press Done Enter HeatingCoil as the project name and press OK c Geometry Importing a Geometry File From the Main Menu select File Import external Geometry file select the HeatingCoil x t file supplied by browsing Press Generate from top menu This loads the geometry file HeatingCoil agdb automatically after the conversion The imported geometr
481. nn Note If the edges lie on the geometry as is the case with longitudinal edges the projection arrows are not shown By default all external edges are surface associated to the nearest active surface and appear as white The association can be set to this default using Associate 65 gt Associate Edge to Surface This operation is useful to correct any Edge to Curve Association mistakes internal edges by default have no association and appear as blue You can set this association which 15 really deleting an association by D j Grouping curves Note This section does not need to be performed on the model but it shows the user how to manually group curves Select Blocking gt Associate e Group curves It will open the window as shown in Figure 3 143 Tutorial Manual Hexa Meshing Figure 3 143 Blocking Group curve window Associations P OK Group Ungroup curves Action f Group Curves C Ungroup Curves Group Selected All tangential Select GEOM 21 AS Apply Dismiss Select the four curves corresponding to OUTLET as shown in the figure and press Apply to group them k Splitting the Topology Using Prescribed Points and Screen Select The following steps instruct the user to split the block in the and J directions around the blade thus creating further blocking topology for the blade The k direction spl
482. nonono 0 External Farces Moments Time start Time step Time end Store result cycle eE 8 Apply Dismiss Choose the un intersected surface tri file BOMBER c3d a tri as the Cart3D geometry file Select BOMB as the Moving component Set Mass of the body 100 0 Cart3D The Principal moments of Inertia have to be specified for three Components Specify Ixx 25 0 Iyy Izz 0 5 Use the non dimensional value for 9 81 m s 0 0 9 78624e 6 0 0 for the Gravity vector Specify the BOMB Center of mass as 1 0 0 4 0 0 Leave the default Initial velocity and Initial Euler values For the Bomber configuration at time t 0 0 the missile is dropped from the vehicle so Time start 0 0 Set Time step 2 0 Calculate the trajectory until Time end 250 Set Store result files cycle 6 so results are saved after every 6 steps Now click on Apply in the Run 6DOF window This will run intersect Cart3D mesher reorder multigrid FlowCart and Clic Then it calculates the new position for the bomb in the next time step and moves the component to the new position in the geometry file a tri Then again goes to intersect The result 1s stored intermittently as specified by the Store result files cycle value The time step will be included in the name of the results files Cart3D 3 7 7 Advanced Pitot Intake Tutorial Overview This 1s a benchmark verification case for the Cart3D inlet bou
483. ntrol from 0 to 1 in the minimum left column does not result in any change in the block edge display Likewise no change occurs when the maximum number Nmax is decreased to Nmax 1 in the right column The index ranges 0 to 1 and Nmax to Nmax 1 are used by blocks in the part that form an outer perimeter around the initial central block These outer blocks are visible Figure 3 68 if the VOREN part is turned on in the Index control panel The outer blocks are used for O grid propagation to be explained later in this manual To simplify the display leave the volume family turned off for now Create two vertical splits one through PNTS 4 the other through PNTS 7 If needed adjust the Index control to I 2 5 while keeping the J index the same Create a horizontal split through PNTS 4 Hexa Meshing Select Reset in the Index control panel so that the block appears as shown in Figure 3 69 Note how these new splits don t propagate through all of the blocks Figure 3 69 Additional Split Next carve out a block above each bumper First set the Index control to I 2 5 J 2 3 Create a horizontal split through PNTS 1 Reset the Index Control of J 2 5 as in Figure 3 70 Figur 3 70 The Mid Block Change Index control to I 2 5 and J 3 4 Proceed to create two vertical splits through PNTS 2 and PNTS 8 Tutorial Manual Hexa Meshing Reset the indices and turn off Points Your bloc
484. nts is not displayed in the histogram Advanced options Only visible subsets Tetra Meshing Appendix This smooth only visible subsets Active parts only This will smooth only active parts from the screen Laplace smoothing This option will solve the Laplace equation which will generally yield a more uniformly spaced mesh All elements This will smooth all the visible and invisible elements Quality metric Violate geometry Selecting this option allows the smoothing operation to yield a higher quality mesh by violating the constraints of the geometry When this option is activated however the smoothing operation has a greater degree of freedom The nodes can be moved off of the geometry to obtain better mesh quality as long as it remains within the absolute distance that 1s specified by the user Tolerance Allowance to so that smoother can violate geometry by mentioned distance Min edge Minimum edge that is allowed to occur after smoothing Length Value of the minimum edge If the user has highlighted bars from the histogram and selected to Show them on the model choosing Select will modify the display so that only those elements are visible These elements are also placed into a Subset The visibility of this subset 15 controlled by toggling Display subset from the Display window The contents of the subset may also be altered with the Modify option Add select This option allows the user to add eleme
485. nts to an already established subset Changing this option allows the user to modify what the histogram displays TS P Tutorial Manual Tetra Meshing Appendix Quality This histogram displays the overall quality of the mesh The x axis measures the quality with 0 representing poor quality and 1 representing high quality The y axis measures the number of elements that belong within each quality sub range Quality 4 3 version This will calculate the quality as per the 4 3 version Aspect ratio For HEXA 8 hexahedral and QUAD 4 quadrilateral elements the Aspect ratio 1s defined as the ratio of the distances between diagonally opposite vertices shorter diagonal longer diagonal For 4 tetrahedral elements MED calculates the ratio between the radii of an inscribed sphere to a circumscribed sphere for each element For TRI 3 triangular elements this operation is done using circles An Aspect ratio of 1 is a perfect cell and an Aspect ratio of 0 indicates that the element has zero volume Determinant This histogram is based on the determinant of the Jacobian matrix The Jacobian value is based on the difference between the internal angles of the opposing edges within the element Min angle The Min angle option yields a histogram based upon the minimum internal angle of the element edges Max othogls Max warp This histogram 15 based
486. o curves Select Associate Associate Edge to Curve window shown in Figure 3 140 will open Press the edge selection icon then select the four edges shown in Figure 3 141 and press the middle mouse button Then press the curve selection icon amp and select the four curves shown in Figure 3 140 and press the middle mouse button Then press Apply Notice that the block edges then transform from white to green confirming their association with the curve Also notice that the four curves Tutorial Manual Hexa Meshing become one color indicating that they have been grouped into one curve Figure 3 140 Blocking Association window Associations Edit Associations o au OKO Edges 22260 262 S Curve s BEOM 22 ES Project vertices Project to surface intersection Project ends to curve Intersection Tutorial Manual Hexa Meshing Figure 3 141 Select these edges Edges and Curve selection for association Select these curves Similarly associate the four edges on the other circle to the corresponding four curves To see a confirmation of these associations right mouse click on Blocking gt Edges gt Show Association in the Display Tree The geometry should look as shown in Figure 3 142 Tutorial Manual Hexa Meshing Figure 3 142 it The Edge Projection TR r 1 1 TOI OA EH 3 T E m a
487. o fit the Initialized Blocking more closely to the geometry the user will associate vertices to points Ww Select Blocking gt Associate gt Associate Vertex and the window shown in Figure 3 137 will open Toggle ON Geometry gt Points and right mouse click on Vertices gt Numbers under Blocking from Display Tree Then toggle ON Blocking gt Vertices Associate vertex window Associations P Edit Associations es KDX Associate Vertex gt Entity C Self Point C Curve C Surface Vertex 42 Ta Point GEOM 7 et Apply ox Dismiss Select Point under Entity Tutorial Manual Hexa Meshing Press the vertex selection icon and select Vertex 42 Press the point selection icon and select Point GEOM 7 and press Apply to associate them as shown in Figure 3 138 similarly associate the other vertices and points for the inlet and outlet so that after completion the geometry should look like as shown in Figure 3 139 Figure 3 138 Movin g the vertice S Figure 3 139 Geometry after associating all vertices to corresponding points Tutorial Manual Hexa Meshing Note When possible the Block vertices on any circular geometry should be placed so that edges are equal in length and the angles between edges are 90 degrees This amounts to vertices being placed at 45 135 225 and 315 degrees around the circle This results in the best mesh quality i Associating edges t
488. o the global scale factor and is the smallest size to be achieved through automatic element subdivision Even with large sizes specified on the surfaces the features can be captured automatically The Natural size is the minimum element size to be achieved via automatic subdivision If the maximum size on a geometry entity is smaller than Natural size Tetra will still subdivide to meet that requested size The effect of the natural size is a geometry based adaptation of the mesh 2 3 2 Tetrahedral Mesh Smoother In smoothing the mesh the tetrahedral smoother calculates individual cell quality based on the selection from the list of available criteria The smoother modifies the cells with quality below the specified Up to quality value Nodes can be moved and or merged edges are swapped and in some cases cells are deleted This operation is then repeated on the improved grid up to the specified number of iterations The user can choose to smooth some element types while freezing others 2 12 ANSYS ICEM CFD Al Environment 10 0 User Manual SAS IP Inc Section 2 3 Important Features in Tetra 2 3 3 Tetrahedral Mesh Coarsener During the coarsening process the user can exclude surface or material domains by selecting those Parts in the Parts to freeze panel If the Maintain surface sizes option is enabled during coarsening the resulting mesh satisfies the specified mesh size criteria on the geometric entities 2 3 4 Triangular
489. oads can be applied on Points Lines Surfaces and elements But here there is an extra option called subset which may contain a group of surfaces or elements Subset1 Nastran Tutorials In Display Tree click the right mouse button on Subset under Mesh and select Create option This will pop up Create Subset window as shown in Figure 4 249 Ensure that all the geometry entities are turned from Display Model Tree Enter Subset as Subset1 and click on e Create Subset by Selection icon in Create Subset window Toggle Off Points Lines and Volume under Mesh in the Display Tree To select the elements on Crank end for this subset click on Element s button and press p from key board ensure that the mouse cursor is in display window which allows to select the shell elements as shown in Figure 4 250 by drawing a polygon shown in Figure 4 250 and press Apply Figure 4 249 Create Subset ay Create Subset window T Subset Subset Vw Create Subset Create Subset by Selection Entities pes Apply ok Dismiss Tutorial Manual Figure 4 250 Elemen ts selectio n by polygo n and elemen ts selecte d for Subset 1 Nastran Tutorials a m m m Tutorial Manual Nastran Tutorials EHI LEE MEI ET rr LY Rev
490. ock Index arid Index fe 411 ti xl Select 4 za 2 p tf 41 ftl 3 p t tll ii First select which index plane you wish to turn on 0 1 2 represents I J K respectively 3 represents the radial o grid direction In this model I J K 1s more or less lined up with the global X Y Z coordinates respectively The scan plane isn t planar For instance turning on 0 will display all the nodes of constant I index not constant X coordinates To move the scan plane toggle the up down arrows underneath either Block Index or Grid Index Block Index will increment one block at a time whereas Grid Index will increment one node at a time Select will turn on the index plane perpendicular to any selected edge Turn 0 Select the up arrow within 0 row Grid Index column and keep toggling until the scan plane appears about half way through the model Note When you toggle from 0 to 1 notice how two planes are visible at the same time Along the radial o grid block I is equal to 1 throughout the entire block Pick Select from the Scan Plane Control window and select one of the edges parallel to the current Scan plane an edge lined up along Y This will select a J edge and the resulting scan plane will be perpendicular to that edge and will display Figure 3 134 Scan planes of the final mesh Hexa Meshing constant J nodes Figure 3 134 Note that t
491. ock Mesh Finally save the project SS A Tutorial Manual Hexa Meshing 3 2 7 Elbow Part Overview In this tutorial example the user will generate a hexa mesh for a three dimensional elbow intersected internally by a Cylinder a F PF y 1 i a ti i 7 E Fo l im i E T 3 T P T Jy F Dh i 5 E T 4 y Bt ET i Cw y 4 2 ES Y i i F I 4 Ww T 3 Fr zi zi LM VAN ed p a zi T A n sd Ux 9 AC x k I _ AT ay mls Lb nd 8 14 US XA i LL a Summary of Steps The Blocking Strategy starting the Project Creating Parts Tutorial Manual Hexa Meshing Creating Material Point starting Blocking Splitting the Blocking Material Fitting the Computational Domain to the Geometry Creating the First O grid Creating the Second O grid Generating the Mesh b The Blocking Strategy For this model the user will make two internal O grids inside of an L shaped blocking The first O grid will create the internal cylinder hole The second O grid will improve the mesh quality within the main elbow pipe c Starting the Project Start A
492. ock orientation and origin modification options 3 3 2 Automatic O grid Generation Generating O grids is a very powerful and quick technique used to achieve a quality mesh This process would not have been possible without the presence of O grids The O grid technique is utilized to model geometry when the user desires a circular or O type mesh either around a localized geometric feature or globally around an object 3 3 3 Important Features of an O grid Generation of Orthogonal Mesh Lines at an Object Boundary The generation of the O grid is fully automatic and the user simply selects the blocks needed for O grid generation The O grid is then generated either inside or outside the selected blocks The O grid may be fully contained within its selected region or it may pass through any of the selected block faces Rescaling an O grid After Generation When the O grid is generated the size of the O grid is scaled based upon the Factor in the Blocking gt O grid parameter window The user may modify the length of the O grid using the Blocking gt Re scale O grid option If a value that 15 less than 1 1s assigned the resulting O grid will be smaller than the original If however a value is larger than 1 the resulting O grid will be larger Hexa Meshing Appendix 278 3 3 4 Edge Meshing Parameters The edge meshing parameter task has been greatly automated by providing the user with unlimited flexibility in specifying bunching
493. od total p 1 y 1 M7 2 y y 1 0 7412294 Pexit Ptotal 0 89 Dexit 65969403 Y Dexit Pexit i Pexit 944801 Conservation of mass Pinlet Areainiet V inlet Pexit Aredaexit V exit Mei 41002478 Select Create new and specify the Surface BC for EXIT by entering the following values as shown in Figure 3 612 Cart3D Name EXIT surface family EXIT Density 0 944801 X Velocity 0 41002478 Pressure 0 65969403 Fi g ure Solver parameters 3 612 File Information Surface BC EXIT Case Information heme xT Exit Solver Controls leat Boundary Conditi Bounda sues O ry Surface BC Velocity 2478 Velocity 0 0 Conditi i on eee z M elacity Joo Paste Pressure O 65969403 Covergence History Partition Information Delete Copy Accept Cancel Use the other defaults and press Accept in the Solver parameters window r oq Select Solver 7 gt Run solver 7 to open the solver panel Specify Max Number of Cycles 300 Enable No full multigrid Tutorial Manual Cart3D Enable Save Cut planes result and specify Z Slices 0 001 as shown in Figure 3 613 Press Apply Figure 3 613 pun Solver P Run Solver Window Lart3D solver Max Number af Cycles nn y Ma ful multigrid Y axis spanwise Save Full Hex Result Run Grid Sequencing Level i Restart computation
494. of the 19 y a WES SI URVES 383 Associate gt Associate Edge to Curve the edge 13 21 with the left mouse button and press middle mouse button to accept the selection Select the curve CURVES 1 with the left mouse button and press middle mouse button to accept the selection Project Vertices should be switched OFF as shown in Figure 3 304 Tutorial Manual Advanced Meshing Tutorials Figure 3 304 Blocking 5 Associate Edge to Curve Associations Window MUR Em E dit Associations Edges 113 210 AS Curves CURVES 1 5 Project vertices Project to surface intersection Project ends to curve Intersection Apply ok Dismiss Press Apply Similarly associate the edge 11 13 to the curve CURVES 3 Note The user can toggle Off and ON the Curves and Points to better see what needs to be selected Select Associate gt Associate Vertex The Entity to associate to should be set as Point Select the vertex 19 Then select the point POINTS 17 as shown in Figure 3 305 Press Apply to associate the vertex to the point Tutorial Manual Advanced Meshing Tutorials Figure 3 305 Associate Vertex to Point Blocking 0 Associations EA Associate Vertex gt Entity C Self Point Curve Surface Vertex 13 us LAS Point POINTS 17 ee Apply Dismiss ao Select Asso
495. ojected mesh CUTPLA NE Y2 c Mesh Generation Full Mesh In the Cart3D Mesher window enable Create and Save Full Mesh as shown in Figure 3 551 Tutorial Manual Figure 3 551 Create and Save Full Mesh Cart3D L art3D Mesher ej L art3D files prefix BJET Single Component Fix Normals Nominal Mesh Radius Body ic A Lenght x ET Starting Mesh Divisions 5 85 Hum of Cell Refinements 8 E Compute Parameters Finest Cell Dimensions 642 x 0 542 0 642 Hesh Creation Preview Mesh Only Create and Save Full Mesh Number of Multi grid levels 4 Outer Bounding Box Minin Diagonal Point 553 9361 J6 205384 653 494641 hl asimum Diagonal Point 660 474967 657 205779 660 916473 BY Define Surface Family Refinement Defne All Surface Refinement Mumber af Buffer Layers 4 Angle Threshold far 20 Refinement Area weight Normals EEETESEMEEST Number of Cut Planes dir 3 E Mumber of Cut Planes in dir 3 Mumber of Cut Planes in Z dir 3 Mesh Internal Region gt Apply Dismiss Set the Number of Multi grid levels to 4 This will create 4 levels of coarsened mesh which can be read by the solver Tutorial Manual Cart3D Press Apply The Cart3D Mesh window appears which asks us to load the cart3D Full Mesh Press Yes The final mesh generated be examined through Mesh gt Cutplane
496. olume Mesher j 2 Solve e 3 Integrate Cp 4 Run Trials 5 Run 6 DOF Tutorial Manual Cart3D 3 7 1 Tutorial Three Plugs Overview This tutorial illustrates how to generate a grid in Cart3D around a set of three plugs io This tutorial introduces the following operations 1 Use of the Cart3D mesher for mesh generation Multigrid preparation running mgPrep a Starting the Project Load ANSYS ICEM CFD Change the working directory using File gt Change Working Dir and set the location to the folder plugs plugs uns is located in that folder Note It is preferable to create a separate folder plugs and put only the plugs uns domain mesh file in that folder before performing this tutorial Select Open Mesh 3 from the main menu and select plugs uns The model contains three closed triangulated components Press the h key to fit the view in the screen if the model is not visible Tutorial Manual Cart3D b Mesh Generation Preview only Click on the Cart 3D tab Select the Volume Mesher icon 1729 the Cart 3D Mesher window as shown in Figure 3 464 AT Erovironment 10 Figure View inio Wire Um 3 464 e uad A ca Geomety Heih Blocking Edi Mech Properties Loads Sobe Options Ou Post procersing Cart3D Qe Botia main 2 windo TU rus I Lonponent Fm
497. ometry tin d Creating Parts In the first two tutorials the parts were pre defined For this and the remaining tutorials the initial geometry 15 in a single part Geometry will be put into different parts to define different boundary regions First expand the Parts tree and turn on Surfaces Tutorial Manual Hexa Meshing Right mouse select Parts and select Create Part as shown in Figure 3 94 Figure 3 94 HE Model Create Part option Hi4 Geometry 1 Subsets Points w Curves Surfaces Create Part Create Assembly Show All Hide All Reverse Blank All Expand All Collapse All Blank Selected Restrict Selected Delete Empty Parts Edit Attributes Heassign Colors In the Create Part panel type in CYL1 for the Part name Select Create Part by Selection or Select entities To avoid selecting entities other than surfaces turn off Toggle selection of sont Toggle selection of X definition Leave on Toggle selection of surfaces as shown in Figure 3 94 Entity types can also be deactivated unselectable by turning them off in the Display tree curves and Toggle selection of bodies material region Tutorial Manual Hexa Meshing Figure 3 95 Select Geometry tool bar Select geometry l amp eN o xxDse99 Yo amp 2 we Select the largest semi cylinder with the left mouse button and press middle mouse button or Apply in the panel Note the n
498. ometry with a gap 1 4 ANSYS ICEM CFD Al Environment 10 0 User Manual SAS IP Inc Section 1 3 How does Match work in Stitch Match Edges Figure 1 7 Result with Close Gap Trim 1 3 How does Match work in Stitch Match Edges Match is generally used in those cases where curves lie very close to each other specifically when the two ends meet together You should have the two sets of curves within some tolerance for this option to work Refer to the figures below to get an idea ANSYS ICEM CFD Al Environment 10 0 User Manual SAS IP Inc 1 5 Chapter 1 CAD Repair Figure 1 9 Geometry with mismatched edges p 1 6 ANSYS ICEM CFD Al Environment 10 0 User Manual SAS IP Inc Section 1 3 How does Match work in Stitch Match Edges Figure 1 10 Geometry after match edges p NN m mulum Trib HH t LM IT TOi SAS IP Inc ANSYS ICEM CFD Al Environment 10 0 User Manual 1 8 Chapter 2 Tetra Automated to the point that the user has only to select the geometry to be meshed Tetra generates tetrahedral meshes directly from the CAD geometry or STL data without requiring an initial triangular surface mesh 2 1 Introduction Tetra uses an Octree based meshing algorithm to fill the volume with tetrahedral cells and to generate a surface mesh on the object surfaces The user can define prescribed curves and points to determine the positions of edges and vertices i
499. on Information Free Stream Density 1 0 Free Stream Sound Speed Accept Cancel Click Solver Controls gt Runge Kutta Scheme Evaluate the gradients only at Stages 1 and 5 as shown in Figure 3 571 Tutorial Manual Cart3D Figur Solver parameters e File Information Runge Kutta Scheme 3 571 Case Information Number of stages 5 Solver Controls Ru ng Runge Kutta Scheme Stagel coefficent 0 0695 e Other controls Eval Gradient 1 Kutta dide da coefficent 01502 Partition Information Eval Gradient 0 stages coefficent 0 2898 Eval Gradient 0 Staged caefficent 0 5060 Eval Gradient o Stages coefficent 1 0 Eval Gradient 1 Accept Cancel Click on Other controls Set CFL number to 1 4 and Number of Multigrid levels to 3 Leave the remaining values as default as shown in Figure 3 572 Tutorial Manual Cart3D Figur Solver parameters e File Information Other controls 3 572 Case Information 1 4 Solver Controls Tune Other Runge Kutta Scheme Contr Other controls No Limiter ol Boundary Conditions History MINMOD Wind Partition Information GH a WwW Flug function yan Leer Colella 1998 Cut Cell BCtype Agglomerated Normals C SubCell Resolution Humber of Mult Grid levels 3 Multigrid cycletype V cecle W cucle Number of pre smoothing passes 1 Number of post smo
500. on of Imported data Expand Material Properties in Model Tree by clicking on select IsotropicMat1 To open Define Material Property window as shown in Figure 4 267 double click on the selected Material IsotropicMatl1 with left mouse button Tutorial Manual Nastran Tutorials Figure 4 267 Define Material al Define Property j Material Property Material Mame IsatropicM atl Maternal ID Type Isotropic Young s Modulus E f Constant Warping Value 207000 Shear Modulus G f Constant Varving Poisson s Ratio NU f Constant Warping Value 0 3 Mass Density HHO f Constant Varying Value 7 842 006 Apply ck Dismiss Nastran Tutorials Expand Displacement in Model Tree by clicking on and also expand Set 2 and double click on CN16 which pops up Modify Displacement window as shown in Figure 4 268 SS A Tutorial Manual Figure 4 268 Modify Displacement window Nastran Tutorials Name tM amp 8 SPC Set vj LES SPC Constraint with Enforced Motion 7 Directional Displacement v Modify Displacement i l uy o uz o Rotational Displacement ROTS 0 0 RoT Apply ox Dismiss Modifying thickness Tutorial Manual Nastran Tutorials Expand the Part option in Model Tr
501. on of the Write View Input file window to verify the modification done through Solver Parameter window Press Apply to generate LS Dyna input file User will see that the LS Dyna input data file comes up in the default text editor If necessary the user can edit and save the file through this text editor Since there is no need to do any editing for this example just close the editor e Solution and Results Modal analysis is to be performed on this model and the results visualized in the post processor Solving the problem From the Solve Options tab click on Submit Solver Run 69 to start LS Dyna with the Run Solver window given in Figure 4 115 Specify the LS Dyna Input File as FrDoor k and the LS Dyna executable path User can specify ANSYS LS Dyna license product to launch LS Dyna through AI Environment Press Apply in Run Solver window to begin the solution process LS Dyna Tutorials Figure 4 115 LS Dyna Run window Run Solver 5 olver L5 Duna Select L5 Duna Executable in bin bin intel Is370 e L5 Duna Input File F FiDaor FrDaor k ANSYS L5 Duna Options C Mone Specify Ansys Product Select Product ultiphysicslLS5 D rNA Apply ck Cancel Post Processing of Results From the main menu select File gt Results gt Open Results fb The Select Result Format window is displayed in Figure 4 116 For the Format choose LS DYNA from the drop down box Select the d3plot file the
502. on window This will calculate the Body Force and Aerodynamics Force and Moment about the Center of mass for the Bomb component The result will be reported in the messages area h Six Degrees of Freedom Given the external Aerodynamic Force and Moment the 6DOF program calculates the position of the component at the next time step The 6DOF utility computes the mesh runs the solver calculates forces and moves the component accordingly It goes to the next time step and repeats the process until the end time is reached 6DOF uses the same parameters defined during the initial meshing and post processing for the Cart3D initial solution The user goes through the initial process then 6DOF can be started While running the Clic post processor only the component that moves should be used to calculate forces and moments otherwise errors will be reported while running 6DOF Click Run 6DOF 0 from the Cart3D menu The Run 6DOF window 16 shown in Figure 3 581 SS A Tutorial Manual Cart3D Figure 3 581 aA Run SixDOF window Run 6D0F L art3D geometry file BOMBER c3dati Moving component OME gt Model reference scale NENNEN Mass of the body Ho 4 Principal moments of inertia 00505 Gravity vector 0 3 786242600 Center of mass Hog400 Initial linear velocity 000000 Initial angular velocity Inooon Initial Euler param Ho
503. onal edge parameters Perform these next steps to redistribute points along the diagonal radial edge of the O grid For the convenience of selecting the edges right mouse click in the Display Tree to turn ON Vertices gt Numbers and Edges gt Bunching Then make sure Vertices in ON Zoom in on the OUTLET area of the blocking Select Blocking gt Pre mesh Params 5 gt Update Sizes sure Update All is toggled and Press Apply Figure 3 158 Mesh before changing mesh parameters Hexa Meshing This will compute the node distributions on the blocking edges from the surface parameters Turn Blocking gt Pre Mesh from the Display Tree Press Yes when it says Mesh is currently out of date recompute Right click on Blocking gt Pre Mesh gt Solid amp wire in the Display Tree to display the mesh in Solid Wire for better Visualization The mesh will look like as shown in Figure 3 158 when viewing the OUTLET The mesh is denser at the walls The near wall elements will have the same initial height that was set on the surface parameters which was 0 03 It may be desirable to have denser near wall spacing Tutorial Manual Hexa Meshing Select Blocking gt Pre mesh Params gt Edge Params i and you will see the window shown in Figure 3 159 Turn OFF Blocking gt Pre Mesh so the edges can be easily seen and selected Select any of the radial edges These are the edges
504. or 0 01 Number of layers 5 E Spacing type Fixed C Function Spacing 1 Delete original elements Apply ox Dismiss Tutorial Manual Nastran Tutorials Figure 4 247 Extrude d mesh Switch Off Mesh and then Switch On Mesh Note User can view the default setting of the Mesh in the Displat Tree by switching Off the Mesh and then switching On the Mesh by default only Shell and Line are switched On e Material and Element Properties Before applying Constraints and Loads on elements define the type of material and assign properties to the elements Selection of Material Select Create Material Property icon from Properties Tab Menubar Define the Material Name as STEEL Material ID can be left as 1 Select Isotropic type from the drop down list Define Young s modulus as 207000 Define Poisson s ratio as 0 28 Tutorial Manual Nastran Tutorials Define Density as 7 8e 9 and leave other fields as it 1s Press Apply Element Properties Select Define 3D Element Properties icon from the Properties Tab Menu bar Set PID as 1 in the Define Volume Element window as shown in Figure 4 248 Select the Part as EXTRUDED Select Material as STEEL Press Apply Figure 4 248 Define Volume d Define Volume Element 2 Element window Part EXTRUDED Maternal STEEL FID LES Global Apply o Dismiss f Subsets Constraints and L
505. or full part of the geometry the user might want to make use of that in the final mesh This be provided as an input to the Tetra and it makes Tutorial Manual Tetra Meshing sure that the rest of the volume and surface mesh 15 connected to the provided mesh b Intelligent Geometry in ANSYS ICEMCED Tetra Using ANSYS ICEMCFD s Direct CAD Interfaces which maintain the parametric description of the geometry throughout the CAD model and the grid generation process unstructured grids can be directly remeshed on the modified geometry The geometry is selected the CAD system and tagged with information for grid generation such as boundary conditions and mesh element sizes This intelligent geometry information is saved with the master geometry Parametric changes in the geometry simply require the user to write the updated geometry file for grid generation The user can then immediately re calculate the unstructured tetrahedral grids c The Octree Approach Tetra s mesh generation from surfaces is based on the following spatial subdivision algorithm This algorithm ensures refinement of the mesh wherever necessary but maintains larger elements wherever possible allowing for faster computation Once the root tetrahedron which encloses the entire geometry has been initialized Tetra subdivides the root tetrahedron until all element size requirements are met At this point the Tetra mesher balances the mesh so
506. orial Manual Geometry Creation e Saving Geometry File Geometry Save Geometry As Enter the file name Geo SphereCube tin and press Save to save the geometry Tutorial Manual Geometry Creation 3 1 4 Pipe Blade Overview We are going to create the geometry for a pipe blade as shown in Figure 3 21 3 Figure 3 27 The Pipe Blade with dimensions a Summary of steps Geometry Menu Create points Create arcs for the blade Create Cylinder from Standard Shapes Create surfaces for the blade and inlets and outlets Intersect surfaces and trim surfaces by those intersection curves b Generating the Geometry Note Settings gt Selection gt Auto pick mode should be turned OFF for ICEM CFD to behave exactly as this tutorial describes Point Creation mo ee ee ee Tutorial Manual Geometry Creation Geometry gt Create Point Explicit Coordinates Select 4 4 Explicit Coordinates to open the window Assign the Part name POINTS and the Name POINTS 0 Enter the co ordinates 0 2 8 and press Apply to create the point Switch on the Points in the Display Tree window To see the names of the points use the right mouse button and select Points Show Point names in the Display Tree window Select Fit Window E from main menu Use the right mouse button to zoom out if needed The newly created point name would be displayed as POINTS 0 similarly create another
507. ormat for multiblock structured surface meshes and VRML 1 2 The ANSYS ICEMCFD Geometry Interface Geometry Tools ANSYS includes a wide range of tools for creating new and or manipulating existing geometry This allows the user to alter complex geometry or create simple geometry without having to go back to the original CAD This can be done for CAD NURBS surfaces and triangulated surface data Although most of the meshing modules within ANSYS ICEMCFD are forgiving of minor gaps and holes in the geometry in some cases it 1s necessary to find and close large gaps and holes without returning back to the original CAD ANSYS ICEMCED provides tools to do both on either CAD or triangulated surfaces Introduction to ANSYS ICEMCFD Finally curves and points can be automatically created to capture certain key features in the geometry These curves and points will act as constraints for the mesher forcing nodes and edges of the elements to lie along them and thus capturing the hard feature 1 3 Meshing Modules Tetra Auto Volume ANSYS ICEMCFD Tetra takes full advantage of object oriented unstructured meshing technology With no tedious up front triangular surface meshing required providing well balanced start meshes ANSYS ICEMCEFD Tetra works directly from the CAD surfaces and fills the volume with tetrahedral elements using the Octree approach A powerful smoothing algorithm provides the element quality Options are av
508. other will not run on the tetra mesh Coarsen mesh This will attempt to coarsen the mesh for the elements whose aspect ratio 1s below the specified value Smooth transition This option is used to have the smooth transition of tetra height Factor Tutorial Manual Tetra Meshing Appendix This is the ratio of the height of the tetra elements in inner layer to that of the next outer layer Additional Options Run as batch process This option is used to run the stand alone tetra mesher In order to run tetra in batch we need to save the problem before we start the tetra mesher Only visible geometry Part by part This will mesh the only visible geometry on the screen This option will do meshing part by part Load mesh after completion Loading the tetra mesh after meshing will automatically invoke the domain file named tetra mesh uns by default when the Tetra batching process is complete If this option is not selected then tetra will not load the mesh in the screen From Geometry and From surface mesh An Existing surface mesh file should be provided in order to select the triangular mesh for different parts The Part window is displayed so that you can select the parts you want for which the surface mesh should be used From surface mesh This option uses only surface mesh to create tetra mesh Once the mesh is generated the Mesh Editor automatically tries to figure out if there are any holes in
509. othing passes 1 Accept Cancel Click on Boundary Conditions gt Directional BC and leave the boundary condition for the six faces of the enclosing Cartesian Box as FAIRFIELD as shown in Figure 3 573 Tutorial Manual Cart3D Figure Solver parameters 3 573 File Information Directional BC Bound Case Information x Low FARFIELD Solver Contrals ary Runge Kutta Scheme 2 High FAR FIELD Conditi Other controls on Boundary Conditions T Low FAR FIELD Directional BE i f High FARFIELD 00 Windo Surface BC 9 FARFIELD Covergence History 2 Low FAR FIELD Z Partition Information High FARFIELD Accept Cancel Leave the Convergence History and Partition Information as default Click on Accept in the Solver parameters window e Running the FlowCart Solver Now the case is ready to start the inviscid computation Select Solver Run Solver E to open the FlowCart solver panel Specify Max Number of Cycles 150 Enable Save Full Hex Result Tutorial Manual Cart3D Turn on Save Cut planes Result Specify X Slices as 0 5 0 6 1 4 and 2 0 Y slices as 0 4 and 0 0 and Z slices as 0 75 and 0 75 as shown in Figure 3 574 Figure 3 574 Flow Cart Solver Window JUL Slot P Cart3D solver Max Number of Cycles sn o 4 No ful multigrid y axis spanwise Save Full Hex Result Run Grid Sequencing Level i Restart computation Check
510. outside of the internal pipe Thus in generating the first O grid the user will essentially partition the volume around the small internal pipe so that part of the blocking may be removed 2 Select Blocking gt Split Block gt gt Ogrid Block e Within the O grid Block window press the Select Block s button long horizontal selection window will appear at the upper right Press the last button called Select diagonal corner vertices and select two corners diagonally spanning the blocks in which we want the O grid Selecting the vertices a and b as specified in Figure 3 180 will work well Press the middle mouse button to finish selection Since we want the cylinder to pass through the top and bottom of the geometry press the Select Face s T button Again press the Select Diagonal corner vertices k button and select the face defined by vertices and c Then press the CD ton again and then select vertices b and d Refer to Figure 3 180 Press the middle mouse button to finish selection and press Apply to create the first O grid Tutorial Manual Hexa Meshing Figure 3 180 Creating the first O grid After creating the first O grid the geometry will appear as shown in Figure 3 181 Figure 3 181 Assigning the block to DEAD Tutorial Manual Figure 3 182 Projecting the inner block to the small pipe curves Hexa Meshing Next the user wi
511. ow Global Mesh Parameters I 5 Global Element Scale Factor Scale factor Display Global Element Seed Size Max element b Display M atural Size Enabled Size Display Cells in 027 Refinement 1 Ignore Wall Thickness Triangle tolerance 0 001 Unitless tri tolerance Apply Dismiss Select Mesh gt Set Surface Mesh Size A Surface mesh size window will appear Tutorial Manual Advanced Meshing Tutorials Press Select Surf s D Press Select Item 1n Part A window appears as shown in Figure 3 351 select INLET INTERFACEI INTERFACE2 and OUTLET Press Accept Figure 3 351 Select Part Windo Accept All Screen Cancel Enter Maximum size as 2 as shown in Figure 3 352 Tutorial Manual Advanced Meshing Tutorials Figure 3 352 NE Surface Mesh Size window as CN Surface s OUTLET IN hd aximum size 2 Height Height ratio 0 Humber of layers Tetra size ratio 0 Minimum size 0 deviation 0 Blank surfaces with param In the same procedure select and select the surfaces CYL2 and CYL3 Enter Maximum element size 4 Press Apply followed by Dismiss to close the window Select Mesh gt Set Curve Mesh size he A Curve mesh sizes window will appear Press a to select all curves of the model Enter a value 4 for Maximum Size i
512. owth law exponential Initial height Height ratio Number af layers 4 Total height Compute params Fix marching direction Min prism quality 0 01 Ortho weight 0 50 Fillet ratio 010 kiaw anala an Apply Dismiss select Mesh gt Prism to set parts to grow prism from and specify detailed prism mesh size parameters as shown in Figure 3 290 Click on Select Parts for Prism Layer Tutorial Manual Tetra Meshing Appendix Figure 3 290 Hesh with Prisms 8 Prsim mesh SSS paramaters Select Parts for Prism Layer omoothing Options Number af surface 0 g smoothing steps Triangle quality type Number of volume 0 smoothing steps directional E smoothing steps First layer smoothing 1 E steps Load mesh after completion Apply Dismiss In the ensuing table Figure 3 291 click walls check box Note also the individual parameters such as Initial height Ratio and Number of layers that can be defined any part in the list Here we leave these parameters blank Press Apply and follow with Dismiss Tutorial Manual Tetra Meshing Appendix Figure 3 291 Prism parts table Mesh sizes for parts Fart Prism Hexe Core Max size pe eee M INLET LIVE OUTLET OUTLETS OLITLET4 OUTLETS OUTLET p WALL 7 E NE NM M NM NN I Show size para
513. parameters such as maximum cell size initial cell height at the boundaries and ex pansion ratios Generate the mesh with or without projection parameters specified CheckMesh quality to ensure that specified mesh quality criteria are met Write Output files to the desired solvers If necessary the user may always return to previous steps to manipulate the blocking if the mesh quality does not meet the specified threshold or if the mesh does not capture certain geometry features The blocking may be saved at any time thus allowing the user to return to previous block topologies Additionally at any point in this process the user can generate the mesh with various projection schemes such as full face projection edge projection point projection or no projection at all Note Note In the case of no projection the mesh will be generated on the faces of the block model and may be used to quickly determine if the current blocking strategy is adequate or if it must be modified 3 4 The Hexa Database The Hexa database contains both geometry and block topology data each containing several sub entities The Geometric Data Entities Points x y z point definition e Curves trimmed or untrimmed NURBS curves Surfaces NURBS surfaces trimmed NURBS surfaces The Block Topologic Data Entities Vertices corner points of blocks of which there are at least eight that define a block Edges face has four edges and a block t
514. pen up window like in Figure 3 401 Advanced Meshing Tutorials Figure 3 401 Surface mesher window Mesh Surface ay Surface Meshing Sse Mesh type Quad Dominant Mesh boundaries Method From surfaces 5 w Projectto surfaces Hespectline elements Remove ald elements Use surface sizes Simple offset lqnore size 0 Clean level 2 2 Smooth boundaries Mapping o 4 Adjust nodes limit 5 deviation 0 Try harder Apply Dismiss Tutorial Manual Advanced Meshing Tutorials Select Quad Dominant in the Mesh Type option increase the Clean Level to 2 and switch ON the Project to surfaces amp Respect Bar Element Finalize by pressing Apply This would create a mesh as shown in Figure 3 402 Note User can see the mesh by Mesh gt Shell gt Solid amp Wire in theDisplay tree Figure 3 402 The final mesh Checking quality The user should always check for the quality of the existing mesh Go to Edit mesh gt Display Mesh Quality in the Criterion window select Quality the window pops up as shown in Figure 3 403 The Tutorial Manual Advanced Meshing Tutorials minimum quality stands at 0 00048 and therefore the mesh must be smoothed Figure 3 403 Quality histograms window 24 18 Min O 000484507 1 12 0 000469 01 0 2 0 9 0 4 0 5 0 7 0 9 0 9 1 e Goto Edit Mesh gt Press Smooth Mesh Globally an
515. perties Type Shell 7 Material MAT Thickness 0 5 Transversal Shear Material same as above Coupling Membrane as above Bending Material e Bending Moment of Inertia 000000 Ratio Bending Material as above Transverse Shear Thickness D 833230 Ratio Nonstructural Mass Unit 000000 PET 0 000000 il Apply ox Dismiss e Similarly define the shell properties on the BAT COVER part also the properties are going to be the same for BAT COVER except PID Set the PID to 11 and supply the same thickness of 0 5 LS Dyna Tutorials In the main menu select Settings gt Solver and select LS Dyna from the pull down Press Apply Expand Material Properties in the Display Tree widget Right click on MATI and select Modify to open the Define Material Property window as shown in Figure 4 126 change the LS Dyna Material Type to Type24 MAT PIECEWISE LINEAR PLASTICITY Input Yield Stress as 210 0 and Failure Strain as 0 3 Press Apply Figure 4 126 Define Material a Define Property Material Name lateral IMATI Ei Material ID 1 isotropic c r L5 Dyna Material tppe 4 E Select Type 24 PIECEWISE LINEAR PLASTICITY Yield stess Failure strain 03 apy
516. plit at interior curves Join edge curves T Delete unattached curves and points El Apply Dismiss Tutorial Manual Advanced Meshing Tutorials The more important settings are Tolerance maximum gap distance between surface edges not considered to be a problem Typically set to one order of magnitude smaller than smallest projected mesh size or geometry feature A default 1s calculated based on a fraction of the model size Filter Curves Points If turned on will remove or filter out curves and points of between surfaces and curves that meet at a smooth transition The Feature angle defines a maximum angle between two surfaces or curves that would be considered smooth Any curves generated between surfaces whose angle is less than this value would be removed Generally recommended only for creating a set of curves for meshing constraints not geometry diagnostics Use all default settings including Tolerance and Apply Note the curves as in Figure 3 408 Figure 3 408 Geometry after Build topology After building topology the new curves are automatically turned on and options changed to Show Wide and Color by Tutorial Manual Advanced Meshing Tutorials Count These options can be turned on or off by right mouse selecting Geometry gt Curves Color by Count will display curves in the following colors Red Curve is shared by two surfaces This is desired and would indic
517. ply Tutorial Manual Nastran Tutorials Figure 4 225 S Define Shell Define Shell Element j Element window Part PART_1001 is PID 1001 Properties Type Shell Maternal STEEL Thickness 25 2 5 Transversal Shear Maternal STEEL Coupling Membrane c Bending Material Bending Moment of Inertia 1 000000 Ratio Bending Material STEEL Transverse Shear ln 0 933330 Nonstructural Mass Unit n 000000 Length Apply ox Dismiss Repeat these steps to define properties for other Shell elements for PART 1002 PART 1003 and PART 1004 except the PID and Thickness as follows Tutorial Manual Nastran Tutorials h Constraints and Loads Constraints AE Click on Displacement on Point icon from the Constraints Tab Menu bar which pops up the window shown in Figure 4 226 In this window toggle on all options UX UY and UZ for both Directional and Rotational Displacement and select the center points of the bolt connections on PART 1001and PART 1002 as shown in Figure 4 227 and press Apply Also while selecting the nodes if the Points On in the display user may not be able to select the center points of the bolt connections So it would be better to make sure that Geometry gt Points are toggled before selecting these points SS A Tutorial Manual Figure 4 226 reate displacement
518. point by entering the coordinate 0 2 12 and the Name as POINTS 1 and press Apply Enter the following coordinates pressing Apply each time and the names will automatically adjust to the names shown below POINTS 2 0 3 2 10 POINTS 3 0 3 2 10 POINTS 4 0 2 8 POINTS 5 0 2 12 POINTS 6 0 3 2 10 POINTS 7 0 3 2 10 Press Dismiss to close the window The points should appear as shown in Figure 3 28 when viewed in the Isometric view Figure 3 28 Created Points Geometry Creation VINIS U VINIS 4 Arc Creation af Geometry gt Create Modify Curve gt Arc through 3 points Select Arc Through 3 Points to the window Enter the Part CURVES and the name as CURVES 0O Select POINTS 0 POINTS 2 and POINTS 1 Press Apply to create the arc Switch on the Curves in the Display Tree window To see the names of the curves right mouse click on Curves Show Curve Names in the Display Tree window The newly created curve name would be displayed as CURVES 0 similarly create several more arcs using the following points The curve names will automatically follow the first curve name to adjust to the names seen below CURVES 1 POINTS 0 POINTS 3 and POINTS 1 CURVES 2 POINTS 4 POINTS 6 and POINTS 5 CURVES 3 POINTS 4 POINTS 7 and POINTS 5 Geometry Creation Press Dismiss to close the window To reduce clutter on the screen switch off the Points from the Display Tree window The geometry
519. ptions C Basic Advanced Volume Elements Defned 5 Shell Elements Defined Thickness Distribution BCDefned Bar Elements Defined l Create Attribute amp Parameter Files Edit Parameters E dit Attributes View Ansys file Apply Dismiss Click on the Edit Parameters button which will open the Solver Parameters window ANSYS Tutorials Expand under Define surface to surface contact configuration then expand under the part name CONTACT and select on the words Key options for 3 D contact elements Change the option for Automated Adjustment KOP5 to Close gap Auto as shown in Figure 4 66 Press Accept to save these changes in the parameter file par file and close the Solver Parameters window Figure 4 66 Al Solver parameters Solver Mesh order Eev options for 3 0 contact elements Parameters AN TS Analysis Options Degrees of freedom KOP1 ux U Ue window Define global parameters Define real constant set Define Fraperty T emperaturg Define Coupled Define Constraint Equations Defaults for low order struct Defaults for Flotran 3 D ele Detaults Far high order struct Penalty Function KOP3 Not Applicable None Location of contact detection point Gauss point Automated adjustment Defaults for HF EM ax 3 0 Defaults for high order therm Defaults Far low order struct
520. r Setup Ansys Run Select Settings Solver from the main menu Select Ansys as the solver and press Apply Selecting a solver is shown in Figure 4 36 Figure 4 36 Colyer Set ie Solver Setup window Solver SYS Apply Cancel Setting Analysis Type ANSYS Tutorials Click on the Solve Options gt Setup Analysis Type fs button to setup an Ansys run to do Linear Static Analysis This will bring up the Setup Analysis Type window as shown Figure 4 37 The solver should be set as Ansys Set the Analysis Type to Static from the pull down Select the Direct option under the Solver Leave all other options as default Press Apply to complete the setup ANSYS Tutorials Figure 4 37 Setup Analysis Tone idis window mui A ANS YS Ansys Analysis Options Analysis Category Structural Structural Analysis Options Analysis static d Solver C Auto Direct C POG Tolerance roE 08 Convergence Multiplier ho Number of Substeps Large Detarmation Key lignore sd Apply ox Dismiss Save Project Through File gt Save Project As create a new directory called Conrod_Ansys and enter into it Enter Conrod Ansys as the project name and press Save to save the geometry mesh constraints and loads in this directory as shown in Figu
521. r s Window Choose File Information gt Mesh File as NOZZLE c3d mesh mg this should be default Click on Case Information and enter Mach number 0 2 Leave the other parameters as default as shown in Figure 3 610 Tutorial Manual Cart3D Figure 3 610 File Information Case Information Case quem EXE 0 2 Inf Boundary Conditions Angle of attack o o nformati Covergence History Side slip angle 00 on Partition Information Free Stream Density Wi ndow Free Stream Sound Speed 1 Accept Cancel Under Solver Controls gt Other controls set Number of Multi Grid levels to 3 Click on for Boundary Conditions and for Surface BC Select Create New and enter the following Name INLET surface family INLET Density 1 0 X Velocity 0 2306 from exact solution Pressure 0 714285714 The values are shown in Figure 3 611 Tutorial Manual Cart3D Fi g ure Solver parameters 3 61 1 File Information Gurface BC p Case Information INLET tt M LET Solver Controls m EMIL Bounda Boundary Conditions ad EUNT Directional BC Density 1 0 ry Surface BC Velocity 0 2206 Cond em x 0 0 Paste z elocity Covergence History Pressure 0 71 4285714 Partition Inf ti InFarmatian Delete Copy Accept Cancel Since the flow is fully subsonic there is no shock wave present in the nozzle and Isentropic relations hold go
522. r example Typically the user will model only a section of the rotating machinery as well as implement symmetry in order to minimize the model size By specifying a periodic relationship between the inflow and outflow boundaries the particular specification may be applied to the model flow characteristics entering a boundary must be identical to the flow characteristics leaving a boundary Applying the Periodic Relationship The periodic relationship is applied to block faces and ensures that a node on the first boundary have two identical coordinates to the corresponding node on the second boundary The user is prompted to select corresponding vertices on the two faces in sequence When all vertices on both flow boundaries have been selected a full periodic relationship between the boundaries has been generated 3 3 9 Mesh Quality The mesh quality functions are accessible through Meshing gt Quality check Any of the four quality check options will display a histogram plot for the user Determining the Location of Elements By clicking on any of the histogram bars with the left button the user may determine where the model these elements are located The selected histogram bars will change in color to pink TS P Tutorial Manual Hexa Meshing Appendix 283 After selecting the bar s the Show button is pressed to highlight the elements in this range If
523. r af Cut Planes in Z dir 3 Mesh Internal Region Click Apply to run the mesher This will create a domain file with 3 Cut Planes Quad Elements each coordinate direction and Cut Cells Hex Elements The PreView mesh will be loaded automatically Tutorial Manual Cart3D Note As in the case of previous tutorials the mesh can be viewed by switching on the CutPlane to be viewed One such view 1s shown in Figure 3 567 Figure CO 3 567 LELLEELETLI CUTPLAN EI E Z2 View c Mesh Generation Full Mesh Enable Create and Save Full Mesh as shown in Figure 3 568 and change the Number of Multi grid levels to 3 This will create 3 levels of coarsened mesh which can be read by the solver Tutorial Manual Cart3D Figure 3 568 Mesher orl Create and Save Full Mesh es CartsD files prefix BOMBER Single Component Fix Normals Nominal Mesh Radius Body 5 4 Lenght X Starting Mesh Divizions 4 44 Mum of Cell Refinements gt Compute Parameters Finest Cell Dimensions 082 x 0 0082 x 0 00 Hesh Creation Preview Mesh Only Create and Save Full Mesh Humber of Multi arid levels 3 Outer Bounding Box Minimum Diagonal Point 13 802 Maximum Diagonal Point 51 005 Define Surface Family Refinement Define All Surface Refinement Humber of Buffer Layers 4 E Angle Threshold Far 10 Refinement Area Weight Normals
524. r pairs only E NEM Freter connected pairs 1ULOTIdl IVianuat Apply Dismiss 404 Advanced Meshing Tutorials Click Apply Note Once the operation is done all the new surfaces will be in FRAME and the corresponding original surfaces will automatically be deleted from the family SURF However SURF family is still not empty and it needs to be deleted When prompted by the delete window Figure 3 394 press Delete to delete all the original entities This operation will also remove the original part name Figure M 5 04 Delete ET Original surfaces of original surtace s found What do you wantto do Create Subset Delete Cancel The geometry would now look as shown in Figure 3 395 after making all the parts visible Right mouse click on Curves and select Color by count The yellow and red curves are indicative of the Build Topology that mid surfacing operation did Figure 3 395 Geometry After Mid Surfacing Tutorial Manual Advanced Meshing Tutorials ES uu A d Repairing Geometry The user can notice several yellow color curves in the model Those represent the free edges of the surfaces that are not connected to a neighboring surface Since this is an FEA model it is Ok to have open boundaries Note that the user can reduce the display clutter by switching OFF Show
525. r the purposes of this tutorial it is not necessary to run through the entire transient solution Kill the LS Dyna run after say 20 time steps LS Dyna Tutorials Figure 4 101 Sol ral RunSolver window Solver LS Dyna Select L5 Duna ANSYS bin intel s950 exe E TIE AANSYTS 960 exe L5 Dyna jos iles Frame_LSDyna Frame k e ANSYS LS Dyna Options C None Specify Ansys Product Select Product SY 5 MuliphysicszL5 D NA Y Apply ck Cancel Select File gt Close Project and save if prompted Post Processing of Results Select File gt Results gt Open Result Choose LS DYNA as the Format Select the d3plot file from the browser and press Apply as in Figure 4 102 LS Dyna Tutorials Figure 4 102 Select Result Format v window Add as DataSet Current Format LS DYNA D 3Flot Frame Lsduna d3plot Group Elements by Materials Apply vo Cancel After loading the default panel will be Select Transient Steps The default displayed variable will be total translation To change the displayed variable select Variables E Change Category Scalar and Vector variables as desired For a quick animation of the time step results select Control AII Animations and hit the Animate arrow View the results as shown in Figure 4 103 For a more complete tutorial of post processing functionality please refer to the CFD gt Post Proce
526. r volume face This error often indicates a hole in the volumetric domain It is unlikely that this error would occur in the initial model usually it results during manual editing when the user happens to delete tetra or tri cells The automatic Fix will cover these uncovered faces with triangles surface mesh This may or may not be the proper solution A better method may be for the user to first Select the flawed cells and then decide if the uncovered faces are the result of missing surface mesh or the result of a hole If itis due to missing surface mesh the Fix option will eliminate the problem re run the check and select Fix If the error points out a hole in the model the user could attempt to correct the grid by manually creating tetras or merging nodes Missing internal faces This check will find pairs of volume elements that belong to different Parts but do not have a surface element between the shared faces This error like Uncovered faces should not occur in the original model and would most likely result from mistakes made during the manual editing process The tetra cutter will detect this problem as a leakage The automatic Fix will create surface mesh in between these cells Periodic problems The user selects the two Parts that should be one to one periodic matches based on the specified periodicity settings Errors are reported if periodic matches are missing Slight offsets in node positions are often repaired automatically
527. ra Prism mesh D Diagnostics As in the SphereCube example the user should go through all of the checks for Errors and Possible problems to ensure that the mesh does not contain any flaws that would cause problems for analysis For checking Edit Mesh gt Check Mesh m Smoothing After confirming that no serious problems or errors exist continue by smoothing the generated tetra prism mesh Select Edit Mesh gt Smooth Mesh Globally Several elements have lower quality than the acceptable value of 0 3 as shown in Figure 3 259 Set the Smoothing iterations to 5 and the Up to quality to 0 4 Make sure Criterion is set to Quality Tutorial Manual Figure 3 259 Quality of the mesh before smoothing Tetra Meshing Mas 98 12 0 uy de ms We qe De e Select the Smooth option for TETRA 4 and TRI 3 and QUAD 4 Select the Freeze option for PENTA 6 the prisms as shown in Figure 3 260 Press Apply when the operation is complete a new histogram will be displayed Tutorial Manual Tetra Meshing Figure 3 260 Smooth Elements 5 Smooth Elements Globally Globally Quality Smoothing iterations E Up to quality 0 4 Criterion Quality Smooth Mesh Type Smooth Freeze Float TETRA 4 C TRI 3 QUAD 4 Smooth Parts Subsets Method ET parts m The histogram doesn t change much indicating quality can t
528. racteristic 1s best fixed by choosing Select for this region and merging the two nodes that would collapse the unwanted triangle box Possible problems gt Single edges This check will locate surface elements that have an edge that isn t shared with any other surface element This would represent a hanging edge and the element would be considered an internal baffle These may or may not be legitimate Legitimate single edges would occur where the geometry has a zero thickness baffle with a free or hanging edge or in a 2D model at the perimeter of the domain Tutorial Manual Tetra Meshing Appendix If the single edges form a closed loop a hole in the surface mesh the user can select Fix when prompted by the corresponding menu A new set of triangles will then be created to eliminate the hole Possible problems gt 2 Single edges This check will locate surface elements that have two edges as single edges Mostly these elements should be thrown out Possible problems gt Single Multiple edges This check will locate surface elements that have an edge which 1s single and another which 15 multiple Possible problems gt Stand alone surface mesh This check locates surface elements that do not share a face with a volume element These can generally be deleted in the case of a volume mesh Possible problems gt Delaunay violation This check finds the elements if they are violating the Delaunay rule Delaunay rule s
529. rain Energy ESE Press Apply to complete the setup Nastran Tutorials Figure 4 256 Setup Analysis Type 8 Setup Analysis Type Galver window NASTRAN Executive amp Case Control Cards Run Linear Static Sol 101 Executive Control Cards Run Time TIME 99999 Output Lines MAWLINES 33422 mi Write Input Lines ECHO NONE Parameters Mass Multiplier v T MASS 1 000000 Rotation Stiffness Adjustment KEROT 0 000000 Wlan ratio MAXRATIO 1e 07 Coupled Mass COUPMASS 1 Constrain Singularities ALI THUS PE Grid weights GADPNT Loads and Constraints Sets Single Point Constraints SPC ii Load Set LOAD Temperature Set TEMP Output Requests Displacement DISP Stress STRESS Strain STRAIN Element Strain Energy ESE Apply Dismiss Nastran Tutorials Save Project Through File gt Save Project As option create new directory Conrod as said in earlier tutorials Enter Conrod as project name and press Save to save all these information in this directory as shown in Figure 4 257 It will save four files geometry file mesh file attribute file and parameter files as Conrod uns Conrod fbc and Conrod par respectively along with the supplied project file Conrod prj aad 4 257 Save n E Conrod amp Save Proje ct As wind H
530. rameters The Scale factor allows the user to globally control the mesh size instead of changing the mesh size on each and every entity For further description of this option refer to the on line help Press Apply followed by Dismiss to close the window Tetra Meshing Figure 3 253 Editing the Global Mesh sizes Global Mesh Global Mesh Parameters a FM A J 7 i Global Element 5cale Factor Scale factor 1 Display Global Element Seed Size Max element 32 Display Hatural Size Enabled Size Display Mum of Elements in gap Refinement ignore Wall Thickness Triangle tolerance 10 001 Unitless tri tolerance isi Apply ok Dismiss g Setting Surface mesh size Select Mesh gt Set Surface Mesh Size gt Select surface s Assign a Maximum size of 1 to the fin Tutorial Manual Tetra Meshing surfaces 1 0 LEAD TRAIL PRESS SUCT and For the outer box define Maximum size of 4 i e for parts BOX SYMM INLET and OUTLET h Setting curve mesh size t Select Mesh gt Set Curve Mesh Size pu gt Select curves curves are in the GEOM part Assign size O to all curves Press shift P to get the list of parts Select GEOM from the list and Accept Set Maximum Size to 0 and Apply The mesh density will be a region in which one can prescribe a certain maximum element size T
531. rder struct Defaults for 3 0 22 Property Temperature data None Defaults for low order therme Defaults for low order therme Defaults Far high order therm Defaults for low order struct Defaults for Flotran 2 elem Delete Copy Defaults For high order struct Define surface to surface co Isotropic Accept Cancel Tutorial Manual ANSYS Tutorials Do the same operation to define the thermal conductivity to the MAT BOARD material Then click on Accept in solver parameters window Now press Edit attributes which will invoke a Boundary Conditions window Please follow the images to define the boundary condition for M CHIP and BOARD SURE part Click on Volumes gt M CHIP gt Create New option to select the boundary condition type Select the Nodal Body Loads as shown in Figure 4 78 Figure Selection Boundary condition selection window for MAT CHIP Select a BC type Nodal Body Loads a Boundary Conditions Electromagnetic material Flatran nan Huid material Maternal Properties Named Local Coordinate System Nodal Body Loads Nodal DOF Constraint Nodal Forces Nodal Surface Loads Structural material Okay Cancel Figure 4 79 Family Boundary Condition window for M_CHIP ANSYS Tutorials Family boundary conditions a m Volumes Nodal Body Loads BF Label eat Generation Fal Boundary Conditions Value 09 Ele
532. re 3 166 Figure 3 166 Pre mesh smooth window Pre Mesh Smooth a Smooth Method Method Quality Smoothing iterations 3 E Up to quality 0 5 Criterion Angle Advanced Options Only visible subsets Active parts only Laplace smoothing Apply ok Cancel Press Apply to smooth mesh Changes in the minimum angle of the mesh can be seen in the histogram as shown in Figure 3 167 The node position changes made by the pre mesh smoother will not be saved to the blocking So reloading the blocking and computing the mesh will always Tutorial Manual Figure 3 167 Histogram after running smoother u Saving Hexa Meshing produced the mesh before smoothing So at this point you should not recompute the mesh ER zh tm p co fs Select File gt Blocking gt Save blocking As and enter a name such as bl blk Saving the blocking will allow the user to change any meshing parameters in the future by reloading the blocking onto the geometry To write the mesh in an unstructured format right mouse click in the Display Tree on Blocking Pre mesh Convert to Unstruct Mesh This will write the default name hex uns to the working directory and immediately load the mesh To save the mesh to a different name the user can then select File gt Mesh gt Save Mesh As To write the mesh in a structured format right mouse click in the Display Tree on Blocking gt Pre mesh gt Convert to MultiBl
533. re 3 620 The hexa unstructured mesh for the 3D Pipe Junction This mesh may be used for input to the STAR CD solver a Summary of Steps Choosing the appropriate solver with Select Settings gt Solver Adding boundary conditions with Boundary conds Writing output to the selected solver Tutorial Manual Output to Solvers Note Different solvers need different output structures For example STAR CD requires an unstructured format while CFX TASCflow requires multi block structured format Input to the STAR CD output interface then should be an unstructured Hexa Tetra or Prism domain file and input to the CFX TASCflow output interface should be a set of structured Hexa domain files Note For information on each of the output interfaces consult the web page http www berkeley ansys com interfaces ToC html where links are located providing information to the details of each interface For users who wish to write output files for unstructured mesh follow the instructions provided by the subsection Unstructured Mesh For users who wish to write output files for structured mesh follow the instructions provided by subsection Structured Mesh Users may also successively go through both sections to write output files for different regions of the model Output to Solvers 3 8 2 Unstructured Mesh If the 3DPipeJunct is not the current project choose File gt Open Project and from the File selection window choo
534. re 4 38 ANSYS Tutorials It will save six files Geometry file tin Mesh file uns Attribute file atr Parameter file par boundary conditions file fbc and the project settings file prj Figure Project As Save Sea in Conrad E ex par Projec tAs Conrad Ansys prj windo History 6 Desktop Documents Computer My Network Pla File name as hype Project Files nri Write Ansys Input File Click the Solve Options gt Write View Input File Dp button Enter the Ansys file name as Conrod_Ansys in and switch ON View Ansys file at the bottom as shown in Figure 4 39 Press Apply ANSYS Tutorials Figure 4 39 Write iew Input Write View Input File File window Solver AN ato Ansys File Conrod Ansys in Attribute File ansys Parameter File ansys anays par Edit Options Basic C Advanced Volume Elements Defined Shell Elements Defined Thickness Distribution BCDefined Bar Elements Defined Create Attribute amp Parameter Files Edit Parameters Edit Attributes Iw View Ansys file Apply cock Cancel You will see that the Ansys input data file comes up in the default text editor This file can be edited and saved 1f desired Since there is no need to do any editing for this example just close the editor Tutorial M
535. ree on Blocking gt Index control to display the index control in the lower right corner Press Select corners and select vertices 89 and 70 with the left mouse button The blocking will restrict to the blocks that connect the diagonal of this selection Switch on Points to Proceed Further Blocking gt Split Block n gt Split Block 5 Select the edge connecting vertices 69 and 73 and split this edge by the Prescribed point POINTS 5 at the tip of the wing In the Index control use Select corners to further restrict the blocking by selecting vertices 105 and 70 Blocking gt Split Block gt gt Split Block Select the edge connecting vertices 69 and 70 and split this edge by the Prescribed point POINTS 19 at the front of the fuselage Tutorial Manual Hexa Meshing Blocking gt Split Block gt Split Block Select the edge connecting vertices 129 and 70 and split this edge by the Prescribed point POINTS 20 at the tail of the fuselage Switch off Points The blocking should look like Figure 3 203 Figure 3 203 More splitting around the fuselage e Splitting the Blocking around Wing To further restrict the display around the fuselage use the Index Control and press Select corners and select the vertices 134 and 159 ANN Blocking gt Split Block si gt Split Block 4 Select the edge connecting vertices 129 and 135 and split this edge by the prescribed point POINTS 18 which is
536. requirements Assigning the edge meshing parameters occurs after the development of the block topology model This option 15 accessible by selecting Meshing gt Edge params The user has access to the following pre defined bunching laws or Meshing laws Default Bi Geometric Law Uniform Hyperbolic Poisson Curvature Geometric 1 Geometric 2 Exponential 1 Exponential 2 Bi Exponential Linear Spline The user may modify these existing laws by Applying pre defined edge meshing functions accessible through the Meshing gt Edge Params gt Graphs option in Hexa This option yields these possible functions Constant Ramp S curve Hexa Meshing Appendix 279 Parabola Middle Parabola Ends Exponential Gaussian Linear Spline Note By selecting the Graphs option the user may add delete modify the control points governing the function describing the edge parameter settings Additional tools such as Linked Bunching and the multiple Copy buttons provide the user with the ability to quickly Apply the specified edge bunching parameters to the entire model 3 3 5 Smoothing Techniques In ICEM CFD Hexa both the block topology and the mesh may be smoothed to improve the overall block mesh quality either in a certain region or for the entire model The block topology may be smoothed to improve the block shape prior to mesh generation This reduces the time required for development of the block topology model The geometry
537. rface the mesh could be over constrained since if the mesh size 1s large the mesh might jump from one edge to the other edge and neglect to model the fillet region Thus the curves at the top and bottom of the filleted surface shouldn t be included in the model It is important to include the curve in Example 2 since it will force Tetra to locate nodes along this corner Points are also necessary to capture the corners of curves If two curves intersect at a sharp angle and the user wishes to capture this feature a point must be created in the corner of intersection Sizes on surfaces and curves To produce the optimal mesh it 1s essential that all surfaces and curves have the proper tetra sizes assigned to them For a visual representation of the mesh size select Surfaces Tetra sizes from the Display Tree Tetra Meshing Appendix widget The same can be done with Curves Tetra icons will appear representing the element size of the mesh to be created on these entities Using the mouse the user may rotate the model and visually confirm that the tetra sizes are appropriate If a curve or surface does not have an icon plotted on it the icon may simply be too large or too small to see In this case the user should modify the mesh parameters so that the icons are visible in a normal display The user should also make sure that a reference element size has been defined To modify the mesh size for all entities adjust the Scale fac
538. rface Family Refinement Define All Surface Refinement Number of Buffer Layers 4 i Angle Threshold for Refinement Area Weight Normals Number of Cut Planes int dir 3 Number of Cut Planes dir 3 Number of Cut Planes in dir 3 Mesh Internal Region Apply ox Dismiss 10 In the Parts menu under the Display Tree widget perform the operation Parts gt Hide All right click on Parts to access and then turn on only the Part CUTPLANE Z2 as shown in Figure 3 495 Tutorial Manual Cart3D Figure 3 495 EHE Mode Display Tree widget Geometry CUTPLANE 1 CUTPLANE x2 CUTPLANE 3 LLTPLAME 11 LLUTPLAMNE 12 LLUTPLAMNE 13 CUTPLANE 21 CUT PLANE 2 CUTPLANE 23 WING 11 The mesh projected onto the middle z direction plane in Part CUTPLANE Z2 is shown in Figure 3 496 Tutorial Manual Cart3D Figure 3 496 CUTPLA NE Z2 Mesh 12 Perform the operation Parts gt Show by a right click on Parts in the Display Tree widget after viewing the mesh c Mesh Generation Full Mesh 1 Now in the Cart3D mesher window enable Create and Save Full Mesh as shown in Figure 3 497 Tutorial Manual Cart3D Figure 3 497 Cart3D Mesher Create and Save Full Mesh CartsD files prefix Single Component Fix Normals Nominal Mesh Radius Body n H Lenght 124 Starting Mesh Divisions 3 33 Num of Cell Refinements 1 2 E Compute Parameters
539. rfaces to better view the new vertex positions as in Figure 3 126 Tutorial Manual Hexa Meshing Figure 3 126 Vertice S moved on the geomet ry jp Creating the O grid An O grid will be used to capture the cube as well as radially propagate the mesh onto the sphere a e Select Blocking gt Split Block S gt Ogrid Block 274 Select face s select the bottom face of the block and press the middle mouse button Note that the block will be selected as well Figure 3 127 Selecting the face selects both blocks on either side The VOREN block beneath the face is not active so a flat icon 1s shown instead of the block underneath Tutorial Manual Figure 3 127 Selectin g the Face for the O Grid Hexa Meshing Press Apply to create the half O Grid k Fitting the O grid Using Prescribed Points Use the central block of the o grid to represent the cube Turn on Geometry gt Points in the Display tree Select Blocking gt Associate 8 Associate Vertex Make sure Point 15 selected under Associate Vertex Entity options in the Blocking Associations panel Select a corner vertex of the central block then select the nearest corner point to that vertex on the cube geometry The vertex will immediately snap to the selected point Note When the vertex snaps to the point selected the point will turn red Red designates a fixed vertex which can t be moved unless the association is
540. riate location Now enter SOLID as the new Part Name in the Create Body window Press the location selection icon E and select two locations on the blade surfaces so that the midpoint will be inside of the blade Press the middle mouse button to accept and press Apply After accepting this Parts assignment dynamically rotate the model to confirm that SOLID is inside the blade When this is complete all components of the Geometry should now have part name assignments Delete any Empty Parts From the Display Tree right mouse select on Parts gt Delete empty Parts Hexa Meshing File gt Save Project As to save the updated model before continuing on in this tutorial Give the project any name you choose h Blocking Initialize blocking which will create the first block by going n Cy UD to Blocking gt Create Block x gt Initialize Block KY The Create Block window will open as shown in Figure 3 136 Figure 3 136 Create Block E Create block window Create Block CTA ATA M E a coco Vo w Initialize Blocks Type ap Bounding Box Entities 83 Project vertices Orient with geometry 2D Blocking Apply ok Dismiss Select the block Type as 3D Bounding Box from the pull down arrow Name the Part as Fluid Press Apply without selecting anything and the initial block will be created around the whole model Tutorial Manual Hexa Meshing T
541. right click on Blocking gt Pre mesh and ensure that Project Faces is checked Then turn ON the Pre mesh and choose Yes when asked to recompute mesh Switch off Edges and all geometry in the Display Tree to view only the pre mesh The final mesh should look similar to Figure 3 195 To get a good quality mesh check angles and determinants view the lowest histogram bars then inspect the lowest quality elements and decide which blocks they exist in and which vertices need to be moved and what direction After adjusting vertices turn the Pre mesh OFF and ON again to recompute the mesh Try to get determinants above 0 3 and angles above 15 degrees Figure 3 195 The final mesh Hexa Meshing save the blocking File gt Blocking gt Save Blocking As Right click in the Display Tree on Blocking gt Pre mesh gt Convert to Unstruct Mesh This will write out the unstructured mesh to the default name hex uns to the working directory Then it will automatically load the mesh You resave File gt Mesh gt Save Mesh As to a different name if you d like after that Tutorial Manual Hexa Meshing 3 2 8 Wing Body Overview This tutorial example will focus on generating a mesh with a replay file for a three dimensional wing body configuration as shown in the diagram below The geometry consists of a simple cigar shaped body with a tapered wing a Summary of Steps Geometry and Blocking Strategy Startin
542. rite Nastran Input File Click Dp Write View Input File icon from Solve Options Tab Menu bar which will open Write View Input File window presented in Figure 4 232 Give the Nastran file name as Frame dat and switch On View Nastran file as shown in Figure 4 232 and press Apply Nastran Tutorials Figure 4 232 Write View 9 Input File window Solver NASTRAN Nastran File Frame dat Volume Elements Defined Shell Elements Defined Bar Elements Defined gt Thickness Distribution BCDefined Large Field Format Use Continuation Card View Nastran File Apply ok Dismiss User will see that the Nastran input data file comes up in the default text editor If user likes to edit this file directly then this can be done and can save the edited file through this text editor Since no need to do any editing for this example just close the editor j Solution and Results Linear Static analysis 1s to be performed on this model and the results should be visualized in a post processor Solving the problem Nastran Tutorials Click on Q Submit Solver Run icon from the Solve Options Tab Menubar to start Nastran as shown in Figure 4 233 The Nastran file will be selected by default as Frame dat Toggle ON Post process and View Results and press Apply in Run Solver window Figure 4 233 Hun Saltet Gil Nastran Run E Start window NASTRAN Nastran File
543. rm 1 RMB Offset Z FC1 value 1 30 mm Additional Transform Reverse Mormal z Axis Flip XY Axes Mao Export Coordinate System Mo This will create the offset plane in the opposite direction Now open the sketching window and select the circle to create the approximate circle Create the approximate circle as done previously After generating the circle apply the dimensions as the same dimensions shown in Figure 5 16 After applying the dimensions press extrude from the main toolbar and enter the details in detail view as shown in Figure 5 20 Figure 5 20 Details of Extrude Extrude details Extrude Extrudez Base Object Sketch4 Operation Add Material Direction vector None Mormaf Direction Normal Tvpe Faces Target Faces 1 45 ThinfSurface Merge Topology Yes After extrusion the geometry will look like the figure shown below Tutorial Manual ANSYS ICEMCFD CFX Tutorials Figure 5 21 Final geomet ry after comple te extrusi on Now we are done with the geometry creation We now proceed to the Advanced Meshing tab for meshing Click on Project in the main menu Select Proceed to Advanced Meshing This will open the Advanced Meshing interface where the user can repair the geometry mesh it and write the output file for CFX Tutorial Manual ANSYS ICEMCFD CFX Tutorials DA Project dm DesignModel Figure 5 22 File Tools Help TA E Project options window DesignModeler Tas
544. rmal Vertices to Set 13 Te Tutorial Manual Advanced Meshing Tutorials Note The user should switch off Curves gt Show Curves Names and Points gt Show Points Name for most of the time to reduce clutter They should be turned on only when it s required and then should be turned off again For the rest of the tutorial it is assumed that the user would do that to find the location of the Curves or Points Figure 3 308 Initial Blocking after vertex placement e Creating the O grid d ie Select Blocking gt Split Block D O Grid Block Select the Face and then select the Edges 11 19 and 19 21as shown in Figure 3 309 and Press Apply Tutorial Manual Advanced Meshing Tutorials Figure 3 309 Selection of edges and Faces for the O Grid The Blocking after O grid creation 15 shown in Figure 3 310 Figure 3 310 Blocking after 21 O grid creation M ag 7 Tutorial Manual Advanced Meshing Tutorials Switch on Points gt Show Points Name select Association ci gt Associate Vertex to Point project vertex 33 to POINTS 18 and vertex 35 to POINTS 14 Set the Screen position to View gt Front and then by using Blocking gt Move Vertex gt Move Vertex Enable Fix Direction as shown in Figure 3 311 Tutorial Manual Advanced Meshing Tutorials Figure 3 311 a Fix Direction Window Move Vertices Move Yertices EP EN qa Move Yertex HM
545. rt d Create Part window Fart 2 Create Part 4086 Create Part by Selection Entities surface FFIN2 03 Apply ok Cancel similarly move each fin into a different Part with the front fins in FFINI FFIN2 FFIN3 and FFIN4 and the back fins in BFINI BFIN2 BFIN3 and BFINA Note It is better to keep each component in separate Parts The final geometry image which we get after the Part assignments is shown in Figure 3 531 Tutorial Manual Cart3D Figure 3 531 After Part Assignm ent From the main menu select Edit gt Facets gt Mesh that would give us the desired mesh as shown in Figure 3 532 Tutorial Manual Cart3D Figur 3 532 Facet Mesh Note Keep the original missile uns at some other location so that user who wants to start this tutorial from the Mesh Generation Preview Only step can load the missile uns file without disturbing the original file save the mesh under the name missile uns and close the geometry f Mesh Generation Preview only Note Users are encouraged to use the domain file created in the above section to run Cart3D Otherwise they can use the domain file missile uns available with the tutorial Tutorial Manual Cart3D Click on Cart3D from the main menu Select the Volume Mesher 0 Icon Leave Fix Normals enabled to ensure the triangle normals point outwards Set Nominal Mesh Radius Body Length X 2
546. rties selection of Material Element Properties Solver setup setup a Nastran Run Save Project Write Nastran Input File Solution and Results Solving the Problem Post processing of Results m P Tutorial Manual Nastran Tutorials b Launch AI Environment Launch the AI Environment from UNIX or DOS window Then File gt Change working directory ICEM ACN docu FEAHelp AI Tutorial Files Load the tetin file Tpipe tin The geometry is shown in Figure 4 142 Figure 4 142 Open Geometr yFile window c Geometry Editing For this tutorial use the Tpipe tin tetin file geometry file from the input files supplied as mentioned above Mid Surface Model The model currently has thickness and will eventually be modeled using thin shells To do this the model needs to be collapsed to a Mid Surface representation Tutorial Manual Nastran Tutorials Expand Geometry menu of the Model Tree by clicking on sign besides Geometry menu Turn ON Surfaces in display by clicking on button for Surfaces in Model Tree Click on e Create Modify Surface icon from Geometry Tab Menubar Enter Part as MID as shown in Figure 4 143 in Create Modify Surface window and leave the Name blank Click on 2 Mid surface icon In the Method window select By Surface Enable Inherit part name enter 15 as the Search distance in the How window select Quiet Present obje
547. rve s surface surface 5 A Maximum Size 55 Number of Nodes o Height RENI R atio 0 width jo 4 size ln 0 7 Masiniun deviation 0 Advanced Bunching Bunching law Spacing 1 1 Spacing z Ratio 2 Space Adjust attached curves Remesh attached surfaces Blank curves with params Tutorial Manual Nastran Tutorials Meshing Select the lt gt Mesh Shell icon from Mesh Tab Menubar Select Patched Based Change the Mesh from Quad Dominant to Quad Click on Select surface s button and select all the surfaces by pressing ensure that the mouse cursor is in display window and press Apply in the Mesh Surface window as shown in Figure 4 243 Nastran Tutorials Figure 4 243 A Mesh Surface Mesh Surface window EI EM surface Meshing Mesh type Quad Dominant v boundaries Method From surfaces Surfaces Prajectto surfaces 6 Respectline elements Remove old elements Use surface sizes Simple offset Ignore size 0 Clean level fi E Smooth boundaries Mapping joe 34 Adjust nodes limit 0 deviation fo Try harder Apply Dismiss Tutorial Manual Nastran Tutorials In Display Tree click on a branch of Mesh Click the right mouse button on Mesh Shells and select Solid amp Wire The mesh looks as
548. rves and trimmed B Spline surfaces with prescribed points ANSYS ICEM CFD Al Environment 10 0 User Manual SAS IP Inc Chapter 2 Tetra Triangular surface meshes as geometry definition Full partial surface meshes B Spline Curves and Surfaces When the input is a set of B Spline curves and surfaces with prescribed points the mesher approximates the surface and curves with triangles and edges respectively and then projects the vertices onto the prescribed points The B Spline curves allow Tetra to follow discontinuities in surfaces If no curves are specified at a surface boundary Tetra will mesh triangles freely over the surface edge Similarly prescribed points allow the mesher to recognize sharp corners in the geometry ANSYS ICEM CFD provides tools Build Topology to extract points and curves to define sharp features in the surface model Triangular surface meshes as geometry definition Prescribed curves and points can also be extracted from triangulated surface geometry This could be stereolitho graphy STL data or a surface mesh converted to faceted geometry Though the nodes of the Tetra generated mesh will not exactly match the nodes of the given triangulated geometry they will follow the overall shape A geometry for meshing can contain both faceted and B Spline geometry Full partial surface mesh Existing surface mesh for all or part of the geometry can be specified as input to Tetra The final mesh will the
549. ry plane Tutorial Manual Advanced Meshing Tutorials The tetra mesh for submarine with symmetry plane is shown in Figure 3 389 Figure 3 389 Mesh in the Fin area h Diagnostics As with the tetra tutorials the user will need to go through all of the checks for Errors and Possible problems Select Edit Mesh gt Check Mesh to ensure that the mesh does not contain any flaws that would cause problems for analysis i Smoothing After the generation of tetra mesh smoothing was done automatically After eliminating errors possible problems from a tetra grid the user should re examine grid quality Tutorial Manual Advanced Meshing Tutorials and if necessary smooth the grid to improve the quality To do this select Edit Mesh gt Smooth Mesh Set the Smoothing iterations to 5 and the Up to quality to 0 4 When all of the parameters have been modified as in Figure 3 390 select Apply The smoother histogram is shown in Figure 3 39 Figure 3 390 Smooth mesh globally SU SHOES a window p Quality smoothing iterations 5 Lp to quality 02 Criterion Quality omooth Mesh Smooth Freeze Float TETRA_ C A TRL3 Smooth Parts 5ubsets Method All parts Retresh Histogram Apply Dismiss Tutorial Manual Advanced Meshing Tutorials Modify the display of the histogram to have a Height of 20 elements Right mouse
550. s Penetrating Non manifald elements vertices Disconnected bar Unconnected elements vertices Set defaults Elements to check fe All C Active Check mode Create subsets Check fix each Apply o Dismiss In the Diagnostic window it asks to Delete the unconnected vertices Press Yes Tutorial Manual Cart3D Expand the Mesh branch the Display Tree widget Right click on Shells and select Solid and Wire Similarly select Face Normals for Shells From the Edit Mesh tab select Reorient Mesh gi Select Reorient Consistent The user is automatically placed into selection mode and prompted to select a shell element Select one element whose normal is facing outward or an element colored by the Part name color and middle click to accept Under the Mesh branch of the Display Tree widget make sure all types are active EXCEPT Shells Note Note that Cart3D requires only Triangles in the Mesh file so other mesh entities like Points Lines and Volumes need to be deleted From the Edit Mesh tab select Delete Elements If not already placed into selection mode from the Delete Elements window click Select K Element s X In the Select mesh elements window click on Select all appropriate visible objects 0 elements but Shells are deleted Either middle click or press Apply to finish Activate Shells from the Display Tree widget and de select Shells gt F
551. s Apply ox Dismiss Specify Max Number of Cycles 250 Enable Y axis spanwise Enable Save Full Hex Result Click Apply and run the solver Tutorial Manual Cart3D The user can view the convergence by clicking on the Convergence Monitor icon and the window pops up as shown in Figure 3 559 This may open automatically Figure 3 559 Sol ution amp xial Ferce C onve rg enc i N villa Mas Residual e window BITTE 10 20 30 Iterations Done Print Set range Full range Xlog Y log v Symbols V Lines v M Y arid f Computing Force and Moments L In the Cart3D main menu select Integrate Cp The Post Process solution window appears as shown in Figure 3 560 Tutorial Manual Cart3D Figure 3 560 Post Process ral Post Process Solution Solution window Carts Result file BJET c3di tria gt Clie Output Directory Profiles E Reference parameters Family Params All Params Model asis tb Model anis 2 Model axis Cp Distribution Apply ia Cancel Click All Params in the window In the Reference All Params window set Reference Area 120 6 and Reference Length 56 8 Enable Compute Force and Compute Moment Click Apply in the Reference All Params window and then Dismiss as shown in Figure 3 561 Tutorial Manual Cart3D Figure 3 561 Reference All Par
552. s e Supply the following information Enter Name as CONTACT ALL For Contact surfaces select all elements using hotkey Under the LS Dyna Single Contact Option select AUTOMATIC SINGLE SURFACE e Press Apply to generate Contact information e Turn OFF Single Surface Contacts display from the Display Tree widget e Velocity Vet e From the Constraints tab click on Define Initial Velocity ifi to open the Define Initial Velocity window as shown in Figure 4 131 LS Dyna Tutorials Figure 4 131 Define Initial Ti Define Initial Velocity m Velocity window Hame VELDEITY Fonts uns sel 2 vd Directional Velocity 25 00 Y 00 2 5858 88 Rotational Velocity A 00 Y 00 2 00 Apply ox Dismiss Enter name as INIT VELOCITY For Points click on Select node s AS and select all nodes using hotkey 66 99 Enter a value of 8888 88 for the Z Directional Velocity e Press Apply to define Initial velocity e Turn OFF Velocities display from the Display Tree widget f Rigid Wall From the Constraints tab click on Define Planer Rigid Wall us the Planar Rigid Wall window as presented in Figure 4 132 LS Dyna Tutorials Figure 4 132 Define Planar Rigid Define Planar Wall i Rigid Wall window Name RIGID WALL Points uns sel 2 Offset 00 Hormal Vector Data Head Coordinates A 00 Y 0 0 Z 100000 0 Tail Coordinates A 0 0 Bf 00 2 10 0
553. s In Boundary Conditions gt Surface BC gt INLET set Pressure 1 75 Click Accept to close Repeat steps 10 7 5 and 10 7 6 to run the solver and view the results Be sure to set Max Number of Cylcles 200 The Pressure result is shown in Figure 3 599 Note the Min and Max values for Pressure in the figure are 0 5406 and 1 600 respectively Tutorial Manual Cart3D Figure 3 599 Sub Critical Post Proces sor Result h Case 3 Super Critical Close the Post Processing session with File gt Results gt Close Result and confirm to close by pressing Yes Change the working directory via File gt Change Working Dir and set the location to the folder Super Critical into which the original files were copied From the Cart3D menu select Solver gt Define solver params In Boundary Conditions gt Surface BC gt INLET set Pressure 1 42 Click Accept to close Repeat steps 10 7 5 and 10 7 6 to run the solver and view the results Be sure to set Max Number of Cylcles 200 The Pressure result is shown in Figure 3 600 Note the Min and Max values for Pressure in the figure are 0 600 and 1 500 respectively Cart3D Figure 3 600 Super Critical Post Proces sor Result Tutorial Manual Cart3D 3 7 8 Advanced Tutorial Converging Diverging Nozzle flow Overview The main aim of this tutorial is to study compressible channel flow through a converging diverging nozzle This also verifies INLET EXIT BCs with
554. s Apply followed by Dismiss to close the window Figure 3 286 Curve Mesh Size a Edit the curve mesh sizes Curve Mesh Parameters Method General Select Curve s cur 5 hd asimum Size EN Number of Modes Height 0 Ratio n 4 Minimum size jo Masinurn deviation jo Advanced Bunching Bunching law 24 Spacing 1 Ratio tt Spacing 2 Rai2 Space Adjust attached curves Remesh attached surfaces Blank curves with params Apply Dismiss Next save this configuration as a Tetin file be sure that all entities are displayed so that they will be written to the file Press File gt Save Project to save this data Tutorial Manual Tetra Meshing Appendix D Generating the Tetrahedral Mesh select Mesh gt Volume Meshing 9 gt From Geometry af Press Apply in Mesh with tetrahedral window Figure 3 287 After the mesh is generated it will be as seen in Figure 3 288 Tutorial Manual Tetra Meshing Appendix Figure 3 287 Mesh Vol E Mesh with Tetrahedral window p O O O O Mesh type Tetra Method cioe ge Smooth mesh Iterations 5 4 Min quality 0 4 m Coarsen mesh Iterations Worst aspect ratio joi Smooth transition Factor 1 2 Options Run as batch process Only visible geometry Part by Part Load mesh after completion Apply ok Dismiss Tutorial
555. s Modulus as a Constant 36e6 Define Poisson s Ratio as a Constant 0 3 ANSYS Tutorials Leave all other fields as they are The window should look like Figure 4 54 Then press Apply ANSYS Tutorials Figure 4 54 Define Material Define Material Property Property a window E Material Name MATT Material ID 1 Type Isotropic Young s Modulus E f Constant Waning Value 3566 Shear Modulus G f Constant Varving Poissons s Ratio HU Constant Warning Value 0 3 Apply o Cancel Element Properties Tutorial Manual ANSYS Tutorials Select Properties Define 3D Element Properties TA Select the Part as V BLOCK Select the Material as MATI Set the PID to 10 The Define Volume Element window should look like Figure 4 55 when you are finished Then press Apply Figure 4 55 Define Volume c Define Volume Element z Element window Part v BLOCK it Material 1 Pip 10 LCS Global Apply ok Dismiss We also need to define the volume elements of the PIN region These are in the V PIN part So select the Part as V PIN Leave the Material as MATI and specify the PID as 11 Then press Apply again e Constraints and Displacement Relevant Constraints and Displacements still need to be applied on the model There will be no applied force for the model The non zero initial displacement will serve as t
556. s for the Mesh In this step the user will define node distributions on the blocking using surface parameters Surfaces should be Tutorial Manual Hexa Meshing turned ON in the Display Tree so they can be selected from the screen Select Mesh Set Surface Mesh Size and select the surface selection icon Then select all the surfaces by box selecting the entire model or pressing a Enter the Maximum Element size as 0 3 Height as 0 03 and Ratio as 1 25 as shown in Figure 3 156 Figure 3 156 Surface mesh Surface Mesh Size size window Surface s GEOM 16 GEOM Maximum size 0 3 Height 003 Height ratio 1 25 Number af layers oc g Tetra size ratio 0 Minimum size 0 deviation 0 Blank surfaces with parama Apply ck Dismiss Press Apply to assign the surface parameters Display the surface parameters by right mouse clicking in the Display Tutorial Manual Hexa Meshing Tree on Geometry Surface gt Hexa Sizes The surfaces will show hexa icons as shown in Figure 3 157 Figure 3 157 is LEA surface paramete p 77 rs c etel 4 n s uS TERI c s EE s 1 p Switch OFF Surface Hexa Sizes r Defining Edge Parameters to Adjust the Mesh Although it may be enough to define the meshing with surface parameters the mesh quality of more complex models can be improved by defining additi
557. s geometry file geometry tin and domain surface mesh uns c Setting Global mesh size Choose Mesh Set Global Mesh Size Tutorial Manual Advanced Meshing Tutorials Figure 3 382 Global Mesh Size 9 Global Mesh Global Mesh Parameters Parameters window Global Element Scale Factor Scale factor 01 Display Global Element Seed Size Max element Display Natural Size iw Enabled Size 0 125 Display Num of Elements in gap Refinement 10 Ignore Yall Thickness Triangle tolerance 0 001 Unitless tri tolerance M Apply Dismiss In the Global mesh size window enter a scale factor of 0 25 a Maximum size of 64 Natural size of 0 125 Natural size gt Refinement of 10 and Tri tolerance of 0 001 as shown Figure 3 382 Leave the other parameters at their default settings Press Apply followed by Dismiss d Setting surface mesh size Choose Mesh gt Set Surface Mesh si V to set the meshing size parameters on the surfaces of the model Select all surfaces the model by on the key board and enter the Maximum element Size of 8 Next repeat the step and from the selection filter click on by parts icon and select the part SUBMARINE The user can make other parts invisible Tutorial Manual Advanced Meshing Tutorials from Display Tree if it s too much clutter on the screen In the Surface Mesh Size window enter a Maximum
558. s one minus the ratio of the shorter diagonal over the longer diagonal Thus 0 1s perfectly rectangular and 1 represents maximum skewness 3 3 6 Refinement and Coarsening The refinement function which is found through Meshing gt Refinement can be modified to achieve either a refined or a coarsened result The refinement coarsening may be applied in all three major directions simultaneously or they may be applied in just one major direction Refinement The refinement capability 1s used for solvers that accept non conformal node matching at the block boundaries The refinement capability is used to minimize model size while achieving proper mesh definition in critical areas of high gradients Coarsening Tutorial Manual Hexa Meshing Appendix 281 In areas of the model where the flow characteristics are such that a coarser mesh definition is adequate coarsening of the mesh may be appropriate to contain model size 3 3 7 Replay Functionality Parametric changes made to model geometry are easily applied through the use of Hexa s replay functionality found in File gt Replay Changes in length width and height of specific geometry features are categorized as parametric changes These changes do not however affect the block topology Therefore the Replay function is capable of automatically generating a topologically similar block model that can be used for the parametric changes in geometry Note If any of the Dir
559. se 3DpipeJunct and press Accept Load the Tetin file geometry tin and the unstructured Hexa mesh hex uns a Setting your Solver select Output gt Select solver to open the Selection window shown in Figure 3 621 Figure 3 621 x Select STAR CD Select solver STAR CD E SAUNA SCRYU SPECTRUM CENTRIC SPLITFLOW ISTAR CD From the Selection window select STAR CD and then press Okay Tutorial Manual Output to Solvers b Editing Boundary Conditions With the solver set the user can browse and set solver specific boundary conditions in the Mesh Editor Press Output gt Boundary This will bring up the Family boundary conditions window as shown in Figure 3 622 Output to Solvers Figure 3 622 The family boundary condition window Mixed unknown Accept Cancel Tutorial Manual Output to Solvers In the Family boundary conditions window Figure 3 623 select Volumes gt LIVE gt Create new This will open up a window to select the type of cells you have Select Fluid BC type in this window as shown in Figure 3 623 Figure 3 623 Selection E Select the FLUID BC to LIVE family E a BC type Fluid ail ICTID number Maternal property Fluid Solid Okap Cancel Press Okay and this should change the Family boundary conditions window as shown in Figure 3 624 Tutorial Manual Output to Solvers Figure i Fluid After de
560. se its Tetin file geometry tin C Determining mid surface The user should verify the thickness by View gt Distance or distance icon fe by clicking on two sides spanning the thickness of the geometry The part will be modeled by the quad shell elements that are computed on the mid surface of the geometry However mid surface creation depends on the gap between the two spanning surfaces The user can safely take a value of 3 to determine the mid surface e Display Surfaces from the model tree The user may type h from the keyboard to get the home view Geometry gt Create Modify Surface This will open up a 1 window as shown in Figure 3 393 Press Mid Surface 2 In the panel Uncheck Inherit part name put the Search distance as 3 and accept the default tolerance for subsequent Build Topology Change Part name for mid surfaces to SURFS and in the Name window enter SURFS 0 Next select Quiet in the How window press on Parts picker is to select the all parts by hotkey a Advanced Meshing Tutorials Tutorial Manual Advanced Meshing Tutorials Figure 3 393 Mid Surface Create Madify surface 2 Part SURFS Name SURFS 00 9 2008028 Method By Parts search distance Tolerance 3 How Quiet gt Farts FRAME is Keep original Delete unattached curves and points x Create assemblies Partial Simila
561. sh which cannot be reached by a user defined material point without intersection of a surface ANSYS CFD Al Environment 10 0 User Manual SAS IP Inc 2 9 Chapter 2 Tetra Figure 2 8 Mesh after it captures surfaces and separation of useful volume AAN MAAA MENGT 2 AS d SUN E CX KON HIS 7 X AT RAO ga TES id an TA E KDR 29 gt q SZ ANZA N EN 2 5 AE 5 4 NO s aS 505 SRA RUE SUNT E 4 P 2 2 SP AES TN A ALTA L 4 SLSR TA aw ET SS ANSYS ICEM CFD Al Environment 10 0 User Manual SAS IP Inc Section 2 2 Tetra Generation Steps Figure 2 9 Final Mesh before smoothing Finally the mesh is smoothed by moving nodes merging nodes swapping edges and in some cases deleting bad cells ANSYS ICEM CFD Al Environment 10 0 User Manual SAS IP Inc 2 11 Chapter 2 Tetra Figure 2 10 Final Mesh after smoothing 2 3 Important Features in Tetra 2 3 1 Natural Size If the maximum tetrahedral size defined on a surface is larger than needed to resolve the feature the user can employ Natural size to automatically subdivide the mesh to capture the feature The value specified is propor tional t
562. sh generation the mesh at one of the inlets will be similar to that shown in Figure 5 39 Note To view the mesh as solid wire mode right click on Mesh Shells in the Display Tree and select Solid amp Wire option Figure 5 39 Prism Layers at inlet ANSYS ICEMCFD CFX Tutorials Editing the Prism Mesh Go to the Edit Mesh tab menubar and click on Smooth Mesh Globally to check the mesh quality In the quality histogram select the first bar with the left mouse button to display the bad elements on the screen as shown in Figure 5 40 Figure 5 40 Low quality Elements displayed in first bar of histogram ANSYS ICEMCFD CFX Tutorials a a d E v mum F 128 NRI FT iF a e ram cy zw e E EN _ Nia mE vt queda XA CESTA A Uu age NAE Ma iran rape 7 gu A l 2A k Et uu 2 um om m coa fec am ri 1 1 ny Me iH 1 d s E pour t e e n ECC B Li s r3 m zs m m PR e TEEN hu E os z cE A eS ae eae n E zr HE ko iR Ti rs These are the low quality tetrahedral elements getting stuck due to pr
563. sher The resultant tet prism mesh is shown in Figure 3 247 Tutorial Manual Tetra Meshing Figur 3 247 Tetra with prism mesh k Diagnostics Check mesh As done in the previous example the user should go through all of the checks for Errors and Possible problems to ensure that the mesh does not contain any flaws that would cause problems for analysis If a question box pops up asking whether to delete disconnected vertices respond by pressing Yes Smoothing the Mesh Once the ICEM CFD Mesh Editor has reported no Errors or Possible problems the user may continue by smoothing the generated Tetra Prism mesh Tutorial Manual Tetra Meshing Press Edit mesh gt Smooth Mesh Globally ca to start the Smooth Elements Globally window as shown in Figure 3 248 Figure 3 248 Smooth Elements Smooth elements globally Globally Quality Smoothing iterations 25 Up to quality 05 Criterion Quality Smooth Mesh Type Smooth Freeze Float TETRA 4 6 C TRI 3 C QUAD_4 Smooth Parts Subsets l parts Apply ck Dismiss Set Smoothing iterations to 25 Up to quality to 0 5 and Criterion to Quality With a Tet Prism mesh first smooth the interior elements without adjusting the prisms Under Smooth Mesh Type set PENTA 6 the prisms to Freeze The mesh quality histogram is next to the messages area as shown in Figure 3 249 Press Apply to start t
564. shing a multiple of the original edge length which is given as 1 setting the offset to 0 5 will reduce the selected edge to half the length It will do this for all the radial edges of the O grid This is why it doesn t matter which radial edge is first selected Press Apply to rescale the O grid This will result in a better element quality Edge to be selected k Generating the Mesh Select Mesh gt Set Surface Mesh Size and box select all surfaces followed by clicking the middle mouse button or press v on the keyboard Enter the following parameters as shown in Figure 3 191 Max Element size 5 Height 1 and Ratio 1 5 Then press Apply Hexa Meshing Figure 3 191 Surface Mesh Size ay Surface mesh size window Suface s Ev MA hd aximum size Height ratia i Humber of layers 8 Tetra size ratio 0 Mininium size 0 deviation 0 Blank surfaces with params Apply Dismiss Before generating the mesh there is an additional step that will improve the quality of the mesh Select Blocking gt Move Vertex gt Move Vertex and reposition the vertices indicated in Figure 3 190 to improve the denoted angle Under Movement constraints select Fix X and Fix Z Then press the vertex selection button and left mouse click and hold to move the vertex down the CYL tube Figure 3 192shows the before and after pictures of the vertex positions Notice that the vertices onl
565. shown in Figure 4 254 Enter Name as PRESSURE Click on SA Select Subset button and select Subset2 for subsets as shown in Figure 4 254 Enter a value of 10 negative value for Pressure and press Apply Turn Loads display from Display Model Tree Figure 4 254 Place Pressure on Gi Place Subsets Pressure on Subsets Mame PRESSURE window Load Set Subsets Subset Pressure Uniform Normal Pressure Load Pressure Apply ok Dismiss h Solver Setup Setup Nastran Run First user should select the appropriate solver before proceeding further Select Setting gt Solver from Main menu and select Solver as NASTRAN as shown in Figure 4 255 and press Apply Nastran Tutorials Figure 4 255 SIE Sele ay Solver Setup window Solver NASTRAN Set As Default Apply ok Cancel Click on Setup Analysis Type icon from Solve Options Tab Menu bar to setup Nastran run to do Linear Static Analysis that will pop up Setup Analysis Type window as shown Figure 4 256 In the Setup Analysis Type window do the following Select Run Type as Linear Static Sol 101 Make sure that Constraint Singularities AUTOSPC and Grid Weights GRDPNT is turned ON For the Default Sets select Single Point Constraints SPC and Load Set LOAD as In the Output Requests toggle Displacement DISP Stress STRESS Element St
566. side by selecting the two half circles on the other side Assign the Part name INLET and the Name INLET 1 Switch ON the Surfaces in the Display Tree window To see the names of the surfaces use the right mouse button and select Surface Show Surface Names in the Display Tree window The geometry after surface creation is shown in Figure 3 32 Press Dismiss to close the window Geometry Creation Figure 3 32 Geometry After Surface Creation Surface Surface Intersection Geometry gt Create Modify Curve gt Surfaces Surface Intersection Select Surface Surface Intersection and choose the B spline option Select the two surfaces shown in Figure 3 33 Select the blade surface for Set Surfaces and the cylinder surface for Set2 Surfaces pressing the middle mouse button each time Press Apply Repeat this for the other side of the blade Figure 3 33 First intersection curve Tutorial Manual Geometry Creation Select the blade surface first Select the cvlinder surface Build topology Geometry Repair Geometry B Build Diagnostic Topology Select e Build Diagnostic Topology from the geometry tab This will extract all the curves from the surfaces and the points from the curves and delete any duplicates It will also automatically segment the surfaces by the previously created intersection curves Set the tolerance to 0 002 and Filter points and Filter curves should be turned off Press Apply
567. sms are smoothed based on a balance between prism warpage and prism aspect ratio Numbers from 0 01 to 0 50 favor improving the prism aspect ratio and from 0 50 to 0 99 favor improving prism warpage A value of 0 5 favors neither The farther the value is from 0 5 the greater the effect Stay on geometry This is the default where normally when a grid is smoothed the nodes are restricted to the geometry surface curves and points and can only be moved along the geometrical entities to obtain a better mesh Violate geometry Tolerance Selecting this option allows the smoothing operation to yield a higher quality mesh by violating the constraints of the geometry The nodes can be moved off of the geometry to obtain better mesh quality as long as the movement remains within the absolute distance specified by the user Violate geometry Relative Tolerance This option works in the similar fashion as above except that the distance is relative here Allow refinement If the quality of the mesh cannot be improved through normal algebraic smoothing Allow refinement will allow the smoother to automatically subdivide tetras to obtain further improvement After smoothing with 2 18 ANSYS ICEM CFD Al Environment 10 0 User Manual SAS IP Inc Section 2 3 Important Features in Tetra Allow refinement selected it may be necessary to Smooth further with the option turned off The goal of this option isto reduce the number of cells that are attache
568. solute hd Apply ox Dismiss Now select block 13 and it s two corresponding faces as shown in Figure 3 434 after selection press Apply to create first O grid After creation of first O grid blocking will look like as shown Tutorial Manual Advanced Meshing Tutorials Figure 3 434 Block and faces selection for first O grid selection Figure 3 435 Blocking after first O grid creation h Second O grid creation Now to capture second hole in geometry user will create another O grid and corresponding block will defines it to Vorfn family Now before O grid creation user will split the block Select Blocking gt Split block m gt Split block 5 dt will open the window as shown in Figure 3 430 Now select Advanced Meshing Tutorials edge 38 42 and split it at the location as shown in Figure 3 436 Figure 3 436 Location where edge 38 42 to be splitted 15 42 Location where edge 38 42 is split Figure 3 437 After splitting edge 38 42 8 Select Blocking gt Split block gt O grid 4 it will open the O grid block window Select the block and it s two corresponding faces as shown in Figure 3 438 After creation of second O grid blocking will look like as shown in Tutorial Manual Advanced Meshing Tutorials Figure 3 438 Selection of block and faces selection for second O grid creation Figure 3 439 Blocking after second O grid creation
569. ss Apply Figure 4 49 Gurfaca Surface Mesh Size window ces Fe Masa 9 Surface s BLoCK 01 M Maximum size 8 59 45 Height 0 Height ratio 2 Number of layers g Tetra size ratio 50 Minimum size l 0 deviation D Blank surfaces with params Apply ox Dismiss c Meshing amp Internal Wall Tetra Meshing Select the Mesh gt Volume Meshing uo It opens the Mesh Volume window shown in Figure 4 50 Ensure that the Mesh type is set to Tetra ANSYS Tutorials Select the From geometry gH button ANSYS Tutorials Figure 4 50 i Mesh Volume ene 7 Mesh type Tetra Method Smooth mesh Iterations E Min quality 04 mesh ah 3 a a J tereunns m Worst aspa E ratio 01 Smooth transition Fado 2 Options Run as batch process Only visible geometry TE C by Par Load mesh completion 4 Apply OK Dismiss For this tutorial don t change anything here Leave the default parameters as they are and press Apply to start meshing ANSYS Tutorials Creating Internal wall Click on the Edit Mesh Split Mesh T Split Internal Wall d button It opens the Split Mesh window shown in Figure 4 51 Figure 4 51 Split Mesh ay Split Mesh window arti Split Split Internal Wall Internal wall parts PIN Bl x M
570. ssing or the FEA gt Ansys tutorials Figure 4 103 Results Displayed in the Graphics window LS Dyna Tutorials TranzlationTotal Tutorial Manual 4 2 2 Front Door Side Impact AI Environment can be used to carry out various types of dynamic impact analysis Some examples of this category of problems include automotive frontal impact side impact bird strike high velocity projectiles etc A simple door structure 1s used to demonstrate the process A rigid impactor strikes the door structure the lateral direction Yield Stress and Failure Strain Criteria are provided for the door structure so that failed nodes and hence failed elements are deleted from the analysis The geometry is shown in Figure 4 104 Figure 4 104 Front Door Model a Summary of Steps Data Editing Launch AI Environment and import an existing Nastran data file Verification of imported data Modify Density Contacts and Velocities Define Contact LEN ANSYS ICEMCFD 10 0 935 Tutorial Manual LS Dyna Tutorials Define Initial Velocity Save Project Solver Setup setup LS Dyna Run Write LS Dyna Input File Solution and Results solving the problem Visualization of Results b Data Editing For this Tutorial use the FrDoor dat file from the AI Tutorial Files directory Launch AI Environment Launch AI Environment user interface Select File gt I
571. ssociations and degrees of freedom Vertices associated with Prescribed Points are red and are fixed at a point Vertices associated to a curve are green and can be moved on the associated curve By default all the vertices lying on the block material boundary are white and are free to move on any surface Additionally internal surfaces are blue and can be moved along the blue block edges to which they are connected Tutorial Manual Hexa Meshing p Generating the O Grid If the pre mesh is generated at this point the existing blocking would result in skewed cells on the four corners of the pipe Converting the existing H Grid type topology to an O grid type topology inside the pipe will produce a mesh that is low in skewness with orthogonal grid on the pipe walls The following steps will improve the overall mesh quality P 4 Press and select all the Blocks of both the FLUID and SOLID regions since the O grid will be added in the entire pipe as shown in Figure 3 154 Press the middle mouse button to accept Similarly press and select the two INLET faces and two OUTLET faces as shown in Figure 3 154 Press the middle mouse button to accept and Press Apply to create the O grid Hexa Meshing Figure 3 154 Add the faces of the outlet and inlet to O grid After creating the O Grid the blocking will appear as shown in Figure 3 155 Figure 3 155 The O grid q Defining Surface Parameter
572. surface with Faceted Surfaces by Angle select surface from screen Enter Angle as 25 and keep other option as default Press Apply to create the new surfaces FAM 1 0 1 to FAM 1 0 8 Turn OFF the Curves names by right clicking on Curves gt Show curve names and turn ON Surfaces gt Show surface names in the Display Tree widget to see the new surfaces labeled Tutorial Manual Tetra Meshing Appendix f Parts creation Rename new surfaces in order to create distinct parts in the model Right click on Parts gt Create part to open the create part window In that window click on Create Part by selection Then Click on to select the desired surfaces curves points and material Select the two surfaces that make up the walls of the model as seen in Figure 3 279 and complete the selection Figure 3 279 Selecting WALL entities In the Create Part window enter the part as WALL and press Apply Tutorial Manual Tetra Meshing Appendix Figure 3 280 Create Part a Creating the WALL part Part wv ALL a Create Part Create Part by Selection Entities surface 5 Adjust Geometry Names Apply ox Dismiss Make the WALL part invisible in the Display Tree widget for easy selection of the remaining surfaces Using the same procedure as when creating the WALL part create parts for the remaining surface segments as seen in Figure 3 281 Figure 3 281 Part definition
573. t Mumber of Buffer Layers 4 E Angle Threshold Far 20 Refinement Area Weight Normals Number of Cut Planes in dir 3 Number of Cut Planes in dir 3 Number of Cut Planes in dir 3 Mesh Internal Region Apply ox Dismiss Tutorial Manual Cart3D This will create 2 density polygons for mesh density control that can be seen by activating Geometries gt Densities the Display Tree widget This also computes the Finest Cell Dimensions 0 00737 x 0 00737 x 0 00737 Varying the Starting Mesh Divisions and or Max Num of Cell Refinements can vary these values The diagonal points displayed under the Outer Bonding Box are the maximum and minimum points of the bounding box of the Mesh region They can be changed if desired Set the Angle Threshold for Refinement to 5 Note In this case we wish to run the case with symmetry in the Z direction Specify the bounding box minimum Z coordinate as 0 00001 slightly inside the model Refer to Figure 3 475 If the model itself is symmetric turn on Half Body Mesh Symmetric in Z Click Apply after specifying minimum Z coordinates as 0 00001 as shown in Figure 3 475 to run the mesher This will create a domain file with 3 Cut Planes Quad Elements in each coordinate direction and Cut Cells Hex Elements The Preview Mesh will be loaded automatically SS A Tutorial Manu
574. t Done For this tutorial there 1s no need to scale the mesh Press Done to convert the mesh into format StaticMixer2 msh Tutorial Manual ANSYS ICEMCFD CFX Tutorials Fig ure 5 43 Name for 5 file He S m x Output to CFX window i 2 prism prism cmdi Documents s ebaticMixerz StaticMixer StaticMixer Desktop StaticMixer2 atr StaticMixer fic Vit StaticMixerz Fbc old s StaticMixer2 prism params Je Daisies StaticMixerZ uns bak g tetra cmd hy Computer T Network File name static Miser2 Save Lez Save type A Files Cancel ii f Exiting ANSYS ICEMCFD CFX Select File gt Exit from the main menu to quit out of ANSYS ICEMCFD CFX Continuing with the Static Mixer Refined Mesh Tutorail As described in previous tutorial the user can continue 5 Static Mixer Refined Mesh Tutorial from the section Defining the Simulation in CFX Pre Tutorial Manual ANSYS ICEMCFD CFX Tutorials 5 3 Blunt Body 5 3 1 Overview This tutorial covers parasolid geometry import geometry clean up and meshing for an automotive style blunt body using ANSYS ICEMCED It 15 intended to be compatible with CFX 5 Tutorial 5 Flow around a Blunt Body This tutorial would effectively replace the section entitled Creating the Model in CFX Build After completing this tutorial
575. t the appropriate icons from the selection tool bar and Apply Tutorial Manual Hexa Meshing Figure 3 54 Curve Mesh Parameter Curve Mesh Size Window NE E M Curve Mesh Parameters Method General Select Curvels CURVES 5 5 Maximum Size EE Number of Modes Ratio 5 27 width n 4 size foo Maximum deviation foo Advanced Bunching Bunching law Spacing 1 Ratia 1 Spacing 2 Ratio 2 Space Adjust attached curves Remesh attached surfaces Blank curves with params Tutorial Manual Hexa Meshing Note Maximum Size determines the length of the edges on the curve or surface for 3D Height determines the length of the edge of the first layer normal to the curve Ratio determines the normal heights of the subsequent layers In this case height and ratio are determined by the perpendicular curves whose Maximum Size will override any height or ratio settings Initial Mesh Generation Select Blocking gt Pre mesh Params 9 Update Sizes as shown in Figure 3 55 Figure 3 55 Pre Mesh Param Window Mesh Params ashing Parameters IT I I iecalculate Sizes Method Update all C Keep Distributions C Keep Counts Tutorial Manual Hexa Meshing Note This will automatically determine the number of nodes on the edges from the mesh sizes set on the curv
576. t to correct the grid by creating tetras or merging nodes manually Errors gt Missing internal faces This check will find pairs of volume elements that belong to different families but do not have a surface element between the shared face This error like uncovered faces should not occur in the original model and would most likely result from mistakes made during the manual editing process The tetra cutter will detect this problem as leakage The automatic Fix Feature will create a surface mesh in between these cells Errors gt Periodic problems This check will compare the families that were selected to have periodic nodes and would report an error if they mismatch or if there 15 a missing connection This should be repaired by hand using Edit nodes Periodic Make periodic or Remove periodic The user should not get this error unless they have edited on the mesh Errors gt Volume orientations This check will find elements where the order of the nodes does not define a right handed element The automatic Fix feature will re order the mis oriented elements nodes to eliminate this error Errors gt Surface orientations This checks the direction of the face normal to the elements This check will indicate any location where tetras share the same volume but not the same nodes duplicate elements are elements that occupy both the same LS
577. tarting the Project Splitting the Blocking Material Figure 3 38 The mesh and its topology Hexa Meshing Creating Composite Curves Projecting the Edges to curves Moving the Vertices Generating the Mesh Refining the Mesh with Edge Meshing saving the Blocking and Mesh before Quitting b The Blocking Strategy The first step in generating a Mesh with Blocking is to decide on a blocking strategy Note The geometry is equivalent to a T Figure 3 38 The right side of the blocking crossbar needs only to be bent upward to resemble the geometry Fitting the Blocking Material to the geometry is accomplished by creating Associations between the Edges of Tutorial Manual Hexa Meshing the Blocks and the Curves in the geometry and then moving the Vertices of the Blocks onto the corners of the geometry Once this is done mesh sizes are set and the mesh is computed The program will automatically project the edge nodes onto the curves of the geometry and the internal 2D volume mesh will be interpolated c Starting the Project From a UNIX or DOS window start ANSYS ICEMCFD Select File gt Change working directory and browse to the ACN docu CFDHelp CFD Tutorial Files gt 2DPip eJunction directory Select File gt Geometry gt Open and select the tetin file geometry tin For this tutorial the geometry and part information has already been pre defined for the user
578. tered for Natural size limit is a factor multiplied by the scale factor The Natural size limit will be the minimum size of any tetrahedral for entire model Only if the user defines a smaller max size on the geometry entity the geometry will be having the smaller size These values will be used for the entire model by default but the user can also define specific natural sizes for each part by defining Minimum size for individual entities Select Mesh gt Global Mesh Parameters TA gt Tetra Meshing Parameters D it will open the window as shown in Figure 3 266 Tutorial Manual Tetra Meshing Figure 3 266 Tetra Meshing Global Mesh 5ize oy Parameters Window Global Mesh Parameters Fast transition Edge criterion 02 Define thin cuts z Apply ok Dismiss To add a thin cut to the model consider a region between any two parts that may be thinner than the tetrahedral size defined on then in which a fine layer s of tetrahedral elements may be created Note For more information on Thin cuts refer to the ICEM CFD on line Help Select Define thin cuts the Thin cuts window will appear press Select The first part is PORT and the second part is SHROUD Press Add and the two part names will appear in the Thin cuts window as shown in Figure 3 267 Tutorial Manual Tetra Meshing Figure 3 267 Thin cuts 0 cuts The Thin cuts window PORT SHROUD Edit entry Add came Delete Do
579. terior curves oin edge curves Delete unattached curves Mw and paints Apply ok Dismiss Save the tetin file using File gt Geometry gt Save Geometry Note By default it saves the geometry file to body tin Tutorial Manual Cart3D Run Tetra from Mesh gt Volume Meshing Select Tetra as Mesh type and From geometry 6 The Mesh Volume window appears as shown in Figure 3 517 Accept the default settings and press Apply Figure 3 517 D Mesh Volume window e ML Mesh type Tetra Method Smooth mesh Iterations al Min quality 49 9 4 0 mesh Iterations Worst aspect ratio 0 1 Smooth transition Factor 12 Options Run as batch process Only visible geometry Part by Part Load mesh after completion Apply Dismiss Tutorial Manual Cart3D From the Edit Mesh tab select Check Mesh The Check Mesh window appears as shown in Figure 3 518 Accept the default settings and press Apply Cart3D Figure 3 518 Check Mesh Check Mesh window Check Mesh Possible Problems Multiple edges Duplicate element 4 Uncovered faces Triangle boxes 7 Missing internal 2 edges a Single multiple Periodic problems T eee Volume orientations tial surface Surface orientations Single edges Overlapping _ Hanging element
580. terminant 3 3 3 0 995 quality Tutorial Manual Advanced Meshing Tutorials Now user will save project Select File gt Save project as and enter name as Parametricl 10 o Modifying geometry DM Now user will modify the geometry in DM Select Tools gt Parameters from main menu as shown in Figure 3 455 It will open the parameter window as shown in Figure 3 456 Figure 3 455 M of parameters from E zo 25 C Advan main menu ept Tools View Help E rj Freeze ok Mh Unfreeze Mamed Selection Mid Surface ne HL Joint ine P Enclosure del Symmetry 11 Fill lisi Surface Extension 25 Winding Tool Model Analyzer Beta 2 Mew Part Parameters Addins y Options Tutorial Manual Figure 3 456 Parameter window Figure 3 457 Parameter manager after changing width of the block Advanced Meshing Tutorials Model view x 110 0000 Circlel Dl 5 XYPlane Dz BOX 8 Circles DIStance MBOX X 5 Circlez Y BB x x 8 Circlel X z BB X X 3 Circlel Y 2 Y X 2 Extrudel FDl X 3 Design Parameters Parameter Dimension Assignments Check Clase Now user will change the width of block change the dimension of BOX X 90 Parameter window after changing length 15 shown in Figure 3 457 Now close the parameter window Model View Xx
581. th a larger area of cross section The junctions of the inlet and outlet pipes are connected through a spherical region which would be the most important section to analyze The fluid material used for the analysis 1s Air Post Processing Tutorials Figure 3 633 Geometr y for the Fluent file ii ri zi IBI aJ om e EZ AC L Em L z I LL st o E c RI i a m LIE pM 1 am p d ill MET T b Starting up Post Processing Go to the option File gt Results gt Open Results to start the Post Processing of the results obtained from the different solvers This will open up Select Result Format window as shown in Figure 3 634 From this window user can select different solver formats for which user wants to do post processing of the results Tutorial Manual Post Processing Tutorials Figure 3 634 Select Result Select Format Result Forma Add as t windo w Format Fluent Cas File lisual3 Pipe_Network pp cas gt Dat File lisual3 Pipe_Network pp dat Apply OK Dismiss c Reading Fluent Files From the Select Result Format window select Format as Fluent and press Apply This will pop up Fluent files selection window as shown in Figure 3 635
582. that elements sharing an edge or face do not differ in size by more than a factor of 2 After this is done Tetra makes the mesh conformal 1 e it guarantees that each pair of adjacent elements will share an entire face The mesh does not yet match the given geometry so the mesher next rounds the nodes of the mesh to the geometry surfaces curves and prescribed points The mesher then determines which portion of the mesh is enclosed by surfaces bounding a Body or Material Point Tetra Meshing based on mesh connectivity The remainder of the mesh is deleted Finally the mesh is smoothed by moving nodes preserving geometry associations merging nodes swapping edges and in some cases deleting bad elements d Parts Creation Material Points amp Prescribed Points The grouping of the geometric entities into parts in the mesher interface allows the user to define different parameters on the individual parts Aside from assigning unique boundary condition information to the various parts the user can define the parameters which govern the element size for each part maximum size initial height and height ratio Additionally users can define element size on individual curves and surfaces With the definition of prescribed points and curves in the mesher interface the user can control the locations of tetrahedral nodes and edges in critical areas of the mesh As described above in the mesh generation process c The
583. the window as seen in Figure 3 230 Select amp and choose all the curves by clicking a on the keyboard the curves will be highlighted in the display Set all the parameters in the Curve Mesh Size window to 0 and then press Apply followed by Dismiss Tutorial Manual Tetra Meshing Figure 3 230 Curve mesh size Curve Mesh Size 2 window Curve Mesh Parameters Method General Select Lurve s C 5 Paes Size Humber of Nodes Height 0 Ratio lo width 4 size RI deviation Advanced Bunching Bunching law lBigeometic Spacing 1 Ratio 1 Spacing z Ratio 2 o Space Remesh attached surfaces Blank curves with params Apply Dismiss Tetra Meshing The assigned Tetra sizes are represented on the geometry as shown in Figure 3 231 Figure 3 231 Tetra sizes on the geometry Make these displayed tetra invisible by right clicking on Surfaces gt Tetra Sizes and Curves gt Curve Tetra Sizes from the Display Tree widget When satisfied with the results press File gt Save Project to save the tetin file Use the default project name Generating the tetrahedral mesh Choose Mesh gt Volume Meshing gt Tetra gt From geometry Mesh Volume window will appear as shown in Figure 3 232 Tutorial Manual Tetra Meshing Figure 3 232 Mesh with Tetrahe
584. the model If there are it displays a message like Material point ORFN can reach material point volume part name e g LIVE in the messages window You will be prompted also with a dialog box saying Your geometry has a hole do you want to repair it If there is leakage in the geometry a jagged line will appear in the display All elements attached to the hole would also be displayed Additionally window would Tutorial Manual Tetra Meshing Appendix appear to help the user fix the problem Go ahead and accept the defaults by pressing Accept Select the single edges in the rectangular box when prompted and that should fix the problem If there were additional holes it would keep the user in a loop until the problem is fixed 3 5 3 Editing the Tetra Mesh The two main criteria in validating a Tetra mesh are Check mesh and Smooth mesh globally both of which are found under the Edit mesh menu Check Mesh From the Edit mesh Check mesh Then Press Apply The user can Check fix each of the problems at this time or can opt to create subsets for each of them so that they can be fixed later Using subset manipulation and mesh editing techniques diagnose the problem and resolve it by merging nodes splitting edges swapping edges delete create elements etc For subset manipulation Right click on Subset Modify in the mesh under Display Tree widget Ordinarily the user will select to Add layer from the Modify subset w
585. the wind tunnel SS A Tutorial Manual Figure 3 60 The Parts of the 2D Car Hexa Meshing A modification to this Geometry called car mod tin 1s also available in the Project directory Use the Replay file for this geometry The parts are the same in both the base and modified geometries allowing the Replay file to be run on each identically c Starting the Project After opening select File gt Change working directory and browse to SICEM ACN docu CFDHelp CFD Tutoria 1 Files 2Dcar Select File gt Geometry gt Open load car base tin Before proceeding note that the names of Parts that are listed are located in the Display Tree As in the previous tutorial the geometry and Parts have already been defined for the user start the Replay File The Replay function allows the user to record all the steps necessary to complete the mesh Select File gt Replay Scripts gt Replay Control to bring up the Replay control window Figure 3 61 Figure 3 61 The Replay control Window Hexa Meshing Replay control Operations in script Ic unda group begin Ic geo new family LIVE set part calor LIVE Ic hex initialiee mesh zd new _ numbering new blocking LI 1 switch blocking root 1 unblank blocks 1 multi arid level 1 switch blocking root 9 ic unda group
586. then select the corresponding to the position of vertex 219 Select vertex 51 110 and 219 and then select the corresponding to the position of vertex 236 point point point point point point Performing the above steps we get the Blocking as shown in Figure 3 322 Advanced Meshing Tutorials Note It is advisable to switch off the Points when position of vertex is to be selected i Placing all nodes to one plane The user should now move the topology to the bottom most planes and then extrude it to get 3D blocking which would then be split to get further planes Blocking gt Move Vertex gt Set location 7 A new window will appear as shown in the Figure 3 323 Switch On Points Show Point name Toggle on Modify Z select all the vertices Enter 5 and press Apply to move complete topology to Z 5 plane Click on Dismiss to close the panel Advanced Meshing Tutorials Figure 3 323 Move vertices Gp Vertex Positions Window Move Vertices e ats P Set Location Method Set Foston m Heference From C Vertex Screen Ref Location POINTS 17 XE Set Coordinate system Cartesian gt lt 14 1666 Modit v d 2 5 Modify Z gt Normal Moral Vertices ta Set 96 11 1693 1197 H Ta Apply ok Dismiss Tutorial Manual Advanced Meshing Tutorials p 3 Blocking Extruding 2D blocking S a S Blocking
587. tin Files of type Geometry Files tin Cancel E Creating Parts for Surfaces see Figure 5 34 From the Main Menu click on 8 Open Geometry and select the geometry file StaticMixer tin created in the previous tutorial by browsing as shown in Figure 5 33 Tutorial Manual ANSYS ICEMCFD CFX Tutorials Figure 5 34 Geometry Parts Right click on Parts from the Display Tree widget and choose Create Part It goes by default into the choice of Create Part by Selection Enter IN1 as the Part name Click on Select entities select the surface at the end of one of the small side pipes and middle click to accept Note that selection mode remains active Enter IN2 as the Part name Select the surface on the end of the other small side pipe and middle click to accept Enter OUTLET as the Part name Select the small surface at the end of the extension of the funnel and middle click to accept Middle click again to cancel out c Mesh Generation Reassigning Mesh Parameters From the Mesh tab menubar click on Set Global Mesh Size A Leave Scale Factor as 1 for Global Element Scale Factor Change Max Element to 2 from 3 for Global Element Seed Size as shown in Figure 5 35 ANSYS ICEMCFD CFX Tutorials Click Apply to save this setting Figure 5 35 Global Mesh Size 9 Global Mesh Size window gt 5 Global Mesh Parameters Global Element Scale Factor Scale factor Displa
588. tion A Segment curve window will appear as shown in Figure AE In the Segment Curve window select segment faceted by angle of 45 as the criterion Press Apply to perform the segmentation This will create a set of 22 new curves whose names will label them the display CURVES 0 0 1 to CURVES 0 0 22 Tutorial Manual Tetra Meshing Appendix Note If the user is experimenting with the angle and is unsure of the outcome of the operation use Keep Original in order to try different operation parameters on the curve In some models particularly those with sharp features where the angle of extraction was set very small the user would next extract points from the curves e Segmenting the Surface Now based on these new curves the user can segment the surface into regions on which to generate mesh Select Geometry Create Modify Surface X Segment Trim Select the surface with the help of the left mouse button complete the selection using the middle mouse button A Segment Surface window will appear as seen in Figure 3 278 In the Method select Faceted Surfaces by Angle Tetra Meshing Appendix Figure 3 278 Create Modify a Segmenting the surfaces surface Part SURFS 8 226 2 31018991 UO qs Segment Surface Method Bu Angle m Surface H e Angle 25 Minimum number of segments 1 i Keep original Apply ox Dismiss To segment the
589. tion Replay file functionality enables parametric block topology generation linked to parametric changes in geometry Symmetry Can be used in analyzing rotating machinery applications For example Hexa allows the user to take advantage of symmetry in meshing a section of the rotating machinery thereby minimizing the model size Link Shape This allows the user to link the edge shape to an existing deforming edge This gives better control over the grid specifically in the case of parametric studies Adjustability Options to generate 3 D surface meshes from the 3 D volume mesh and 2 D to 3 D block topology transformation 2D Surface Meshing Automatic 2D blocks creation for mapped surface meshing b Mesh Generation with Blocking Overall Process First create or import geometry using any of the direct indirect or facetted data interfaces Interactively split blocks discard unused blocks to capture underlying shape top down approach else create blocks extrude blocks bottom up approach Blocks are at first created independently of the geometry Associate edges to curves to capture hard features Move vertices to position block corners on geometry Assign mesh sizes such as maximum element size initial element height and expansion ratio to surfaces and or curves Assign edge meshing parameters for better control of node distributions Tutorial Manual Hexa Meshing Automatically generate
590. tion 1 to select Set surfaces as 1 1 and Set2 surfaces as CYL2 1 with the left mouse button pressing the middle mouse button to complete the selection each time Press Apply to create the intersection curve Segmentation of Surface Geometry gt Create Modify Surface gt Segment Trim surface Select Segment Trim Surface and choose the Method by Curves which 15 the default Press the surface selection icon and select the surface CYL1 1 using the left mouse button and press the middle mouse button to Geometry Creation complete the selection Press the curve selection icon amp and using the left mouse button select the intersection curve that was created in the previous step Press the middle mouse button to complete the selection Press Apply to segment the surface CYL1 1 into two parts Similarly segment the surface CYL2 1 with the same intersection curve If the two previous curves have been split into two then select both curves Deleting unused entities Geometry gt Delete Surface Select Delete Surface to open the Delete Surface window Select the surface CYL1 1 and CYL2 1 cut 0 with the left mouse button Press the middle mouse button to complete the selection and press Apply to delete these surfaces Note The curves and points will need to be deleted so the next step which is build topology will not segment the surfaces where the curves span them Geometry Delete Curve
591. tion Edge to Associations Curve Window Edit Associations C HOR OR Associate Edge gt Curve Edge s 126 1300 1 122 126 07 L urve s 28 GEOM 26 5 TM Project vertices Project to surface intersection Project ends to curve Intersection Apply ok Dismiss You should associate the Edges and corresponding blade curves as shown in Figure 3 151 Do this to the top and bottom of the blade on both sides After associating Switch on Blocking gt Edge gt Show Association from the Display Tree The geometry should look as shown in Figure 3 152 Tutorial Manual Hexa Meshing Figure 3 152 Blade edges Associated to curves n Moving the Vertices This section shows the user how to move all the associated vertices onto the geometry in one step Snap the appropriate block vertices onto the geometry by selecting Associate 95 gt Snap Project Vertices All Visible should be toggled ON Then Press Apply Switch off Edges gt Show Association All the vertices belonging to blade inlet and outlet are moved to the locations as shown in Figure 3 153 Figure 3 153 The final positions of the vertices before the O grid Hexa Meshing o Vertex Color Distinction Notice from this lesson and from previous lessons that the movement of the vertices is restricted to the associated Curve The colors of the vertices indicate their a
592. to Delete some original Surface Press Delete as shown in Figure 4 144 Figure 4 1 44 Some original surfa x Some original Surface Exist 2 original surface s found What do you want to da Try to make the Model Tree look similar to the one shown in Figure 4 145 Figure 4 145 Model Tree display Tutorial Manual Nastran Tutorials The image after setting the display of Model Tree as above is shown in Figure 4 146 Figure 4 146 Geometry Display Part Remove Holes The geometry should be studied to find whether it needs any repairing 1 e if it has any cracks or holes The Build Topology function located in the Repair Geometry window extracts Curves and Points from the existing Surfaces and Deletes the un necessary un attached Curves and Points The newly created Curves are Color coded based on how many surfaces they are attached to and can be used for the purpose of model diagnosis and repair Nastran Tutorials Click on Repair Geometry is icon from Geometry Tab Menubar By E default the Build Topology function is highlighted Make sure that Inherited By default Inherited is ON is toggled ON for New Part Name and in the Method select Parts as shown in Figure 4 147 and press Apply to extract Curves and Points from the current Surface model Figure 4 147 Repair Geometry Window Nastran Tutorials Repar Geometry Surface Build Topology Tolerance 0 3 Filt
593. to the license The following buttons would lead to different mesh generation modules which ANSYS ICEMCFD maintains and develops Set Global Mesh Size Set Surface Mesh Size set Curve Mesh Size Set Meshing Params by Part Create Mesh Density Create Elements Surface Meshing Volume Meshing Mesh Prism Global Cartesian Mesher Extrude Mesh Pressing any of these buttons will invoke the preferred meshing module 2 3 3 The Blocking menu The Blocking menu contains the functions necessary to create a topology for block structured hexahedral meshes Either a block file must be loaded or an initial block created to make all the items active Create Block Split Block Merge Vertices ANSYS ICEMCFD GUI Edit Block Associate Move Vertex Transform Blocks Edit Edge Pre Mesh Params Pre Mesh Quality Pre Mesh Smoothing Block Checks Delete Block 2 3 4 The Edit Mesh menu The Edit mesh menu contains tools necessary for mesh editing both automated and manual Operations include Create Elements Check Mesh Display Mesh Quality Smooth Mesh Globally Smooth Hexahedral Mesh Orthogonal Repair Mesh Merge Nodes Split Mesh Move Nodes Transform Mesh Convert Mesh Type Adjust Mesh Density Renumber Mesh Reorient Mesh Delete Nodes Delete Elements 2 3 5 The Output menu The Output menu contains all tools necessary for setting up the model and writing out to the solver Select Solver ANSYS ICEMCFD GUI
594. togram it can be seen that the mesh has all elements above a target minimum quality of 0 3 Figure 5 36 Replot window and Quality Mine value 0 0 Histogram X value height o Mum bars o 0 Accept Cancel Help ANSYS ICEMCFD CFX Tutorials Quality m Min 0 264494 Reset 12 v Show v Solid Subset Done Lh ht Tt ll 0 01 02 05 06 OF n8 03 1 Saving the Project Save the project by clicking on Save Project x from the Main Menu d Inflated Boundary Generation Prism Mesh Generation Prism meshing gives layers of flat prismatic wedge shaped elements which provide a smaller mesh length scale in the direction perpendicular to the wall This provides better resolution of the velocity field in the boundary layer near the wall where it changes rapidly Prism meshing can greatly improve accuracy particularly in a model with a high aspect ratio such as a long narrow pipe or in a model where turbulence is significant Prism meshing should be used when lift drag or pressure drop in the model is of interest Click on Mesh Prism 5 from the Mesh tab menubar to create inflated prism layers from the walls Click on Select Parts for Prism Layer Toggle on SOLID 1 1 from the Part list as shown in Figure 5 37 Click on Apply and Dismiss to accept and close the panel ANSYS ICEMCFD CFX Tutorials Figur Fart Priem Hesa Core Size Height He
595. tor which is found through Mesh gt Set Global mesh size Note that if 0 is assigned as the scale factor Tetra will not run To make sure that sizes are defined for all of the surfaces activate all Parts and Surfaces in the Display Tree widget Then select Mesh Set surface mesh size Press the right mouse button to Dismiss the selection mode and in the params window check the box for Blank surfaces already done This will blank all surfaces in the model Any surfaces that remain visible need to have proper tetra sizes defined The same check should be done for Curves Material point s From the Display Tree widget Make bodies visible and right click on Bodies gt By name Dynamically rotate the model to confirm that each closed volume has a material assigned to it If a closed volume does not have a material assignment provide one for the region The user need not define material point ORFN for every dead region as Tetra automatically finds the dead regions and throws them out When periodicity is defined however it 1s preferable to assign material point to speed up the meshing process Converging or thin regions between objects Examine the regions between two surfaces or two curves that are very close together or converging and check whether the tetra sizes refer to the tetra icons are small enough so that at least 1 or 2 tets would fit through the thickness If the tetra sizes are not small enough the user should select to d
596. tor User can edit this file manually and can save the changes with the same file name Since no need to do any editing for this example just close the editor jp Solution and Results Linear Static analysis 1s to be performed on this model and the results should be visualized in a post processor Solving the problem Click on Q Submit Solver Run icon from the Solve Options Tab Menubar to start the Nastran as shown in Figure 4 194 The Nastran file will be selected by default as Bar dat Toggle On Post process and View Results and press Apply in Run Solver window SS ee Tutorial Manual Nastran Tutorials Figure 4 194 Run Solver window Hun Solver 2 Solver NAS TRAN E Mastran File Bar Bar dat T Hun Time Options Post process and View Results Apply ok Cancel k Post Processing of Results After completion of Nastran run the results will be automatically loaded into the post processor tab Click on Variables option in Post processing Tab menu bar In Select Nastran Variables window select Category as Solid and Current Scalar Variable as VonMises Stress as shown in Figure 4 195 The VonMises Stress distribution is shown in Figure 4 196 Tutorial Manual Nastran Tutorials Figure 4 195 ET d Nastran MastranV anables Variables window Moade Load 5ide Hz Load H Category Scalar Variable Current
597. torial Manual LS Dyna Tutorials 4 2 3 PDA Drop Impact This tutorial demonstrates a drop impact simulation using AI Environment It is customary to test electronic consumer products like PDAs mobile phones and laptops for drop impact survivability An AI Environment user can setup a drop impact analysis by simply defining a rigid wall floor initial velocity and gravity loading boundary conditions a Summary of Steps e Data Editing e Launch AI Environment and Load the Mesh e Define Properties through Table Editor Material and Element Properties e Define Material Properties e Define Elements Properties Contacts and Velocities Define Contact Define Initial Velocity Define Planar Rigid Wall Define Gravity Save Project Tutorial Manual LS Dyna Tutorials e Solver Setup e Setup LS Dyna Run Write LS Dyna Input File e Solution and Results Solving the problem e Visualization of Results b Data Editing Launch AI Environment Launch AI Environment from a UNIX or DOS window Then File gt Change Working Dir to ACN docu FEAHelp AI Tutorial Files For this tutorial use the pda uns file from the AI Tutorial Files directory Click on Open Mesh e from the main menu to open the window as shown in Figure 4 119 Select the pda uns file and click on Open to load it into AI Environment Figure _ 4 119 E Load Directory Tutorial Files el Mesh i Windo 1 Solved Tutorials
598. ts Constraints and Loads can be applied to geometry and mesh and either can be 0D points 1D lines 2D surfaces or surface elements or 3D bodies or volume elements It is also possible to set up sub groups of any combination of these and then apply the constraints and loads on these groups These are called Subsets So we will use subsets to assign constraints and load Subset0 In the Model Tree right mouse click on Subsets gt create under Mesh This will pop up the Create Subset window as shown in Figure 4 25 Tutorial Manual ANSYS Tutorials The Subset name should read Subset0 if none have been created yet Then press the first icon for the screen selection method e Create Subset by Selection if it is not already selected Make sure that the only Mesh elements that are ON in the Model Tree are Shells Use View Front to orient the model for easy selection Right mouse click and move the mouse up or down to zoom in or out in order to see the large hole side To select the elements on the Crankshaft end for this subset click on the Select elements then press p from key board ensure that the mouse cursor 1s in the display window or click the polygon selection icon then keep left mouse clicking on the screen to draw a polygon as shown in Figure 4 26 Click the middle mouse button click to finish the polygon and then middle mouse click again to finish all selection Then press Apply to create the subset
599. ty NODE EA E EA EIE HIP HE B n3 n3 Switch OFF the Grid with variable colors and Uniform colors options by selecting them again e Plotting Solid Contours The mesh was displayed in uniform color since the variable density NODE 15 constant in this example One would now switch to another scalar variable i e pressure NODE which is more appropriate in this situation select the Variables icon from the Post processing tab Menu bar Figure 3 640 Tutorial Manual Post Processing Tutorials Figure 3 640 Post processing tab Geomet Mesh Blackin Edit Mesh Properties Constraints Loads Solve Options Output Postprocessing 9 p p p CO BEES SAL This will pop out the Result Variables window shown in Figure 3 64 Figure 3 641 Result Variables a Variables window Global Variables Vars sv Scalar Current pressure NODE Min 1 04255 1 21 83 Vector Variable Current velocity Max mag 2 37485 Apply ox Cancel Change the variable selection to pressure Node from the list of Scalar Variables drop down menu After changing the variable close the Variables window by clicking on the OK button Tutorial Manual Post Processing Tutorials Toggle off Grid with Variable Colors and click the option Continuous Contour to display the pressure contours in solid shading as shown in Figure 3 642
600. ty of the cells should be higher ANSYS ICEM CFD Al Environment 10 0 User Manual SAS IP Inc 2 17 Chapter 2 Tetra than or equal to this value If this does not happen the user should find other methods of improving the quality such as merging nodes and splitting edges For most models the cells should all have ratios of greater than 0 3 while a ratio of 0 15 for complicated models is usually sufficient Freeze If the Freeze option is selected for a cell type the nodes of this cell type will be fixed during the smoothing operation thus the cell type will not be displayed in the histogram Float If the Float option is selected for a cell type the nodes of the cell type are capable of moving freely allowing nodes that are common with another type of cell to be smoothed The quality of elements set to Float is not tracked during the smoothing process and so the quality is not displayed in the histogram 2 3 8 Quality metric Changing this option allows the user to modify what the histogram displays Quality This histogram displays the overall quality of the mesh The x axis measures the quality with 0 repres enting poor quality and 1 representing high quality The y axis measures the number of cells that belong within each quality sub range Aspect ratio For HEXA 8 hexahedral and QUAD 4 quadrilateral cells the Aspect ratio is defined asthe ratio ofthe distances between diagonally opposite vertices shorter diagonal lo
601. ualization and Optimization ANSYS ICEMCFD GUI 2 1 Main Menu 2 2 Utilities 2 3 Function Tabs 2 3 1 The Geometry menu 2 3 2 The Mesh menu 2 3 3 The Blocking menu 2 3 4 The Edit Mesh menu 2 3 5 The Output menu 2 3 6 The Post Processing menu 2 4 The Display Control Tree 2 4 1 Geometry 2 4 2 Mesh 2 4 3 Parts 2 4 4 The Message window 2 5 The Histogram window CFD Tutorials 3 1 Geometry Creation 3 1 1 2D Pipe Junction 3 1 2 3D Pipe Junction Tutorial Manual cO 00 QN gt QU N 10 10 10 11 11 12 12 13 13 14 14 14 14 15 16 16 16 3 3 1 3 3 1 4 Sphere Cube Pipe Blade 3 2 Hexa Meshing Sauls 3 2 2 3 2 3 3 2 4 3 2 9 3 2 6 3 2 4 342 8 Introduction 2D Pipe Junction 2D Car 3D Pipe Junction Sphere Cube Pipe Blade Elbow Part Wing Body 3 3 Hexa Meshing Appendix 3 3 2 3 3 3 3 3 4 309 3 3 6 3 3 7 3 3 8 3 3 9 The Most Important Features of Blocking Automatic O grid Generation Important Features of an O grid Edge Meshing Parameters Smoothing Techniques Refinement and Coarsening Replay Functionality Periodicity Mesh Quality 3 4 Tetra 3 4 1 3 4 2 3 43 3 44 Introduction Sphere Cube 3D Pipe Junction Fin Configuration 43 55 66 66 78 109 139 167 182 220 249 276 276 ZH ZI 278 279 280 281 282 282 285 285 202 306 327 3 4 5 Piston Valve 341 3 4 6 STL Configuration 356 3
602. ubsets in the Display tree and turn on Mesh gt Shells Right mouse select Shells and select Solid amp Wire View the corrected surface mesh as in Figure 3 419 Figure 3 419 Mesh in circular region after repair Tutorial Manual Advanced Meshing Tutorials Also note the refined mesh in the square stick out portion as a result of Natural Size Figure 3 420 Figure 3 420 Final mesh detail Final Steps Smooth the mesh Select Edit Mesh gt Smooth Mesh Globally Note the current bad quality in the Histogram Window Use the defaults in the Smooth Elements Globally panel and Apply Note the improvement in quality in the histogram Select File gt Save project and Exit Tutorial Manual Advanced Meshing Tutorials 3 6 6 Workbench Integration This tutorial will give user the idea about parametric changes in the blocking with the geometry Figure 3 421 Blocking geometry Figure 3 422 Blocking after modifying geometry Tutorial Manual Advanced Meshing Tutorials a Summary of the steps Loading geometry in DM The Blocking strategy Create composite curves Splitting the blocking material Associating edges to curves Generating the blocking Modifying the geometry Updating the association saving the blocking b Starting the project From the Windows fire Ansys workbench integration Then one window as shown in Figure3 423will launch Select Geoemtry This will open a DesignModeler graph
603. ume If the material point is 1n the wrong position choose Geometry gt Delete Bodies select it and then Apply The Material point will be removed from the screen Now redefine the material point using the same procedure described above h Assigning the Mesh Sizes The User can define meshing parameters in several ways In this example the user will define them on the model on the surfaces and on the curves i Setting Global mesh size Select Mesh gt Set Global Mesh Size gt General parameters I it will open the Global Mesh Size window Figure 3 283 enter a Scale factor of 2 0 a Max Element of 128 Natural size of 1 Natural size gt Refinement of 10 and Tri tolerance of 0 001 Leave the other parameters at their default settings Press Apply and then Dismiss Tetra Meshing Appendix Figure 3 283 Edit the Global mesh sizes Global Mesh Size Global Mesh Parameters Global Element 5cale Factor Scale factor Display Global Element Seed Size element zu Display Matural Size Enabled Size Display Cells in ii Refinement 10 Ignore Wall Thickness Triangle tolerance 0 001 Unitless tri tolerance is Apply ox Dismiss Tutorial Manual Tetra Meshing Appendix Select Mesh gt Set Global Mesh Size o gt Tet Meshing Parameters e it will open the window as shown in Figure 3 284 Turn ON Fast trans
604. umn Actual values are displayed in the second column Note that due to the number of Nodes the Mesh Law and Spacing the requested Ratios cannot be attained Increase the number of Nodes using the arrow toggles until the Ratios are close to the requested value 1 2 Note The Mesh Law 15 by default set to BiGeometric This allows the nodes to be biased towards both ends of the edge The expansion rate from the end is a linear progression Several other mathematical progression functions laws are available Hexa Meshing Toggle on Copy Parameters Set Copy gt Method gt To Parallel Edges default and press Apply This will ensure that the parallel Edges 34 42 38 43 and 21 44 have the same spacing Next select Edge 21 38 and change Spacing 1 and 2 to 0 5 This will concentrate grid points toward the outlet and toward the small pipe To have these changes reflected in edge 43 44 as well be sure that Copy Parameters gt gt Method gt To Parallel Edges 15 selected Apply Next we ll copy the same distribution to the other section of the large pipe Still in the Edge Parameters menu change Copy Parameters gt Copy gt Method gt To Selected Edges Reversed Select the Select edge s icon immediately underneath the Method field and select Edge 13 34 Press the middle mouse button or Apply Refine the nodes along the small pipe Select Edge 33 42 make sure to select the icon toward the top of the m
605. unction found in the Edges menu Italicized font indicates a button selection Bold font indicates user input ALL CAPS indicates a part entity name Mouse and Keyboard functions Keyboard key click and drag Right mouse button Zooms in or out on the click and drag model up down Right mouse button Rotates model about click and drag screen Z axis left right Press F9 and then use Toggles temporarily to any mouse button dynamic mode Press F9 again to translate zoom return to previous rotate operation F11 Key Emergency Graphics Reset Tutorial Manual Introduction to ANSYS ICEMCFD 1 Introduction to ANSYS Meeting the requirement for integrated mesh generation and post processing tools for today s sophisticated analysis ANSYS ICEMCFD provides advanced geometry acquisition mesh generation mesh optimization and post processing tools Maintaining a close relationship with the geometry during mesh generation and post processing ANSYS ICEMCED 1s used especially in engineering applications such as computational fluid dynamics and structural analysis ANSYS ICEMCFD s mesh generation tools offer the capability to parametrically create meshes from geometry in numerous formats Multiblock structured Unstructured hexahedral Unstructured tetrahedral Cartesian with H grid refinement Hybrid Meshes comprising hexahedral tetrahedral pyramidal and or prismatic elements Quadrilateral an
606. urfaces Animate views Rotate about line Angle dearee 350 Axis 001 Center ooo Animate deformation Undeformed shape Smoothly back cycle Amplifier 0 58356 Animate modal Undeformed shape Steps per cycle 20 Amplifier 1 Cancel Tutorial Manual Nastran Tutorials Set the values as shown in Figure 4 198 and press Animate to view the mode shape as shown in Figure 4 199 Finally select Exit to quit the post processor Figure 4 199 Anima ted Model Tranzlation Total Load 1 18 71 17 46 16 21 14 97 13 72 12 47 11 23 878 27321 484 236 989 uds 495 224 0000 D e M co TT Pls Tutorial Manual Nastran Tutorials 4 3 3 Frame This exercise explains meshing of Frame geometry including the Seam and Spot welds and writing the input file to solve this Linear Static problem in NASTRAN The geometry model is shown in Figure 4 200 Figure 4 200 Frame Geometr y a Summary of Steps Launch AI Environment and load geometry file Geometry Editing Geometry Repair Connectors Create Seam Weld Create Spot welds Create bolt connectors Mesh Parameters Mesh Sizing Tutorial Manual Nastran Tutorials Meshing surface Meshing Checking mesh quality Improving mesh quality Material and Element Properties selection of Material Element Properti
607. urve to open Delete Curve window Select the curve selection icon amp and select CURVES 11 CURVES 12 CURVES 13 and CURVES 14 Press the middle mouse button to complete the selection Press Apply to delete these curves Tutorial Manual Geometry Creation Geometry gt Delete Points Select the Delete Point to open the Delete Points window Select the point selection icon and select POINTS 10 POINTS 11 POINTS 12 and POINTS 13 Press the middle mouse button to complete selection and press Apply to delete these points c Creating the Material point Ch Geometry gt Create Body gt Material Point gt Centroid of 2 points Select the location selection icon E and click close to POINTS 1 and POINTS 3 with the left mouse button Press the middle mouse button to complete the selection Give the Part name BODY and press Apply to create the material point Switch on Bodies in the left side Display Tree window to see the body The Geometry after creating material point is shown in Figure 3 9 Figure 3 9 Final Geometry Geometry Creation POINTS 6 ETRE 9 d Saving Geometry File gt Geometry gt Save Geometry As Enter the file name as Geo 2DPipe tin and press Save to save the geometry file Tutorial Manual Geometry Creation Tutorial Manual Geometry Creation 3 1 2 3D Pipe Junction Overview We are going to create geometry for a three dimensional pipe junction as
608. used to create the model Warpage The Warpage check will yield a histogram that indicates the level of element distortion Nodes that are in plane with one another will produce an element with small warpage Nodes that make elements twisted or SS Tutorial Manual Hexa Meshing Appendix 284 distorted will increase an elements distortion giving a high degree of warpage The y axis 1s the scale for the number of elements represented in the histogram a value determined by the assigned Height The x axis which ranges from a Min of 0 to a Max of 90 is the degree of warpage that an element experiences SS A Tutorial Manual Tetra Meshing 3 4 Tetra Tetra Meshing Automated to the point that the user has only to select the geometry to be meshed ANSYS Tetra generates tetrahedral meshes directly from the CAD geometry STL data without requiring an initial triangular surface mesh Figure 3 223 This mesh was generated CI using ANSYS N ICEM CFD WI 000 JA mods ha NARRE approximately DOO 550 000 m tetrahedral CX KJ elements 3 4 1 Introduction Tetra uses an Octree based meshing algorithm to fill the volume with tetrahedral elements and to generate a surface mesh on the object surfaces The
609. user can define prescribed curves and points to determine the positions of edges and vertices in the mesh For improved element quality Tetra incorporates a powerful smoothing algorithm as well as tools for local adaptive mesh refinement and coarsening Tutorial Manual Tetra Meshing Suitable for complex geometries ANSYS ICEMCFD Tetra offers several advantages including Octree based mesh generation Rapid model set up Mesh 15 independent of underlying surface topology No surface mesh necessary Generation of mesh directly from CAD or STL surfaces Definition of element size on CAD or STL surfaces Control over element size inside a volume Nodes and edges of tetrahedral are matched to prescribed points and curves Natural size automatically determines tetrahedral size for individual geometry features Volume and surface mesh smoothing node merging and edge swapping Tetrahedral mesh can be merged into another tetra hexa or hybrid mesh and then can be smoothed Coarsening of individual material domains Enforcement of mesh periodicity both rotational and translation Surface mesh editing and diagnostic tools Local adaptive mesh refinement and coarsening One consistent mesh for multiple materials Fast algorithm 1500 cells second Automatic detection of holes and easy way to repair the mesh Tetrahedral mesh from a completely closed surface mesh using the Delauney meshing algorithm Tetra Meshing Extrusion of
610. utorial illustrates how to generate grid Cart3D around a bomber with a missile and solving the problem in flowCart Post processing of the results is explained Use of the SixDOF tool for missile separation is also explained eme ie eee Since Lm EE GE GNE CE x Pieces imari oha pee Cee Cet Pee eee EH 7 Er ery E aa E jx mies ELIGE 5 an as This tutorials introduces following operations Running the solver for AOA 5 and Mach 0 65 Computing Force and Moment information Visualizing the results in Post Processing Running the 6DOF tool Tutorial Manual Cart3D a Starting the Project Load ANSYS CFD Change the working directory by File gt Change Working Dir and set the location to the folder bomber bomber uns is located in that folder Note It is preferable to create a separate folder bomber and put only the bomber uns mesh file in that folder before performing this Tutorial select Open Mesh a from the main menu and select bomber uns Press the h key to fit the view in the screen if the model is not visible b Mesh Generation Preview only Click on Cart3D from the main menu Select Volume mesher ag the Cart 3D window pops up as shown in Figure 3 564 Figure ms Cart3D Main GUI Leave Fix Normals enabled This case 15
611. ve Project Write Ansys Input File Solution and Results Solving the Problem Post processing of Results b Geometry Editing Launch AI Environment Launch AI Environment Then use File Change working directory and set the current directory to ACN docu FEAHelp AI Tutorial Files Then use File Geometry Open Geometry and load PinHole tin ANSYS Tutorials Figure 4 46 en Open C3 AI Tutorial Files cf Gr Geomet ry File window History G L as lop Wty Documents Te Computer Nebwo rk Flea File ole tin Files af type Geometry Files Repair Click on the Geometry gt Repair Geometry S button which will bring up the Repair Geometry window as shown in Figure 4 47 The default Tolerance of 0 003 should work fine here Make sure that New Part Name 15 set to Inherited Then press Apply Tutorial Manual ANSYS Tutorials Figure 4 47 etme Und Repair Geometry Hepair Geometry window Build Topology Tolerance 0 003 Filter by angle Feature angle 30 Filter points Filter curves f Inherited Create new Part for new curves Parttor new points Build Topo Parts Selection Method All parts Part by part es Part Name Single curve cleanup single Edge Tolerance 0 006 Split surface at T connectons Join edge curves Delete unattached sane
612. vector next to Method You should see the window shown in Figure 4 21 Click on the element selection icon and select all the surface mesh elements by drawing a rectangular box around the model with the left mouse button or pressing the hotkey v for visible Click the middle mouse button click to accept Set the New volume part name to STEEL ELEMENTS Set the New side part name to SIDE Set the New top part name to TOP Enter Vector as 0 0 1 Set the Number of layers to 5 The Spacing type should be set to Fixed and the Spacing at 1 Press Apply Figure 4 21 Extrude Mesh window ANSYS Tutorials Extrude Mesh Elements se 3 New volume part name steel elements New side side Mew tap part name lop H Extrude mesh Method Extrude by vector Extrude By Vector Vector 0 01 Humber of layers 5 Spacing type Fixed Functon Spacing Llismiss The mesh should appear as shown in Figure 4 22 Tutorial Manual ANSYS Tutorials Figure 4 22 Extrude d mesh d Material and Element Properties Before applying Constraints and Loads on the elements define the type of material and assign properties to the elements Material Definition Select the Properties Create Material Property icon Enter the name STEEL for the Material Name The Material ID can be left as 1 The Type can be left as
613. ved but rather are neglected or chamfered The boundary mesh nodes lie on the surfaces but they will only lie on the edges of the surfaces if curves and points are present Removal of curves and points can be used as a geometry defeaturing tool Figure 2 1 Curves and Points representing the sharp edges and corners ANSYS CFD Al Environment 10 0 User Manual SAS IP Inc 2 3 Chapter 2 Tetra Figure 2 2 Mesh with Curves and points Figure 2 3 Mesh without curves and points 2 2 3 Sizes on surfaces and curves To produce the optimal mesh it is essential that all surfaces and curves have the proper tetra sizes assigned to them For a visual representation of the mesh size select Geometry Surfaces Surface Tetra sizes from the Display Tree The same can be done with Curves Tetra icons will appear representing the cell size of the mesh to be created on these entities With the mouse the user may rotate the model and visually confirm that the tetra sizes are appropriate If a curve or surface does not have an icon plotted on it the icon may be too large or too small to see In this case the user should modify the mesh parameters so that the icons are visible in a normal display 2 4 ANSYS ICEM CFD Al Environment 10 0 User Manual SAS IP Inc Section 2 2 Tetra Generation Steps The user should also make sure that a reference cell size has been defined To modify the mesh size for all entities adjust the Scal
614. version information 2 2 Utilities Icon representation of some of the most commonly used functions represented in the Main menu including opening closing a project undo redo and display options It also includes measurement and setup of local coordinate systems 2 3 Function Tabs The main functionality for the entire grid generation process 15 accessed through the function tabs which include Geometry Mesh Blocking Edit mesh Output Post processing 2 3 1 The Geometry menu The Geometry menu includes functions for the creation editing and repair of geometry For more information ANSYS ICEMCFD s Tetin files and treatment of geometry entities refer to the section on Geometry definitions Help gt Help Topics Functions and utilities in this menu include Create Point Create Modify Curve Create Modify Surface Create Body Create Faceted Repair Geometry Transform Geometry Restore Dormant Entities ANSYS ICEMCFD GUI Delete Point Delete Curve Delete Surface Delete Body and Delete Any Entity 2 3 2 The Mesh menu These tools are the heart of ANSYS ICEMCFD The Mesh menu contains the ANSYS ICEMCFD meshing modules as well as options to set mesh sizes parameters Depending on the licensing some users may not be able to access certain meshing modules Contact customer support or ANSYS ICEMCFD s website for guidance with any licensing questions or for help with adding any additional modules
615. view In this tutorial the user will generate a Mesh for external flow over a simple 2D Car residing in a wind tunnel The Replay will be employed for recording all the blocking steps This replay script file will be run to model a modified geometry a Summary of Steps The Blocking Strategy Starting the Project splitting the Blocks with Prescribed Points splitting Blocks using the Index Control Reassigning the Material Domains Body Fitting the Blocking Aligning the Vertices Meshing with Curve Parameters Creating an O grid around the Car Meshing with Edge Parameters saving your Replay File and Quitting Hexa Using Replay for the Design Iteration Hexa Meshing b The Blocking Strategy For an external flow model in a wind tunnel the following steps are usually taken when blocking the model to obtain the desired results The Split function 15 a common technique when beginning blocking by carving a Cartesian set of blocks around the object The vertices are then moved onto the geometry in order to fit the shape of the car with all its features front bumper hood etc An O grid block is created around the car to give an orthogonal grid The following Parts that have been defined in the geometry Figure 3 60 CAR Vehicle geometry GROUND Ground surface of the wind tunnel INLET Inlet face of the wind tunnel OUTLET Outlet face of the wind tunnel PNTS Prescribed points associated with the Car TOP Top surface of
616. view In this tutorial the user will generate the tetra mesh in a pipe configuration The pipe has different problems in the geometry which might cause leakage holes in the Tetra mesh This example focuses on how to deal with leakage and corresponding geometry repair Figure 3 406 stl start a Summary of steps Starting the project Repairing the geometry Saving the project b Starting the Project Start ANSYS ICEMCFD Select File gt Change working directory and browse for ACN docu CFDHelp CFD Tutorial Files STL epair Load the tetin file geometry tin Tutorial Manual Advanced Meshing Tutorials Right mouse select Geometry gt Surfaces in the Display tree and select Show Full to see the full triangulation of the surfaces c Repair Geometry First run initial topology to find any possible problems with the geometry Select Geometry gt Repair Geometry Build Eum n Diagnostic Topology This will open up a window as shown in Figure 3 407 Advanced Meshing Tutorials Figure 3 407 Hepair Geometry a Repair Geometry Build Topology window Repar Surface FIT ie Build Topology Tolerance 0 004 Filter by angle Filter points Filter curves Hew Part f nherited Create new i Build Topo Parts Selection Method All parts Part by part Single curve cleanup 0 008 Split zurface at M T connectians S
617. w Figure 3 675 Multi Views options Tutorial Manual Post processing Model Dataset 0 Colormap Create 4 Views Remove 4 views Post 30 fram Dataset 0 Fost 2L from Cataset_U Create Mew 10 From the options select Post 2D from Data_0 Upon prompt drag a box on the graphics window Now the result on the cut plane will appear in the new 2D window The main graphics window should appear as in Figure 3 676 The 2D graphics window s name will appear in the model tree under Multi Views This will also has its own right click options which are shown in Figure 3 677 Tutorial Manual Post processing Figure 3 676 Multi Views Post 2D window Mach number 794 608 422 235 051 855 679 494 308 122 9363 7506 9548 JP 9I 1934 007616 oS Tutorial Manual Post processing Figure 3 677 Post 2D window display options Modit Frame Freeze Image Update Flots Move VvFrame Raise or Lower Remove Frame d Orient Edge plots vs X Edge plots vs v AY Flot Misc Display Annotation Hardcopy select the option Remove Vframe to clear the newly created window The user will be given a confirmation message window Click OK to confirm Select the option Move Vframe to reposition the newly created window The user will be given an instruction on the main window Click anywhere on the
618. w ensure that the Fraction value for Cut Plane 15 set to a value of 0 5 and that the normal to the cut plane is in the Z direction 1 e the variables NX NY and NZ are set to values 0 0 1 respectively From the Dynamic Surface display options select Contour Bands The Dynamic Surface will change as given in Figure 3 655 Figure 3 655 Cut plane surface displayed with Contour Bands Tutorial Manual Post Processing Tutorials pressure NODE e Velocity Vectors on Dynamic Surface Choose the option Vector with variable colors from display control options The display control options can be invoked by right clicking on Dynamic Surface This will result in the display shown in Figure 3 656 Figure 3 656 Dynamic Surface display with Vectors of Variable Colors Tutorial Manual pressure N DE 1 1 Oooo 2212 55 9156 b 5ll 6145 i537 1625 01193 1386 2894 4400 i by 413 9919 043 Post Processing Tutorials Tutorial Manual Post Processing Tutorials pressure N DE 1 217 1 066 9156 b 5ll 6145 i537 1625 0 01163 0 1368 0 2694 0 4400 0 5907 0 7413 io 1 043 Here contour bands and vectors display similar colors and hence it becomes difficult to distinguish them from each other In order to observe the clear display one can change the color of the vectors as follows Shown in Figure 3 657 On
619. w Solver AN 55 m Apply Cancel Setting Solver Parameters Click the Solve Options tab then the Setup Analysis Type icon Fs window that appears is shown in Figure 4 7 Enter the following select the Solver as Ansys from the dropdown arrow if it 1s not already set Select the Analysis Category as Structural Select Modal from the dropdown for Analysis Type and keep all the default options Press Apply to complete the setup ANSYS Tutorials Figure 4 7 Setup Analysis Type ay Setup Analysis Solver Type window ANS Ansys Analysis Options Analysis Category Structural Structural Analysis Options Analysis Type Mi Hode Extraction Method Block Lanczos Number of Modes to Extract 0 Beginning Lower End Frequency ul Ending Upper End Frequency Shape Normalization OFF kep Constraint Equation Defaut gt Processing Kep Defauk Element Calculation OFF Apply ok Cancel f Write Ansys Input File Press the Write View Input File icon P from the Solve Options Tab Menu bar The Ansys File name should be Tpipe Ansys in Tutorial Manual ANSYS Tutorials Scroll to the bottom and switch ON View Ansys file as shown in Figure 4 8 Keep the other options as the default and press Apply Figure 4 8 Write View Input Write View File Input File zs window solver ANSYS
620. welve Faces six faces make up a block Blocks volume made up of vertices edges and faces 3 5 Intelligent Geometry in Hexa Using ANSYS ICEM CFD s Direct CAD Interfaces which maintain the parametric description of the geometry throughout the CAD model and the grid generation process hexahedral grids can be easily remeshed on the modified geometry 3 2 ANSYS ICEM CFD Al Environment 10 0 User Manual SAS IP Inc Section 3 7 Blocking Strategy The geometry is selected in the CAD system and tagged with information made intelligent for grid generation such as boundary conditions and grid sizes and this intelligent geometry information is saved with the master geometry In Hexa by updating all entities with the update projection function blocking vertices projected to prescribed points in the geometry are automatically adapted to the parametric change and one can recalculate the mesh immediately Additionally with the use of its Replay functionality Hexa provides complete access to previous operations 3 6 Unstructured and Multi block Structured Meshes The mesh output of Hexa can be either unstructured or multi block structured and need not be determined until after user has finished the whole meshing process when the output option is selected 3 6 1 Unstructured Mesh Output The unstructured mesh output option will produce a single mesh output file where all common nodes on the block interfaces are merged independent
621. window Nastran Tutorials Create Displacement ral on Surface Mame ENSTI sPESe 1 2 LES Globa SPC Constraint Ony gt Surfaces BAR 10 24 BAF Tw Directional Displacement v uy o uz 0 Rotational Displacement ROX 0 ROTZ Apply ck Dismiss Tutorial Manual Nastran Tutorials Figure 4 183 Surfaces for Displacement and Loads surface sub Apply force on oval cutout surface Tutorial Manual Apply constraints e 85 2 8 c e 5 Q oo 92 lt Nastran Tutorials h Loads 1 Create Subset To apply the load on surface surfaces a subset should be created which contains these surfaces In Model Tree right mouse button on Geometry gt Subsets to select Create as shown in Figure 4 185 Figure 4 185 Create Subset Beare Subsets Points Create Curves surfac Hide Al 1 Ea Li Tutorial Manual Nastran Tutorials Note Even the Subset is switched Off in the Display Tree it does nt alter the appearance of the Create Subset window This Create Subset window pops up as shown in Figure 4 186 In this window enter Subset as LOAD SURF and click on e Create Subset by Selection icon Click on Select Geometry button and select the surface as shown in Figure 4 187 and press Apply This creates the subset LOAD SURF F
622. with undesirable skewness or angles may be displayed to highlight the block topology region where the individual blocks need to be adjusted Mesh Refinement Coarsening Refinement or coarsening of the mesh may be specified for any block region to allow a finer or coarser mesh definition in areas of high or low gradients respectively Replay Option Replay file functionality enables para metric block topology generation linked to parametric changes in geometry Symmetry As necessary in analyzing rotating machinery applications for example Hexa allows the user to take advantage of symmetry in meshing a section of the rotating machinery thereby minimizing the model size Link Shape This allows the user to link the edge shape to existing deforming edge This gives better control over the grid specifically in the case of parametric studies Adjustability Options to generate 3 D surface meshes from the 3 D volume mesh and 2 D to 3 D block topology transformation ANSYS ICEM CFD Al Environment 10 0 User Manual SAS IP Inc Chapter 3 Hexa 3 3 Mesh Generation with Hexa To generate a mesh within Hexa the user will Import a geometry file using any of the direct indirect or facetted data interfaces nteractively define the block model through split merge O grid definition edge face modifications and vertex movements e Check the block quality to ensure that the block model meets specified quality thresholds Assign edge meshing
623. wn in Figure 6 5 QUAD9 Element Figure 6 5 QUAD9 Element 1 5 2 The Shape function for Corner Node N 2 2 1 4 1 1 The Shape function for Mid Side Node 1 2 2 1 27 2 1 The Shape function for Middle Node No 1 27 1 27 Suppose a Force F is uniformly distributed over the whole Area the pressure is 4 Because in coordinate system the Area of the rectangle is 4 To Find Consistent Load ANSYS ICEM CFD Al Environment 10 0 User Manual SAS IP Inc 6 5 Chapter 6 Loads Consistent Load at Node 1 L1 Consistent Load at Node 5 L5 Consistent Load at Node 9 19 On Integration we get the following values L12p 2 1 N d d 4p 36 L5 p 2 2 1 N d d 4p 9 L9 p 2 1 d d 16p 9 Now Putting this value in the above equation we get the consistent Nodal Force as L1 F 36 L5 F 9 L9 4F 9 By symmetry Consistent Nodal Force on Node 1 2 3 amp 4 are equal By symmetry Consistent Nodal Force on Node 5 6 7 amp 8 are equal Now Total Force 4 L1 4 L5 L9 F 9 4F 9 4F 9 F Note Note The same method is employed for calculating the Consistent Nodal Force on QUAD8 ele ment which gives correct results 6 1 Force on Point Using this option user can apply force on points in all the three directions as well as user can apply the moment in x y z directions Here specifying negative value implies force applied in
624. y Global Element Seed Size element 2 Display Natural Size Enabled Size Display Mum of Elements in fi Refinement fio 4 Ignore Wall Thickness Triangle tolerance o 001 Unitless tri tolerance is Apply o Dismiss Saving the Project Save the project by clicking on Save Project from the Main Menu This saves the geometry file as StaticMixer2 tin in the StaticMixer2 directory Meshing Select Volume Meshing 8 from the Mesh tab menu bar to create the refined tetrahedral mesh on this geometry ANSYS ICEMCFD CFX Tutorials Make sure Mesh type is Tetra and the Method is From geometry Keep the defaults for meshing Notice that by default there will be 5 iterations of smoothing after the tetra meshing to improve the elements of low quality Click Apply to create the tetrahedral mesh Once the mesh 1s created it gets loaded on the screen Verifying Mesh Quality Click on Smooth Mesh Globally from the Edit Mesh tab menubar to check the quality of the mesh Set Up to quality to 0 5 and Criterion to Quality Right click In the histogram and select Replot which pops up the Replot window Change Min X value to 0 Change Max X value to 1 Change Max Y height to 20 as shown in Figure 5 36 Click Accept to replot the Histogram as shown in Figure 5 36 Press Apply in the Smooth Elements Globally panel to smooth From the messages and the smoothing his
625. y M Apply Dismiss Select Apply from the panel to get the default result as shown in Figure 3 49 Right click on Colormap from the Display Tree widget and select Modify Entries to adjust the Min and Max values for the displayed variable Tutorial Manual Figure 3 491 Visualizati on Results of Density 1 105 1 083 1 062 1 041 1 020 0 9990 0 9779 0 9568 0 9357 0 9146 0 8935 0 8724 0 8513 0 8302 0 8091 0 7879 Cart3D Tutorial Manual Cart3D 3 7 3 Onera M6 Wing with 0 84 M Overview This tutorial illustrates grid generation Cart3D around a Wing and solving the problem in flowCart Post processing the results is also explained The tutorial introduces the following operations Use of the Cart3D mesher for mesh generation Multi grid preparation running mgPrep Running the solver for AOA 3 06 0 84 Computing force and moment information Visualizing the result in the post processor a Starting the Project Load ANSYS CFD Change the working directory by File gt Change Working Dir and set the location to the folder wing2 oneraM6 uns is located in that folder Tutorial Manual Cart3D Note It is preferable to create a separate folder wing2 and put only the oneraM6 uns domain file in that folder before performing this tutorial 2 Select Open Mesh e from the main menu and select oneraM6 uns b Mesh Generation Preview only
626. y icon from Geometry Tab Menu bar which will pop up Repair Geometry window as shown Figure 4 173 By default Build Topology amp is highlighted Make sure that Inherited is toggled ON for New Part Name and press Apply to extract curves and points Tutorial Manual Figure 4 173 Repair Geometry window Nastran Tutorials Repar Geometry Repair Surface W Build Topology Tolerance 0 06 Filter by angle Feature angle 30 Filter points Filter curves Hew Part Name Inherited C Create new Fart for new curves Part for new paints Build Topo Parts Selection Method l parks Part by part Single curve cleanup Single Edge Tolerance 0 1 2 Split surface at cannectians Split at interior curves Join edge curves Delete unattached curves and paints Apply DK Nastran Tutorials The geometry will be displayed in the Main Display window as shown in Figure 4 174 Figure 4 174 Geometr y after Build Topolog y d Mesh Parameters and Meshing Since this is a 3D model the mesh will be a volumetric one So the mesh parameters should be given on Surfaces Mesh Sizing Select 183 Set Global Mesh Size icon from Mesh Tab Menubar and toggle ON Enabbled under the Natural size window and enter a value of 0 5 for Size window and leave all other fields as default in Global Mesh Size window as shown i
627. y move up and down the Y axis Tutorial Manual Hexa Meshing Now turn OFF Fix X and Fix Z Then move the two vertices shown in the second part of Figure 3 192 by selecting on the small blue radial edge close to the vertex but do not select on the vertex itself Internal vertices blue move in the direction of the edge selected on that 15 connected to the vertex Figure 3 192 Move vertices window Move Vertices Move Vertices PN Move Vertex Method Single Vertex T i Movement Constraints FixZ Fix direction Normal to Surf Move dependent Tutorial Manual Hexa Meshing Press the middle mouse button to finish the operation Note These two minor vertex adjustments will decrease the acuteness of angle in the blocking and improve the overall quality of the mesh Figure 3 193 T Moving the vertices 3 3 194 Vertex positions after moving which shows the improved angle Tutorial Manual Hexa Meshing Select Blocking gt Pre mesh Params 4 gt Update J For Method ensure that Update all is toggled ON Then press Apply This will reapply the any surface and curve parameters to the blocking edges which is necessary after any new edges are created through blocking splits or O grid creation Before computing the Pre mesh turn the DEAD part off so that the mesh is not computed for that part In the Display Tree
628. y Options Solid bodies Surface bodies Iv Line bodies Parameters ps Attributes sbrFEA DoM Named selections us Material properties Pressing Proceed to advance meshing will invoke the Advance meshing gui Select File gt Geometry gt Update geometry gt Merge geometry it will open geometry in Advance meshing as shown in Figure 3 427 Tutorial Manual Advanced Meshing Tutorials Figure 3 427 Geometry the Advance meshing e Blocking Select Blocking gt Create Block gt Initialize bio 2 will open the window Select Initialize block and 3D for Type of the block as shown in Figure 3 428 Select all entities and press Apply to create blocking Tutorial Manual Advanced Meshing Tutorials Figure 3 428 Create block window Create Block 9 Fart SOLID Initialize Blocks Type 30 Bounding Entities 5 Project vertices Orient with geometry 20 Blocking i Apply o Dismiss For vertices number turn ON Blocking gt Vertices gt Number from Display Tree widget After creating the block geometry will look like as shown in Figure 3 429 Tutorial Manual Advanced Meshing Tutorials Figure 3 429 Geometry after creating the block f Split block Now user will split the blook in 1 j and k direction in order to capture the shape of the geometry Select Blocking gt Split Block iud Split Block m it
629. y Tree widget Go To Blocking gt Index Control and Reset Note The two faces corresponding to the HUB location remain unprojected m Defining Periodicity Note Defining periodicity in ICEM CFD requires periodic definitions such as Axis location and Angle that are already defined in the tetin file select Blocking gt Edit Block M Periodic Nt which will open up a panel as shown in Figure 3 340 Tutorial Manual Advanced Meshing Tutorials Figure 3 340 m Periodic Vertices Panel Edit Block Edit Block Perodic Yertices Hethod Create Remove lt Apply o Dismiss Toggle on Create select a vertex lying on the periodic plane PERIODICI and the corresponding vertex on periodic plane PERIODIC2 This will define the periodicity between two vertices One can see the periodicity by switching on Vertices gt Periodic from the Display Tree widget Do this for the rest of the vertices lying on the periodic planes PERIODICI and PERIODIC2 Click Dismiss to close the panel At the end of this process select Verticies Periodic we get the display as shown in Figure 3 34 Figure 3 341 Tutorial Manual Advanced Meshing Tutorials Periodicity in the blocking k h Fi Fa a A d Mu tt Lu p i re NM E p H qd A L 42224 i 1 i Y vi ko P Mi UP fi DET M d j a Fi
630. y appears as shown in Figure 5 68 ANSYS ICEMCFD CFX Tutorials Figure 5 68 Imported Geometry d Geometry Manipulation From the main project window as shown in Figure 5 69 a Cer aer EDT C Se dS Ss 4 Figure 1 To d a i mnl Le 5 69 ee Em oan oe E a gt XT m an rau E UE Un Mh ics et a NH M eee Bene e t I Eo adie Eg F x c i advance E eec m Im Sr So SES 8 c h 2S er ibook Ee eR E c soe mes Ing uer i Ee chico See ra H d mAs Eteria gn a K 8 win OW A ud m eee Oe mm 3n 4 ee D ie se EE 91 So m I Shr EE oe On mu m JE See Se ee ee mu el mmmuM ee mE Ea ee a p ace mom HO NC oe com S E ee ee m 0T Wa BE wan I SS eco I co rat
631. y as shown in Figure 3 123 Select Yes Note Build Topology will generate a series of curves along all shared edges of surfaces It is meant as a geometry diagnostic tool but is also used to determine logical connectivity between surfaces and to build curves and points to capture sharp features To invoke independently use Geometry gt Repair gt Build Diagnostic topology not necessary for this tutorial Tutorial Manual Hexa Meshing Figure 3 123 Group curve warning 1 Group curve warning window This feature needs geometry connectivity Do want Eo run build topology Re Apply from the panel to group all tangential curves All four base curves forming the circular perimeter of the hemisphere will be grouped as in Figure 3 124 Figure 3 124 Grouping of all tangential Curves h Projecting the Edges to Curves Select Associate qi Associate Edge to Curve Select the four bottom edges press the middle mouse button and then select the grouped circular curve Press the middle mouse button or Apply The selected edges will turn green Verify association In the model tree turn on Surface gt Solid and Edges gt Show Association and view as in Figure 3 125 Tutorial Manual Hexa Meshing Figure 3 125 Projection to the curve and sphere surface i Moving Vertices Select Blocking gt Associate ts gt Snap Project Vertices v A Visible and Apply Turn off the su
632. ying Poisson s Ratio NUJ 2 Constant C Varying Zl Value 0 3 Mass Density RHO Consta C Vaping Value 1 71e 3 zi pm Tutorial Manual LS Dyna Tutorials Create another material Named as MAT3 in Define Material Property window shown in Figure Material ID can be left as 3 Select the type as Isotropic from the drop down menu Define the Constant Young s Modulus as 1e 8 Define the Constant Poisson s ratio as 0 3 Define the Constant Mass Density as 7 8e 9 Leave other fields as they are and Press Apply Tutorial Manual Figure 4 124 Define Material Property window e From the Properties tab select Define 2D Element Properties n Define Shell Element window appears as shown in Figure 4 125 LS Dyna Tutorials Define Material a Property Material ID 3 r T isotropic Young s Modulus E Constant Varying Value 1e 8 a Poisson s Ratio NU El Constan Vaping zl Value 03 Mass Density RHO Comtat C Vaning Value 7 2e9 El Apply ox Dismiss Element Properties e Select Part as PDA e Set PID as 10 Tutorial Manual LS Dyna Tutorials e Select Type as Shell e Select material as MATI e Supply Thickness as 0 5 e Keep all other parameters as default and press Apply Figure 4 125 _ Define Shell Define Shell Element a Element window Fart PDA ds 2 21 10 Pro
633. ype Eigenvalue Extraction Parameter Mame Method ID SIDJ 1 Freg v2 5550 NumberofModes ND 20 Apply ok Dismiss FA Click on 5 Setup Analysis Type icon from Solve Options Tab Menu bar to setup Nastran run to do Modal Analysis that pops up Setup Analysis Type window shown in Figure 4 163 Select Run Type as Modal Sol 103 Tutorial Manual Nastran Tutorials select ALL Output Requests section for Displacement DISP and Element Strain Energy ESE Also select the Case Control Cards as EIGRLI Press Apply Nastran Tutorials Figure 4 163 Setup Analysis Analysis ype Type window Gul ar m NASTRAN Executiwe amp Case Control Cards Run Type IModal Sol103 gt Executive Control Cards Run Time TIME 99999 a cL _ Write 2 NONE gt Parameters PARAM O m Adjustment KBROT PO Wax ratio MAXRATIO Constrain Singularities AUTOSPO Grid vveights GRDPNT Output Requests Displacement DISP ALL Element Strain Energy ESE Case Contral Cards Eigenvalue Extraction Meteor IEIGRL1 gt Nastran Tutorials Save Project Select File gt Save Project As option from the Main Menu and click on Create New Directory icon and enter folder name as Tpipe as shown in Figure 4 164 Now enter the project name as Tpipe as shown in Figure 4 164 to save all the information i
634. zation of Surface edges and Vector plots Figure 3 647 Surface displaying edges with variable color Select the display option Edge with variable color by right clicking on Surfaces This will display the geometry boundaries shown in Figure 3 647 Boundaries are sorted out from the feature lines provided by the Fluent case and data files Q 2 Choose the option Vector with variable colors from the menu list This will show the velocity vectors indicating the direction of flow as shown in Figure 3 648 Tutorial Manual Post Processing Tutorials Figure 3 648 D E Surface displaying Vector with variable color T n Note The direction of the arrows corresponds to the currently selected vector variable and the colors of the vectors indicate the present scalar variable The length of the vector arrows is relative to the magnitude of the vector variable Switch OFF the velocity vectors by selecting Vector with variable colors again h Saving the Output Go to View gt Save Hardcopy option This will bring out the Output window as shown in Figure 3 649 Tutorial Manual Post Processing Tutorials Figure 3 649 Hard C c Output Window Output prefix screen Generate new file names Format FEG Quality 75 Invert black and white Landscape mode Scale Factor Apply ok Cancel Select the Format as JPEG and clic

ANSYS ICEM CFD/AI*Environment 10.0 User Manual

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents